AF2228C - AF2232 MS - v00

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
SERVICE MANUAL
001892MIUMIU
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
SERVICE MANUAL
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
SERVICE MANUAL
001892MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
B147
B149
B190
GESTETNER
DSc332
DSc338
DSc328
COMPANY
LANIER
RICOH
LD232c
Aficio 2232C
LD238c
Aficio 2238C
LD228c
Aficio 2228C
SAVIN
C3224
C3828
C2820
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
1
DATE
01/2004
09/2004
COMMENTS
Original Printing
B190 Addition
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ..........................................................1-3
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS ........................................................................1-3
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ................................................................1-3
1.3 COPIER.....................................................................................................1-4
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-4
1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-5
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-6
1.4.1 COPIER............................................................................................1-6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................1-6
Installation Procedure ...........................................................................1-7
Settings Relevant to Contract .............................................................1-11
1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE........................................................................1-12
1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE..........................................................1-13
1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT .....................................................................................1-15
1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ....................................................1-15
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-15
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-16
1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT....................................................1-19
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-19
1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ..............................................................1-23
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-23
1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER ......................................1-27
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-27
1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER...................................................................1-30
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-30
1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT .................................................................................1-33
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-33
1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ...........................................................1-37
Accessories Check List.......................................................................1-37
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray .....................................................1-38
1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER .....................................................................1-39
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-39
Adjusting the Height............................................................................1-40
Main Body...........................................................................................1-41
Optional Punch Unit ............................................................................1-44
1.5.9 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT (FOR ASIA MODEL ONLY)................1-48
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-48
1.5.10 POSTSCRIPT 3............................................................................1-51
1.5.11 256 MB MEMORY ........................................................................1-52
1.5.12 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER ......................................................1-53
1.5.13 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)................................................................1-54
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-55
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 ........................................................1-55
1.5.14 USB 2.0 ........................................................................................1-56
USB SP Settings.................................................................................1-57
1.5.15 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) .................................................1-58
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ...................................................1-60
SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11B WIRELESS LAN.........................1-61
1.5.16 BLUETOOTH................................................................................1-62
1.5.17 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ......................................................1-64
1.5.18 KEY COUNTER HOLDER............................................................1-65
1.5.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-67
1.5.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-69
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 SETTINGS.................................................................................................2-1
New Unit Set.........................................................................................2-1
Counter Reset.......................................................................................2-1
2.2 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-2
2.3 OTHERS ...................................................................................................2-5
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................3-1
3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ..............................................................................3-2
3.2.1 SCANNING.......................................................................................3-2
Scanner sub-scan magnification ...........................................................3-2
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..............................3-2
Main scan dot position correction .........................................................3-3
B147/B149/B190
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.2.2 ARDF................................................................................................3-4
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration .................................3-4
3.2.3 REGISTRATION...............................................................................3-5
Image Area ...........................................................................................3-5
Leading Edge........................................................................................3-5
Side to Side ..........................................................................................3-5
Adjustment Standard ............................................................................3-5
Paper Registration Standard.................................................................3-5
Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................3-6
3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION .................................................................3-6
Line Position Adjustment ......................................................................3-6
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper............................................3-6
3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ..................................................3-7
Copy Mode ...........................................................................................3-7
Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-11
3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT......................................................................3-13
3.3.1 TOP COVER ..................................................................................3-13
3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD .........................................................3-13
3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1 .....................................................3-14
3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH .............................3-15
3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR..................3-15
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2 .................................................................3-15
3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ..............................................................................3-16
3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD................................................................3-16
3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR ................................................................3-16
3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR...............................................................3-17
3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS ..............................................................................3-18
3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES ..............................................3-18
3.5.2 LEFT SIDE .....................................................................................3-20
3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS...........................3-21
3.6 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................3-22
3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-22
3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR ..........................................3-22
3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU).......................................................3-23
3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER ...................................................3-24
3.6.5 XENON LAMP ................................................................................3-24
3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU) ....................................3-25
3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-25
3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ..............................................................3-26
3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-29
3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT .................................3-32
3.7 LASER OPTICS ......................................................................................3-33
3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .....................................................3-33
3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ..................................................3-34
Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit...............3-39
3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................3-40
3.7.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-40
3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...........................................................3-41
SM
iii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-42
3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ..........................3-42
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ...............................................................................3-42
By-pass Tray.......................................................................................3-42
3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD ...........................................3-43
3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ...............................................3-44
3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT .......................................................................3-44
3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS .....................3-45
3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES.............................................................3-45
3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH ..............................................................3-46
3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .......................................................................3-46
3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................3-47
3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT .....................................3-48
3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT .........................................................................3-48
3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT............................................3-49
3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER ...........................3-50
3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-52
3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR...............................................3-54
3.11 ID SENSORS ........................................................................................3-55
3.12 FUSING .................................................................................................3-56
3.12.1 FUSING UNIT...............................................................................3-56
3.12.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT AND UPPER COVER....................................3-57
3.12.3 CLEANING UNIT ..........................................................................3-58
3.12.4 HEATING ROLLER LAMP............................................................3-59
3.12.5 FUSING BELT UNIT.....................................................................3-60
3.12.6 HOT ROLLER...............................................................................3-61
3.12.7 HEATING ROLLER ......................................................................3-61
3.12.8 PAPER GUIDE PLATES AND STRIPPER PAWLS......................3-62
3.12.9 THERMISTOR AND FUSE...........................................................3-63
3.12.10 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP .......................................3-64
3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-65
3.12.12 FUSING UNIT FAN.....................................................................3-67
3.12.13 WASTE OIL BOTTLE .................................................................3-68
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT ..............................................................................3-68
3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-69
3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY .............3-69
3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C,
B OUT OF THE WAY ...................................................................3-70
3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU ...................................................3-70
3.13.4 HDD..............................................................................................3-72
3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE .....................................3-72
NVRAM on BCU .................................................................................3-72
NVRAM on Controller .........................................................................3-73
3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B .......3-74
3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT .......................................................3-74
3.13.8 PSU ..............................................................................................3-75
3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD ..........................................................................3-75
B147/B149/B190
iv
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.14 DRIVE UNIT ..........................................................................................3-76
3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-76
3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-76
3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY .................................................3-77
3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K .3-79
3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K...........................................3-80
3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-81
M Toner Supply Unit ...........................................................................3-81
C and Y Toner Supply Units ...............................................................3-85
K Toner Supply Unit............................................................................3-86
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS .........................................4-1
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .........................................4-1
4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ...............................4-3
4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT .......................................4-4
4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE ...........................................................................4-7
4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE ............................................................................4-7
SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R ..........................................................4-7
SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G ..........................................................4-7
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B ..........................................................4-7
4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE..............................................................................4-7
SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result ....................................4-7
SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result ..................................................4-7
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-9
4.3.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-9
SC Code Classification .......................................................................4-10
4.4 SC TABLE ...............................................................................................4-11
4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-55
4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-55
Work-flow............................................................................................4-55
4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-57
4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-57
Detailed Explanation ...........................................................................4-61
Copy Image processing ......................................................................4-66
4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT ...............................................................................4-68
Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 mm..................................................4-70
How to measure the gap between color lines .....................................4-76
4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT .........4-78
Check the color shift level ...................................................................4-78
Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment ...................................4-78
4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT .....................................................................4-81
Black Over Print Disabled ...................................................................4-81
Black Over Print Enabled....................................................................4-81
4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-82
4.7.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-82
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-84
4.9 LEDS (BCU) ............................................................................................4-84
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ...........5-1
Entering SP Mode.................................................................................5-1
Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES ....................................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-3
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........5-4
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-4
Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-5
5.1.3 REMARKS........................................................................................5-5
Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-5
Others ...................................................................................................5-6
5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE............................................................................5-7
5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..................................................................5-7
SP1-XXX (Feed) ...................................................................................5-7
SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-15
SP3-XXX (Process) ............................................................................5-27
SP4-XXX (Scanner) ............................................................................5-35
SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-42
SP6-XXX (Peripherals) .......................................................................5-64
SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-67
SP8-xxx: Data Log2 ............................................................................5-78
5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE .................................................................5-114
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007 ............................................................5-116
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor...........................................................5-117
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) .................................................5-117
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ................................................5-117
Table 4: Original Size Detection .......................................................5-118
5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE .............................................................5-119
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997) .........................................................5-123
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-124
SP1-XXX (Service Mode) .................................................................5-124
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ...........................................................................5-126
SP1-xxx (System and Others) ..........................................................5-126
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-127
5.5 REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET ................................................5-137
5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ....................................................................5-137
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ...................5-137
System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-137
Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-138
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................................................5-139
5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE..................................................................5-139
B147/B149/B190
vi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2004
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ..............................................................5-140

5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-140
5.6.3 VERIFYING A SUCCESSFUL UPDATE ......................................5-147
5.6.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL.............5-150
5.6.5 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ..................................................5-151
5.6.6 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-152
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-152
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-152
5.6.7 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-153
5.6.8 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS...............................5-156
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-157
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-157
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-158
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-159
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................5-160
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-160
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................5-161
5.9 USER PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................5-162
5.9.1 MENU ...........................................................................................5-162
5.9.2 DISPLAY ......................................................................................5-166
Selecting Menu .................................................................................5-166
Inquiry ...............................................................................................5-166
5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-167
Controller Board................................................................................5-167
BCU Board........................................................................................5-167
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4
Overview...............................................................................................6-4
Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-5
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS ......................................................................6-6
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8
Overview...............................................................................................6-8
Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10
Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12
SM
vii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation .................................6-13
Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection...........................................6-13
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection ........................................................6-13
6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB ..........................6-14
Highlight Pattern .................................................................................6-14
Adjustment Process ............................................................................6-14
6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-15
Overview.............................................................................................6-15
Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-15
6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION ............................6-16
Introduction .........................................................................................6-16
Toner Near End Detection 1 ...............................................................6-17
Toner Near End Detection 2 ...............................................................6-17
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-18
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-18
6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-19
6.3 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-20
6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-20
6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-21
6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-22
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ..................................................6-23
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-24
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-24
6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................6-25
Signal Processing ...............................................................................6-25
A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-25
White Level Correction........................................................................6-25
Others .................................................................................................6-25
Black Level Correction ........................................................................6-26
Adjustments ........................................................................................6-26
VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-26
6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................6-27
Shading Correction .............................................................................6-27
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-28
Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-28
Image Separation................................................................................6-28
ACS (Auto Color Select) .....................................................................6-29
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-30
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-31
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..................................................6-31
Color Conversion ................................................................................6-32
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-33
Printer Gamma Correction ..................................................................6-34
Error Diffusion .....................................................................................6-36
IPU Board Test ...................................................................................6-36
6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH................................................................................6-37
Copier Application...............................................................................6-37
Printer Application...............................................................................6-37
Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) ........................................................6-37
B147/B149/B190
viii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)..........................................6-37
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-38
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-38
6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-39
6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................6-40
Overview.............................................................................................6-40
Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-40
Clock Frequency Adjustment ..............................................................6-40
6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-41
Dual Beam Mechanism.......................................................................6-41
Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism...............................................6-41
Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position ..........................................6-42
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-43
Error Messages ..................................................................................6-44
6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..............................6-45
Overview.............................................................................................6-45
Summary of Each Adjustment ............................................................6-46
Adjustment Conditions ........................................................................6-47
Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-48
6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES ...............6-48
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-49
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-49
6.7.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-50
6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS .............................................6-51
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51
Initialization Process and SC Codes ...................................................6-52
6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-53
6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-54
6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-55
Waste Toner Path ...............................................................................6-55
Waste Toner Vibrator..........................................................................6-56
6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION ...............................6-57
6.8 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-58
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-58
6.8.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-59
6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION .............................................................6-60
6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-61
6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-62
Overview.............................................................................................6-62
Toner Agitation and Attraction ............................................................6-62
Air Flow and Toner Flow .....................................................................6-63
Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-63
Toner Transport ..................................................................................6-64
6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ...............................................6-65
6.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-66
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-66
6.9.2 DRIVE TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY .........................6-67
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT TRAYS 1 & 2..........................................................6-68
6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2....................................6-69
SM
ix
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2 ..............................6-70
6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2 ....................................6-70
6.9.7 REGISTRATION.............................................................................6-71
6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED...........................................................6-72
6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .......................................6-73
6.10 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................6-74
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-74
6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION .................................................................6-75
Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF ............................................................6-75
Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF...................................................6-75
6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT...........................................................6-76
6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE) ........6-77
6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................6-78
6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER ....6-79
With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...........................................6-79
With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...............................6-79
6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................................6-80
Drive ...................................................................................................6-80
Feed-in and feed-out...........................................................................6-80
6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-81
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-81
6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ............................................................6-82
Drive Motor .........................................................................................6-82
Rotation Encoder ................................................................................6-83
6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT................................................................6-84
6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .....................................................6-85
6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT ......................................................6-86
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-86
Transfer Belt Sensor ...........................................................................6-87
Copier ACS.........................................................................................6-87
Printer ACS.........................................................................................6-88
6.12 FUSING .................................................................................................6-89
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-89
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE...................................................................6-90
Belt and Rollers ..................................................................................6-90
Fusing Clutch......................................................................................6-90
6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-91
Fusing Temperatures..........................................................................6-91
Temperature Corrections ....................................................................6-92
Overheat Protection ............................................................................6-92
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING .....................................................6-93
Oil Supply Pad and Roller...................................................................6-93
Oil Supply Mechanism ........................................................................6-94
6.12.5 WASTE OIL ..................................................................................6-95
Bottle Set Sensor ................................................................................6-95
Waste Oil Sensor ................................................................................6-96
6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION ..........................6-96
6.12.7 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-97
Overview.............................................................................................6-97
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Panel Off Mode ...................................................................................6-98
Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-99
6.13 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................6-100
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-100
6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ............................................6-101
6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS .......................................................................6-102
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-102
6.14.2 HARD DISK ................................................................................6-104
Overview...........................................................................................6-104
Data Transfer....................................................................................6-104
6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING .....................................................6-105
RPCS Driver .....................................................................................6-105
PCL5c Driver ....................................................................................6-105
PS3 Driver ........................................................................................6-106
CMS (Color Management System) ...................................................6-106
Gray Correction ................................................................................6-106
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)..........................6-106
Gamma Correction............................................................................6-106
Toner Limitation ................................................................................6-107
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .......................................................6-107
6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS .....................................................6-108
Sample Print .....................................................................................6-108
Locked Print......................................................................................6-108
6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING .........................................................................6-109
Related SP Modes ............................................................................6-109
Paper Source Selection ....................................................................6-110
Auto Continue ...................................................................................6-111
Paper Output Tray ............................................................................6-112
Stapling.............................................................................................6-112
Punching...........................................................................................6-113
6.15 ETHERNET BOARD ...........................................................................6-114
6.15.1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT ...................................................6-114
6.15.2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION.............................................6-115
6.16 IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)..........................................................6-116
6.16.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................6-116
6.17 USB .....................................................................................................6-118
6.17.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-118
6.17.2 USB 1.1/2.0 ................................................................................6-118
6.17.3 USB CONNECTORS..................................................................6-119
6.17.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT .....................................................................6-119
6.17.5 REMARKS ABOUT USB ............................................................6-120
Related SP Mode..............................................................................6-120
6.18 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ........................................................6-121
6.18.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-121
LED Indicators ..................................................................................6-121
6.18.2 TRANSMISSION MODES ..........................................................6-122
Ad Hoc Mode ....................................................................................6-122
Infrastructure Mode...........................................................................6-122
6.18.3 SECURITY FEATURES .............................................................6-123
SM
xi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Using the SSID in Ad hoc mode .......................................................6-123
6.18.4 WIRELESS LAN TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES .......................6-124
Communication Status......................................................................6-124
Channel Settings ..............................................................................6-124
Troubleshooting Procedure...............................................................6-125
6.19 BLUETOOTH.......................................................................................6-126
6.19.1 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................6-126
6.19.2 BLUETOOTH PROFILES ...........................................................6-127
6.19.3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES.......................................6-127
6.20 SCANNER FUNCTIONS .....................................................................6-128
6.20.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE.........................6-128
Image Data Path ...............................................................................6-128
6.20.2 SCANNER ACS (AUTO COLOR SELECTION) .........................6-129
6.21 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)...................................................6-130
SPECIFICATIONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1
1.1 BASIC..................................................................................................7-1
1.2 PRINTER.............................................................................................7-3
1.3 SCANNER ...........................................................................................7-4
2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES......................................................................7-5
2.1 PAPER FEED......................................................................................7-5
2.2 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................7-6
PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................7-7
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-8
3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ............................................................................7-8
3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ..........................................................................7-8
Scanner ................................................................................................7-9
Scanner Drivers ....................................................................................7-9
Scanner Utilities ....................................................................................7-9
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................7-10
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................7-12
5.1 ARDF.................................................................................................7-12
5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT .......................................................7-13
5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ......................................................7-13
5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ...........................................7-13
5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT ...........................................7-14
5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER ........................................................................7-15
5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ..............................................................7-16
ARDF B597
SEE SECTION B597 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
B147/B149/B190
xii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2004
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599

BOOKLET FINISHER B602

FAX OPTION B603

INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

SEE SECTION IFAX FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694

SEE SECTION B692/B694 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM
xiii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IIMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not
recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
5. Dispose of used fusing oil in accordance with local regulations.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.
Symbols and Abbreviations

This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol

What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Short Edge Feed (SEF)
Long Edge Feed (LEF)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX OPTION B603

INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

TROUBLESHOOTING
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TAB
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 6
TAB
POSITION 5

TAB
POSITION 2
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597
TAB
POSITION 3
INSTALLATION
TAB
POSITION 1
Rev. 05/2004
TAB
POSITION 4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Ambient Humidity (%RH)
80%
70%
Recommended conditions:
15 to 25C
30 to 70 %RH
54%
30%
15%
B146I935.WMF
10C
15C
30C 32C
1. Temperature Range:
10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F)
2. Humidity Range:
15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination:
Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation:
3 times/hr/person or more
5. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:

1) Direct cool air from an air conditioner
2) Direct heat from a heater
6. Avoid installing the machine in areas that might be exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at a location lower than 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no
more than 5 mm.)
9. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left:
SM
Within 5 mm (0.2")
1-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B146I927.WMF
A: Over 10 mm (0.39")
B: Over 100 mm (3.9")
C: Over 550 mm (22")
D: Over 75 mm (3.0")
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Insert firmly the plug in the outlet.
2. Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.
3. Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A
220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10 %
3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord.
B147/B149/B190
1-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Options
1-tray paper feed unit
2-tray paper feed unit
Large capacity tray
Platen cover
ARDF
Multi-bin output tray
Two-tray finisher
Punch kit (3 types)
Booklet Finisher
Punch unit (4 types)
Remarks
One from the three
One from the two
One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9
No. 7 required; One of the three types
No. 9 required; One of the four types
Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Options
Remarks
Printer/scanner
256 MB memory
NIB
IEEE 1394
IEEE 802.11b
USB 2.0
Bluetooth
PostScript 3
File Format Converter
For Asia model only
One from the four
Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)
SM
1-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER
1.3 COPIER
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ARDF
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V
2. Duplex unit
Max. DC24V
3. Finisher
Max. DC24V
B146I932.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER
Installation
1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows the flow of the installation procedures.
Start
Unpack the copier.
Install the copier.
Select the language.
Will the paper feed

unit or LCT installed?
Set the date and time.
Yes
Place the copier on the paper feed unit or
LCT, and install it.
Perform ACC.
No
Check magnification and registration.
Will the controller options installed?
Yes
Adjust the operation panel display if

necessary.
Install the controller options.

No
Specify the settings relevant to the

contract (see section 1.4.1).
Install the platen cover or ARDF.
Will the two-tray finisher

or booklet finisher installed?
End
Yes
Will the punch unit installed?
Yes
Install the punch unit.
No
No
Install the finisher.
A
B146I901.WMF
The finisher requires an optional paper tray unit or the LCT.

A punch unit is dedicated to the two-tray finisher or the booklet finisher.
SM
1-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MACHINE INSTALLATION
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.4.1 COPIER
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving the
machine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories.
Description
Qty
1. Operating InstructionsSystem Setting................................1

2. Operating ManualCopy Reference ....................................1
3. Operating ManualPrinter Reference*.................................1
4. CD-ROMPrinter/Scanner Driver* .......................................1
5. CD-ROMOperating Instructions*........................................1
6. Ferrite Core* ........................................................................1
7. Paper Size Decal .................................................................1
8. Model Name Decal ..............................................................1
9. Operation Panel Indication Decal ........................................1
10. Energy Star Sticker............................................................1
11. DecalInkjet Caution..........................................................1
12. DecalCopy Prohibition .....................................................1
13. Oil Supply Unit ...................................................................1
14. External Tray .....................................................................1
15. Power Cord........................................................................1
16. Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth .........................................1
17. Cloth Holder.......................................................................1
18. NECR (New Equipment Condition Report) ........................1
* The Asia model does not include these accessories.
B147/B149/B190
1-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn
the main switch on. The development units may be severely damaged if
they operate with the tape attached.
If you install an optional paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time, place
the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and other
options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. You may need
them (in the future) to transport the machine to another location.
[A]
1.
B146I945.WMF
B146I944.WMF
Remove the tape and padding on the copier. To remove the tapes from the
developer units follow the procedure below:
a) Turn the transfer belt release lever
counterclockwise.
b) Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.
Then lift the plate until you hear a click.
SM
1-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
Rev. 10/2004
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2004
c) Hold the development unit. At the

same time, slowly pull out the tape
horizontally.
d) Push in each development unit
e) Lower the drum plate. Then tighten

two screws that hold the plate (the
upper left one first, then the lower
right one). Return the transfer belt
release lever to its operational position. (See Step a).
2. Remove the pin [A]. (As shown on the previous page.)
NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it to transport the machine in the future
( 1.4.3).
B146I913.WMF
3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit.
B146I914.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2004
Install the oil supply unit to the fusing

unit.
[A]
5. Install the fusing unit [A] to the copier.
[B]
B146I912.WMF
6. Shake the toner cartridge five or six

times.
7. Install the toner cartridges to the copier.
8. Check that the hooks [B] hold the
cartridge correctly.
B146I915.WMF
[C]
9. Install the external tray [C].
B146I916.WMF
SM
1-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
4.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2004
10. Attach the cloth holder [A] to the left side of the
scanner unit.
11. Place the contact glass cleaning cloth [B] in the

holder.
B146I936.WMF
12. Remove the guide cover [C].

13. Attach the duplex inverter guide [D].
14. Re-attach the guide cover.
[B]
[C]
[D]
B146I003.WMF
[A]
15. Attach the appropriate model name decal [A] to

the front cover.
16. Pull each paper tray out, and adjust the side
guides and end guide to match the paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out
the tray fully, then push down the green
lock at the rear inside the tray.
17. Attach the appropriate paper tray number
decals [B] to the paper trays.
[A]
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used
for the optional paper tray or the
optional LCT. Keep any remaining
decals for use with these optional units.
18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen

cover.
B147/B149/B190
1-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
B146I928.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
19. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine
automatically starts the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the Start
button LED (C) turns green.
20. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
21. Perform the Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Place the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5) Press Start Scanning on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
22. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
23. Check that the circuit breaker works normally.
Settings Relevant to Contract

If the customer has a service contract, change the settings of the following SPs in
accordance with it.
NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in
accordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).
Item
Counting
method
SP No.
SP5-045-001
A3/11" x 17"
double
counting
Serivice Tel.
No. Setting
SP5-104-001
SM
SP5-812-001
through 004
Function
Specifies whether the counting method
used in meter charge mode is based on
developments or prints.
NOTE: You can specify this setting only
one time. After you have specified
it, you cannot change the setting.
Specifies whether the counter is doubled
for A3/11" x 17" paper.
Default
0:
Developments
No: Single
counting
Programs the service station fax number.

The number is printed on the counter list
when the meter charge mode is selected,
so that the user can fax the counter data to
the service station.
1-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
Rev. 10/2004
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE
CAUTION
This section assumes that you will manually move the machine from one floor to
another floor. When using any transport equipment, see section 1.4.3,
Transporting Machine.
The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray
or LCT installed. You can remove them as necessary.
1. Check that the transfer belt is in its
correct position.
2. Remove all trays from the optional
paper feed unit or LCT.
3. Remove the front stand [A]
( x 2).
[A]
G080I910.WMF
4. Remove the rear stand [B]

( x 2, 2 brackets).
[B]
G080I911.WMF
CAUTION: After moving the machine to its new location, reinstall the machine
stands. Without them, the machine may tip over when you pull out a
paper tray or while you work on the machine.
B147/B149/B190
1-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE
CAUTION
1. Check that the transfer belt is in its correct position.
2. Remove the machine stands ( 1.4.2)
3. Remove the toner cartridges to prevent toner from flowing into the toner supply
tube due to vibrations experienced during transport. This may cause the tube to
be clogged with toner.
4. Put air packing into the toner cartridge holder to shield the toner supply
entrance. This prevents toner from flowing out to the toner cartridge holder.
5. Set the lock pin [A] (which comes
with the machine) in the transfer belt
unit.
NOTE: The lower end of the transfer
belt moves. The surfaces of
the belt and PCU may be
damaged by the friction
between them if you
transport the machine
without locking the belt.
[A]
6. Make sure there is no paper left in

the paper trays and fix down the
bottom plates with a sheet of paper
and tape.
B146I911.WMF
7. Empty out the waste toner bottle and

attach securing tape to prevent the
bottle from falling out.
8. Empty out the waste oil bottle and
attach securing tape to prevent the
bottle from falling out.
9. Turn the release lever [B]
counterclockwise to its lowermost
position. (The lever does not stay in
this position if you do not hold it.)
Fasten the lever in this position with
tape.
[B]
B146I939.WMF
NOTE: The release lever lifts the transfer belt up and holds it against the black
PCU. The surfaces of the belt and PCU may be damaged by the
friction between them if you transport the machine with the two units in
this position.
SM
1-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
10. Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors, or shrink-wrap the machine
tightly.
NOTE: 1) If pre-installing machines for actual test prints at a service depot, use a
jig oil supply unit, and not the oil supply unit enclosed as an accessory.
This is because the toner supply system uses a touch-and-release
mechanism, which can cause the unit to move freely up and down
during transport if shipping the mainframe with the oil supply unit
installed. This in turn may cause damage to the white holder on the
fusing unit. However if simply moving the machine from floor to floor, the
oil supply unit can be left installed.
2) If shipping a used machine to a new location, dispose of the used oil
supply unit and install a new one, due to the reason explained above.
This is not necessary when simply moving the machine from floor to
floor.
3) After having moved the machine to a new location, be sure to perform
Auto Adjust (User Program mode) or forced Line Position Adjustment
(SP5-993-002) to optimize color line alignment.
4) Make sure that the side fences in the trays are properly positioned to
prevent color shifting.
B147/B149/B190
1-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories.
Description
Qty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1

2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
B146I929.WMF
SM
1-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord before
starting the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips may be damaged.
1. Remove all tape on the paper tray

unit.
B146I919.WMF
2. Remove the paper tray and

remove all tape and padding.
3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).
[A]
B147/B149/B190
1-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B146I920.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
4. Install the rear stand [A].

5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B146I921.WMF
[E]
6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of

the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].
[D]
[F]
B146I004.WMF
SM
1-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.

9. Fasten the knob screw [A].
10. Re-install tray 2.
[A]
B146I922.WMF
[B]
11. Open the right cover.

12. Install the link bracket [B]
(1 knob screw).
B146I923.WMF
13. Turn on the main switch.

14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.
B147/B149/B190
1-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Accessory Check
Description
Qty

4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
B146I929.WMF
SM
1-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips may be damaged.
1. Remove all tape on the paper tray

unit.
B456I002.WMF
2. Remove the paper trays and

remove all tape and padding.
3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).
B456I103.WMF
[A]
B147/B149/B190
1-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT

( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B598I901.WMF
[E]

the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].
[D]
[F]
B146I004.WMF
SM
1-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT

[A]
B146I902.WMF
[B]

(1 knob screw).
B146I903.WMF

B147/B149/B190
1-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Accessory Check
Description
Qty

4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M 4 x 10 ....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
B146I929.WMF
SM
1-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the LCT installed. The handle and grips may be
damaged.
1. Remove all tape.
B457I001.WMF
[A]
2. Press the stopper [A] and pull out

the tray [B].
3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2).
[B]
[C]
B147/B149/B190
1-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B457I003.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT

( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B598I901.WMF

the copier.
[E]
7. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT

[F].
[D]
[F]
B600I901.WMF
SM
1-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT

[A]
B146I917.WMF
[B]

(1 knob screw).
B146I918.WMF

B147/B149/B190
1-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Left stopper bracket ......................................................................1

2. Right stopper bracket....................................................................1
3. Knob screw ...................................................................................4
4. Stud screw ....................................................................................2
5. Screw M4 x 10 ..............................................................................2
6. Screwdriver Tool ...........................................................................1
7. Decal.............................................................................................1
8. Decal.............................................................................................1
B146I924.WMF
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord before
1. Remove all tape.
G564I122.WMF
SM
1-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[E]
[B]
[C]
B146I930.WMF
[D]
B597I901.WMF
[A]
[F]
B146I937.WMF
2. Install the two stud screws [A].

3. Mount the ARDF on the copier, and slide it to the front as shown.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the ARDF, grasp it as shown.
4. Fasten the two screws [B] to secure the ARDF.
5. Attach the left [C] and right [D] stopper brackets (Knob screw x 2 for each).
6. Connect the cable [E] to the copier.
7. Fasten the cable with the clamp [F].
B147/B149/B190
1-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
G564I102.WMF
B146I931.WMF
8. Remove the platen sheet [A] and place

it on the exposure glass [B].
9. Align the rear left corner (of the platen
sheet) flush against the corner [C] on
the exposure glass.
10. Close the ARDF.
11. Open the ARDF and check that the
platen sheet is correctly attached.
12. Attach the decal [D] with the arrow (on
the decal) pointing at the ARDF
exposure glass.
[D]
[E]
G564I105.WMF
13. Attach the decal [E] on the top.

14. Turn the main switch on, and check
the operation.
15. Make a full size copy, and check that
the registrations (side-to-side and
leading edge) and image skew are
correct. If they are not, adjust the
registration and image skew with SP
mode.
G564I106.WMF
SM
1-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Duplex-unit support.......................................................................1
2. Tray...............................................................................................2
3. Link rail .........................................................................................1
4. Link-rail holder ..............................................................................1
5. Screw M4 x 12 ..............................................................................6
6. Screw M4 x 8 ................................................................................2
5
6
4
B146I926.WMF
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug its power cord before
1. Remove all tape. Check that no tape remains inside

the front cover and on the left cover.
2. Fold the external tray [A].
[A]
B146I905.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
3. Set the link rail [A] on the link-rail

holder [B].
4. Install the link-rail holder (with the
link rail) to the copier [C] ( x 2).
[C]
[B]
[A]
B146I906.WMF
5. Install the duplex-unit support [D] to

the copier ( x 3).
[D]
B146I907.WMF
SM
1-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
6. Adjust the position of the connection

bracket [A] as necessary ( x 2):
Upper position for the copier with the
two-tray paper feed unit or LCT.
Lower position for the copier with the
one-tray paper feed unit.
[A]
7. Connect the finisher [B] with the copier

( x 1).
B146I908.WMF
[B]
8. Connect the finisher cable to the

connector of the copier.
B146I909.WMF
9. Install the two trays [C] ( x 1 for each).

10. Extend the external tray of the copier
(see step 2).
[C]
11. Turn the main switch on and check the

operation.
B146I910.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Sensor arm ..........................................................................1
3. Spring ..................................................................................1
4. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................2
5. Step screw...........................................................................2
6. Hopper.................................................................................1
7. Spacer (2 mm) .....................................................................1
8. Spacer (1 mm) .....................................................................2
3
8
4
B146I933.WMF
SM
1-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug its power cord. If the two-tray
finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
[A]
[C]
[B]
B377I102.WMF
B377I103.WMF
1. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door of the finisher and remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).
3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and paper guide [C] (stepped x 1).
B147/B149/B190
1-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[A]
[C]
B377I101.WMF
[E]
B377I104.WMF
[D]
4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped x 1).
6. Install the spring [C].
7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].
8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped x 1).
SM
1-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
B377I200.WMF
[C]
[B]
B377I106.WMF
9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp it as shown.

10. Slide in the hopper [B].
11. Fasten the two 1-mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.
NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the punch
holes.
12. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation.
B147/B149/B190
1-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Accessories Check List
Description
Qty
1. Front Tray Holder.................................................................1

2. Rear Tray Holder .................................................................1
3. Tray .....................................................................................2
4. Screw (M3 x 14)...................................................................4
5. Discharge Brush ..................................................................2
6. Ground Plate for Left Cover.................................................1
7. Ground Plate for Upper Exit.................................................1
8. Ground Plate for Lower Exit.................................................1
B146I934.WMF
SM
1-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray

NOTE: Before installing the multi-bin output tray, install the duplex unit.
1. Open the left cover [A] of the duplex

unit.
[D]
[E]
2. Install the ground plate [B] behind the

magnet.
3. Install the ground plate [C] on the rear
of the left cover.
[A]
4. Attach the ground plate to the top

cover, aligning the bottom edges of
the plate [D] and cover [E].
[C]
[B]
G306I101.WMF
5. Attach the discharge brushes [F][G] to

the upper edges of the paper exits, so
that the ends of the brushes [H][I]
touch the ground plates [C][D]
respectively.
NOTE: Make sure the brushes do not
obstruct paper coming from
the exits.
[H]
[F]
[G]
[I]
G306I102.WMF
[A]
6. Install the front [A] and rear [B] tray
holders on the top cover ( x 2 for
each).
[C]
7. Install the upper [C] and lower [D]

trays.
8. Turn the main switch on; select the SP
mode menu, SP69011; and change
the multi-bin output tray setting.
NOTE: The multi-bin output tray is not
[B]
automatically recognized by the
printer mainframe. The multi-bin
output tray cannot be used until
you have changed this SP mode setting.
B147/B149/B190
1-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G306I103.WMF
[D]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Regular tray ..................................................................................1

2. Rail holder.....................................................................................1
3. Magnet catchrear........................................................................1
4. Magnet catchfront .......................................................................1
5. Duplex-unit support.......................................................................1
6. Rail joint ........................................................................................1
7. Screw M4 x 12 ..............................................................................6
8. Screw M4 x 6 ................................................................................8
9. Screw M3 x 14 ..............................................................................4
10. Rail..............................................................................................1
11. Stapler unit..................................................................................1
12. Staple cartridge...........................................................................1
13. Pad .............................................................................................3
5
10
6
7
8
11
9
B602I912.WMF
12
13
NOTE: Make sure that you retain the pads. The pads are white and made of
styrofoam.
SM
1-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Adjusting the Height
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
B602I901.WMF
B602I008.WMF
1. Check the type of optional paper tray installed:

If the optional two-tray paper feed unit or the optional LCT is installed, go to
step 2.
If either of them is not installed, go to Main Body.
2. Tape the pads [A] to the right-hand side of the machine.
3. Lay the finisher on its right-hand side.
4. Remove the adjuster plates [B] ( x 2).
5. Change the height [C].
6. Reinstall the adjuster plates [D].
7. Take out the finisher from the box and stand it up.
8. Check that the height is correct, and remove the pads.
B147/B149/B190
1-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
Main Body
1. Remove all tape and padding.
B602I001.WMF
2. Remove the screw cover [A].

3. Install the rail joint [B] ( x 4).
4. Reinstall the screw cover.
[A]
[B]
B602I902.WMF
5. Install the regular tray [C] ( x 4).

[C]
B602I903.WMF
SM
1-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[F]
6. Remove 2 screws [F] and install the

magnet catches [A][B] ( x 2 for each).
7. Install the duplex-unit support [C] ( x 3). [A]
[C]
[B]
B602I004.WMF
8. Slide the rail [D] through the rail holder

[E].
9. Install the rail holder (with the rail) to the
copier ( x 2).
[D]
B147/B149/B190
[E]
1-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602I904.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
10. Connect the booklet finisher unit to

the copier ( x 1).
B602I905.WMF
11. Install the stapler unit [A].
[A]
B602I907.WMF
12. Turn the knob [B] clockwise until the

staple-cartridge holder [C] reaches the
front-most position.
13. Install the staple cartridge [D] firmly to
the staple-cartridge holder.
[B]
[C]
[D]
B602I908.WMF
14. Turn on the main switch and check the operation.
SM
1-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Optional Punch Unit

Description
Qty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Decal ...................................................................................1
3. Screw M4 x 6 (with the base) ..............................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................2
2
3
4
B647I001.WMF
1. Remove the front lower cover

[A] ( x 2).
[A]
B602R988.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[E]
[G]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B647I002.WMF
2. Remove the joint guard [A] ( x 2).

3. Open the front door [B].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob [C].
5. Remove the front cover [D] ( x 2).
6. Remove the rear cover [E] ( x 3).
NOTE: Do not damage the mylar when you remove the screw.
7. Remove the right top cover with the paper entrance cover [G] ( x 4).
SM
1-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
8. Remove the right top cover [A] from

the paper entrance cover [B].
[B]
B647I003.WMF
9. Install the punch unit [C] ( x 2,

1 screw with the base [D])
[D]
[C]
10. Install the right top cover [E] ( x 2).
B647I901.WMF
[E]
B647I005.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B647I006.WMF
11. Install the cable to the connectors as follows:

J1003 (punch unit) [A] to CN12 (booklet finisher unit) [D]
J1004 (punch unit) [B] to CN14 (booklet finisher unit) [C]
[F]
[E]
B602I911.WMF
B647I903.WMF
12. Fasten the cable with the clamps.
13. Reassemble the booklet finisher unit.

NOTE: Check that the side guide and the front cover correctly join with each
other [E].
14. Attach the decal [F].
15. Turn on the main switch and check the punch operation.
SM
1-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.9 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT (FOR ASIA MODEL ONLY)

The printer scanner unit is a standard unit for the models other than the Asia model.
Accessory Check
Check the accessories in the box against the following list:
Description
Qty
1. Key Tops Printer (English: 1 set, Universal: 1 set)............2

2. Key Tops Scanner (English: 1 set, Universal: 1 set).........2
3. NIB.......................................................................................1
4. IEEE 1284 Interface Board ..................................................1
5. SD Card...............................................................................1
6. Ferrite Core (For LAN cable) ...............................................1
CAUTION
Switch the main switch off and unplug the power cord before starting any
procedure described in these instructions.
CAUTION: When installing an SD card, push the
card into the slot until you hear a click. If
you release it too early, the SD card may
be pushed out of the slot.
You need to install the optional 256 MB memory with
the printer/scanner unit.
B612I901.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the

I/F Card Slot B ( x 2).
2. Install the Ethernet board [B]
(Knob-screw x 2).
[B]
[A]
B612I002.WMF
3. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card

Slot A [C] ( x 2).
4. Install the IEEE 1284 interface board
[D] (Knob-screw x 2).
[D]
[C]
B612I903.WMF
SM
1-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
5. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD

Card Slot 1 ( x 1).
[B]
6. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rear

of the machine, and push it slowly into
the slot until you hear a click.
[A]
7. Attach the slot cover ( x 1).
B612I004.WMF
8. Remove the dummy keys [C] and

install one of the printer keys [D][d]
and one of the scanner keys [E][e].
[C]
Prin ter
[D]
Scanner
[d]
[E]
[e]
B612I902.WMF
9. Attach the ferrite core [F] to the LAN cable.
[F]
10. Connect the LAN cable.
B603I904.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.10 POSTSCRIPT 3
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD

Card Slot 2 ( x 1).
[B]
2. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rear

of the machine, and push it slowly
into the slot until you hear a click.
3. Attach the slot cover ( x 1).
[A]
G369I901.WMF
4. Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal [C] to the

front cover.
[C]
G369I902.WMF
SM
1-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.11 256 MB MEMORY
CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B612I001.WMF
1. Remove the controller board [A] ( x 3).

2. Install the expansion memory [B].
3. Reinstall the controller board ( x 3).
B147/B149/B190
1-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.5.12 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER
CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B609I901.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the file format converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
SM
1-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.13 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)

CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[C]
[A]
B581I901.WMF
You can install one of the following network interfaces: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless
LAN), USB 2.0, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth. (For the information on the Asia
model, see section 1.5.9.)
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot D [A] ( x 2).
2. Make sure that the jumper [B] is set on TB2.
3. Install the FireWire board [C] (Knob-screw x 2).
B147/B149/B190
1-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
3. Press Interface Settings.
4. Press the corresponding key to enter the following settings:
IP Address
Subnet Mask
IP Over 1394. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
IP Over 1394 as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
SCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print Bi-directional. Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
SM
SP No.
5-839 004
Name
Host Name
5-839 007
Cycle Master
5-839 008
BCR Mode
5-839 009
5-839 010
IRM 1394a
Check
Unique ID
5-839 011
Logout
5-839 012
5-839 013
Login
Login MAX
Function
Sets the name of the device used on the network.
Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX
Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE
1394 standard bus.
Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for
the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus
for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings
are available: Standard, IRM Color Copy, and
Always Effective.
Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is
conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
Enables the Node_Unique_Id setting for enumeration
on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login in for SBP-2.
Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:
1 ~ 62.
1-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.14 USB 2.0

CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B596I901.WMF
2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B147/B149/B190
1-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USB SP Settings
The following SP commands are available. However, only one setting may require
adjustment and this setting should be performed only if the customer is
experiencing USB data transmission errors.
NOTE: Do not change the settings marked DFU. These settings are for design
and factory use only.
SM
SP No.
5-844-001
Name
Transfer Rate
5-844-002
5-844-003
5-844-004
Vendor ID
Product ID
Dev. Release
Number
Function
Adjusts the USB transfer rate. Do not change the
setting unless there is a data transfer error using the
USB high speed mode.
HS/FS: High speed/Full speed auto adjust
(480Mbps/12Mbps)
FS:
Full speed (12Mbps fixed)
Displays the vendor ID. DFU
Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version number.
DFU
1-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.15 IEEE 802.11b (WIRELESS LAN)

CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B582I901.WMF
2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B147/B149/B190
1-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[C]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[F]
[A]
B582I902.WMF
3. Pull off the edge connector protector [A] off the card and discard it.
4. With the card label facing left, insert the card [B] into the PCI slot.
5. Use the Velcro pads to install the antennas [C] on the left rear corner of the
machine.
NOTE: The antennas should be separated by at least 40 ~ 60 mm (1.5~2.5").
Always detach the antennas from the corners of the machine and
disconnect them before moving the machine.
6. Connect the antennas to the terminals [D].
7. Wrap the cables [E] and hang them over the antennas as shown.
8. Attach the cover [F] ( x 2).
9. If reception is poor, you may need to move the machine:
Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of
equipment that can generate a strong magnetic field.
Position the machine as close as possible to the access point.
SM
1-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be used if Ethernet is being used.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select Interface Settings Network (tab) Network I/F Settting
4. Select either Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b.
5. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options are displayed.
6. Transmission Mode. Select either Ad Hoc Mode or Infrastructure Mode.
7. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
8. Channel. This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
9. WEP (Privacy) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to unlock encoded
data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There are 64 bit and
128 bit WEP keys.
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
10. Bandwidth Status. This setting is enabled only for the Infrastructure Mode.
Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth. One of the following
is displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN:
Good
Fair
Poor
Unavailable
B147/B149/B190
76 ~ 100%
41 ~ 75%
21 ~ 40%
0 ~ 20%
1-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
11. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to display more settings, then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point, depending on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps
5.5 Mbps
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
140 m (153 yd.)

200 m (219 yd.)
270 m (295 yd.)
400 m (437 yd.)
12. To initialize the wireless LAN settings, use page 2/2. Press Execute to initialize
the following settings:
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 802.11b
SM
SP No.
5-840-004
5-840-006
Name
SSID
Channel MAX
5-840-007
Channel MIN
5-840-010
5-840-011
5-840-020
WEP Key
WEP Key Select
WEP Mode
Function
Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Used to display the maximum length of the string that
can be used for the WEP Key entry.
1-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.16 BLUETOOTH
CAUTION
procedure.
[B]
[A]
B582I901.WMF
2. Install the Bluetooth board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B147/B149/B190
1-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[C]
[A]
G377I901.WMF
3. Insert the Bluetooth card [A] into the slot.

4. Press the antenna [B] to extend it.
5. Attach the antenna cap [C].
SM
1-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.17 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch.
2. Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page
NOTE: The same data can also be printed by executing SP1-004 Print
Summary. All installed options are listed in the System Reference
column.
B147/B149/B190
1-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.18 KEY COUNTER HOLDER

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).
[A]
B146R102.WMF
[B]
2. Cut a 15-mm (0.6") piece [B] off the

tape.
NOTE: You do not need the smaller
piece for the installation.
15 mm
(0.6")
A674I901.WMF
3. Remove the scanner right cover

[A] ( x 2).
[A]
4. Clean the area [B] with alcohol.

5. Attach the tape.
[B]
A674I902.WMF
SM
1-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Rev. 09/2005
[A]
[D]
62 mm
(2.4")
[C]
[B]
A674I904.WMF
A674I903.WMF
The view from the back
The view from the top
6. Attach the key counter holder as follows.

The bottom end of the key counter holder [B] is 62 mm (2.4") below the
bottom end of the scanner right cover [A].
The bracket on the back of the key counter holder [C] is aligned to the rear
end of the scanner cover [D].
7.
The CN227 connector on the BCU has 8 pins. Pins # 1 to 4 are used for the
Key Counter, pins # 5 and 6 are used for the mechanical counter and pins # 7
and 8 are not used for US models. The intermediate harness [E] for the key
counter is connected to CN 227. The connector for this harness is located
inside the rear cover by the lower rear. (As shown in the illustration below).
Please connect the harness for Key Counter to this connector.
8. Reassemble the covers.
9.
Set SP 5-113-1 to 8.
[E]
B178I547.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER)

[A]
B146R102.WMF
[F]
2. Remove the scanner right cover [B]

( x 2).
[C]
3. Remove the rear scale [C] ( x 3).

4. Remove the exposure glass [D] with
[E]
the left scale [E] ( x 2).
[B]
NOTE: You do not have to remove the

ARDF exposure glass. If the
glass is removed, position the
glass marker [F] at the rear-left
corner when reattaching.
[D]
B146I940.WMF
SM
1-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
5. Install the anti-condensation heater [A]

in the rear-left corner of the scanner
unit ( x 2).
[A]
6. Pass the cable through the opening

[B] in the rear.
B146I942.WMF
[B]
[D]
7. Attach the clamps [C] to the rear

frame.
8. Fasten the cable with the clamps.
[C]
9. Connect the connector [D].

10. Reassemble the copier.
B146I943.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.5.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (PAPER TRAY)
CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
2. After cutting the lower-most rectangular piece off the right-bottom corner
of the rear cover, file the edges to smooth them. Rough edges may hurt
the user. The user pushes the tray-heater switch through this
rectangular opening.
[A]
2. Remove the switch bracket [B] (

x 2).
3. Remove tray 1 and tray 2.
[B]
B146I947.WMF
4. Cut the lower-most rectangular

piece [C] off the right-bottom corner (viewed
from the rear) of the rear cover.
5. File the edges to smooth them.
[C]
6. Make sure that the heater switch [D]

is not upside down. The sign [E]
is on the upper end and the sign
[F] is on the lower end.
NOTE: The sign means on. The
sign means off.
B146I946.WMF
[E]
[D]
7. Install the switch to the bracket [G].

[F]
8. Make sure that the heater switch is

off.
[G]
SM
1-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B146I948.WMF
B147/B149/B190
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
9. Install the switch bracket (with the

heater switch) to the original place. Do
[B]
not fasten the screws yet.
[A]
10. Connect the white connectors to the

switch.
B146I949.WMF
11. Insert the red connector [A] into the

opening on the frame [B].
[C]
[D]
12. Fasten the two screws on the switch bracket.

13. Align the caution decal [E] with the
mark [F] on the front of the heater
cover [G], and attach the caution
decal there.
[G]
[E]
B146I950.WMF
[F]
14. Align the tray heater [H] with the
[H]
marks [I][J] on the back of the
heather cover, and attach the tray
heater there.
[K]
15. Connect the tray heater connector
[K] (from the front side of the
copier) to the red connector [A].
[I]
[J]
B146I951.WMF
16. Insert the heater cover to the

openings [C][D] from the front side
( x 1).
NOTE: The connectors [A][K] are
under the heater-tray cover.
17. Reassemble the copier and install
tray 1 and tray 2.
18. Attach the On/Stand by decal on
the left-hand side of the main switch
(not the tray heater switch).
On
Stand by
B146I952.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SETTINGS
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 SETTINGS
You must enable New Unit Set (SP5-999) before you replace the following units:
PCUK (SP5-999-001)
Development UnitC (SP5-999-006)
PCUY (SP5-999-002)
Development UnitM (SP5-999-007)
PCUM (SP5-999-003)
Development UnitY (SP5-999-008)
Fusing Unit (SP5-999-009)
PCUC (SP5-999-004)
Development UnitK (SP5-999-005)
To enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit), perform as follows:
1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).
2. Select a program from SP5-999-001 to 009.
3. Select "1. Enable."
4. Select "OK."
5. Quit the SP mode.
6. Turn the main switch off.
7. Replace the unit.
8. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit.
Counter Reset
After you replace the following units, you must reset the counter (SP7-804):
By-pass tray (SP7-804-011)
Tray 4 (SP7-804-015)
Tray 1 (SP7-804-012)
Transfer unit (SP7-804-017)
Tray 2 (SP7-804-013)
Transfer belt cleaning unit (SP7-804018)
Tray 3/LCT (SP7-804-014)
3. Select "EXECUTE."
SM
2-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Preventive
Maintenance
New Unit Set
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
Rev. 05/2005
2.2 PM TABLES
On the B190, there is a wider gap between sheets of paper. Since the PM interval
is based on the number of motor revolutions, increasing the paper interval means
shortening the PM interval by 10% (motor revolutions are more frequent, making
the PM timing sooner).
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job)
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol key:
C: Clean,
L: Lubricate,
I: Inspect
B147/B149
Copier
B190
Item
R: Replace,
Scanner
1st/2nd/3rd mirrors
Front and Rear Rails
Exposure Glass
ADF Exposure Glass
Exposure Lamp
APS Sensor
Development
Dev. UnitK
Dev. UnitC
Dev. UnitM
Dev. UnitY
PCU
Transfer
Waste Toner Bottle
Fusing
Fusing Unit
Oil Supply Unit
Paper Path
Registration Sensor
Duplex Unit
Inverter Roller
Transport Roller
Inverter Sensor
Miscellaneous
Dust Filter
Breaker
20K
120K
140K
60K
40K
36K
54K
18K
108K
126K
C
C
C
C
EM
C
C
I
Remarks
Optics cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth
R
R
R
R
R
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1 See NOTE below.
2.1
R
C
Blower brush
C
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Blower brush
Distributed with development unit-K

I
NOTE: The yield of the PCU was increased from 40K to 60K. Refer to TSB
B147/B149/B190 008 Reissue for more information.
B147/B149/B190
2-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
Rev. 09/2004
B147/B149
ARDF
B190
240K
216K
Pick-up Roller
Feed Belt
Separation Roller
Sensors
Platen Sheet Cover
White Plate
Drive Gear
Transport Roller
Exit Roller
Inverter Roller
Idle Rollers
R
R
R
C
EM
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
C
C
C
C
Remarks
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Blower brush
Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
Dry or damp cloth
Grease G501
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original) (B147/B149)

216k copies (= 72k originals x 3 copies/original) (B190)
One-Tray Paper Feed Unit
Item
240K
Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
EM
C
C
C
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
EM
C
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
EM
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
EM
C
C
C
I
Remarks
Damp cloth
Dry cloth
Blower brush
Replace if required.
EM
C
Discard chad.
Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

Item
Feed Rollers
Pickup Rollers
Separation Rollers
240K
Remarks
LCT
Item
Relay Roller
Bottom Plate Pad
240K
Remarks
Two-Tray Finisher
Items
Rollers
Discharge Brush
Sensors
Jogger Fences
240K
Two-Tray Finisher Punch Kit

Item
Punch Chad
SM
240K
Remarks
2-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Preventive
Maintenance
Item
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
Booklet Finisher
Item
Rollers
Shafts
Sensors
Jogger fences
60K
EM
C
C
C
I
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Blower brush
Booklet Finisher Punch Kit

Item
Punch Chad
B147/B149/B190
60K
C
EM
C
Remarks
Discard chad.
2-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OTHERS
2.3 OTHERS
NOTE: These units are considered as EM parts since their expected lifetimes are
relatively long.
Copier
150K
500K
Remarks
1000K
R
R
R
R
R
Preventive
Maintenance
Item
Transfer
Transfer Unit
Belt Cleaning Unit
Bypass Tray
Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1

Item
Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
150K
500K
R
R
R
1000K
500K
R
R
R
1000K
500K
R
R
1000K
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth

Item
150K
Feed Rollers
Pickup Rollers
Separation Rollers
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
LCT
Item
Relay Roller
Bottom Plate Pad
SM
150K
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
2-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIAL TOOLS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section.
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.
: See or refer to
: Screw
: Clip ring
: E ring
: Connector
Part Number
Description
Qty
B6455010
SD Card
B6456700
PCMCIA Card Adapter
B6456800
USB Reader/Writer
A029 9387
Digital Multimeter FLUKE87
G021 9350
Loop-back Connector Parallel
C401 9503
20X Magnification Scope
A2579300
Grease Barrierta S552R
52039501
Silicon Grease G-501
A0929503
C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set)
A0069104
Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set)
SM
3-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.1 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Scanner sub-scan magnification

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and
make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 to
adjust if necessary.
Standard: 1.0%.
A
B146R962.WMF
A: Sub-scan magnification
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make

a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration,
and adjust them with the following SP modes if
necessary. Standard: 0 2mm.
Leading Edge Registration
Side-to-Side Registration
SP mode
SP4-010-001
SP4-011-001
B146R963.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
B147B149/B190
3-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Main scan dot position correction

NOTE: Before adjusting the scanner, adjust the printer registration.
1. Enter the SP mode and open SP4-010 and SP4-011.
2. Check that each value corresponds to the factory-set value.
4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do
this.) If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy, exit the
SP mode to end the adjustment. If the yellow and cyan lines significantly
extend beyond the black line, proceed to the next step.
5. Press the SP Mode key to return to the SP mode and open SP4-932.
Compare the current values against the table.
SP4-932-1
SP4-932-2
SP4-932-3
SP4-932-4
SM
Dot correction R left edge

Dot correction R right edge
Dot correction B left edge
Dot correction B right edge
3-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Press the COPY Window key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo
mode.
NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. This is because color displacement
cannot be checked properly in text mode.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration
B
B146R964.WMF
A: Leading edge registration

B: Side-to-side registration
B146R965.WMF
Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT (11 x 17 inch) paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code
SP6-006-001
SP6-006-002
SP6-006-003
SP6-006-004
B147B149/B190
What It Does
Side-to-Side Registration
Leading Edge Registration (Simplex)
Buckle: Duplex Front
Buckle: Duplex Rear
3-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Adjustment Range
3.0 mm
42 steps
42 steps
45 steps
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
The image area shown in the
illustration must be accurate. So make
sure that the registration is adjusted
within the adjustment standard range
as described below.
Feed direction
A
A = B = C = 4.2mm (1.6")
B146R966.WMF
Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side to side registration for each paper feed station. The side to side
registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and duplex unit can be adjusted
with SP mode (SP1-002).
Adjustment Standard
Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 0 mm
Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 0 mm
Paper Registration Standard
The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions may fluctuate within the
following tolerance.
1st side
Sub-scan direction:
Main-scan direction:
2nd side in duplex
Sub-scan direction:
Main-scan direction:
SM
0 1.5 mm
0 2 mm
0 3 mm
0 4 mm
3-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Image Area
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode and access SP5-997.
2. Print out the pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP5-997.
NOTE: Registration may change slightly print by print as shown above.
Therefore print a few pages of the trimming pattern for step 3 and 4,
and average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values and
adjust each SP mode.
3. Perform the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value then press the key.
4) Check the leading edge adjustment by generating the trim pattern.
4. Perform the side to side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side to side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value then press the key.
4) Check the side to side adjustment by generating the trim pattern.
3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION

Line Position Adjustment
Normally, the automatic line position adjustment is executed under a specified
condition to optimize the color prints. If color registration shifts, execute Auto
Adjust with the user tools (Maintenance menu Color registration) or SP5-993-2
to do the forced line position adjustment. In addition, it is recommended to perform
the line position adjustment under the following conditions:
After transporting or moving the copier (If copier are pre-installed at the
workshop and transported to the user location, forced line position adjustment
should be done after copier installation is completed at the user location.)
When opening the drum positioning plate
When removing or replacing the motors, clutches, and/or gears related to the
drum/development/transfer sections
When removing or replacing the transfer belt or laser optical housing unit
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper

You must adjust the line speed of the fusing unit (the speed of development motorK) under the following conditions:
The color registration shifts more on the trailing edge than on the leading
edge.
This problem has not been solved by the line position adjustment.
B147B149/B190
3-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION

NOTE: Normally, the ACC is enough to adjust the color balance to achieve the
optimum print output. The printer gamma correction is only required for
fine-tuning to meet user requirements.
The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified using SP modes.
The gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and IDmax can be adjusted.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 15 (16 steps).
Copy Mode
The adjustment uses only Offset values.
NOTE: Never change Option values (default value is 0).
Highlight (Low ID)
Middle (Middle ID)
Shadow (High ID)
ID max
Offset
Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are four adjustable modes (SP4-918-009):

Copy Photo mode
Copy Letter mode
Copy Letter (Single Color) mode
Copy Photo (Single Color) mode
B146R967.WMF
SM
3-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you are going to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select Copy SP.
4. Select SP4-918-009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( the
table below).
NOTE: 1) Never change Option value (default value is 0).
2) Adjust the density in order from ID Max, Middle, Shadow, and then
Highlight.
- Photo Mode, Full Colour Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
Middle (Middle ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
Shadow (High ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
Level on the C-4 chart
Highlight (Low ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
4
K Highlight (Low ID)

(C,M, and Y)
<on the full color
copy>
B147B149/B190
Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
the color balance of black scale
levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, redo
step 1 to 4.
3-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Step
1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)
Middle (Middle ID)

(K)
Shadow (High ID)

(K)
Level on the C-4 chart
Highlight (Low ID)

(K)
4
Adjustment Standard
on the C-4 chart.
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Colour Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
Middle (Middle ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
Shadow (High ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
Level on the C-4 chart (K)
Highlight (Low ID)

(K, C, M, and Y)
4
SM
Adjustment Standard
on the C-4 chart.
3-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
- Photo Mode, Single Colour -
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Colour Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)
Middle (Middle ID)

(K)
Shadow (High ID)

(K)
Level on the C-4 chart (K)
Highlight (Low ID)

(K)
4
Adjustment Standard
on the C-4 chart.
NOTE: After adjusting shadow as explained above, text parts of the test pattern
may not be printed clearly. If this happens, check whether the 5 line/mm
pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of
shadow again until it is.
B147B149/B190
3-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
1200 x 1200 photo mode
600 x 600 text mode
1800 x 600 text mode
1200 x 1200 text mode
K
SP1-104-1
SP1-104-2
SP1-104-3
SP1-104-4
C
SP1-104-21
SP1-104-22
SP1-104-23
SP1-104-24
M
SP1-104-41
SP1-104-42
SP1-104-43
SP1-104-44
Y
SP1-104-61
SP1-104-62
SP1-104-63
SP1-104-64
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Highlight
Middle
Shadow
IDmax
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select Printer SP.
5. Select SP1-102-001 and select the print mode that you are going to adjust.
6. To review the image quality for these settings, choose SP1-103-1 to print out a
tone control test sheet.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown below comparing the tone
control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
NOTE: Adjust the density in order from ID Max, Shadow, Middle, and then
Highlight.
8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1-105-001.
SM
3-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction

The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The
tables show the level of the color scale on the C4 test chart and on the tone control
test sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode, grade
12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.
Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance by
gamma data adjustment will be required only when the result from ACC and Color
Calibration does not meet the customers requirements.
Test
sheet
C4 test chart
600 x 600
Photo
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
600 x 600
Text
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
-
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
8
8
9
9
9
7
10
10
10
10
10
11
8
11
11
12
11
12
12
9
16
16
15
16
16
15
10
16
16
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
-
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
4
4
5
4
5
6
6
5
5
6
5
6
9
8
8
8
9
9
7
10
10
10
10
10
10
8
12
11
11
11
11
11
9
13
12
12
12
12
12
10
14
13
13
13
14
13
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
-
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
8
8
7
7
8
7
6
11
11
10
10
11
10
7
12
12
12
12
13
12
8
14
15
14
14
14
13
9
16
16
16
16
16
16
10
-
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
4
9
8
8
5
11
10
10
6
12
11
11
7
14
14
14
9
16
16
16
10
-
600 x 600
10
11
14
15
16
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
1
3
2
6
4
9
7
10
9
12
10
14
13
8
15
15
15
14/
15
15
15
16
16
C4 test chart
Photo
C
Test
sheet
Text
C4 test chart
Photo
M
Test
sheet
Text
C4 test chart
Photo
Y
Test
sheet
Text
B147B149/B190
3-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT
3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

3.3.1 TOP COVER
1. External tray [A]
[B]
2. Open the duplex left cover [B].
[C]
[A]
B146R985.WMF
3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)
2. Duplex control board [A] ( x 4, x 7)
[A]
B146R925.WMF
SM
3-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Top cover [C] ( x 4)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)
2. Exit tray [A]
[B]
3. Duplex unit [B] ( x 1, x 1)
[A]
B146R955.WMF
4. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)

5. Duplex control board bracket [D]
( x 2, x 7)
[C]
[D]
B146R986.WMF
6. Duplex inverter motor 1 [E]

( x 2, 1 timing belt)
[E]
B146R500.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH

1. Duplex control board bracket ( 3.3.3)
[A]
2. Duplex inverter unit switch [A]

( x 1, x 1)
3. Duplex inverter motor 2 [B]
( x 2, 1 timing belt)
B146R501.WMF
3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR

[C]
1. Open the duplex inverter unit [A]

2. Exit sensor 3 [B] ( x 1)
3. Duplex inverter sensor [C]
( x 1, x 2)
[B]
[A]
B146R134.WMF
[B]
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2
[A]
1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)

2. Open the duplex unit.
3. Exit sensor 1 [A]
( x 1, x 1, 1 bracket)
4. Exit sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)
B146R135.WMF
SM
3-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX FEED UNIT
3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD
[B]
[C]
[A]
B146R136.WMF
B146R114.WMF
1. Open the front cover

2. Duplex feed unit [A] ( x 1)
3. Inner cover [B] ( x 1)
4. Duplex drive board [C] ( x 2, x 3)
3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR
[A]
1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1)

2. Inner cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Duplex feed motor [B]
( x 1, x 1, 1 timing belt)
[B]
B147B149/B190
3-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B146R137.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX FEED UNIT
3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B146R138.WMF

2. Duplex feed sensor [A] ( x 1)
SM
3-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS

NOTE: 1) For the procedure to remove the paper exit tray, see section 3.7.2,
Laser Optics Housing Unit.
2) For the procedure to remove the paper exit cover, see section 3.12.14,
Paper Exit.
3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES

1. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)
2. Rear cover [A] ( x 5, 2 hooks)
[A]
B146R102.WMF
3. Front cover [B] (2 pins)
[B]
B146R917.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVERS
4. Open the by-pass tray [A].
[D]
[C]
5. Right cover [B] ( x 2)

6. Upper right cover [C] (1 strap)
[A]
B146R918.WMF
[B]
CAUTION: Do not put anything on the operation panel. After you remove the upper
front cover, the operation panel may become unstable.
8. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3)

9. Rear right cover [E]
( x 4, 1 hook)
[E]
B146R905.WMF
SM
3-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
7. Upper front cover [D] ( x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5.2 LEFT SIDE
[E]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[A]
[B]
B146R921.WMF
1. Duplex unit ( 3.3.3)

2. Duplex unit base cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Duplex inverter guide [B]
4. Duplex unit base [C] ( x 6)
5. Left cover [D] ( x 6, 1 hook)
6. Rear cover ( 3.5.3)
7. Open the upper left cover [E]
8. Scanner left cover ( 3.5.3)
9. Rear left cover [F] ( x 4)
B147B149/B190
3-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS

[D]
[B]
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
B146R919.WMF

3. Upper front cover ( 3.5.1)
4. Operation panel [A] ( x 4, x 1)
5. Scanner left cover [B] ( x 2, 1 hook)
6. Scanner right cover [C] ( x 2)
7. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1)
SM
3-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6 SCANNER UNIT

3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)
[B]
2. Exposure glass with left scale [B]

( x 2)
[D]
[A]
[C]
3. ARDF exposure glass [C]

NOTE: When reattaching the exposure
glass and ARDF exposure glass,
position the glass marker [D] at
the rear-left corner.
B146R987.WMF
3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR

[B]
1. Exposure glass with left scale

( 3.6.1)
[A]
2. Original length sensors [A]

( x 2, x2)
3. Original width sensor 1 [B]
( x 1, x1)
B146R927.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU)

2. Exposure glass ( 3.6.1)
3. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3)
[A]
B146R127.WMF
[B]
5. Sensor board unit
[B] ( x 4, x 4)
B146R128.WMF
6. After replacing the sensor board unit, adjust the following SP modes (
3.3.12):
SP4008 (Scanner leading edge magnification)
SP4010 (Scanner leading edge registration)
SP4011 (Scanner side-to-side registration)
SM
3-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
4. Inner cover [A] ( x 4)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER

( 3.6.1)
2. Sensor board unit ( 3.6.3)
[A]
3. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A]

( x 2, x 2)
B146R129.WMF
3.6.5 XENON LAMP

[A]

2. Operation panel and scanner covers
( 3.5.3)
( 3.6.1)
4. Left frame [A] ( x 2)
5. Front frame [B] ( x 5)
[B]
B146R130.WMF
[C]
6. Xenon-lamp cover [C] ( x 5)

7. Xenon lamp [D] (2 clamps)
[D]
B146R131.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling
1. Take up the cable slack.
2. Adjust the cable clamp position [A] if
necessary.
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
B146R139.WMF
3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU)

[A]
2. Scanner power supply unit [A]

(all 's, x 6)
B146R132.WMF
3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR

1. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6)
2. Scanner motor [A] ( x 2, Spring x 1)
[B]
3. Timing belt [B]
Reassembling
1. Install the motor.
2. Install the timing belt.
3. Install the spring.
[A]
4. Fasten the screws.
SM
B146R133.WMF
3-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE

[A]
1. Front frame ( 3.6.5)

2. Front scanner wire clamp [A]
3. Front scanner wire bracket [B]
( x 1)
4. Front scanner wire and scanner
drive pulley [C] ( x 1)
[C]
[B]
B146R140.WMF
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A]
in the middle of the forked
holder.
2. Pass the right end (with
the ring) [B] through the
square hole, and the left
end (with the ball) [C]
through the notch.
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
3. Wind the right end

clockwise (viewed from the
machines front) three
times; wind the left end
counterclockwise five
times.
B146R141.WMF
NOTE: The two red marks [D] meet when you have done this. Stick the wire to
the pulley with tape, so you can handle the assembly easily during
installation.
B147B149/B190
3-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
4. Install the drive pulley on

the shaft [A].
[B]
[C]
[D]
5. Insert the left end into the

slit [B], with the end going
via the rear track of the left
pulley [C] and the rear
track of the movable pulley
[D].
[A]
B146R142.WMF
6. Hook the right end onto

the front scanner wire
bracket [E], with the end
going via the front track of
the right pulley [F] and the
front track of the movable
pulley [G].
[E]
[G]
NOTE: Do not secure the
scanner wire bracket
with the screw yet.
B146R143.WMF
[F]
SM
3-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: Do not secure the

pulley to the shaft
with the screw yet.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
7. Remove the tape from the

drive pulley.
[D]
[A]
[I]
8. Insert a scanner positioning

pin [A] through the 2nd
carriage hole [B] and the left
holes [C] in the front rail.
Insert another scanner
positioning pin [D] through
the 1st carriage hole [E] and
the right holes in the front rail
[F].
[B]
9. Insert two more scanner
positioning pins in the holes
in the rear rail.
[G]
[H]
[E]
[C]
[F]
B146R144.WMF
10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [G].

11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
NOTE: After removing the positioning pins, make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages
move smoothly. If they do not, repeat steps 8 through 13.
B147B149/B190
3-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE

CAUTION: Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment may become difficult if these screws are
removed.
[S1]
[S3]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
[S2]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B146R928.WMF

2. Operation panel and scanner covers ( 3.5.3)
3. Exposure glass with left scale ( 3.6.1)
4. Left frame ( 3.6.5)
5. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6)
6. Five screws on the right-hand side (viewed from the front) [A]
7. Two screws on the left-hand side (viewed from the front) [B]
8. Pivot brackets [C][D] ( x 1 for each)
SM
3-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
B146R929.WMF
9. Rear frame [A] ( x 2, x 7)

NOTE: To remove the screw [B] on the bottom-right corner (viewed from the
front), lift the right-hand side (viewed from the front) of the scanner unit.
10. Rail frame [C] ( x 5)
NOTE: When reassembling, make sure that the home position sensor [D] is
not damaged by the sensor blade near the rear end of the xenon lamp.
[F]
[E]
11. Rear scanner wire clamp [E]

12. Rear scanner wire bracket [F]
( x 1)
13. Loosen the two screws on the
scanner-motor bracket ( 3.6.7)
14. Scanner motor gear [G] ( x 1)
15. Rear scanner wire and scanner
drive pulley [H] ( x 1)
[G]
B147B149/B190
3-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[H]
B146R145.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A]
in the middle of the forked
holder.
2. Pass the left end (with the
ball) [B] through the drive
pulley notch, and the right
end (with the ring) [C]
through the drive pulley
hole.
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Wind the left end

counterclockwise (viewed
from the machines front)
five times; wind the right
end clockwise three times.
B146R146.WMF
NOTE: The two red marks [D] meet when you have done this. Stick the wire to
the pulley with tape, so you can handle the assembly easily during
installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
NOTE: Do not secure the pulley on the shaft with the screw yet.
5. Install the wire.
NOTE: The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner
should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front,
except that it should appear as a mirror image.
Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with
the three windings should face the front of the machine. At the rear of
the machine, it should face the rear.
6. Perform steps 7 through 13 in the Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire
Section.
SM
3-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: It is necessary to calibrate touch panel in the following cases:
When the operation panel is replaced.
When the controller board is replaced.
When the touch panel detection function is not working correctly
Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are
for design use only.
1. Press , press , and then press 5 times to open the SelfDiagnostics menu.
B146R147.WMF
2. On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust (or press ).
B146R148.WMF
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark
4. Press the lower right mark
after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
B147B149/B190
3-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
3.7 LASER OPTICS

WARNING
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Caution decals are placed as shown below.
B146R900.TIF
B146R107.WMF
B146R901.TIF
WARNING
Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser
unit. This printer uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm
and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
SM
3-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT

CAUTION: Before installing a new laser optics housing unit, remove the sponge
padding and the tag from the new unit.
[A]
Steps 1 through 4 refer to the
procedure for a newly supplied unit
that replaces the old one.
1. Top cover of the laser optics
housing unit [A] ( x 4)
2. Sponge padding [B]
[B]
[C]
3. Tag [C]
4. Reinstall the top cover.
B146R149.WMF

[D]
7. Open the duplex inverter unit [D].

8. Open the front cover [E].
[E]
B146R922.WMF
10. Right cover, upper right cover, and upper front cover ( 3.5.1)
11. Operation panel, scanner left cover, scanner right cover, and scanner rear
cover ( 3.5.3)
B147B149/B190
3-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
12. Remove the support [A] on the front of

the scanner unit.
B146R920.WMF
CAUTION: 1) Before going to the next step, make sure that the cables on the rear
of the scanner unit are safe. The whole function (not only the
scanner unit) may be disabled if some of the cables are damaged.
2) Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment may become difficult if these screws are
removed.
[B]
13. Lift the scanner unit [B] ( x 7) and

prop the unit with the support [C].
NOTE: Remove screw [D] and
screw [E].
[C]
CAUTION: Do not lift the scanner unit

any higher after setting the
support under the scanner
unit. The support may come
off the opening [F].
[F]
[S1]
[D]
B146R924.WMF
SM
[E]
3-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[S2]
[S3]
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
[A]
14. Securing screws for the paper exit tray
[A] ( x 2)
NOTE: Do not remove the paper exit
tray yet.
B146R912.WMF
15. Securing screws for the toner supply

unit [B] ( x 4)
[B]
16. Securing screws for the laser optics

housing unit [C] ( x 2)
[C]
B146R910.WMF
[A]
17. Hold the toner supply unit [D] up and
lower it , so the pins [E] on the front
and rear shafts hold the unit.
[D]
[E]
B146R914.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
18. Paper exit tray [A]
B146R923.WMF
19. Connector cover [B] ( x 3)
[C]
1
20. Four flat cables [C]
[B]
21. Connector [D]
[D]
B146R909.WMF
22. Flat cable bracket [E] ( x 1)

23. Release the cable from the clamps [F].
[E]
[F]
B146R913.WMF
SM
3-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
[A]
24. Duct [A]
25. Securing screws for the laser optics
housing unit [B] ( x 2)
NOTE: When reassembling, attach the
ground cable [C].
[C]
26. Palace a sheet of paper [D] between the

laser optic housing unit and the machine
rear frame.
NOTE: This ensures that the cables are
not caught by the brackets when
you lift the laser optics housing
unit.
[B]
[D]
27. Hold the unit with both hands and slowly

B146R911.WMF
lift it up, making sure that the flat cables
from the laser diode board are not caught
by the brackets.
NOTE: If you roughly remove the unit, the cables can be caught by the
brackets and the laser diode board may be damaged.
28. After reinstalling the laser optics housing unit, do adjustments ( the
procedures on the following page).
After installing the laser optics housing unit, execute the forced line position
adjustment (SP5-993-2 or User Tools > Maintenance > Colour Registration > Auto
Colour Registration > OK).
B147B149/B190
3-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit

1. Enter SP mode.
2. Input the values printed on three decals on the new laser optics housing unit
into the following SPs. Each decal contains two values.
Value on the left
SP2-109-3
Value on the right

SP2-109-2
Decal 2
Not used
Not used
Decal 3
Not used
Not used
Function
Laser beam pitch
Main-scan registration
correction for black and cyan
Main-scan registration
correction for magenta and
yellow
Decal 3
Decal 2
Decal 1
Jp:xxxxx KC:-2,-2
Jp:xxxxx P:46,41
600dpi
1200dpi
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Decal 1
Jp:xxxxx MY:-2,-2
C
B146R150.WMF
Y
B146R151.WMF
B146R152.WMF
NOTE: The values on decals 2 and 3 do not need to be input, as the machine
performs the main scan registration correction for each color during
automatic line position adjustment.
3. Print out the following test pattern (Cross Stitch M) with SP5-997.
4. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, vertical black
strips seem to appear.
Cross-stitch pattern: The thin lines should be of uniform thickness (no
striping effect should appear on the printout).
5. Adjust the laser beam pitch values in SP2-109-2 and -3 until the printout is
correct, as shown below.
Feed direction
Adjustment not completed
Adjustment completed
B146R153.WMF
6. Execute SP5-993-2 or Auto Colour Registration in the User Tools

(Maintenance > Colour Registration > Auto Colour Registration > OK).
SM
3-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR
[A]
1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2)

2. Cover [A] ( x 4)
[B]
3. Polygon mirror motor [B]

( x 1, x 4)
B146R915.WMF
3.7.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS

2. Synchronizing detector boards [A]
( x 1 for each, x 1 for each)
[A]
B146R916.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Rev. 05/2005
3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

NOTE: Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let any metal object touch the
development sleeve.
[B1]
1. Start the SP mode and execute the

New Unit Set:
PCU: SP5-999-001 004
Development unit: SP5-999-005
008
[B2]

4. Loosen the 2 screws [B1][B2] (on the
drum positioning plate).
NOTE: When reassembling, fasten
screw [B1] first, and screw [B2]
second.
[C]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Open the front cover [A].
[A]
B146R930.WMF
5. Turn the release lever [C] counterclockwise.

6. Lift the drum positioning plate.
7. Pull a development unit [D] out.
[D]
8. Check that the development units are

installed in the proper color order
(black yellow cyan magenta
from left to right).
B146R154.WMF
9. Release the lever and pull a PCU [E]

out until the handle appears.
[E]
10. Grasp the handle [F] and pull the PCU

out of the machine.
11. Turn the main switch on. The machine
starts the initialization for the new unit.
B146R155.WMF
SM
3-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[F]
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9 PAPER FEED

3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1. Tray 1 and Tray 2
2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
[B]
4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1)
[A]
[C]
B146R961.WMF
[A]
By-pass Tray
[C]
1. Open the right door.

2. By-pass tray cover [A] (1 hook, x
1)
3. Raise the paper end sensor actuator
[B].
4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)
[B]
B146R932.WMF
[D]
5. Feed roller [D] ( x 1)

6. Vertical transport cover [E] ( x 4)
NOTE: To have easier access to
the four screws, remove the
right rear cover ( 3.9.4).
7. Separation roller [F] ( x 1)
[F]
B146R156.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[E]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD

[D]
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[C]
B146R933.WMF
1. Open the by-pass tray.

2. Center the side fences [A].
3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 2, 2 hooks)
NOTE: There is a square opening [C] on each side. Release the hooks by
pushing them through these openings.
4. Paper width detection board [D] ( x 1)
NOTE: To remove the connector,
open the bottom cover [E].
[E]
B146R157.WMF
SM
3-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR
[B]
[A]
B146R158.WMF

2. Vertical transport cover [A] ( x 4)
NOTE: To have easier access to the four screws, remove the right rear cover
( 3.9.4).
3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1)
3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT
B146R159.WMF
[B]
[A]
B146R160.WMF
1. Rear right cover ( 3.5.1)

2. Open the right door [A].
3. Lift the vertical transport unit [B] to remove it from its hinges ( x 3, x 1).
B147B149/B190
3-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS

[B]
[C]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B146R956.WMF
B146R934.WMF
1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4)

2. Registration guide [A] ( x 2)
3. Registration sensor [B] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Relay sensor [C] ( x 1, x 1)
3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

1. Paper trays
[B]
[A]
3. Swing out the high voltage supply unit

( 3.13.2).
4. Clutch holder [A] ( x 2, 1 bearing)
5. Paper feed clutch for tray 1 [B] ( x 1)
6. Clutch holder [C] ( x 2, 1 bearing)
7. Paper feed clutch for tray 2 [D] ( x 1)
[D]
[C]
B146R161.WMF
SM
3-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

[B]
1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4)

2. By-pass tray cover [A]
( x 1, 1 hook)
[F]
3. Loosen the screw on the right

door latch [B].
4. Turn the latch in the opposite
direction.
[A]
[D]
5. Upper guide plate [C]

( x 4, x 1)
[C]
6. Support plate [D] ( x 2)
B146R162.WMF
[E]
7. Relay gear [E] (1 hook)

8. By-pass feed clutch [F] ( x 1)
3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

3. Swing out the high voltage supply
unit ( 3.13.2).
4. Sub power supply unit [A]
( x 2, x 3)
[A]
B146R122.WMF
5. Tray lift motors (tray 1 [B], tray 2 [C])

( x 2, x 1)
[B]
[C]
B146R163.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[A]
B146R164.WMF

2. Sub power supply unit ( 3.9.8)
NOTE: This step is necessary to release the cable.
3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
NOTE: The connector is CN604 on the driver board [B].
SM
3-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT
NOTE: When removing or installing the transfer unit, grasp the central areas of the
front and rear frame. Do not touch the transfer belt [A]. Do not damage the
entrance mylar [B].
After replacing the transfer unit, reset the maintenance counter, SP7-804-16, and
conduct the output check, SP5-804-74.
[A]
[C]
[B]
B146R958.WMF

2. Turn the release lever counterclockwise. ( 3.8)
3. Pull out the transfer unit [C] until the entire unit is visible ( x 2).
4. Grasp the transfer unit grips as shown above. Lift the unit to remove it.
NOTE: Grasp the front grip. Use caution not to damage the actuator on the rear.
After replacing the transfer unit:
Perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or > Maintenance >
Color Registration).
Print the 1-dot grid pattern on A3/11" x 17" paper and check the color shift level
( 4.6.3).
B147B149/B190
3-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, reset the maintenance
counter, SP7-804-17.
[A]
[B]
B146R165.WMF
While pushing the lever, pull out the transfer belt cleaning unit [A] ( x 1).
NOTE: 1) The blade [B] may damage the belt if you do not keep pushing the lever.
2) When reassembling, check that the transfer unit release lever is put
back to the original position ( 3.8).
After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, perform forced line position
adjustment (SP5-993-002 or > Maintenance > Color Registration).
SM
3-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER
[A]
[B]
B146R166.WMF
1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2)

2. Cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
3. Tension spring [B]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B146R167.WMF
4. Lever [C]
5. 3 gears [D] ( x 1)
6. Gear box [E] ( x 1)
B147B149/B190
3-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
B146R168.WMF
7. Roller cover [A] ( x 2)

8. Cleaning brush gear [B] ( x 1)
9. Cleaning brush [C] (Bushing x 1)
After replacing the cleaning blade, perform forced line position adjustment (SP5993-002 or Maintenance menu Color registration - Auto Adjust in User Program
mode).
SM
3-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT

NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt during handling. When replacing the belt,
hold the belt at its end.
[A]
[B]
B146R169.WMF

2. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1)
3. Transfer entrance guide [A] ( x 3)
4. Right bracket [B] ( x 2)
[C]
[E]
[D]
B146R936.WMF
5. Left bracket [C] ( x 2)

6. Tension roller [D] ( x 2, Spacer [E] x 1)
NOTE: When reassembling, attach the spacer [E] to the original position.
B147B149/B190
3-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B146R170.WMF
7. Lay the transfer unit on its side.

8. Grasp the upper end of the transfer belt and pull the transfer belt [A] up and out.
NOTE: If the drive rollers are dirty, clean them with a damp cloth.
After replacing the transfer belt, perform forced line position adjustment (SP5-993002 or > Maintenance > Color Registration).
SM
3-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR
[B]
[A]
B146R171.WMF

2. Pull out the transfer unit ( 3.10.1).
3. Release lever [A] ( x 1)
4. Front cover [B] ( x 3)
[C]
[D]
B146R937.WMF
5. Front plate [C] ( x 5, x 2, Timing belt x 1)

6. Transfer unit drive motor [D] ( x 2)
B147B149/B190
3-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ID SENSORS
3.11 ID SENSORS
B146R172.WMF

2. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)
3. Black PCU ( 3.8)
4. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
When reassembling, check that the ID sensor bracket receives the drumpositioning plate correctly.
SM
3-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12 FUSING
CAUTION
1. Be careful when handling the fusing unit. It is very hot.
2. Take care not to spill silicone oil.
3.12.1 FUSING UNIT
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B146R173.WMF
CAUTION: Do not tilt the fusing unit [A] while handling it. The oil supply unit [B] can
fall off the fusing unit after the grip [C] is released from the oil supply
unit.
1. Start the SP mode and execute the New Unit Set (SP5-999-009).
3. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.
4. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
5. Push the heat insulator [D]. The grip [C] is released from the oil supply unit.
6. Fusing unit [A]
7. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts initialization for the new unit.
After replacing the fusing unit, if the customer uses thick paper, make some test
prints on a sample of the paper used by the customer. If there are any color
registration problems, adjust the line speed for thick paper with the following SP:
SP1-004-007 (Development Motor Speed[K] 62.5 Thick)
B147B149/B190
3-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT AND UPPER COVER
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B146R174.WMF
1. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.

2. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
3. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)
4. Oil supply unit [A]
5. Upper cover [B] ( x 4)
SM
3-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.3 CLEANING UNIT

[A]
[B]
[C]
B146R175.WMF
1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)

2. 2 handle guides [A][B] ( x 2 for each)
3. Handle [C] (Spring x 1)
[D]
[F]
[E]
B146R176.WMF
4. Gear [D] and collar [E] (Retaining ring x 1)

5. Cleaning unit [F] ( x 2)
NOTE: When reattaching, make sure that you set the cleaning unit [F] in place first
and then attach the gear [D] and collar [E].
B147B149/B190
3-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.4 HEATING ROLLER LAMP
[C]
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
B146R177.WMF

2. Heating roller lamp [A] ( x 2)
NOTE: When reinstalling, make sure the front [B] and rear [C] ends of the lamp are
on the correct terminals.
SM
3-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.5 FUSING BELT UNIT

[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
B146R178.WMF
[D]
1. Cleaning unit ( 3.12.3)

2. Heating roller lamp ( 3.12.4)
3. Upper paper guide plate ( 3.12.8)
4. Pressure roller gear [A] (C ring x 1)
5. 2 pressure brackets [B][C] (Spring x 1 for each)
6. Knob [D] ( x 1)
7. Fusing belt unit [E] ( x 1, x 1)
B147B149/B190
3-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3.12.6 HOT ROLLER
[A]
B146R179.WMF
1. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.5)

2. Hot roller [A] (Bushing x 2)
3.12.7 HEATING ROLLER
[A]
B146R180.WMF
1. Pressure roller ( 3.12.6)

2. Heating roller [A]
SM
3-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.8 PAPER GUIDE PLATES AND STRIPPER PAWLS
[A]
B146R181.WMF

2. Lower paper guide plate [A] ( x 2)
[B]
[C]
B146R182.WMF
3. Upper paper guide plate [B] ( x 2)

4. 5 stripper pawls [C]
B147B149/B190
3-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3.12.9 THERMISTOR AND FUSE
[A]
B146R183.WMF
1. Lower right cover [A] ( x 2)

[B]
B146R184.WMF
2. Thermistor [B] ( x 1, x 1)
SM
3-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
[A]
B146R185.WMF
3. Fuse [A] ( x 3)
3.12.10 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP
[A]
B146R186.WMF
1. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.5)

2. Pressure roller fusing lamp [A] ( x 2)
B147B149/B190
3-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER
[A]
B146R187.WMF
[B]
1. Pressure roller fusing lamp ( 3.12.10)

2. Lower paper guide plate ( 3.12.8)
3. Drive gear holder [A] ( x 1)
4. Drive gear [B] ( x 1)
5. Lower right cover ( 3.12.9)
6. Pressure roller unit [C] ( x 5, x 2)
SM
3-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
[C]
[A]
B146R188.WMF
7. Pressure roller gear [A] (C ring x 1, Bushing x 1)
[B]
8. Pressure roller holder [B] ( x 1)

9. Pressure roller [C] (C ring x 1)
B147B149/B190
3-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.12 FUSING UNIT FAN
CAUTION
When reinstalling, make sure that the fan faces to the correct direction. The
arrow on the fan [D] and the arrow on the duct [D] must face to the same
direction.
2. Left cover, rear left cover ( 3.5.2)
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Connector cover (on the top of the

controller box) ( 3.13.1)
4. Fusing fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)
B146R116.WMF
5. Release the hooks and remove the

upper cover [B].
[B]
6. Fusing fan [C]
[D]
[C]
B146R939.WMF
SM
3-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.13 WASTE OIL BOTTLE

[B]
1. Open the front cover [A].

2. Release the hook [B].
[D]
3. Waste oil bottle [C]

4. Close the bottle with the lid [D].
5. Dispose of the bottle (with waste
oil in it) in accordance with your
local regulations.
[C]
[A]
B146R189.WMF
NOTE: 1) The message, Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full, is cleared when the
front cover is closed. You do not need to turn the main switch off and
on.
2) The message, Waste Oil Bottle Setting Error, indicates that the bottle
is not in position. Check that the bottle is correctly reinstalled if this
message is displayed.
[C]
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT

1. Lift the scanner unit ( 3.7.2).
[A]
2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Exit upper limit sensor [B]
4. Paper exit sensor [C]
[B]
B146R938.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY
2. Connector cover [A] ( x 3)
[B]
3. Four flat cables [B]
[A]
4. Connector [C]
[D]
[C]
B146R959.WMF
6. Duct [E] ( x 1, x 2)
[E]
[F]
7. Ground cable [F] ( x 1)

8. Two connectors [F]
9. Swing out the controller box [G]
( x 5).
[G]
B146R960.WMF
SM
3-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5. Ground cable [D] ( x 1)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUT

OF THE WAY
2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit
[A] ( x 2).
[A]
B146R190.WMF
3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU

NOTE: 1) Before replacing the BCU or controller, print out the SMC reports (SP
Mode Data and Logging Data).
2) After replacing the BCU or controller, remove the NVRAM on the old
board and install it on the new board.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B146R954.WMF
1. Controller [A] ( x 3)
2. IPU [B] ( x 2, x 2)
3. Option bracket [C] ( x 2)
4. Rear cover [D] ( 3.5.1)
B147B149/B190
3-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5. Connector cover ( 3.13.1)
[A]
6. Cover bracket [A] ( x 4)
[B]
B146R942.WMF
8. BCU [C] (Flat cables x 4,

All 's, x 8)
[C]
[E]
[D]
B146R943.WMF
CAUTION: 1) When handling NVRAMs, keep them away from any objects that can
cause static electricity. The data in NVRAMs may be corrupted by
static electricity.
2) Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. A half-disk
[D] is engraved on one side of the NVRAM, while a guide mark [E] is
on one side of the NVRAM slot. Install the NVRAM so that the halfdisk and the guide mark are on the same side.
3) When replacing the BCU, make sure that the DIP-switch settings on
the old board and on the new board are the same ( 5.10).
NOTE: 1) Before replacing the NVRAM, make sure the SMC reports (SP Mode
Data and Logging Data) has been printed out.
2) After replacing the BCU or controller, remove the NVRAM on the old
board and install it on the new board. If the NVRAM on the old board is
defective, replace the NVRAM ( 3.13.5).
SM
3-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
7. Inner bracket [B] ( x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.4 HDD
You cannot separate the hard-disk drive into two different hard-disk drives. If you
should separated it into two and replace one of them, the controller does not
recognizes the hard-disk drive.
1. Controller ( 3.13.3)
2. HDD [A] ( x 4, Shoulder-screw x 3)
[A]
B146R191.WMF
3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

NVRAM on BCU
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings) that comes with the
copier.
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
3. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824) if possible.
4. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.
5. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.
6. Select a paper-size type ( SP5-131-001).
7. Specify the device number and destination code of the machine.
NOTE: 1) Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the device
number and destination code.
2) SC 999 or Fusing Unit Setting Error may be displayed until the
device number and destination code is properly programmed.
B147B149/B190
3-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8. Turn the main switch off and on.

9. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have
successfully copied them to the SD card.
10. Reset the settings for meter charge ( SP5-930-002).
11. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
12. Execute the process control self-check.
13. Perform ACC for the copier application program.
NVRAM on Controller
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings) that comes with the
copier.
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
3. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824) if possible.
4. Enter SP mode and print out the SMC reports ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
5. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.
6. Replace the NVRAM on the controller and reassemble the machine.
7. Turn the main switch on.
8. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have
successfully copied them to the SD card.
9. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
10. Perform ACC for the copier application program.
11. Perform ACC for the printer application program.
SM
3-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Replacement
and
Adjustment
14. Perform ACC for the printer application program.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B
[A]
B146R121.WMF

2. High voltage supply board [A] (All 's, x 6)
3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
B146R122.WMF

2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit ( 3.13.2)
3. Sub power supply unit [A] ( x 2, x 3)
B147B149/B190
3-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.8 PSU
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B146R192.WMF
1. Left cover ( 3.5.2)

2. PSU [A] (All 's, x 5)
NOTE: Check that the interlock switches on the PSU work normally after
reinstalling the PSU (open/close the left and front doors).
3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD
[A]
B146R193.WMF

2. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1).
3. Driver board [A] (All 's, x 4)
SM
3-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
3.14 DRIVE UNIT

3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH
[A]
B146R944.WMF

9. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES
[C]
1. Drum gears ( 3.14.3).

2. Development clutch assembly [A]
( x 1, x 1)
3. Clutch holder [B]
4. Clutch shaft [C] (1 bushing, x 1)
[B]
[A]
B146R945.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B146R946.WMF

3. Drum gear cover [A] ( x 2, x 5)
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B146R947.WMF
4. Turn the drum gears [B] counterclockwise, so the shoulder screws [C][D] are in
the three, seven, or eleven o'clock position.
NOTE: By doing that, you can align the three corners of each drum-gear shaft to
the three openings on the development-clutch securing plate [E].
SM
3-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
B146R948.WMF
5. 4 drum gears [A] ( x 2 for each)

NOTE: 3) Do not move the drum-gear shafts after removing the drum gears.
4) The print quality may be affected if any of the teeth on the drum
gears are damaged. Make sure they are intact.
6. Timing belt gear [B] (Timing belt x 1, Bushing x 1)
7. Idle gear [C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B146R949.WMF
[H]
[G]
8. 4 gear drive holders [D][G] ( x 1 for each)

9. Development clutch securing plate [H] ( x 8, x 6)
NOTE: Two of the six connectors are on the rear side.
B147B149/B190
3-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
B146R950.WMF
10. Development drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 5, x 1, Spring x 1)

NOTE: When reassembling, remove the three bushings [B] and install the
development drive motor first. After this, install the bushings.
3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K

[B]
1. Development clutch securing plate

( 3.14.3)
2. Drum drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 2)
3. Drum drive motor - K [B] ( x 2)
[A]
B146R194.WMF
SM
3-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K

1. Fusing fan duct ( 3.12.12)
2. Development clutch securing plate
( 3.14.3)
3. Solenoid cover [A] ( x 2)
[A]
B146R951.WMF
[C]
2
B146R952.WMF
1
[D]
[B]
4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3)

5. Development drive motor K [B] (with the fusing clutch [C]) ( x 4, x 2)
NOTE: When reassembling, remove the bushing [D] and install the
development drive motorK (with the fusing clutch) first. After this,
install the bushing.
B147B149/B190
3-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT

NOTE: 1) Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let any metal object touch the
development sleeve.
2) Having removed the PCUs, cover them with paper or cloth. Keep them
in a dark place.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
M Toner Supply Unit
[A]
[B]
B146R953.WMF

2. All development units and PCUs ( 3.8)
4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3)
5. Right inner cover with the drum positioning plate [A] ( x 3)
6. M development unit plate [B] ( x 1)
SM
3-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
[B]
B146R195.WMF
7. Development unit left guide [A] ( x 1)

9. Registration upper stay [B] ( x 4)
[E]
[C]
[D]
B146R196.WMF
CAUTION: 1) When you remove the toner path cover and a toner supply pipe, the
toner spills out. Before removing them, place some paper or cloth
beneath the toner supply unit and waste toner collection path.
2) After removing a pipe, close it with a paper clip or tape.
10. Toner path cover [C] ( x 2)
11. Toner supply pipe [D]
12. Toner supply unit [E] ( x 2, x 1)
B147B149/B190
3-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Reinstalling the M Toner Supply Unit
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B146R197.WMF
1. Wind the harness [A] on the shaft.

2. Insert the toner collection pipe [B].
NOTE: Check that the pipe does not come off the unit.
[C]
B146R198.WMF
3. Remove the toner supply unit bushing [C].
SM
3-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
[B]
B146R199.WMF
4. Install the unit [A] and secure it with the screws.

5. Unwind the harness and connect it.
6. Install the bushing.
7. Connect the toner supply pipe and the waste toner collection pipe [B].
8. Check that the pipes [C] do not come

off the unit.
9. Attach the toner path cover and
secure it with screws.
10. Reassemble the machine.
[C]
B146R200.WMF
B147B149/B190
3-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
C and Y Toner Supply Units
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[A]
B146R201.WMF
1. Development drive motor - CMY ( 3.14.3)

2. Development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)
NOTE: To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the C and M
development unit plates. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the
Y and C development plates.
3. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)
4. PCU 3C guide rail [A] ( x 2)
NOTE: 1) To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the M PCU guide. To
replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the Cyan PCU guide.
2) Pull the front plate [B] slightly.
SM
3-85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B146R202.WMF
5. Toner path cover [A] ( x 2)

6. Branch toner path covers [B][C] ( x 1)
NOTE: To replace the Cyan toner supply unit, remove the cover on the righthand side [B]. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the cover on
the left-hand side [C].
7. Toner supply pipe and toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)
K Toner Supply Unit

1. K and Y development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)
2. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)
3. PCU 3C guide rail ( C and Y Toner Supply Units)
NOTE: Remove the Y PCU guide.
4. Toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)
B147B149/B190
3-86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
Rev. 05/2005
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT
SP-3-005-006 (Developer Initialization Result)
Result
Not
performed
Description
Developer
initialization is not
performed.
Possible Causes
When initializing only
the black developer, the
initialization result
becomes 1000.
When done at unit

replacement:
Check if a new unit is
installed
Check if the unit detection
system is working
Check if SP2-223-001 (auto
initialization at unit
replacement) is enabled.
-
Successfully Developer
completed
initialization is
successfully
completed.
Forced
Developer
termination initialization was
forcibly terminated.
A cover was opened or

the main switch was
turned off during the
initialization.
Vt error
SM
Action
When done in SP mode, do
the developer initialization
again. If the result is the
same, reinstall the engine
main firmware.
When done in SP mode, do

the developer initialization
again. If the result is the
same, reinstall the engine
main firmware.
When done at unit

replacement, turn the main
switch off and on.
Vt is less than 0.5V 1. Check if the drum stay is properly set and secured.
and a SC370,
2. Check if the development unit is properly set.
SC371, SC372, or 3. If the problem is still the same, check the following:
SC373 is
Poor connection of connectors
displayed.
TD sensor defective
Harness damage
BCU board failure
Firmware problem (engine main or MUSIC)
4-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Troubleshooting
No.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No.
Result
Description
Toner supply During toner fill-up
error
mode, Vt does not
reach the target
value.
Failure
Possible Causes
Action
1. Check if the toner cartridge is properly set.
2. Check if the amount of toner left in the toner cartridge
is insufficient.
3. Check if toner is coagulated. (If yes, shake the toner
cartridge well.)
4. Check if the connectors of the following parts are
properly set, and/or replace the parts.
Toner attraction pump / Air Pump / Valves
5. Check if the toner supply tube is bent, caught, or
damaged.
1. Shielding tape is not 1. Remove the shielding tape
Vt cannot be
removed.
to supply developer to the
adjusted within 3.0
unit.
0.1V.
2. Development unit is 2. Reinstall the development
SC370 - 373 will
not firmly installed,
unit.
be displayed.
causing poor
Turning the main
connection of the TD
switch off and on
sensor connector.
clears this SC
code.
3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace the development
unit.
NOTE: After you set "Enable" in SP5-999-005, 006, 007, or 008, the machine
starts developer initialization. If an error other than Error 8 occurs,
developer initialization is automatically resumed by opening and closing the
front door or turning the main switch off and on.
B147/B149/B190
4-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

SP3-975-001 (Process Control Self-check Result)
0
1
Result
Not
performed
Successfully
completed
ID sensor
adjustment
error
Vmin error
Sampling
data error
Gamma
error
Vk error
6
Vt error
7
SM
Sampling
data error
during LD
power
correction
Forced
termination
Description
Process control selfcheck is not done.
Process control selfcheck successfully
completed.
Vsg cannot be
adjusted within 4.0
0.5V.
Possible Causes
-
Action
Do the process control
self-check again.
-
1. Dirty ID sensor (toner,

1. Clean the ID sensor.
dust, or foreign material)
2. Dirty transfer belt
2. Check the belt
cleaning, and clean or
replace the transfer
belt.
3. Scratched or damaged 3. Replace the transfer
transfer belt
belt.
4. Defective ID sensor
4. Replace the ID
sensor.
Vmin is not within
Vmin is calculated during the self-check. Even when
the specified range. the calculated Vmin value is out of the specified range,
an optimum value is automatically used instead.
Therefore, this error code does not usually occur.
If no problem is observed with image density and/or
development gamma, nothing needs to be done.
If an image problem such as low image density is
observed, check the following points:
Transfer belt / Belt guide plate / ID sensor
Not enough data can 1. ID sensor pattern
1. Check the image
density is too high or
be sampled.
development process
low.
and correct toner
Gamma is out of
density if necessary.
2. Residual image on
range.
transfer
belt
2.
Check the transfer belt
0.3 > Gamma, or
cleaning
unit.
3. Toner dropped from
6.0 < Gamma
development
unit
3.
Clean
the
development
Vk is out of range.
unit
and
correct
toner
4. Scratched or damaged
-150 > Vk or 150 <
density.
transfer
belt
Vk
4. Replace the transfer
belt.
1. Development unit not
1. Check.
Vt is out of range.
properly installed.
0.5 > Vt or 4.8 < Vt
2. Toner density is too low 2. Check and/or correct
or high.
toner density.
3. TD sensor defective.
3. Replace development
unit.
Not enough data can See the possible causes and action for error codes 4,
be sampled during
5, and 6.
the LD power
correction (if "LD
Power" is set in SP3125-002).
Process control self- A cover was opened or the Do the process control
check was forcibly
main switch was turned off self-check again.
terminated.
during the self-check.
4-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Troubleshooting
No.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP5-993-007 (Line Position Adjustment Result)
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
17
18
19
29
39
49
59
69
79
Result
Successfully
completed
Out of adjustment
range
(over 2 mm)
Calculation Error
Sampling Error
Descending slope
error
Ascending slope
error
Pattern lines
mismatch
(less than 64 lines)
Sampling time-out
Sampling start
error
Pattern length
mismatch
Pattern lines
mismatch
(over 64 lines)
Magnification
mismatch
Toner condition
Not executed
Potential control
error
Cyan line error
Magenta line error
Cyan & Magenta
line error
Yellow line error
Cyan & yellow line
error
Magenta & yellow
line error
Cyan, magenta, &
yellow line error
Description
Data sampling was correctly done and line position
adjustment was successfully completed.
The calculated result for line position correction is
greater than 1.4 mm.
Note
Distance between the lines is greater than 1.4 mm.

Data sampling cannot be done properly.
The ascending or descending slope of the ID sensor
signal wave is out of specification.
(See Note 1)
(See Note 1)
The detected number of pattern lines is less than 64.
(See Note 1)
Data sampling cannot be done within the allocated
time.
The start mark cannot be detected within the
allocated time.
The pattern length is shorter or longer than specified.
(See Note 1)
The detected number of pattern lines is over 64.
The calculated magnification value does not match
any data in the laser power frequency adjustment
data table.
The machine is in the toner near-end or toner end
condition.
The machine is not ready to do the line position
adjustment manually from the user menu.
Line position adjustment cannot be done due to
failed potential control.
The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
adjustment range (cyan only).
adjustment range (magenta only).
adjustment range (cyan and magenta).
adjustment range (yellow only).
adjustment range (cyan and yellow).
adjustment range (magenta and yellow).
adjustment range (cyan, magenta, and yellow).
Note 1: Concerning the error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) which stop sampling data
when either the front, center, or rear ID sensor detect an error, the machine
may display the error code for both ID sensors in some cases.
B147/B149/B190
4-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Possible causes of errors in the line position adjustment

Possible
Action
Error Code
The pattern does not reach the proper density.
1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or
04, 05, 06, 07, 1. Clean the ID sensors.
foreign material)
08, 09, 10
2. Incorrect toner density
2. Correct the toner density.
Low: ID sensor cannot detect the
pattern lines.
High: Lines may be partially blank
due to improper toner density
and/or paper transfer current.
3. Incorrect transfer current
3. Correct the transfer current.
The ID sensors are affected by electrical noise or dirt/damage on the transfer belt.
1. Scratched or damaged OPC drum 02, 03, 04, 05, 1. Replace PCU
2. Scratched or damaged transfer belt 06, 10, 11, 12 2. Replace transfer belt
3. Dirty transfer belt
3. Clean or replace transfer belt
4. High voltage leak in transfer unit
4. Fix the high voltage leak
5. Residual image on transfer belt
5. Check transfer belt cleaning and
clean the belt
6. Toner dropped from development
6. Clean the development unit and
unit
adjust the toner density
7. Carrier dropped from development
7. Clean the development unit and
unit
adjust the toner density
The transfer belt is covered with toner.
Development does not work properly. All error codes Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
None of the patterns are developed.
Development does not work properly. 09, 04
Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
Some of the patterns are not developed;
Development does not work properly. 07, 08
Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
The machine is not in the condition to execute the line position adjustment;
The machine is in the toner near end 13
Replenish toner.
or end condition.
The machine is not ready to do the
17
Wait until machine becomes the
line position adjustment manually from
ready condition from the energy
the user menu.
saver or auto off mode.
Line position adjustment cannot be
18
Fix the problem causing the potential
done due to failed potential control.
control error.
The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (1)
No error code is displayed. However, the machine keeps displaying
execution on the screen.
In addition, the green LED on the
BICU stays on or off under the
following condition.
1. The MUSIC CPU resets due to
1. Fix the bias leak and/or replace
electrical noise generated by a high
PCU
voltage leak on a damaged OPC
drum.
SM
4-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Possible
Error Code
Possible Cause
8
The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (2)

No error code is displayed. However,
the machine keeps displaying
execution on the screen.
The green LED on the BICU keeps
blinking faintly (this is normal) even
under one of the following conditions.
1. Poor connection between the toner
cartridge detection board and the
memory chip on the toner cartridge
2. The memory chip on the toner
cartridge fails.
B147/B149/B190
Action
1. Check the connection between

the detection board and memory
chip.
2. Replace the toner cartridge.
4-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER TEST MODE
4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE

4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE
To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern
with SP4-907. After you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key,
the VPU test pattern is printed out.
SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R

SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G
4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE

You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2.
If no error is detected, the test ends, and the completion code appears in the
operation panel display. If an error is detected, the test is interrupted and an error
code is displayed. The table below lists the completion and error codes.
SP4-904-1 Register Write/Read Check Result

Normal end
Abnormal end
Code
00
11
12
13
14
15
Defective ASIC
ASIC 1
ASIC 2
ASIC 3
Ri 10
SP4-904-2 Image Path Check Result

Normal end
Abnormal end
SM
Code
00
21
22
23
24
25
Error detected in the image data path
ASIC 1 ASIC 2
ASIC 1 ASIC 3 ASIC 1 ASIC 2
ASIC 2 ASIC 1 ASIC 3 ASIC 1 ASIC 2
ASIC 3 Ri 10
Scanner ASIC ASIC 1
4-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Troubleshooting
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B

If the copy is abnormal and the VPU test pattern is normal, the CCD on the SBU
board may be defective.
If the copy is normal and the VPU test pattern is abnormal, the harness may not
connected properly between SBU and IPU, or the IPU or SBU board may be
defective.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER TEST MODE
Errors may be caused by the following problems:

1) Short circuit on the signal lines
When the IPU board is installed, a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged.
Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins.
Condensation
2) Destruction of circuit elements
Overcurrent or a defective element has broken the circuit.
3) Abnormal power supply
The required voltage is not supplied to the devices.
4) Overheat/overcooling
The board (the scanner unit) is in an inappropriate environment.
5) Static electricity
Static electricity of a high voltage occurred during the test.
6) Others
Error code 25 may be detected if the scanner and IPU are incorrectly
connected.
When you have conducted a check, turn the main switch off and on before
conducting another check. When you have conducted all necessary checks, turn
the main switch off and on.
B147/B149/B190
4-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3.1 SUMMARY
Section 4.4 classifies the SC codes into the controller errors and other errors. The
latter (the errors other than the controller errors) are classified into four types by
their reset procedures. The table lists the classification of the SC codes.
CTL
A
B
Other
errors
Definition
The error has occurred in the
controller.
The error involves the fusing unit.
The machine operation is disabled.
The user cannot reset the error.
The error involves one or some
specific units. The machine
operates as usual, excluding the
related units.
The error is logged. The SC-code
history is updated. The machine
operates as usual.
The machine operation is disabled.
You can reset the machine by
turning the operation switch or main
switch off and on. If the error
recurs, the same SC code is
displayed.
Reset Procedure
See "Troubleshooting Procedure" in
the table.
Turn the main switch off and on.
Reset the SC (set SP5-810 to 1).
Turn the main switch off and on.
Turn the operation switch off and
on.
The SC will not be displayed. Only
the SC history is updated.
Turn the operation switch or main

power switch off and on.
After you turn the main switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the
main switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. Printing logging data (SP5-990004) in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters
when the SC code is detected.
NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect, then
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before replacing motors or sensors.
SM
4-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Troubleshooting
Key
Controller
errors
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC Code Classification
The table lists the classification of the SC codes:
Class 1
Section
1XX
Scanning
2XX
Laser exposure
3XX
Image development 1
4XX
Image development 2
5XX
Paper feed / Fusing
5XX
Paper feed / Fusing
6XX
Communication
7XX
Peripherals
8XX
Controller
9XX
Others
B147/B149/B190
SC Code
100 190 200 220 230 240 260 280 300 330 350 380 400 420 430 440 460 480 500 515 520 530 540 560 570 600 620 630 640 650 670 680 700 720 740 800 820 860 880 900 920 990 -
Detailed section
Scanner
Unique for a specific model
Polygon motor
Synchronization control
FGATE signal related
LD control
Magnification
Charge
Drum potential
Development
Image transfer
Paper separation
Cleaning
Around drum
Unit
Others
Paper feed
Duplex
Paper transport
Fan motor
Fusing
Others
Electrical counters
Mechanical counters
Account control
CSS
Network
Internal data processing
Original handling
Two-tray finisher
Booklet finisher
Error after ready condition
Diagnostics error
Hard disk
Counter
Memory
Others
4-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
4.4 SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 101
Exposure lamp
error
The standard white level is

not properly detected when
scanning the shading plate.
(The shading data peak
does not reach the specified
threshold.)
SC 120
Scanner home
position error 1
The scanner home position

sensor does not detect the
on condition during
scanning.
Exposure lamp
defective
Lamp stabilizer
defective
Exposure lamp
connector defective
Standard white plate
dirty
Scanner mirror or
scanner lens out of
position or dirty
SBU defective
Scanner I/O board or
SBU defective
Scanner motor
defective
Harness between
scanner I/O board
and scanner motor
disconnected
Scanner HP sensor
defective
Harness between
SBU and HP sensor
disconnected
Scanner wire, timing
belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
SM
Related
SCs
SC 121
and 122
4-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Procedure
Type

2. Turn the power key off and on.
3. Check and clean the scanner
mirror(s) and scanner lens.
4. Check and clean the shading plate.
5. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
7. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or
scanner lens.
8. Replace the SBU.

2. Check the cable connection between
the scanner I/O board and scanner
motor.
the SBU and HP sensor.
4. Replace the SBU or scanner I/O
board.
5. Replace the scanner motor.
6. Replace the HP sensor.
7. Replace the scanner wire, timing belt,
pulley, or carriage.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 121
Scanner home
position error 2

off condition during
scanning.
SC 122
Scanner home
position error 3

home position during
initialization.
B147/B149/B190
Definition
Possible Cause
SBU defective
Scanner motor
defective
Harness between
scanner I/O board
and scanner motor
disconnected
Scanner HP sensor
defective
Harness between
SBU and HP sensor
disconnected
belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
SBU defective
Scanner motor
defective
Harness between
scanner I/O board
and scanner motor
disconnected
Scanner HP sensor
defective
Harness between
SBU and HP sensor
disconnected
belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
Related
SCs
SC 120
and 122
SC 120
and 121
4-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

motor.
board.

motor.
board.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 142
White level
detection error
The white level cannot be

adjusted within the target
during auto gain control.
Dirty exposure glass

or optics section
SBU board defective
IPU board defective
Exposure lamp
defective
Lamp stabilizer
defective
SC 144
SBU
communication
error
IDU error
The SBU hardware is

inconsistent with the
software.
After the command is
written into the DFID selfdiagnosis startup register,
the correct value is not
stored in the register in the
specified duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected when the main
switch is turned on.
After the negate interruption
of FGATE occurs, IDU is not
recognized in the specified
duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected during scanning
operations.
Defective SBU
hardware
Incorrect software
IPU board defective
(defective connection
between ASIC and
DFID, or Defective
LSYNC)
SC 161
SM
Related
SCs
4-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
1. Turn on the main switch off and on.

2. Clean the exposure glass, white plate,
mirrors, and lens.
3. Check if the exposure lamp is lit
during initialization.
4. Check the harness connection
between SBU and IPU.
5. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the SBU board.
7. Replace the IPU board
2. Replace the SBU.
3. Update the software.
2. Replace the IPU board.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 195
Serial Number
Mismatch
Serial number stored in the

memory does not consist of
the correct code.
NVRAM defective
BCU replaced without
original NVRAM
Incorrect DIP-switch
setting
SC 201
Polygon motor
error
The polygon mirror motor

does not reach the targeted
operating speed within 10
seconds after turning on.
The lock signal does not
become high within 10
seconds after turning off the
polygon motor.
The lock signal does not
become low within 0.2
second after the polygon
motor reaches the targeted
operating speed.
Polygon mirror motor

error
Abnormal GAVD
behavior
Cable disconnection
B147/B149/B190
Related
SCs
4-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Open the front cover and turn on the
main switch. Check the serial number
with SP5-811-002.
If the stored serial number is incorrect,
contact your product specialist for
details of how to solve the problem.
For DIP-switch settings, see section
5.10.
2. Check the cables.
3. Replace the polygon motor.
Type
D
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 220
Synch.
detection signal
error 1
220-001: Y
220-002: M
220-003: C
220-004: K0
220-005: K1
The front (for K&Y) or rear (for

C&M) laser synchronizing
detector board, which is used
to determine the start timing of
laser writing, does not send a
signal while the polygon motor
is operating normally and the
LD is on.
Disconnection of the
cable between front
(K&Y) or rear (C&M)
synchronizing
detector board and
the LD unit
Incorrect installation
of front (K&Y) or rear
(C&M) synchronizing
detector board (the
beam does not target
the photo detector.)
Defective LD unit
Defective BCU
Defective +5VLD
circuit
SM
Related
SCs
4-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

front (for K&Y) or rear (for C&M)
synchronizing detector board and the
LD unit.
3. Check or reinstall the front (for K&Y)
or rear (for C&M) synchronizing
detector board.
4. Replace the front (for K&Y) or rear
(for C&M) synchronizing detector
board.
5. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
6. Replace the BCU.
7. Replace the PSU.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 221
Synch.
detection signal
error 2
221-001: Y
221-002: M
221-003: C
221-004: K
B147/B149/B190
Definition
Possible Cause
Main scan length detection is

not properly completed ten
consecutive times.
The front (for C&M) or rear (for
K&Y) laser synchronizing
detector boards are used for
the main scan length
detection, which automatically
corrects the main-scan
magnification.
Related
SCs
Damaged or
disconnected cable
between front (C&M)
or rear (K&Y) laser
synchronizing
detector board and
the LD unit
of front (C&M) or rear
(K&Y) synchronizing
detector board (the
beam does not target
the photo detector.)
Defective front (C&M)
or rear (K&Y)
synchronizing
detector board
Defective LD unit
4-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
After doing any of the following, print ten

jobs or more to see if the same SC code
is displayed:
2. Check or replace the cable
connecting front (for C&M) or rear (for
K&Y) synchronizing detector board
and the LD unit.
3. Check or reinstall the front (for C&M)
or rear (for K&Y) synchronizing
detector board.
4. Replace the front (for C&M) or rear
(for K&Y) synchronizing detector
board.
6. Replace the BCU.
If a synch. detector board cannot be
replaced, do the following as a
temporary measure:
Disable main scan length detection
(SP 2-919-001)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC 230
SC 231
SM
Item
FGATE error
230-001: Y
230-002: M
230-003: C
230-004: K
FGATE timeout
231-001: Y
231-002: M
231-003: C
231-004: K
Type
Poor connection
between BCU and LD
units
Defective BCU
Defective LD unit

2. Check the cables between the LD
units and the BCU.
4. Replace the BCU.
Poor connection
between BCU and LD
units
Defective BCU
Defective LD unit

2. Check the cables between the LD
units and the BCU.
4. Replace the BCU.
Possible Cause
The BCU generates the

FGATE signal based on the
registration sensor ON timing.
Then, it sends the signal to the
LD units. The LD units send a
feedback signal to the BCU.
When the LD units start
emitting laser beams, the
feedback signal changes from
High to Low.
The SC code is generated
when the BCU receives no
feedback signal (stays High)
from the LD unit 1 second after
paper reaches the position
where the laser should start
writing.
When LD units emit laser
beams to print a job, the
feedback signal stays Low and
becomes High after laser
exposure for a page is
completed. The SC code is
detected in the following
cases:
When the feedback signal
stays Low 7 seconds after
completing the laser
exposure, or
When the feedback signal
stays Low until the laser
exposure timing for the next
page in multi-page print
mode.
Related
SCs
Definition
4-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 240
LD over
240-001: Y
240-002: M
240-003: C
240-004: K
The power supply for the LD

unit exceeds 67 mA.
SC 260
LD HP sensor
not switched on
(for K only)
During homing, it takes more

than five seconds to switch the
HP sensor on (the sensor
actuator does not cover the
sensor).
SC 261
LD HP sensor
not switched off
(for K only)
After the laser beam pitch was

changed, it takes more than
five seconds for the HP sensor
to switch off.
B147/B149/B190
Related
SCs
LD worn out
(current/light output
characteristics have
changed.)
LD broken (short
circuit)
Defective motor
Defective sensor
Mechanical problem
when switching the
actuator
Brown fuse (FU81) on
the Power supply unit
Defective motor
Defective sensor
Mechanical problem
when switching the
actuator
Brown fuse (FU81) on
the Power supply unit
4-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type


2. Check the sensor actuator position of
the LD positioning motor.
3. Replace the LD positioning motor.
4. Replace the LD home position
sensor.
5. Check and/or replace the PSU.
2. Check the sensor actuator position of
the LD positioning motor.
3. Replace the LD positioning motor.
4. Replace the LD home position
sensor.
5. Check and/or replace the PSU.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
SC 285
Line position
adjustment
(MUSIC) error
Line position adjustment fails

three consecutive times.
SC 370
TD sensor [K]:
Adjustment
error
TD sensor [Y]:
Adjustment
error
TD sensor [C]:
Adjustment
error
TD sensor [M] :
Adjustment
error
Vt error [K]
Vt error [Y]
Vt error [C]
Vt error [M]
During the developer

initialization, the output value
of the TD sensor is without the
adjustment range (3.0 0.1V).
SC 371
SC 372
SC 373
SC 374
SC 375
SC 376
SC 377
SM
During the image

development, Vt value is less
than 0.5V.
Related
SCs
Type
Pattern sampling
error due to
insufficient image
density of patterns
used for the
adjustment
Inconsistency in the
sampling line position
adjustment pattern
due to dust on the
pattern, damage to
the OPC drum,
damage or toner
dropped on the
transfer belt, or a dirty
or defective ID sensor
Poor connection (TD
sensor outputs is less
than 0.5V.)
Defective TD sensor

2. Check and fix the problem that
causes low image density. .
3. Clean or replace the transfer belt
and/or the ID sensor.
4. Replace the PCU or clean the
development unit that causes toner to
drop on the transfer belt.

2. Reset the related color development
unit.
3. Replace the related color
development unit.
Poor connection (TD

sensor outputs is less
than 0.5V.)
Defective TD sensor

2. Reset the related color development
unit.
3. Replace the related color
development unit.
Possible Cause
4-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC 380
SC 381
SC 385
SC 386
SC 387
SC 388
SC 389
Item
Black
development
motor error
Color
development
motor error
ID sensor VSG
adjustment
error
Development
gamma error K
Development
gamma error Y
Development
gamma error C
Development
gamma error M
B147/B149/B190
Definition
Possible Cause
When the motor speed is

within the target level, the
motor sends a lock signal
(High to Low at CN214-5) to
the BCU.
SC380 is detected under the
following conditions:
The Lock signal stays High
2 seconds after the motor
turns on.
The Lock signal stays Low 2
seconds after the motor
turns off.
The Lock signal stays High
for more than 2 seconds
while the motor is on.
Vsg is the out of adjustment
range during a process control
self-check.
Adjustment range:
4.0 0.5V
Any of the following conditions
happens three consecutive
times:
When the development
gamma is out of the
following range:
0.3 6.0
When Vk is out of the
following range:
-150V Vk 150V
Development gamma
calculation error
Related
SCs
Type
Defective motor
Defective BCU

2. Replace the motor.
3. Replace the BCU.
Defective ID sensor
Dirty ID sensor
ID sensor
disconnected
Dirty drum (cleaning
incomplete)
Unsuitable toner
density
Toner supply
mechanism problem
Laser exposure
problem
Image transfer
problem

2. Clean the ID sensor and adjacent
parts.
3. Check the drum cleaning condition.
4. Check the ID sensor connector.
5. Replace the ID sensor.
1. Turn the main switch off and on .
2. Check the process control self-check
result (SP3-975). If the result is not
1, fix the problem according to the
table in section 4.1.2.
3. Print a full color image by disabling
SC detection (SP5-809-001) and
check if the image quality is OK. If the
image quality is not OK, fix the
problem. Then, enable the SC
detection again.
4-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC 390
Item
Development
Bias output
error
Definition
Possible Cause
The high voltage supply board

(C/B) monitors the circuit and
detects abnormal conditions
such as a voltage leak or no
output condition. If this
happens, the high voltage
supply board sends an error
signal (High to Low at CN204A18) to the BCU.
Loose connection
Defective power pack
C/B output
Damaged cable
Defective
development unit
Defective BCU
Related
SCs
The BCU monitors this signal

every 2 ms and generates this
SC code when the error
condition occurs 250
consecutive times.
SC
391-01
SM
Charge AC:
output error
391-01: K
391-02: Y
391-03: M
391-04: C

sends the feedback signal
(CN228-2 to 5; MCYK). The
BCU monitors these feedback
signals every 8 ms. If the
average of the sampled data is
not within the control target 20
consecutive times, this SC
code is generated.
Power pack
disconnected
Charge receptacle or
terminal
Defective PCU bias
input terminal
Incorrect power pack
B/C output
Damaged cable
Defective BCU
PCU not found
4-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Check if the harness and cables are
properly connected.
3. Disconnect the high voltage supply
cables from the bias terminals on the
high voltage supply board C/B.
Measure the DC voltage using a
multi-meter.
Replace the high voltage supply
board if no voltage is supplied.
4. If the result is OK at step 2, check if
the high voltage supply cable or
development unit is grounded.
Replace the high voltage supply
cable if it damages.
Replace the development unit if it
damages.
5. Check the PWM signals are sent to
the high voltage supplied board from
the BCU. Replace the BCU or
harness between the BCU and high
voltage supply board if the voltage is
0.
2. Check the connector.
3. Check that the PCU is correctly
installed.
4. Check the PCU charge voltage input
(the spring/conducting shaft) or
replace the PCU.
5. Replace the power pack B/C.
6. Replace the cable.
7. Replace the BCU.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC
393001
SC
440001
Related
SCs
Type
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
TD sensor error
during warming
up
393-001: K
393-002: Y
393-003: C
393-004: M
Drum motor
error
440-001: Black
440-002: Color
The development-unit drive

starts. TD sensor signal is 0.78
V or less.
Loose cable
connection
Positioning plate out
of place
Defective TD sensor
Development unit not
found
Defective PCU
Defective drum motor
Defective drum gear
position sensor

2. Check that the development unit is
correctly installed.
3. Remove the development unit and
check the connector on the rear.
4. Check the positioning plate.
5. Replace the development unit.
2. Check and/or replace the PCU.
3. Check and/or replace the sensor.
Thermistor 1
defective
Cable connection
error
BCU defect

2. Check the cable connections.
3. Replace the thermistor.
4. Replace the BCU.
Thermistor 1
defective
Cable connection
error
BCU defect

4. Replace the BCU.
SC
460001
Thermistor 1
error (open
circuit)
SC
460002
Thermistor 1
error (short
circuit)
B147/B149/B190
No drum gear position sensor

signal is detected within 0.7
second (185 mm/s), 1.0
second (125 mm/s), or 2.0
seconds (62.5 mm/s).
When the temperature
detected by thermistor 1,
which is at the left (fusing unit)
side of the laser optics unit, is
less than -30C for 10 seconds
consecutively, the BCU
determines that the circuit is
opened and displays this SC
code.
detected by the thermistor 1,
which is at the left (fusing unit)
side of the laser optics unit, is
higher than 70C for 10
seconds consecutively, the
BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and displays
this SC code
4-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC
461001
Thermistor 2
error (open
circuit)
SC
461002
Thermistor 2
error (short
circuit)
SC 471
Transfer belt
H.P. error
SC 481
Waste toner
vibrator error
SM
Definition
Possible Cause

which is at the right (paper
feed section) side of the laser
optics unit, is less than -30C
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is opened and displays
this SC code.
which is at the right (paper
feed section) side of the laser
optics unit, is higher than 70C
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and displays
this SC code
The transfer belt HP sensor
signal does not change from
Low to High (home position) or
vice versa 1 second after the
transfer belt contact motor
turns on.
The waste toner vibrator does

not operate.
Related
SCs
Type
Thermistor 2
defective
Cable connection
error
BCU defect

4. Replace the BCU.
Thermistor 2
defective
Cable connection
error
BCU defect

4. Replace the BCU.
Transfer belt unit not

set properly
Defective transfer belt
H.P. sensor and/or
transfer belt sensor
Defective transfer belt
contact motor
Transfer belt unit
problem
Loose connector
Defective motor

2. Reset the transfer belt unit.
3. Clean or replace the transfer belt
sensor.
4. Replace the transfer belt contact
motor.
5. Check the contact and release
mechanism of the transfer belt unit.

2. Replace the motor.
4-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 490
Transfer bias /
paper attraction
roller bias leak
error

- Transfer monitors the circuit
and detects current leaks. If
this happens, the high voltage
supply board sends a SC
signal (High to Low at CN2138) to the BCU.
Defective high
voltage supply board
- Transfer
Damaged transfer
belt
Transfer unit
Damaged high
voltage supply cables
Damaged cables
between the BCU and
high voltage supply
board
Defective BCU
Defective paper lift
sensor
Defective tray lift
motor
Defective bottom
plate lift mechanism
The BCU monitors this signal

every 2 ms and generates this
SC code when the error
condition occurs 250
consecutive times.
SC 501
SC 502
Paper Tray 1
error
Paper Tray 2
error
B147/B149/B190
When the tray lift motor is

turned on, if the upper limit is
not detected within 10
seconds, the machine asks the
user to reset the tray. If this
condition occurs three
consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
Related
SCs
4-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Check the transfer unit and replace
the belt and/or the transfer unit if any
damage is found.
3. Replace the high voltage supply
board - Transfer.
4. Check and/or replace the high voltage
supply cables.
5. Check and/or replace the dc cables
between the BCU and high voltage
supply board.
6. Replace the BCU.

2. Check if the bottom plate smoothly
moves up and down manually.
3. Check and/or replace the paper lift
sensor.
4. Check and/or replace the tray lift
motor.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC
503-01
Item
Tray 3 error
(Paper Feed
Unit or LCT)
Definition
Possible Cause
For the paper feed unit:

generated.

Defective tray lift
motor or connector
disconnection
Defective lift sensor
or connector
disconnection
For the LCT:

This SC is generated under
the following conditions:
If the upper or lower limit is
seconds when the tray lift
motor is turned on to lift up
or lower the tray
If the paper stack is not
transported within a specific
number of pulses after the
tray motor and stack
transport clutch turn on to
transport the paper stack
If the end fence home
position sensor stays ON for
a specific number of pulses
after the tray motor and
stack transport clutch turn
on to transport the paper
stack.
SM
Related
SCs
3. Check and/or replace the defective
component.
Type
B
For the LCT:

Defective stack
transport clutch or
connector
disconnection
Defective tray motor
or connector
disconnection
Defective end fence
home position sensor
or connector
disconnection
Defective upper limit
sensor or connector
disconnection
Defective tray lift
motor or connector
disconnection
4-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC
503-02
Item
Tray 3 error
(Paper Feed
Unit or LCT)
Definition
Possible Cause
If the following condition

occurs 3 consecutive times,
this SC is generated.

Defective tray lift
motor or connector
disconnection
or connector
disconnection

When the main switch is
turned or when the tray is set
and if the upper limit is already
detected, the lift motor turns on
to lower the bottom plate until
the lift sensor goes off.
If the motor turns on for 7
seconds or more, the machine
asks the user to reset the tray.
SC
504-01
Tray 4 error (3
Tray Paper
Feed Unit)
B147/B149/B190
For the LCT:

turned on or when the LCT is
set, if the end fence is not in
the home position (home
position sensor ON), the tray
lift motor stops.
generated.
Related
SCs
Type

component.

component.
For the LCT:

Defective stack
transport clutch or
connector
disconnection
Defective tray motor
or connector
disconnection
Defective end fence
or connector
disconnection
Defective tray lift

motor or connector
disconnection
or connector
disconnection
4-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC
504-02
Tray 4 error (3
Tray Paper
Feed Unit)
SC 530
Fusing fan
motor error
SC 541
Heating roller
thermistor error
SC 542
Heating roller
warm-up error
SC 543
Heating roller
fusing lamp
overheat
SM
Definition
Possible Cause

turned or when the tray is set
and if the upper limit is already
detected, the lift motor turns on
to lower the bottom plate until
the lift sensor goes off.
If the motor turns on for 7
seconds or more, the machine
asks the user to reset the tray.
If this condition occurs 3
consecutive times, this SC is
generated.
The BCU does not receive the
lock signal (CN210-B5) 5
seconds after turning on the
fusing fan.
The temperature measured by
the heating roller thermistor
does not reach 7 C for ten
seconds.
After the main switch is turned

on or the cover is closed, the
heating roller temperature
does not reach the ready
temperature within 60 seconds
during fusing unit warm-up.
The detected fusing
temperature stays at 210C or
more for five seconds.
Related
SCs
Type
Defective tray lift

motor or connector
disconnection
or connector
disconnection

component.
Defective fusing fan

motor or connector
disconnection
Defective BCU
Loose connection of
the heating roller
thermistor
Defective heating
roller thermistor
Defective BCU
Heating roller fusing
lamp broken
Defective heating
roller thermistor
Defective BCU

2. Check the connector and/or replace
the fusing fan motor.
3. Replace the BCU.
1. Check if the heating roller thermistor
is firmly connected.
2. Replace the fusing unit.
3. Replace the BCU.

3. Replace the BCU.
Defective PSU
Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
4-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Item
Definition
SC 544
Heating roller
fusing lamp
high
temperature
error
Heating roller
fusing lamp
consecutive full
power
During stand-by mode or a

print job, the detected heating
roller temperature stays at
210 C or more for 0.2 second.
Defective heating
roller thermistor
Defective PSU
Defective BCU

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
When the fusing unit is not

running in the Ready condition,
the heating roller fusing lamp
keeps on with full power for 30
consecutive seconds.
The heating roller temperature
changes by 20C or more in
one second. This occurs three
times in one minute or two
consecutive times.
The measured pressure roller
temperature does not reach
7C for 30 seconds.
Heating roller
thermistor out of
position
Loose connection of
the thermistor
Loose connection
between the fusing
unit and main frame
Loose connection of
pressure roller
thermistor
Defective pressure
roller thermistor
Defective BCU
Pressure roller fusing
lamp broken
Defective pressure
roller thermistor
Defective BCU
1. Check if the fusing unit is properly set

and connected to the main frame.
connector is firmly connected.
1. Check that the pressure roller
thermistor is firmly connected.
3. Replace the BCU.
1. Check if the pressure roller thermistor

3. Replace the BCU.
Defective PSU
Defective BCU

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
SC 545
SC 546
Heating roller
fusing lamp
temperature
fluctuation
SC 551
Pressure roller
thermistor error
SC 552
Pressure roller
warm-up error
SC 553
Pressure roller
fusing lamp
overheat
B147/B149/B190
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
SC No.
After the main switch is turned

on or the door is closed, the
pressure roller temperature
does not reach the ready
temperature within 180
seconds during fusing unit
warm-up.
The detected pressure roller
temperature stays at 210C or
more for five seconds.
4-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2004
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
SC 555
Pressure roller
fusing lamp
consecutive full
power
SC 556
Pressure roller
fusing lamp
temperature
fluctuation
SC 560
Zero cross error
SC 620
ARDF
communication
error

the pressure roller fusing lamp
keeps ON with full power for
100 consecutive seconds.
The pressure roller
temperature changes by
20C or more in one second.
This occurs three times in one
minute or two consecutive
times.
turned on, the machine checks
how many zero-cross signals
are generated during 500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross
signal generated is either more
than 66 or less than 45 and
when this condition is detected
10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
After the ARDF is detected,
the break signal occurs or
communication timeout
occurs.
SC 621
Two-tray
finisher/booklet
finisher
communication
error
Bank
communication
error
SC 622
SM
Possible Cause
While the BCU communicates

with an optional unit, an SC
code is displayed if one of
following conditions occurs.
1. The BCU receives a signal
which is generated by the
peripherals only just after
the main switch is turned
Related
SCs
Type
Pressure roller
thermistor out of
position
Loose connection of
the pressure roller
thermistor
Loose connection
between the fusing
unit and main frame
Electrical noise in the
supply from the
power cord

1. Replace the PSU.
of ARDF
ARDF defective
IPU board defective
External noise

2. Check the cable connection of the
ARDF.
3. Shut out the external noise.
4. Replace the ARDF.
2. Check if the cables of peripherals are
properly connected.
3. Replace the PSU if no power is
supplied to peripherals.
4. Replace the BCU or main board of
peripherals.
Cable problems
BCU problems
PSU problems in the
machine
Main board problems
in the peripherals
4-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Item
Definition
SC 623
Duplex unit
communication
error
Cable problems
BCU problems
PSU problems in the
machine
Duplex control board
problem

2. Check if the cable of the duplex
inverter unit is properly connected.
supplied to the peripherals.
4. Replace the duplex control board in
the inverter unit.
SC 630
CSS
communication
error
MF accounting
device error 1
on.
2. When the BCU does not
receive an OK signal from a
peripheral 100ms after
sending a command to it.
The BCU resends the
command. The BCU does
not receive an OK signal
after sending the command
3 times.
An communication error has
occurred during
communication with the CSS.
The controller sends data to
the accounting device, but the
device does not respond. This
occurs three times.
After communication is
established, the controller
receives the brake signal from
the accounting device.
Communication line
error
Logging only.
CTL
Loose connection
between the
controller and the
accounting device

2. Check the connection.
CTL
The accounting device sends

the controller the report that
indicates a backup RAM error
has occurred.
The accounting device sends
the controller the report that
indicates the battery voltage
error has occurred.
Defective controller of
the MF accounting
device
Battery error

2. Replace the controller board of the
accounting device.
3. Replace the battery.
CTL
SC 632
SC 633
MF accounting
device error 2
SC 634
MF accounting
device error 3
SC 635
MF accounting
device error 4
B147/B149/B190
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Defective controller
Defective BCU

2. Replace the controller.
3. Replace the BCU.
CTL
The controller does not receive

any response from the BCU
three consecutive times when
sending a signal every 100ms.
Loose connection
Defective BCU
CTL
When the main power is

turned on or the machine
starts warming up from
energy-saving mode, the
controller does not receive a
command signal from the
BCU.
Loose connection
Defective BCU

2. Check the connection between the
BCU and controller.
4. Replace the BCU.
BCU and controller.
4. Replace the BCU.
Item
Definition
SC 640
BCU Controller
communication
error (check
sum error)
BCU
Controller
communication
error (no
response)
No response
from BCU at
power on
The check sum of the interface

between the BCU and
controller is not the same.
SC 641
SC 670
SM
Related
SCs
SC No.
Possible Cause
4-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CTL
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Controller stalled
Controller board
installed incorrectly
Controller board
defective
Operation panel
connector loose or
defective
The controller is not
completely shutdown
when you turn the
main switch off.

2. Check the condition of the controller
board.
3. Check the condition of the operation
panel.
4. Replace the controller board.
5. Replace the operation panel.
6. Turn the main switch off, wait for one
second or more, and turn the main
switch on.
CTL
Toner cartridge
memory chip loose
connection
Memory chip problem
Memory chip cable
wiring problem

2. Check if the toner cartridge is
installed correctly.
3. Replace the toner cartridge.
4. Check if the harnesses are not
damaged.
5. Replace the BCU.
scanner unit.
4. Replace the SBU board.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 672
Controller-tooperation panel
communication
error at startup
SC 680
BCU/ MUSIC
communication
error
After the machine is

powered on, the
communication between the
controller and the operation
panel is not established, or
communication with
controller is interrupted after
a normal startup.
After startup reset of the
operation panel, the
attention code or the
attention acknowledge code
is not sent from the
controller.
After the controller issues a
command to check the
communication line with the
controller at 30-second
intervals, the controller fails
to respond twice.
After the engine CPU sends a
message, the Music CPU does
not respond within five
seconds three consecutive
times.
SC 685
SBU-IPU
communication
error
B147/B149/B190
During data transfer, a

checksum error occurs.
During any operation except
initialization, the SBU sends
a hardware-reset
acknowledgement to the
IPU.
Related
SCs
SC No.
Loose connection
between SBU and
IPU
SBU board defective
IPU board defective
External noise
4-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 686
BCU-IPU
communication
error

powered on or recovering
from the power save mode,
timeout occurs during BCU
communication.
The break signal is received
after the communication is
normally established with
the BCU.
Timeout occurs while the
communication with the
BCU is retried after a
communication error.
SC 687
Memory
address
command error
SC
690001
GAVD I2C
communica-tion
error
690-001: Y
690-002: M
690-003: C
690-004: K
The BCU does not receive a

memory address command
from the controller 60 seconds
after paper is in the position for
registration.
The I2C bus device ID is not
identified during
initialization.
A device-status error occurs
during I2C bus
communication.
The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
Board connector
between BCU and
controller loose
Board connector
between controller
and motherboard
loose
Board connector
between motherboard
and IPU loose
BCU board defective
IPU board defective
Controller board
defective
Motherboard
defective
Loose connection
Defective BCU
SM
Related
SCs
Loose connection
Defective BCU
Defective LD
controller board
4-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

the board connector and BCU.
controller and motherboard.
motherboard and IPU.
5. Replace the BCU board.
8. Replace the motherboard.

2. Check if the controller is firmly
connected to the BCU.
4. Replace the BCU.
2. Check the cable connection.
4. Replace the BCU board.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 691
Scanner startup
error

powered on or recovering
from the power save mode,
the scanner ready signal is
not verified.
SC 692
GAPCII2C
communication
error
SC 700
ARDF original
pick-up
malfunction
The I2C bus device ID is not

identified during
initialization.
A device-status error occurs
during I2C bus
communication.
The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
After the pick-up motor is
turned on, the original
stopper HP sensor is not
activated.
Board connector
between controller
and motherboard
loose
Board connector
between motherboard
and IPU loose
IPU board defective
Controller board
defective
Motherboard
defective
Loose connection
Defective BCU
Defective LD
controller board
B147/B149/B190
Original stopper HP
sensor defective
Pick-up motor
defective (not
rotating)
Timing belt out of
position
ARDF main board
defective
Related
SCs
SC 701
4-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

controller and motherboard.
motherboard and IPU.
6. Replace the motherboard.
CTL

2. Check the cable connection.
3. Replace the BCU.

4. Replace the pick-up motor.
5. Replace the control board.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
Original pick-up HP
sensor defective
Pick-up motor
defective
ARDF main board
defective
Defective jogger H.P.
sensor
Loose connection
Defective jogger
motor
SC 701
ARDF original
pick-up/paper
lift mechanism
malfunction
The original pick-up HP

sensor is not activated after
the pick-up motor is turned
on.
SC 722
Two-tray
finisher jogger
motor error
SC 724
Two-tray
finisher staple
hammer motor
error
The jogger fences of the

two-tray finisher donot
return to home position
within a specific time.
The two-tray finisher jogger
motor does not leave home
position within a given time.
Stapling does not finish within
150 ms after the staple
hammer motor turns on.
SC 725
Two-tray
finisher stack
feed-out motor
error
SM
The stack feed-out belt H.P.

sensor does not activate within
a specified time after the stack
feed-out motor turns on.
Related
SCs
SC 700
Staple jam
Loose connection
Overload caused by
stapling too many
pages
Defective staple
hammer motor
Defective stack feedout H.P. sensor
Loose connection
Stack feed-out motor
overload
Defective stack feedout motor
4-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Replace the pick-up motor.
3. Replace the control board.

2. Check the connection of jogger H.P.
sensor and jogger motor connectors
3. Replace the jogger H.P. sensor.
4. Replace the jogger motor.

2. Check if the staple hammer motor
connector is properly connected.
3. Check if the staple jam occurs.
4. Replace the staple hammer motor.

2. Check if the connectors of the stack
feed-out H.P. sensor and motor are
properly connected.
3. Replace the stack feed-out H.P.
sensor.
4. Replace the stack feed-out motor.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Loose connection
Defective upper stack
height 1 sensor
Defective shift tray 1
lift motor
Motor overload

2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
and motor are properly connected.
3. Replace the upper stack height 1
sensor.
4. Replace the shift tray 1 lift motor.
Loose connection
Defective stapler
rotation motor
Motor overload
Loose connection
Defective punch H.P.
sensor
Defective punch
clutch
Defective punch hole
motor
Loose connection
Defective stapler H.P.
sensor
Defective stapler
motor

2. Check if the stapler rotation motor
connector is properly connected.
3. Replace the stapler rotation motor.
2. Check if the connectors of sensor,
clutch and/or motor are properly
connected.
3. Replace the punch H.P. sensor.
4. Replace the punch clutch.
5. Replace the punch hole motor.
3. Replace the stapler H.P. sensor.
4. Replace the stapler motor.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 726
Two-tray
finisher shift
tray 1 lift motor
error
SC 727
Two-tray
finisher stapler
rotation motor
error
Two-tray
finisher punch
motor error
The upper stack height 1

sensor is activated
consecutively (detecting
paper) for 15 seconds after
the shift tray starts moving
up.
The upper stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
down.
When the upper tray moves
from lower paper exit to the
upper paper exit, the upper
stack height 1 sensor is
activated.
The stapler cannot return to its
home position within a
specified time after the stapler
rotation motor starts rotating.
The punch home position is
not detected within 250 ms
after the punch clutch turns on.
SC 729
SC 730
Two-tray
finisher stapler
motor error
B147/B149/B190
The stapler home position is

not detected within a specified
time after the staple motor
turns on.
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Type
B
SC 731
Two-tray
finisher exit
guide plate
motor error
The exit guide plate open

sensor is not activated within a
specified time after the exit
guide plate motor turns on.
Loose connection
Defective exit guide
plate open sensor
Defective exit guide
plate motor
SC 732
Two-tray
finisher tray 1
shift motor error
Tray 1 home position is not

detected within a specified
time after the tray 1 shift motor
turns on.
SC 733
Two-tray
finisher tray 2
lift motor error
SC 734
Two-tray
finisher tray 2
shift motor error
The lower stack height 1

sensor is activated
consecutively (detecting
up.
The lower stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
down.
Tray 2 home position is not
detected within a specified
time after the tray 2 shift motor
turns on.
Loose connection
Defective tray shift 1
sensor
Defective tray 1 shift
motor
Loose connection
Defective lower stack
height 1 sensor
Defective tray 2 lift
motor
Motor overload

3. Replace the exit guide plate open
sensor.
4. Replace the exit guide plate motor.
3. Replace the tray shift 1 sensor.
4. Replace the tray 1 shift motor.
3. Replace the lower stack height 1
sensor.
4. Replace the tray 2 lift motor.
Loose connection
Defective tray shift 2
sensor
Defective tray 2 shift
motor

3. Replace the tray shift 2 sensor.
4. Replace the tray 2 shift motor.
SM
4-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Defective transport
motor
Loose connection of
the transport motor
Defective folder home
position sensor
Loose connection of
the holder home
position sensor

2. Check the connection of the transport
motor.
3. Check the connection of the folder
home position sensor.
4. Replace the transport motor.
Defective paddle
motor
Loose connection of
the paddle motor
Defective paddle
Loose connection of
the paddle home
position sensor
Defective stack-tray
upper-roller homeposition sensor
Loose connection of
the stack-tray upperroller home-position
sensor

2. Check that the connection of the
paddle motor.
3. Check the connection of the paddle
4. Check the connection of the stacktray upper-roller home-position
sensor.
5. Replace the paddle motor.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 740
Booklet finisher
transport motor
error
SC 741
Booklet finisher
paddle motor
error
The folder home position

sensor does not turn off
within 2 seconds after the
folder rollers start to move.
The folder home position
sensor does not turn on
folder rollers start
transporting the paper to the
booklet tray.
The paddle home position
paddles start to move.
The paddle home position
paddles start to operate.
The stack-tray upper roller
home position sensor does
not turn off within 2 seconds
after the paddle motor starts
to lower the roller.
The stack-tray upper-roller
home-position sensor does
not turn on with in 2
seconds after the paddle
motor starts to lower the
roller.
B147/B149/B190
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 742
Booklet finisher
stapler slide
motor error
The stapler home position

within 1 second after this
same sensor turns on.
The stapler home position
within 1 second when the
stapler is coming back to its
home position.
SC 743
Booklet finisher
front jogger
fence motor
error
The front-jogger-fence
after the front-jogger-fence
motor starts.
The front-jogger-fence
not turn on within 3 seconds
when the front-jogger-fence
motor is driving the fence to
its home position.
SC 744
Booklet finisher
rear jogger
fence motor
error
The rear-jogger-fence
after the rear-jogger-fence
motor starts.
The rear-jogger-fence
not turn on within 3 seconds
when the rear-jogger-fence
motor is driving the fence to
its home position.
Defective stapler slide

motor
Loose connection of
the stapler slide
motor
Defective stapler
Loose connection of
the stapler home
position sensor
Incorrect assembling
of the front jogger
fence
Loose connection of
the front jogger fence
motor
Defective frontjogger-fence homeposition sensor
Loose connection of
the front-jogger-fence
home-position sensor
of the rear jogger
fence
Loose connection of
the rear jogger fence
motor
Defective rear-joggerfence home-position
sensor
Loose connection of
the rear-jogger-fence
SM
Related
SCs
4-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Check the connection of the stapler
slide motor.
4. Replace the stapler home position
sensor.
5. Replace the stapler slide motor.

2. Check the connection of the front
jogger fence motor.
3. Check the connection of the frontjogger-fence home-position sensor.
4. Replace the front-jogger-fence homeposition sensor.
5. Replace the front jogger fence motor.

2. Check the connection of the rear
jogger fence motor.
3. Check the connection of the rearjogger-fence home-position sensor.
4. Replace the rear-jogger-fence homeposition sensor.
5. Replace the rear jogger fence motor.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 745
Booklet finisher
stack-tray exit
motor error
The stack-tray-belt homeposition sensor does not

turn off within 394
milliseconds after the stacktray exit roller starts to drive
the belts. The stack-tray
exit motor retries to drive
the belts, but the stack-traybelt home-position sensor
still does not turn off within
another 394 milliseconds.
The stack-tray-belt homeposition sensor does not
turn on within 1,084
milliseconds after the same
home-position sensor turns
off. The stack-tray exit
motor retires to drive the
belts, but the stack-tray belt
home-position sensor still
does not turn on within
another 1,084 milliseconds.
Defective stack-tray
exit motor
Loose connection of
the stack-tray exit
motor
Defective stack-traybelt home-position
sensor
Loose connection of
the stack-tray-belt
B147/B149/B190
Related
SCs
4-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. Check the connection of the stacktray exit motor.
3. Check the connection of the stacktray-belt home-position sensor.
4. Replace the stack-tray-belt homeposition sensor.
5. Replace the stack-tray exit motor.
Type
B
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 746
Booklet finisher
stapler/folder
motor error
The stapler/folder motor

starts. But the controller
does not receive the signal
from the encoder sensor
within 0.1 second.
starts to drive the stapler
unit, and the stapler switch
is on. But the controller
does not receive the signal
from the home position
sensor for 0.5 second.
The stapler starts to staple
the paper. But the controller
does not receive any signal
from the home position
sensor, and the stapler
switch is off.
starts to drive the folder
rollers. But the home
position sensor does not
turn off within 9.247
seconds.
The home position sensor
does not turn on within
9.247 seconds after this
same sensor turns off.
Malfunction of the
stapler/folder motor
Loose connection of
the stapler/folder
motor
Loose connection of
the encoder sensor
Defective encoder
sensor
Loose connection of
the stapler switch
Defective stapler
switch
Loose connection of
the stapler home
position sensor
Defective stapler
Loose connection of
the folder-roller
Defective folder-roller
SM
Related
SCs
4-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. Check the connection of the
stapler/folder motor.
3. Check the connection of the encoder
sensor.
switch.
6. Check the connection of the folderroller home-position sensor.
7. Replace the stapler/folder motor.
8. Replace the encoder sensor.
9. Replace the stapler switch.
10.Replace the stapler home position
sensor.
11.Replace the folder-roller homeposition sensor.
Type
B
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Defective paper
height sensor
Loose connection of
the paper height
sensor
Defective upper limit
sensor
Loose connection of
the upper limit sensor
Defective lift motor
Loose connection of
the lift motor
of the lift motor
Defective lift motor
encoder sensor
Loose connection of
the lift motor encoder
sensor

2. Check the connection of the paper
height sensor.
3. Check the connection of the upper
limit sensor.
4. Check the connection of the lift motor
encoder sensor.
5. Check the connection of the lift motor.
6. Replace the paper height sensor.
7. Replace the upper limit sensor.
8. Replace the lift motor encoder sensor.
9. Replace the lift motor.
Defective EEPROM
EEPROM not
installed
The finisher controller
cannot communicate
with the punch-unit
controller.
Defective EEPROM
(on the punch-unit
controller)
EEPROM not
installed

2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
3. Replace the EEPROM.
finisher controller and the punch-unit
controller.
2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
3. Replace the EEPROM.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 747
Booklet finisher
lift motor error
SC 748
Booklet finisher
backup data
error
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
communication
error
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
controller error
The upper limit sensor

detects the regular tray
while the lift motor is lifting
the regular tray.
The paper height sensor
does not turn off within 10
seconds after the lift motor
starts to lower the regular
tray.
The upper limit sensor does
not turn off within 10
starts to lower the regular
tray.
The paper height sensor
does not turn on within 10
starts to lift the regular tray.
The controller does not
receive the signal from the
lift motor encoder sensor
within 50 milliseconds after
the lift motor starts.
The CPU tries to write data in
the EEPROM three times, but
fails to write data.
A communication-error alarm
is not cleared for 3 seconds.
SC 749
SC 750
B147/B149/B190
The checksum in the backup

data is inconsistent.
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
SC 751
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
sensor error 1
SC 752
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
registration
motor error
SC 753
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
punch motor
error
The paper edge and size

sensors receive the 2.5-volt
light or weaker light even when
the source emits 4.4-volt light.
The registration motor
drives the slide unit to the
rear side for 1 second. But
the home position sensor
does not turn on.
The registration motor
drives the slide unit to the
front side for 1 second. But
the home position sensor
does not turn off.
The punch motor starts to
drive the punch cams. But
the controller does not
receive the encoder-lock
signal for 60 milliseconds.
The punch motor start to
drive the punch cams. But
the home positions sensor
does not turn on for 250
milliseconds.
SC 754
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
sensor error 2
Watch-dog
error
SC 818
SM
The A/D inputs of the sensor

are not corrected by varying
the D/A outputs.
While the system program is
running, other processes do
not operate at all.
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Type
Defective sensors
Dirty sensors

2. Clean the sensors.
3. Replace the sensors.
Incorrect assembly of
the registration motor
Loose connection of
the registration motor
Defective home
position sensor
Loose connection of
the home position
sensor

2. Check the connection of the
registration motor.
3. Check the connection of the home
position sensor.
4. Replace the home position sensor.
5. Replace the registration motor.
Malfunction of the
punch motor
Loose connection of
the punch motor
Defective home
position sensor
Loose connection of
the home position
sensor
Loose connection of
the encoder sensor
Defective encoder
sensor
Defective sensor
Dirty sensor

2. Check that the connection of the
punch motor.
3. Check the connection of the home
position sensor.
4. Check the connection of the encoder
sensor.
5. Replace the home position sensor.
6. Replace the encoder sensor.
7. Replace the punch motor.

2. Clean the sensors.
3. Replace the sensors.
3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table
Software error
4-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CTL
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC 819
[696E]
[766D]
[4361]
SC 820
[0001]
to
[06FF]
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
Fatal error
Defective RAM DIMM
Defective ROM DIMM
Software error
Process error
Memory error
System completely down

Unexpected system memory
size
Kernel stop
error
Kernel stop
error
The cache error trap occurs in

the CUP.
Any error in the operation
system (An error message is
output.)
CPU cache error
CPU error
Related
SCs
Type

2. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
3. Check and/or replace the ROM
DIMM.
5. See NOTE at the end of the SC
table.
CTL
CTL
1. Replace the memory.

Defective CPU
Defective memory
Defective flash
memory
Incorrect software
Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code
During the self-diagnostic, the
System firmware
controller CPU detects an
2. Reinstall the controller system
problem
error. There are 47 types of
firmware.
error code (0001 to 4005)
depending on the cause of the
error. The CPU detects an
When the problem cannot be fixed with
error and displays the specific
the above procedure, the following
error code with the program
information displayed on the screen
address where the error
needs to be fed back to a technical
occurs).
support center.
CTL
CTL
SC code
Detailed error code
Program address
B147/B149/B190
4-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Type

software.
3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
CTL
[0702]
[0709]
[070A]
CPU/Memory
Error
[0801]
to
[4005]
[0B00]
CPU error
Same as [0001]
CTL
ASIC error
CTL
SC 821
[0D05]
Self-diagnosis
error: ASIC
SC 822
[3003]
[3004]
Timeout error
Command error
The write-&-verify check error

Defective ASIC
has occurred in the ASIC.
device
The CPU checks if the ASIC
System firmware
timer works properly compared
problem
with the CPU timer. If the ASIC Defective RAM-DIMM
firmware.
timer does not function in the
3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
specified range, this SC code
is displayed.
Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
[XXXX]: Detailed error code
Loose connection
turned on or starting the self2. Check that the HDD is properly
Defective HDD
diagnostic, the HDD stays
connected to the controller.
busy for the specified time or
3. Replace the HDD.
more.
Self-diagnostic error: NIB
The result of the MAC address Defective controller
check sum does not match the
check sum stored in ROM.
The PHY IC on the controller
cannot be properly recognized.
An error occurred during the
loop-back test for the PHY IC
on the controller.
SC 823
[6101]
MAC address
check sum error
[6104]
PHY IC error
[6105]
PHY IC loopback error
SM
System firmware
problem
Defective RAM-DIMM
4-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CTL
CTL
CTL
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 824
[1401]
Self-diagnosis
error: Standard
NVRAM
SC 826
[1501]
[15FF]
SC 827
[0201]
[0202]
SC 828
[0101]
Self-diagnostic
Error: RTC/
Optional
NVRAM
Self-diagnostic
Error: RTC/
Optional
NVRAM
Verification
error
Resident
memory error
Check sum
error 1
B147/B149/B190
Definition
The controller cannot
recognize the standard
NVRAM installed or detects
that the NVRAM is defective.
Possible Cause
Related
SCs

2. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly
inserted into the socket.
3. Replace the NVRAM.
Self-diagnostic error: RTC
An RTC device is
RTC defective
2. Replace the NVRAM with another
recognized, and the
NVRAM without RTC
NVRAM with an RTC device.
difference between the RTC
installed
device and the CPU
Backup battery
exceeds the defined limit.
discharged
No RTC device is
recognized.
The RTC device is not
NVRAM without RTC
2. Replace the NVRAM with another
detected.
installed
NVRAM with an RTC device.
Backup battery
discharged
Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM
Error detected during a
Loose connection
write/verify check for the
2. Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
Defective SDRAM
standard RAM (SDRAM
DIMM
DIMM).
The SPD values in all RAM
1. Replace the RAM DIMM.
Defective RAM DIMM
DIMM are incorrect or
Defective SPD ROM
unreadable.
on RAM DIMM
Defective 12C bus
Self-diagnostic error : ROM
The boot monitor and OS
1. Turn the main switch on and off.
Defective ROM DIMM
program stored in the ROM
2. Replace the ROM DIMM
DIMM is checked. If the check
sum of the program is
incorrect, this SC code is
displayed.
Loose connection
Defective standard
NVRAM
4-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
[0104]
SC 829
[0302]
Item
Check sum
error 2
Composition
error (Slot 0)
[0401]
Verification
error (Slot 1)
[0402]
Composition
error (Slot 1)
SC 835
[1102]
Verification
error
[110C]
DMA
verification error
[1120]
Loop-back
connector error
SC 840
EEPROM
access error
EEPROM read
error
SC 841
SC 850
SM
Network
interface error
Definition
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
All areas of the ROM DIMM

are checked. If the check sum
of all programs stored in the
ROM DIMM is incorrect, this
SC code is displayed.
Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM
The result of checking the
Not specified RAM
composition data of the RAM
2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
DIMM installed
in Slot 0 (CN5) on the
Defective RAM DIMM
controller is incorrect.
The data stored in the RAM in
Slot 1 does not match the data
when reading.
The result of checking the
composition data of the RAM
in Slot 1 (CN6) on the
controller is incorrect.
Self-diagnosis error: Centronics interface
The controller detects that the
Loose connection
loop-back connector is not
Defective loop-back
properly connected.
Centronics connector and loop-back
connector
connector.
A DMA data abnormality is
Defective Centronics
3.
Reconnect the loop-back connector.
detected even when the loopconnector
back connector is properly set. Defective controller
The loop-back connector is not
set when starting the detailed
self-diagnostics.
An error has occurred during
Defective EEPROM
1. Replace the EEPROM on the
I/O processing.
controller.
The EEPROM stores three
Defective EEPROM
1. Replace the EEPROM on the
different data in mirrored
controller.
areas.
The network is unusable.
4-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Type
CTL
SC 851
IEEE1394
interface error
The 1394 interface is

unusable.
Defective IEEE1394
Defective controller.
SC 853
Wireless LAN
card not
detected
Loose connection
SC 854
SC 854
Wireless LAN
card not
detected
Loose connection
SC 853
CTL
SC 855
Wireless LAN
card error
The wireless LAN card is not

detected before
communication is established,
though the wireless LAN board
is detected.
The wireless LAN card is not
detected after communication
is established, though the
wireless LAN board is
detected.
An error is detected in the
wireless LAN card.

2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface
board.

2. Replace the wireless LAN card.
CTL
SC 856
Wireless LAN
card error

wireless LAN board.

2. Replace the wireless LAN board.
CTL
SC 857
USB interface
error
HDD:
Initialization
error
HDD: Reboot
error
The USB interface cannot be

used due to a driver error.
The controller detects that the
hard disk fails.
Loose connection
Defective wireless
LAN card
Defective wireless
LAN board
Loose connection
Defective USB driver
Loose connection
HDD not initialized
Defective HDD
CTL
The HDD does not become

ready within 30 seconds after
the power is supplied to the
HDD.

2. Replace the USB board.
2. Reformat the HDD.
3. Replace the HDD.
HDD and controller.
3. Check and replace the cables.
4. Replace the HDD.
SC 860
SC 861
B147/B149/B190
Loose connection
Defective cables
Defective HDD
4-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CTL
CTL
CTL
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 862
Defective sector
error
The 101st defective sector is

detected in the hard disk.
SC 863
HDD: Read
error
The data stored in the HDD

cannot be read correctly.
SC 864
HDD: CRC
error
Defective HDD
SC 865
HDD: Access
error
SD card
authentication
error
SD card error
While reading data from the

HDD or storing data in the
HDD, data transmission fails.
An error is detected while
operating the HDD.
A correct license is not found
in the SD card.
The SD card is ejected from
the slot.
An error report is sent from the
SD card reader.
The SD card is
ejected from the slot.
An error is detected in
the SD card.
An error is detected in the data

copied to the address book
over a network.
Defective software
program
Defective HDD
Incorrect path to the
sever

flash ROM that stores the
address-book data.
Defective flash ROM
SC 866
SC 867
SC 868
SC 870
SC 871
SM
SD card access
error
243-252: File
system error
253: Device
error
Address book
error
FCU flash ROM

error
Definition
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Same as SC 863 (SC

862 counts the
number of SC 863
occurrence.)
Defective HDD
Defective HDD
SD-card data has
corrupted.
4-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
1. Replace the HDD.
CTL

2. Replace the HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
CTL

2. Replace the HDD.
1. Store correct data in the SD card.
CTL
1. Install the SD card.

1. For a file system error, format the SD
card on your PC.
2. For a device error, turn the mains
switch off and on.
3. Replace the SD card.
2. Initialize the address book data (SP5846-050).
3. Initialize the user information (SP5832-006/007).
4. Replace the HDD.
2. Replace the MBU (on the FCU).
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 872
HDD mail data

error

HDD at machine initialization.
Defective HDD
Power failure during
an access to the HDD
SC 873
HDD mail
transfer error

HDD at machine initialization.
Defective HDD
Power failure during
an access to the HDD
SC 880
File format
converter error
Electric counter
error
The file format converter does

not respond.
Abnormal data is stored in the
counters.
Defective file format

converter
Defective NVRAM
Mechanical
total counter
error 1
Mechanical
total counter
error 2
Printer
application error
The mechanical counter is not

connected.
NOTE: This error is detected
by the North America
model only.
Printer font
error
A necessary font is not found

in the SD card.
The counter is
manually ejected.
Loose connection
Defective counter
Incorrect DIP-switch
setting
Defective software
Unexpected hardware
resource (e.g.,
memory shortage)
A necessary font is
not found in the SD
card.
The SD card data is
corrupted.
SC 900
SC 901
SC 902
SC 920
SC 921
B147/B149/B190

printer application program.
Related
SCs
4-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832007).
3. Replace the HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832008).
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Turn the main switch off on.
5. Replace the file format converter.
NVRAM and controller.
3. Replace the NVRAM.
1. Make sure that the counter is
correctly installed.
2. Replace the counter.
3. Check that the DIP-switch setting is
correct ( 5.10).
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
1. Check that the SD card stores correct

data.
CTL
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 925
Net file function

error
The management area or

management file on the HDD
is corrupted.
Defective HDD
Data inconsistency
(e.g., caused by
power failure)
SC 990
Software
performance
error
The software makes an

unexpected operation.
Defective software
Software error
SC 991
Software
continuity error
SC 992
Undefined error
SC 995
BCU error
The software has attempted to

perform an unexpected
operation. However, unlike SC
990, the object of the error is
continuity of the software.
An undefined error has
occurred.
The DIP witch on the BCU is
incorrectly set.
SC 997
Application
function
selection error
Software program
error
Internal parameter
incorrect, insufficient
working memory.
Defective software
program
The DIP switch on the
BCU is incorrectly
set.
Software (including
the software
configuration)
defective
An option required by
the application (RAM,
DIMM, board) is not
installed
SM
Definition
Possible Cause
The application selected by

the operation panel key
does not start or ends
abnormally.
Related
SCs
When SC 860-865 keep occurring:
1. Follow the troubleshooting
procedures.
In other cases:
3. Initialize the net file partition.
4. Initialize the hard disk.
5. Replace the HDD.
2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine
main firmware.
3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table.
This SC is not displayed on the LCD
(logging only).
Type
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
1. Set the DIP switch correctly.
SC 998
4-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1. Check the devices necessary for the

application program. If necessary
devices have not been installed,
install them.
2. Check that application programs are
correctly configured.
3. Take necessary countermeasures
specific to the application program. If
the logs can be displayed on the
operation panel, see the logs.
D
CTL
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
SC 998
Application start
error
No applications start within 60

seconds after the power is
turned on.
B147/B149/B190
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Loose connection of
RAM-DIMM, ROMDIMM
Software problem
4-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROMDIMM are properly connected.
firmware.
Type
CTL
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 999
Program
download error
SM
Definition
The download (program,
print data, language data)
from the IC card does not
execute normally.
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Board installed
incorrectly
Engine board
defective
IC card defective
Incorrect IC card
used (machine
type/model, card
version)
NVRAM defective
Loss of power during
downloading
NOTE 1: This error is
not logged because
the error occurs in the
download mode
(different from the
normal operation
mode).
NOTE 2: If the
machine loses power
while downloading, or
if the download does
not normally end for
some other reason,
this could damage the
controller board or the
target PCB of the
downloading and
prevent subsequent
downloading. If this
problem occurs, the
damaged PCB must
be replaced.
4-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. If you can download necessary
programs, do it by using an
appropriate card.
3. If you cannot download necessary
programs, use the special card and
tool for downloading or replace the
board having been used for the
unsuccessful downloading.
Type
CTL
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software
error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist.
Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
Summary sheet (SP mode 1 Service/Printer SP, SP1-004 [Print Summary])
SMC - All (SP5-990-002)
SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.)
Image file which causes the problem, if possible
B147/B149/B190
4-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY
Work-flow
The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the considerable
image quality problems on this product.
Start
Verification of
problem reported
from users
Can the
problem be
duplicated?
Ask customer to
duplicate it.
No
Image Quality?
No
Troubleshoot using
the service manual
or technical bulletin.
No
Troubleshoot
depending on the
type of problem.
Troubleshooting
Yes
Yes
Make copy in the
enlargement or
reduction mode.
Copy
Copy or Print?
Print
Location of
the image problem
shifted?
No
Make a test pattern

in SP5-997.
Colour related?
Possible Symptoms
Yes
Yes
y Vertical white dotted lines

Check the transfer bias or paper
condition.
y Vertical white lines on thick paper
Check the timing when the problem
occurs.
y Dirty lines
Check the transfer belt cleaning section.
y Poor fusing / Fusing offset
Check the paper types selected in the
printer driver.
y Smeared image at trailing edge
Check the fusing unit speed.
y Crow marks
Check the humidity condition and adjust
the transfer bias if necessary.
No problem on pattern
* Font problem
* Image data missing
Especially, problems
related to the above
symptoms and if no
problem is found on the
test pattern, it may be
related to the application
used or driver. Collect a
capture file for further
investigation (select
'Print to File' in the
driver).
B146T901.WMF
SM
4-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
(From previous page)

A
B
Possible Symptoms
y Colour shift
Check the level of the
colour shift and follow
the troubleshooting
guide if required.
Problem is related to
the scanner section.
Make a test print

from SBU in SP4907 in each colour.
No
Make a test print

from IPU in SP4-417
by selecting related
colour.
Can the
problem be
duplicated?
y Connection of flat cable

between the controller
and laser optic housing
unit.
y Mirror position of related
colour located in the laser
optic housing unit.
y Controller or BCU board
defective
Check the scanner section

(exposure glass, mirrors,
scanner movement, etc.)
No
Check the connection

between the SBU/IPU or
replace the SBU.
All colour?
No
Check Points
Can the
problem be
duplicated?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Colour missing
No
Specify the colour

that caused the
image problem.
Check the image

processing area of
the colour specified
in the previous step
Yes
Check connection
between the IPU/
Controller, or
replace the IPU.
Considerable Symptom
y Faint image (K)
Check the image transfer unit position lever.
y Cyan/Magenta jitter
Check if the registration roller speed is suitable for the type of paper used.
y Toner blasting
Check which colour is blasting and adjust the toner limit or transfer bias.
y Image density change
Check when the problem is reported and follow the necessary steps.
y Dirty Background
Check in which condition the problem is reported, and follow the required procedure.
y Colour vertical bands/lines/dirty background
Check the OPC drum and/or development unit.
y Colour shift
Check the level of the colour shift and follow the troubleshooting guide if required.
y Colour lines/bands/dirty background
When the PCU/development unit is close to its life end, the developer or the cleaning blade of the
PCU wears out, causing vertical colour lines, bands, or dirty background. Check the related colour
unit and replace it if necessary.
B146T902.WMF
B147/B149/B190
4-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the following image problems.
Smeared image for 4C thin lines or White lines in solid image areas
Dirty background
Fireflies
Crow marks
Image density change
Toner blasting
Subject
Smeared image for 4C
thin lines or white lines
in solid image areas
Symptom
4C thin lines become
smeared in the paper feed
direction or white lines
appear in solid image areas.
Cause
Spurs are located just before the fusing
section to prevent paper from touching
the fusing unit. When paper touches the
spurs and the spurs do not rotate, the
spurs scratch the mage.
Action
Clean the edges of the spurs and change the
position of the spurs as shown below.
If 4C thin lines become smeared:
B146T903.WMF
If white lines appear in solid image areas:
B146T904.WMF
B147/B149/B190
4-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Dirty background
Symptom
Dirty background may
continuously appear on the
left side (relative to paper
feed) under very low
temperature and humidity
conditions.
Cause
Action
When the developer has deteriorated or

when prints are made in a very low
humidity condition, dirty background may
appear continuously.
Perform forced toner refresh mode (SP3-921-1 or

2).
The machine automatically does this in the
following sequence. (It takes about 20 minutes to
complete this mode.)
1. Consumes toner in the development unit
without toner supply until toner end is detected.
2. Starts toner recovery mode.
3. Starts process control self-check.
NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this
mode, to prevent carrier flowing out.
Fireflies

intermittently appear with
originals that have a high
image area ratio after making
multiple prints of originals
with a low image area ratio.
While making prints with a low image

area ratio, the toner-carrier attraction
tends to increase. Then, when a large
amount of toner is supplied under this
condition, the supplied toner cannot be
properly charged, causing toner to flow
out from the development unit.
Fireflies may appear with

originals that have a high
image area ratio after making
multiple prints of originals
with a low image area ratio.
While making prints with a low image

area ratio, developer is agitated with less
toner supplied. This may cause some
toner to coagulate and harden. Then,
when switching over to originals with a
high image area ratio, this toner may
cause fireflies.
Change the settings of the following SP modes:

SP3-906-1 Job End Process Control Self-check
200 (Default) to 100
SP3-920-3 OPC Refresh Prints
200 (Default) to 100
SP3-920-6 Toner Refresh Mode
0 (Default: Disable) to 1 (Enable)
During the above mode, toner refresh will
automatically be done after job end process
control self-check, and will consume the
coagulated or overcharged toner.
SP3-125-3 Auto TD Adjust
Default 0 (Disable) to 1 (Initial process control)
Making prints with a low image area ratio causes
the toner-carrier attraction to increase, resulting in
low image density. Activating the Auto TD
Adjustment corrects toner density within the target
range; however, it takes up to 6 minutes to
complete the self-check and Auto TD Adjustment.
SM
4-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Crow marks

(1)
B147/B149/B190
Symptom
Cause
When making duplex prints in

low temperature and humidity
conditions, crow marks may
appear on black images,
especially in halftone areas
on the 2nd side.
A charge is applied to the paper at each

color station in order to attract each
toner onto the paper. Therefore, the
initial toner colors will receive multiple
charging as they pass each station,
which increases the attractive force
between the toner and paper. Since
black is the last toner to be applied, the
attractive force between it and the paper
is lowest. Black toner moves on the
paper during transport to the fusing
section, due to discharge from the toner
to the surrounding guide plates.
Using SP2-301 (Transfer Current), increase the

paper transfer current for black in the mode in
which the problem occurs.
When the machine is tuned

on in the morning (having
been unused for a while), the
ID of the initial outputs may
be relatively low or high, in
which case the machine
needs to compensate by
raising or lowering the ID
during machine operation.
When the machine is off, the

environmental conditions can begin to
affect the machines development
capability. When the main switch is
tuned on, the machine starts a process
control self-check and adjusts the
development parameters to achieve the
proper development potential gap
without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.
If this is often pointed out by users who are very

particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
Adjustment (SP3-125-3) as a solution.
4-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action
NOTE: White dotted lines may appear on outputs

if the transfer current is increased too
much. Therefore, after adjusting the
transfer current, it is necessary to check
the results by making a solid or halftone
image in duplex mode.
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the

self-check.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
(2)
Toner blasting
SM
Symptom
Image density is too low or
high.
Toner may blast, causing

smeared text characters
and/or lines in 2C or process
black mode (depending on
the PDL setting or type of
paper used.)
Cause
If the machine has never been turned off
and Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) is
disabled, the machine has never
performed the initial process control selfcheck, causing the image density to
become low or high.
An excessive amount of toner is used for

development.
4-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action
SP3-906-3 Non-use Time 1
0 (Default) to 500
30 (Default) to 480
If Energy Saver 1 is activated (Default: Off), the
non-use time process control self-check will not
function. Therefore, make sure that Energy
Saver 1 is Off (SP5-101-3 or UP mode).
With the above setting, the self-check
automatically starts after 500 prints and after no
prints have been made for 480 minutes (8
hours). Based on the average daily printing
volume of 500 prints, self-check would be
performed first thing every morning. These
settings are suitable for machines, which are
used during the day and then kept On in Ready
status throughout the night. Therefore, this SP
mode should be set based on the particular way
the customer uses the printer.
Change the toner limit setting in SP mode.
If toner blasted images appear for text or lines
in 2C, decrease the setting for Text from 190%
to 150 - 170%.
If toner blasted images for text and lines
recognized as pure image data (i.e. not
processed as text/line data), decrease the
setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%.
NOTE: If the toner limit is lowered too much, it
may cause the density of shadow areas to
be not smooth.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed Explanation
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the considerable image problems.
Subject
Symptom
Cause
Action
Symptoms not related to color

Vertical white dotted
lines
If the paper transfer bias is

excessive for the paper type
used in the low humidity
condition, vertical white
dotted lines may appear.
In the low humidity condition, the

electrical resistance of paper tends to
increase. Excessive paper transfer bias
may cause electrical leak, causing
vertical white lines.
Check if the optional heater has been installed

in the paper tray and it is activated.
In high temperature and

humidity conditions, vertical
white lines may appear in
halftone areas on thick paper
after multiple prints of the
same image.
In this condition, the drum sensitivity

tends to drop. Since the image transfer
efficiency differs between plain and thick
paper, sensitivity drop may cause
changes in image transfer efficiency on
thick paper, causing vertical white lines.
The drum sensitivity recovers, and this symptom

disappears after waiting for about 5 minutes after
this symptom has been observed.
Dirty lines/bands or
background on 2nd
side
The cleaning blade of the transfer belt

cleaning may be worn away or damaged
when the transfer belt cleaning unit
becomes close to its life (500KP).
Check and replace the transfer belt-cleaning unit.
Poor fusing / Fusing

offset
The type of paper selected in the printer

driver does not match the paper type
used for printing, causing the fusing
temperature not to be controlled for the
paper used.
Please instruct users to select the correct paper

type in the printer driver.
The papers trailing edge tends to flip up

and come very close to the fusing belt
after it passes the paper transfer unit.
The static electricity built up on the
fusing belt may cause toner to move,
resulting in the smeared image.
This is most noticeable with 600x600dpi
printing.
Please instruct users to select 1800x600 or

1200x1200dpi.
Vertical white lines
Smeared image
B147/B149/B190
When making prints of an

original with a solid image
near the trailing, a smeared
image may appear.
4-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Customize (decrease) the paper transfer

current for the related mode (SP2-301).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Crow marks
Symptom
Cause
When making duplex prints in

low temperature and humidity
conditions, crow marks may
appear on black images,
especially in halftone areas
on the 2nd side.
A charge is applied to the paper at each

color station in order to attract each
toner onto the paper. Therefore, the
initial toner colors will receive multiple
charging as they pass each station,
which increases the attractive force
between the toner and paper. Since
black is the last toner to be applied, the
attractive force between it and the paper
is lowest. Black toner moves on the
paper during transport to the fusing
section, due to discharge from the toner
to the surrounding guide plates.
Action
Using SP2-301 (Transfer Current), increase the
paper transfer current for black in the mode in
which the problem occurs.
NOTE: White dotted lines may appear on outputs
if the transfer current is increased too much.
Therefore, after adjusting the transfer current, it is
necessary to check the results by making a solid
or halftone image in duplex mode.
Symptoms related to color

Faint image (black)
Only black becomes lighter.
The transfer belt position is not in the

correct position.
Check the transfer belt unit position and/or the

transfer belt unit release lever.
Magenta and/or cyan

jitter
Magenta jitter may appear at

67 mm and/or cyan jitter at
165 mm from the trailing
edge.
If the registration roller speed is too fast

for the paper types used, the shock
when the trailing edge has just passed
the registration roller generates
vibration, causing the jitter.
Adjust the registration roller speed depending on

the paper types and/or mode selected.
This may appear especially when using

thick paper because of its stiffness.
SP1-004-4: Normal paper (1200 dpi)

SP1-004-5: Normal paper (600 dpi)
SP1-005-3: Thick paper (1200 dpi)
If SP1-005-3 cannot improve the level even when
setting it to -1.0, follow the procedure below.
1. Set SP1-005-3 to -1.0.
2. Print the samples by adjusting SP1-004-4 from
100% (-0.2% to -0.8%).
After adjusting SP1-004-4, check the image
quality also with normal paper in the 1200 dpi
mode. Readjust it so that the image quality
level is acceptable for both thick and normal
paper if necessary.
SM
4-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Toner blasting (1)
Toner blasting (2)
Symptom
Cause
Action
Toner may blast, causing

smeared text characters
and/or lines in 2C or process
black mode (depending on
the PDL setting or type of
paper used.)
An excessive amount of toner is used for

development.
Change the toner limit setting in SP mode.
Black toner may blast on the

2nd side of paper under the
low temperature.
Black toner moves on the paper during

transport to the fusing section, due to
discharge from the toner to the
surrounding guide plates.
Increase the paper transfer current in SP data

from the default setting to a recommended value
depending on the mode selected as shown below.
If toner blasted images appear for text or lines

in 2C, decrease the setting for Text from 190%
to 150 - 170%.
If toner blasted images for text and lines
recognized as pure image data (i.e. not
processed as text/line data), decrease the
setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%.
may cause the density of shadow areas to be not
smooth.
SP2-301-3 ([K] 125mm/sec): 16 to 21

SP2-301-4 ([K] 180mm/sec): 27 to 32
SP2-301-16 ([FC, K] 125mm/sec): 9 to 13
SP2-301-17 ([FC, K]180mm/sec): 15 to 20
may cause the density of shadow areas to be not
smooth.

(1)
B147/B149/B190
When the machine is tuned

on in the morning (having
been unused for a while), the
ID of the initial outputs may
be relatively low or high, in
which case the machine
needs to compensate by
raising or lowering the ID
during machine operation.
When the machine is off, the

environmental conditions can begin to
affect the machines development
capability. When the main switch is
tuned on, the machine starts a process
control self-check and adjusts the
development parameters to achieve the
proper development potential gap
without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.
4-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
If this is often pointed out by users who are very

particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
Adjustment (SP3-125-003) as a solution.
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the
self-check.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
(2)
Dirty background
Symptom
Image density is too low or
high.

continuously appear on the
left side (relative to paper
feed) under very low
temperature and humidity
conditions.
Cause
If the machine has never been turned off
and Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) is
disabled, the machine has never
performed the initial process control selfcheck, causing the image density to
become low or high.
When the developer has deteriorated or

when prints are made in a very low
humidity condition, dirty background may
appear continuously.
Action
0 (Default) to 500
30 (Default) to 480
If Energy Saver 1 is activated (Default: Off), the
non-use time process control self-check will not
function. Therefore, make sure that Energy
Saver 1 is Off (SP5-101-3 or UP mode).
With the above setting, the self-check
automatically starts after 500 prints and after no
prints have been made for 480 minutes (8
hours). Based on the average daily printing
volume of 500 prints, self-check would be
performed first thing every morning. These
settings are suitable for machines, which are
used during the day and then kept On in Ready
status throughout the night. Therefore, this SP
mode should be set based on the particular way
the customer uses the printer.
Perform forced toner refresh mode (SP3-921-001
or 002).
The machine automatically does this in the
following sequence. (It takes about 20 minutes to
complete this mode.)
4. Consumes toner in the development unit
without toner supply until toner end is detected.
NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this
mode, to prevent carrier flowing out.
SM
4-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Symptom
Cause
Action
Color Shift
Color shift level is out of the

adjustment standard.
The adjustment standard on this product

is maximum 150 m.
The color shift level may change
depending on a type of paper used.
Check the level of the color shifts reported from

user and follow the troubleshooting procedure
described in section 4- if necessary.
Color missing
Color(s) is missing on the

outputs.
The position of 3rd mirror moves due

to the rough transportation of service
part; and then, becomes out of
position.
When replacing the laser optic housing unit

due to any reason, make a color demo page in
the UP mode. If color(s) is missing, open the
unit and reposition the mirror(s).
Flat cable(s) is not properly

connected to the BCU board.
Reconnect the flat cable(s) firmly.
B147/B149/B190
4-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Copy Image processing

Symptom
Black image is weaker
when the ACS is on.
Mode
ACS
Cause
The ACS Mode use K toner and CMY toner to
create black images. CMY toner makes black
images weaker.
Action
Specify "Black & White" in the following menu:
> Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
Color Image > ACS Priority
Black ballpoint pen

images are colored.
FC
This symptom is caused by the characteristic of

ballpoint pen ink.
Specify "Darker" level in the following menu:

> Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
Generation copy makes

less colorful images.
FC
Generation copy is executed in the text mode.

Photo images become less colorful.
Select "Photo" as the original type.
Maps are incorrectly

colored.
FC
The Map Mode uses CMYK toner to create black

letters. Sometimes black images are somewhat
colored.
Specify "Darker" level in the following menu:

> Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
Raise the "Sharp" level in the following menu:
> Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
Specify "Full Color" in the following menu:
> Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
Color Image > ACS Priority
The ACS does not

correctly distinguish
between color and black &
white images.
ACS
Color images are

enclosed by black lines.
Black letters are enclosed
by while lines.
FC,
Text/Photo
When the following originals are used, color

images are sometimes incorrectly taken as black
letters, or black letters are incorrectly enclosed
by white lines:
Outputs from a printer (laser or ink-jet)
Copied images
Raise the "Photo" level in the following menu:

> Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity > Photo
Black letters and black

lines are colored.
FC,
Text/Photo
Black letters and lines are colored when the

background of the original is not clear.
Mono color images are

not sharp enough.
B&W,
Text/Photo,
ACS
This symptom is based on the copier

characteristics.
Raise the "Text" level in the following menu:

> Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity
NOTE: If you raise the "Text" level too much, some
weaker images are enclosed by black lines.
Raise the "Soft" level in the following menu:
> Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Soft
SM
Darker images are sometimes incorrectly taken

as black & white images.
4-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Symptom
Mode
Letters are not clear when

the background is shaded.
B&W,
Text/Photo,
ACS

characteristics.
Letters are not clear when

the background is slightly
shaded.
B&W,
Text/Photo,
ACS

characteristics. This symptom tends to occur
when the background is shaded with a rough dot
pattern.
B147/B149/B190
Cause
Action
4-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Specify the full-color mode when using color originals.
Specify the text mode when using black-and-white
originals.
Specify the full-color mode when using color originals.
Specify the text mode when using black-and-white
originals.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT

The following briefly explain the factors causing color shifts and what to do on the machine to correct it:
Temperature change causes the optical components in the laser
optics housing unit to contract, causing the main scan
The black development motor drives the
magnification to change. To correct the line position, the machine
fusing unit pressure roller. The motor
automatically does the line position adjustment when the
speed is adjustable in the SP mode.
temperature changes by 5C since the last position adjustment.
If the line position adjustment functions properly, no color shift
occurs. If the line position adjustment fails (result: SP5-993-007),
color lines may shift anywhere on the outputs.
The process speed at each stage (registration roller, transfer belt,
and fusing belt/roller) affects the paper transport speed. If the
paper transport speed changes during image transfer of a color,
the color line being transferred shifts with respect to the color line
already transferred to the paper. The registration roller speed
The transfer motor drives the
(adjusted by color development motor speed) and fusing
transfer belt. The motor speed
belt/roller speed (adjusted by black development motor speed)
is not adjustable.
are adjusted by the manufacturer.
Paper speed may slightly change due to the type of paper used or
after replacing the parts related to the drive sections of the
registration section, transport unit, and fusing unit. (After replacing
The color development motor drives
the fusing unit, the speed adjustment should be done in the User
the registration rollers. The motor
speed is adjustable in SP mode.
Program mode.) Also, the position where color shift occurs
B146T905.WMF
depends on which section starts moving at the incorrect speed.
Paper skew directly affects the color shift between the front and
rear sides. There are several factors. One of them is the position
of the side fences.
SM
4-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
As explained on the previous page, there are several types of color shift problem. The following table shows the symptoms,
factors, action required, and the page to see for details.
1
Symptom
Color shift on entire image in
main-scan and/or sub-scan
directions
Factors
Line position adjustment does not
function properly.
Transfer belt unit has just been
replaced.
Action Required
Check the result of the line position
adjustment (SP5-993-007) and solve the
problem if an error was detected.
Check which color lines are shifted from
black line and adjust the SP modes for
registration and magnification.

2
Color shifts only at the

leading edge area
(sometimes causing shock
jitter, magenta or cyan lines)
Color shifts only at the trailing
edge area
Registration roller speed is not

appropriate.
Adjust the color development motor speed

(SP1-004-4, 5, and SP1-005-003) depending
on the process speed.
Fusing belt/roller speed is not

appropriate.
Color shifts between the front

and rear sides
Paper skew on transfer belt

Side fences are not properly set.
Pressure between the paper
attraction roller and transfer belt is
not even at the front and rear
sides.
Adjust the black development motor speed

(SP1-004-001, 002, and 007, or Fuser
Adjust in the User Program mode) depending
on the process speed.
Reposition the side fences.
Reposition the paper attraction roller unit.
B147/B149/B190
4-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Refer to #
Page 4-4
Main-scan
Page 4-56/57
Sub-scan
Page 4-54/55
Transfer Unit
Page 4-60
Page 4-54
Page 4-54
Page 4-57
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Adjustment Standard:
Max. 150 m
The flowchart illustrates the procedure to adjust line positions.

NOTE: The allowance of color shift is 150m. Keep the color shift in the range of 0 to
150m.
Start
Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).

SP2-103-055 (M: [K] 64.3 MHz) is ...
250 or higher
Set the factory settings in the following SPs:

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003
SP2-103-055, 056, 057, and 058
2 mm or more
Set the factory settings in the following SPs:

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003
SP2-916-008, 009, and 010
SP2-103-056, 057, and 058
Less than 250

Print out a pattern with the following settings:
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-004 "Full Color"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
How much do the lines shift?

Less than 2 mm
Execute the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).
Has the SP ended normally?
No
Are the
transfer belt and ID sensors
clean?
Yes
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
No
Replace or clean the

transfer belt and/or the
ID sensors.
Yes
Execute the forced toner-density
adjustment with the following SP:
SP3-126-002
Do the lines shift?
No
Yes
A
End
B146T906.WMF
SM
4-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
A
Main-scan direction
How the lines shift?
When you have come to

this step, the lines shift
0.2 mm or less.
Sub-scan direction
Yes
Are the black

lines and color lines parallel?
Which part
of the lines shift?
No
Whole part
Leading or trailing edge

Yes
Adjust the main-scan registration with the
following SPs:
SP5-993-010
SP5-993-011
SP5-993-012
Execute the line position adjustment with the

following SP:
SP5-993-002

SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
Do the lines shift?
Adjust the magnification

with the following SPs:
SP5-993-013
SP5-993-014
SP5-993-015
Leading edges
Adjust the developmentmotor speed with the
following SPs:
SP1-004-005
SP1-004-004
SP1-005-003
SP1-007-001
Check the transfer-belt speed with

the following SPs:
SP5-993-031
SP5-993-033
Leading or trailing edge
Disable the transfer-belt feedback
feature with the following SP:
SP5-995-020
Which
edges of the color lines has
shifted?
Trailing edges
Adjust the development-motor speed
with the following SPs:
SP1-004-002
SP1-004-001
SP1-004-007
Enable the transfer-belt feedback

feature with the following SP:
SP5-995-020
No
No
Adjust the sub-scan

registration with the
following SPs:
SP5-993-016
SP5-993-017
SP5-993-018
SP5-993-019
SP5-993-020
SP5-993-021
Yes
Execute the line position
adjustment with the
following SP:
SP5-993-002
Print out a pattern with the

following settings:
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
and "1200 x 1200"
Do the lines shift?
End
B146T907.WMF
B147/B149/B190
4-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Direction
Sub-scan
Area
Leading
edge
Symptom
Color shift,
especially 100 mm
from the leading
edge.
Possible Cause
Action Required
Output Mode
SP Mode
Procedure / Remarks
Registration roller Normal Paper SP1-004004

speed is not
1200 dpi
suitable for the
paper used.
Normal Paper SP1-004005
600 dpi
Check the magenta line position against the black line.

If the registration roller is too fast or slow, the magenta
line appears above or below the black line.
SP1-005003
When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.05

steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
Then, repeat this until the shift between magenta and
black is minimized.
(Refer to pattern 1
on page 4-57 for the
symptom.)
Thick Paper
1200 dpi
(by-pass feed)
Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed

Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed
NOTE: If the registration roller is too fast, magenta jitter

may appear at 67 mm and/or cyan jitter at 165 mm from
the trailing edge. This is caused by the mechanical
shock when the trailing edge of the paper passes the
registration rollers.
Trailing
edge
Color shift,
especially 100 mm
from the trailing
edge.
(Refer to pattern 2
symptom.)
Fusing roller
speed is not
suitable for the
paper used.

1200 dpi
Check the magenta line position against the black line.

If the fusing roller is too fast or slow, the magenta line
appears above or below the black line.

600 dpi
Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed
Thick Paper
1200 dpi
SP1-004007
(by-pass feed)
SM
4-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed

When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.1
steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
Then, repeat this step until the shift between magenta
and black is minimized.
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Direction
Sub-scan
Area
Entire
image
Symptom
Color shift on the
entire image, and
the amount of shift
from leading to
trailing edge is
almost the same.
Possible Cause
Action Required
Output Mode
Procedure / Remarks
SP Mode
SP mode setting Normal Paper SP5-993016 (Y)

is not suitable for
600 dpi
the paper used.
SP5-993017 (M)
SP5-993018 (C)
Normal Paper SP5-993019 (Y)
1200 dpi
SP5-993020 (M)
SP5-993021 (C)
Measure the gap between the black line and other

colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
Convert the measured value from [m] to [dots] with the
following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
dot value in the SP mode.
Correction [dots] = Measured value [m] / 21.2 or 42.4
600 dpi mode: 1 dot = 42.4 m
1200 dpi mode: 1 dot = 21.2 m
If color (YMC) has shifted up in relation to black, add the
above value to the current value.
If color (YMC) has shifted down in relation to black,
subtract the above value from the current value.
Examples
If the magenta line has shifted up in relation to black
by 40m in 600dpi mode, add 1 to the current setting
of SP5-993-017.
Correction [dots] = +(40/42.4) = Approx. +1
If the magenta line has shifted down in relation to
black by 70m in 600dpi mode, subtract 2 from the
current setting of SP5-993-17.
Correction [dots] = -(70/42.4) = Approx. 2
B147/B149/B190
4-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Direction
Area
Main-scan Entire
image
Symptom
Color shifts on the
entire image, and
the amount of shift
differs at front,
center, and rear.
Possible Cause
Main-scan
magnification is
not correctly
adjusted.
Action Required
Output Mode
-
Procedure / Remarks
SP Mode
SP5-993013 (Y)
SP5-993014 (M)
SP5-993015 (C)
(Refer to pattern 3
symptom.)

Convert the measured value [mm] to [%] with the
value in the SP mode
Correction [%] = Measured value [mm] / 287 x 10000
If the color line is enlarged in relation to black, add the
correction value to the current setting.
If the color line is reduced in relation to black, subtract
the correction value from the current setting.
NOTE: Line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Auto
Adjust in User Program mode) should be done to check
the result after changing the main-scan magnification
data. This is because the changes will affect the line
position adjustment.
Examples
If the magenta line is enlarged by 0.1mm in relation to
the black line, add 4 to the current setting of SP5993-014.
Correction [%] = (0.1/287) x 10000 = Approx. +4
If the magenta line is reduced by 0.05 mm in relation
to the black line, subtract 2 from the current setting
of SP5-993-014.
Correction [%] = -(0.05/287) x 10000 = Approx. -2
SM
4-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Direction
Area
Main-scan Entire
image
Symptom
Color shifts on the
entire image and
amount of shifts is
almost the same at
front, center, and
rear sides.
Possible Cause
Action Required
Output Mode
Main-scan
registration is not
correctly
adjusted.
Procedure / Remarks
SP Mode
SP5-993010 (Y)
SP5-993011 (M)
SP5-993012 (C)

Convert the measured value [m] to [dots] with the
dot value in the SP mode.
Correction [dots] = Measured value [m] / 21.2
If color (YMC) has shifted to the left in relation to black,
add the above value to the current setting.
(Refer to pattern 4
symptom.)
If color (YMC) has shifted to the right in relation to black,

subtract the above value from the current setting.
Examples
Front or
rear
B147/B149/B190
The amount of color

shift at the front and
rear sides becomes
gradually bigger
toward the trailing
edge.
Side fence
position
Transfer belt
position
If the magenta line has shifted to the left by 40m,

add 4 to the current setting of SP5-993-011
Correction [dots] = +(40/21.2) = Approx. +2
If the magenta line has shifted to the right by 70m,
subtract 3 from the current setting of SP5-993-011.
Correction [dots] = -(70/21.2) = Approx. -3
Check if the side fences of the paper trays are
properly positioned. If there is clearance between the
paper and the side fences, this causes paper to skew
during paper transport.
Check if the transfer belt is in correct position, if the
tension springs are properly set, or if the paper
attraction roller is properly installed..
( 3.7.4 Transfer Belt)
4-75
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
How to measure the gap between color

lines
Use a magnification scope to measure the

gap [A] between two lines. Measure the
distance between the same sides of two lines.
For example (see the illustration), measure
between the left edges of the lines.
Magnification
scope
Pattern 1
Black
line
Color
line
B146T908.WMF
Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the

leading edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the registration roller speed is too
high for the paper used. Therefore, the
registration roller speed needs to be reduced
by decreasing the setting (percentage) of
SP1-004-004, 005, and SP1-005-003
depending on the mode selected.
SP1-004-004 Normal paper,
Color mode, 1200 dpi (62.5 mm/s)
SP1-004-005 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (125 mm/s)
SP1-005-003 Thick Paper (62.5 mm/s)
B146T909.WMF
Pattern 2
Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the
trailing edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the fusing roller speed is too high
for the paper used. Therefore, the fusing
roller speed needs to be slower by
decreasing the setting (percentage) of SP1004-001, 002, or 007 depending on the
mode selected.
SP1-004-001 Normal paper,
Color mode, 1200 dpi (62.5 mm/s)
SP1-004-002 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (125 mm/s)
SP1-004-007 Thick Paper (62.5 mm/s)
B147/B149/B190
4-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B146T913.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Pattern 3
Color shift (magnification change) in the main-scan direction
Troubleshooting
Fig. 1 and 2 show that the colored (dotted) line has shifted away from the black line
and the amount of shift differs at the front, center, and rear. Both Fig. 1 and Fig. 2
show the color grid is larger than the black grid. Yellow becomes larger from left to
right in Fig. 1, but cyan and magenta become larger from right to left. This is
because the laser writing direction for B&Y is different from C&M.
B146T911.WMF
Fig. 1 (Yellow)
B146T910.WMF
Fig. 2 (Cyan & Magenta)
Pattern 4
Color shift (registration) in the mainscan direction
Colored line shifts in the main-scan
direction and the amount of shift is the
same at left, center, and right.
This is caused by incorrect color
registration.
B146T912.WMF
SM
4-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT

If the color shift level is not within the target range (max 150m) after replacing the
transfer unit and performing the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or
Auto Color Registration), follow the procedure explained below.
Check the color shift level

1. Make sure that OPC Refresh (SP3-920-005) has been done.
2. Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).
3. Print a 1-dot grid pattern using A3/11" x 17" paper. Refer to the following table
for detailed SP mode settings.
SP5-997 (Test Pattern) Setting
Mode
Normal, color, 600 dpi
Tray
selection
2
2
Pattern
Color mode
Resolution
05
05
Full Color
Full Color
600x600
1200x1200
Paper size
(By-pass)
NOTE: Each adjustment needs to be done by using the paper type which the
customer normally uses.
4. Check the tendency of color shift in the grid pattern printed in step 3.
Sometimes, a magnification scope must be used to measure the amount of
color shift between colors.
5. If the result is not within the target, go to the next step.
Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment

SP mode (sub-scan registration) reset
1. Make sure that the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002) have been printed out.
2. Reset the setting of SP5-993-016 to 021 to "0."
Transfer belt aging

1. Remove all PCUs. Place them on clean sheets of paper and cover the drums
with a few sheets of paper to prevent the drums from light fatigue. Then, secure
the drum positioning plate (2 screws) and return the transfer unit release lever
to the original position.
2. Perform the transfer belt idling with SP5-804-074 (Drum M H CW) for about 3
minutes. (This is to stabilize the transfer belt side-to-side movement.)
3. Reinstall the PCUs.
4. Perform the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Auto Adjust in User
Program mode).
5. Print a 1-dot grid pattern using A3/11" x 17" paper in 600 dpi mode.
6. If the color shift in the main-scan direction is not within the adjustment standard,
follow the troubleshooting guide.
B147/B149/B190
4-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fusing roller speed adjustment

Program mode).
2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes using A3/11" x 17"
paper.
(1) Normal, 600 dpi
(2) Normal, 1200 dpi
(3) Thick, 1200 dpi
3. If the color has shifted within 100 mm from the trailing edge, follow the
troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Trailing edge).
Registration roller speed adjustment (for color mode)

Program mode).
(1) Normal, 600 dpi

(2) Normal, 1200 dpi
3. If the color has shifted within 100 mm from the leading edge, follow the
troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Leading edge).
NOTE: The registration roller speed for by-pass paper feed is the same as for
normal 1200 dpi mode.
Line position fine adjustment for sub-scan

1. Print a 1-dot grid pattern each for each of the following modes using A3/11" x
17" paper.
Mode
Thick paper
Tray
selection
2
2
0

Color
Pattern
Resolution
mode
05
Full Color
600x600
05
Full Color 1200x1200
05
Full Color 1200x1200
Paper size
(By-pass)
A3 / 11x17
2. Check if there is any color which has shifted from the black line by the same
amount all the way down the page from leading to trailing edge. If there is,
follow the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Whole image).
SM
4-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Troubleshooting
2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes using A3/11" x 17"
paper.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2005
Registration roller speed adjustment (For B&W mode)

1. Input the following values in the SP modes.
SP1-004-006 = (Value of SP1-004-005)

SP1-005-002 = 0.2%
2. Print a 2-dot pattern (pattern 12) using A3/11" x 17" paper.
Mode
Normal color 600 dpi
Tray
selection
2

Single
Pattern
Color Mode Resolution
Color
12
6 (Black) Single Color 600x600
3. Depending on the paper used, a horizontal band may appear at 60 mm (2.76")

from the leading edge on A3 (11" x 17") paper. If the horizontal band is
observed on the 2-dot pattern, decrease the setting of SP1-004-006 in 0.05%
steps until the problem is solved.
B147/B149/B190
4-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT

Black Over Print prevents unexpected white lines from appearing when black
letters or lines are printed with color background. You can enable or disable this
feature from the printer driver (default: disabled).
When it is enabled, Black Over Print has the following unpleasant side effects:
Crispness may deteriorate because the black toner spreads out.
More toner is consumed.
The background color may be seen through black letters or lines.
[D]
Black Over Print Disabled
1. The color toner (for example,

magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C].
Some space [D] is left blank for
the black toner.
[A]
Y
M
Y
M
[C]
Y
K
2. The black toner [E] is transferred

in the blank space.
If the line position of the black toner
is not correct, an unexpected white
line [F] appears.
[B]
[E]
Y
Y
K
M
B146T920.WMF
[F]
Black Over Print Enabled

Black lines and color background are
printed as follows:
[A]
1. The color toner (for example,

magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C].
2. The black toner [D] is transferred
on the color toner.
K
Y
Y
M
Y
M
[B]
[C]
[D]
Even if the line position of the black

toner is not correct, an unexpected
white line does not appear.
Y
M
B146T921.WMF
SM
4-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Troubleshooting
Black lines and color background are

printed as follows:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.7.1 SENSORS
Component
Scanner Home
Position
Platen Cover
CN
632-A2
Condition
Open
Shorted
Open
648-2
Shorted
Original Width
Open
632-A
Symptom
SC121
SC120
APS and ARE do not function
properly.
No symptom
CPU cannot detect the original size
properly. APS and ARE do not
function correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-1
Open
632-B

function correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-2
Open
632-B
LD H.P. sensor
220-B12
TD sensor
K: 210-A3
C: 210-B9
M: 209-A19
Y: 210-A9
Transfer belt
sensor
210-A12
ID sensor
Rear: 228-3
Center: 228-4, 7
Front: 228-8
Paper end sensor
Paper lift sensor
Tray1: 205-A5
Tray2: 205-B9
By-pass: 209-A15
Tray1: 205-A2
Tray2: 205-B6
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
205-A8
Shorted
Open
Vertical transport
sensor
B147/B149/B190
SC261
SC260
SC370/371/372/373
SC370/371/372/373 or
SC374/375/376/377
SC471
SC385
Shorted
Open
Relay sensor

function correctly.
208-B11
Shorted
The Paper End indicator lights even

if paper is placed in the paper tray.
The Paper End indicator does not
light even if there is no paper in the
paper tray.
The bottom plate of the paper feed
unit is not lifted up.
SC501/502
Paper Jam is detected whenever a
print is made.
Paper Jam is detected even if there
is no paper.
print is made.
is no paper.
4-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Component
CN
Condition
Open
Registration
sensor
209-B2
Fusing exit sensor
212-A7
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Paper exit sensor
212-B4
Shorted
Paper overflow
sensor
Open
212-A2
Shorted
Toner end sensor
Drum gear
position sensor
K: 209-A2
Y: 206-A7
C: 206-A4
M: 206-A1
Shorted
K: 213-13
CMY: 210-B12
Open
Shorted
Open
Open
Waste oil sensor
212-A13
Shorted
Open
Waste oil bottle
set sensor
212-A16
Shorted
Open
Waste toner
sensor
213-A4
Shorted
Symptom
print is made.
is no paper.
print is made.
is no paper.
print is made.
is no paper.
The paper overflow message is not
displayed even when a paper
overflow condition exists, causing
paper jam.
The paper overflow message is
displayed.
Toner near end may not be
detected even when the toner near
end condition is satisfied.
Toner near end may be detected
even when the toner near end
condition is not satisfied.
SC440
Waste oil near full message is
displayed.
Waste oil near full message is not
displayed even when a waste oil
near full condition exists, causing a
waste oil leak.
The message Reset waste oil
bottle correctly is displayed even
when it is set correctly.
The message Reset waste oil
bottle correctly is not displayed
even when it is not set correctly.
Waste toner near full message is
displayed, even when a waste toner
near full condition does not exist.
Waste toner near full message is
not displayed even when a waste
toner near full condition exists,
causing waste toner leak.
NOTE: The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU.
SM
4-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Troubleshooting
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Fuse
115 V
Rating
220 - 240 V
Power Supply Unit

FU1
15A/125V
CB1
8A/250V
FU2
10A/125V
5 A/250V
FU91
10A/125V
10A/125V
Symptom when turning on the

main switch
No response (No power is supplied
to the electrical components.)
No response (No DC power is
supplied to the electrical
components.)
Only 24V DC power is not supplied.
The LED lights. But you see no
other response.
High Voltage Power Supply BoardTransfer

IP101
SC285 (The electricity to the

following components is cut off: the
transfer roller, paper attraction roller,
and transfer exit roller.)
1.5A/50V
4.9 LEDS (BCU)

LED
LED 3 (Red)
LED 2 (Green)
LED 1 (Yellow)
B147/B149/B190
Status
Blinking
The Main CPU functions
correctly.
The MUSIC CPU functions
correctly.
The DSP functions correctly.
Stays OFF or ON
The Main CPU does not function
properly.
The MUSIC CPU does not function
properly.
The DSP does not function properly.
4-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE TABLES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CAUTION
Before starting the SP mode, check that the data-in LED () is not on. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the copier. When the LED is on, wait for
the copier to process the data.
5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, so
that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In this case, product quality cannot
be guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
1. Press the Clear Mode key.
2. Use the keypad to enter 107.
3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.

4. Enter the Service Mode.
Exit
SM
5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
5-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
Exiting SP Mode
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES

Copy SP ...........SP modes related to the engine functions
Printer SP .........SP modes related to the controller functions
Scanner SP ......SP modes related to the scanner functions
Fax SP..............SP modes related to the fax functions
After accessing the SP mode, select one of the Service Program modes (Copy,
Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below.
This section explains the functions of the Printer/Copy/Scanner SP modes. Please
refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.
B146S910.WMF
B147/B149/B190
5-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
B146S911.WMF
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP
mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.
Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
SM
5-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press . (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If not,
just press the required SP Mode number.)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
B146S912.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.
5. To enter a setting:
Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to
enter the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous
setting.
Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window
and select the settings for the test print. Press Start , and then press SP
Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B147/B149/B190
5-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Exiting Service Mode

Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.
NOTE: To make the following settings effective, you must turn the main switch off
and on after exiting service mode.
SP Modes Related to the Engine
SP2-208-009
SP2-213-001
SP2-224-001 to 004
SP5-150-001
SP5-994-001 and 002
SP5-998-001
SP5-999
SP Modes Related to the Controller

SP5-302-002
SP5-801-003 to 013
SP5-824-001
SP5-825-001
SP5-832-001 to 011
NOTE: If the settings of SP modes 5-993-013 to 015 are changed, these changes
will affect the next line position adjustment.
5.1.3 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen
Paper Type
N: Normal paper
TH: Thick paper
Color Mode [Color]
[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full
color mode
Paper Feed Station
P: Paper tray
B: By-pass table
Fusing Section
H: Heating roller
P: Pressure roller
Print Mode
S: Simplex
D: Duplex
Process Speed
62.5, 125, 185
SM
5-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
Since the maximum number of characters which can be displayed on the control
panel screen is limited (20 characters), the description of SP modes displayed on
the screen needs to be abbreviated The following are the major abbreviations used
for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the print
mode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode
settings depend on the process speed.
Mode
B/W
Color
OHP/Thick
Resolution
(dpi)
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
Line speed
(mm/s)
Print speed
(ppm)
185
38
125
28
125
28
62.5
14
62.5
10
The process speed (mm/s) depends on the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution,
and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode settings depend on the process
speed.
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory
setting sheets enclosed, which is located underneath the jammed paper removal
decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch the SP mode in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main
switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this
mode is stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to
the default value. BCU and CTL indicate which NVRAM contains the data.
BCU: NVRAM on the BCU board
CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP
table in the following manner.
[ Adjustable range / Default setting / Step ] Alphanumeric
NOTE: If Alphanumeric is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the
setting of the SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumeric
characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in
the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
B147/B149/B190
5-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE
SP1-XXX (Feed)
1-001-1
1-001-2
1-001-3
1-001-4
1-001-5
1-001-6
1-001-7
1-001-8
1-001-9
1-002
1-002-1
1-002-2
1-002-3
1-002-4
1-002-5
1-002-6
1-003
1-003-1
1-003-2
1-003-3
1-003-4
1-003-5
1-003-6
1-003-7
1-003-8
SM
[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration

(Paper Type, [Color ], Process Speed), Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP, TH: Thick
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation
timing for each mode.
Normal [K] 62.5
*BCU [ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
Normal [K] 125
*BCU
Normal [K] 185
*BCU
Normal [FC] 62.5
*BCU
Normal [FC] 125
*BCU
Thick [K]
*BCU
Thick [FC]
*BCU
OHP [K]
*BCU
OHP [FC]
*BCU
[Side to Side Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for
each mode.
By-pass Table
*BCU [ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
Paper Tray 1
*BCU
Paper Tray 2
*BCU
Paper Tray 3
*BCU [ -10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Paper Tray 4
*BCU
Duplex
*BCU
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle
(Paper Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed), Paper Type: N: Normal, TH:
Thick
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper
feed timing.
Paper Tray 62.5
*BCU [ -5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
Paper Tray 125
*BCU
Paper Tray 185
*BCU
By-pass N 62.5
*BCU
By-pass N 125
*BCU
By-pass N 185
*BCU
By-pass TH
*BCU
By-pass OHP
*BCU
5-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
1-001
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
1-004
1-004-1
1-004-2
1-004-3
1-004-4
1-004-5
1-004-6
1-004-7
[Dev. Motor Speed] Development Drive Motor Speed

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick
Adjusts the development drive motor speed for correcting color shifts at the leading
edge or trailing edge area.
Black Motor [K]: Adjusts fusing roller speed for the trailing edge area.
Color Motor [YMC]: Adjusts registration roller speed for the leading edge area.
NOTE:
SP1-004-002 and 005 is for color mode. Fine adjustment for B&W mode can be
done with SP1-005-001 and 002.
SP1-004-004 is for normal paper. Fine adjustment for thick paper can be done with
SP1-005-003.
[K] 62.5 Normal
*BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 97.8 / 0.1 %/step ]
[K] 125
*BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 97.6 / 0.1 %/step ]
[K] 185
*BCU [ 96.0 to 104.0 / 98.1 / 0.1 %/step ]
[YMC] 62.5
*BCU [ 96.00 to 104.00 / 100.00 / 0.05 %/step ] FA
[YMC] 125
*BCU
[YMC] 185
*BCU
[K] 62.5 Thick
*BCU
[Dev. Motor Speed2] Development Drive Motor Speed 2

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> TH: Thick
1-005-1 [K]
*BCU [ -0.2 to +1.0 / +0.2 / 0.1 %/step ]
Adjusts the black development drive motor speed for the B&W 125mm/s process
speed. The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-002 (see the note
for SP 1-004).
At the 125mm/s process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport quality, causing the
paper to flip up at the fusing section if the same speed as color mode is used for B&W
mode. To minimize the occurrence of paper flipping up, which causes smeared
images in the trailing area, this SP mode can change the motor speed in B&W mode.
1-005-2 [YMC]
*BCU [ -1.00 to 1.00 / 0 / 0.05 %/step ] FA
Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for the B&W 125mm/s process
speed. The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-005 (see the note
for SP 1-004).
At the 125mm/s process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport speed slightly. This
SP mode can adjust the motor speed for B&W mode.
1-005-3 [YMC] Thick
*BCU [ -0.30 to 0.30 / 0 / 0.05 %/step ]
Adjust the color development drive motor speed for thick paper in by-pass mode. The
value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-004 (see the note for SP 1004).
Normal and thick paper are different types of paper, and this sometime causes color
shift due to paper slippage. This SP mode can change the motor speed for thick
paper.
1-005
1-006
1-006-1
1-006-2
1-006-3
1-006-4

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> SP: Special
Adjusts the development motor speed for special paper.
[K] 62.5 Special
*BCU [ -4.0 to 4.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ]
[K] 125 Special
*BCU
[YMC] 62.5 Special
*BCU [ -4.00 to 4.00 / -0.1 / 0.05 %/step ]
[YMC] 125 Special
*BCU
B147/B149/B190
5-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE

Adjusts the development motor speed for postcards.
1-007-1 [CL] Mail TH
*BCU [ -1.00 to 0.00 / -0.40 / 0.05%/step]
1-007
1-008-1
1-008-2
1-008-3
1-008-4
1-008-5
1-008-6
[Drum STM Speed] Drum STM Speed Adjustment

Adjusts the drum speed of each line-speed mode (62.5 mm/s and 125 mm/s); this
adjusts drum speed but not transfer belt speed.
[CL] 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 10/ 7 / 1 /step ] DFU
[CL] 125
*BCU [ 0 to 10/ 7 / 1 /step ] DFU
[Bk] 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 10/ 5 / 1 /step ] DFU
[Bk] 125
*BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU
OHP
*BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU
MUSIC
*BCU [ 0 to 10/ 3 / 1 /step ] DFU
1-104
[Fusing Control]
1-104-1 Control Method
*BCU
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: ON/OFF Control
1: Phase Control
Selects the fusing control method.

NOTE: This mode can be used only for N. America models
1-104-25 Process Speed
*BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Color 62.5 mm/s (temperature specified by
SP 1-105-8 and 19)
1: Color 125 mm/s (temperature specified by
SP 1-105-9 and 20)
2: Thick / OHP (temperature specified by SP 1105-13 and 24)
3: K 125 mm/s (temperature specified by SP 1105-4 and 15)
4: K 185 mm/s (temperature specified by SP 1105-5 and 16)
Selects the power-on default target fusing operation temperature.
The target operating fusing temperature depends on the process speed. When the
machine is switched on, it starts warming up for the process speed specified in this
SP mode.
1-105
[Fusing Temperature]
(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. TH: Thick, SP: Special
Some settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).
US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia
1 105-1 H: Ready
*BCU [ 10 to 100 / 10 / 1oC/step ]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing ready condition.
After the main switch has been turned on, the machine enters the print ready
condition when the heating roller temperature reaches the temperature specified in
this SP mode.
When the machine is in the recovery mode from the energy saver or auto off mode,
the machine becomes ready when both heating and pressure roller temperatures
reach the specified temperature.
Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-3 to 28)
Temperature specified in this SP mode.
SM
5-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
1-008
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 06/2004
1-105
1-105-2 P: Ready
*BCU [ 10 to 100 / NA: 10, EU: 20 / 1oC/step ]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing ready condition.
Temperature specified in this SP mode
The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressure
rollers in various modes. (The default settings are different for N. America and
Eur./Asia)
1-105-4 H:N [K] S 125
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 180, EU: 175 / 5C/step]
1-105-5 H:N [K] S 185
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 180, EU: 180 / 5C/step]
1-105-6 H:N [K] D 125
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 165 / 5C/step] **
1-105-7 H:N [K] D 185
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 175 , EU: 175 / 5C/step]
1-105-8 H:N[FC] S 62.5
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5C/step]
1-105-9 H:N[FC] S 125
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / 180 / 5C/step]
1-105-10 H:N[FC] D 62.5
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 145/ 5C/step]
1-105-11 H:N[FC] D 125
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 170 / 5C/step] **
1-105-13 H:OHP
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / 165 / 5C/step]
1-105-15 P:N [K] S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 160, EU: 155 / 5C/step]
1-105-16 P:N [K] S 185
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 155, EU: 160 / 5C/step]
1-105-17 P:N [K] D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 145 / 5C/step] **
1-105-18 P:N [K] D 185
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 155 / 5C/step]
1-105-19 P:N[FC] S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 125, EU: 130 / 5C/step]
1-105-20 P:N[FC] S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 160 / 5C/step]
1-105-21 P:N[FC] D 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 120, EU: 125 / 5C/step]
1-105-22 P:N[FC] D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5C/step] **
1-105-24 P:OHP
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 150 / 5C/step]
1-105-26 H:TH
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5C/step]
1-105-28 P:TH
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5C/step]
1-105-29 H:Envelop
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5C/step]
1-105-30 P:Envelop
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5C/step]
1-105-31 H: Slow Down
*BCU [ 1 to 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
Fusing temperature must be decreased when the machine changes to a process
speed that is slower than the current process speed (for example, when the speed
changes from 185 mm/s to 62.5 mm/s). The machine idles while reducing the fusing
temperature. When the fusing temperature becomes lower than the ready
temperature, the machine starts printing.
Ready Temperature = Target temperature + Temperature specified in this SP mode.
1-105-32 P: Slow Down
*BCU
[ 1 to 20 / 10 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
1-105-33 H:SP 62.5
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-34 H:SP 125
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-35 H:SP 185
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-36 P:SP 62.5
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-37 P:SP 125
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-38 P:SP 185
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +20 / 1C/step]
** Requires Engine firmware 1.09C or later.
[Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)

Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
1-106-1 Heat Roller
[ 0 to 200 / - / 5C/step]
1-106-2 Pressure Roller
1-106
B147/B149/B190
5-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Paper Size] Tray Paper Size

1-902
1-902-1 Tray 1 A4/LT
*BCU
Specifies the paper size for tray 1.

1-902-2 Tray 2 B4/LG
*BCU

1-902-3 Tray 2 A4/LT
*BCU

1-902-4 Tray 2 B5/LT
*BCU
0: A4 sideways, 1: LT sideways
Tray 1 can only use these two sizes.
US: 1 FA
0: B4 lengthwise, 1: LG lengthwise
This specifies which size is detected for a
sensor output of 1101 (see section 6 for
details).
US: 1 FA
0: A4 lengthwise, 1: LT lengthwise
details).
US: 1 FA
0: LT, 1: B5 lengthwise
details).

[Fusing Idling Time]
Specifies the timer for deciding whether to do fusing idling when receiving a print
command.
When receiving a new job within the time specified in this SP mode after the last job
is completed, fusing idling is not done because the fusing section was already
warmed up during the last job.
1-910-1 Idling Time
*BCU [ 0 to 180 / 1 / 1 minute/step ] DFU
SM
5-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
1-910
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
1-912
1-912-1
1-912-2
1-912-3
1-912-4
1-912-5
1-912-6
1-913
1-913-1
1-913-2
1-913-3
1-913-4
1-913-5
1-913-6
1-913-7
1-913-8
1-913-9
1-913-10
[Machine Temp. Cor.] Machine Temperature Correction

Th: Threshold, Heating or Pressure roller
Corrects the fusing temperature depending on the temperature inside the machine.
If the temperature inside the machine is too high or low, this may cause hot or cold
offset image at the fusing section. To avoid the offset image, the fusing temperature is
corrected depending on the temperature inside machine, which is monitored by the
thermistor located on the right side of the laser optics housing unit.
If the temperature inside the machine is detected as high or low (based on the
settings of SP1-912-001 or 002), the fusing temperature is decreased or increased by
the temperature specified in SP1-912-003 to 006.
Also see SP 1-917-1.
Th:High Temp
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 30 / 1C/step]
Sets the threshold for entering the high temperature condition.
Th:Low Temp
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 17 / 1C/step]
Sets the threshold for entering the low temperature condition.
H:High Temp
*BCU [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1C/step]
Sets the fusing temperature decrease for the high temperature condition.
P:High Temp
*BCU [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1C/step]
H:Low Temp
*BCU [ 0 to 15 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the fusing temperature increase for the low temperature condition.
P:Low Temp
*BCU [ 0 to 15 / 5 / 1C/step]
[Temperature. Cor. 1] Fusing Temperature Correction (Correction Timing)
Specifies the number of sheets to determine whether or not to apply the fusing
temperature correction.
During a multi print job, the fusing temperature tends to slightly overshoot around the
10th sheet and then stabilize. Temperature overshooting may cause the glossiness to
increase.
To minimize the overshooting, both fusing and pressure roller temperatures are
decreased by the amount specified in SP1-914 at the number of sheets specified in
this SP mode, until the end of the job.
The temperatures are decreased in two steps.
Example: 125 mm/s line speed
First step (also called 'Mode 1'): After 5 sheets (SP 1-913-2), temperature drops by
5C (SP 1-914-2).
Second step (also called 'Mode 2'): After 20 sheets (SP 1-913-7), temperature drops
by 10C (SP 1-914-7).
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
Mode 1 185
*BCU
[ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 1 125
*BCU
[ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 1 62.5
*BCU
[ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 1 OHP narrow
*BCU
[ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 1 185 wide
*BCU [ 1 to 255 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 2 185
*BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 2 125
*BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 2 62.5
*BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 2 185 narrow
*BCU [ 1 to 255 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]
Mode 2 185 wide
*BCU [ 1 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step ]
B147/B149/B190
5-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
1-914
1-914-1
1-914-2
1-914-3
1-914-4
1-914-5
1-914-6
1-914-7
1-914-8
1-914-9
1-914-10
[Temperature Cor. 2] Fusing Temperature Correction (Temperature Setting)

Specifies the temperature to be subtracted from the targeted temperatures specified
in SP1-105-4 to-24.
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
Temp 1 185
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step ]
Temp 1 125
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5C /step ]
Temp 1 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step ]
Temp 1 OHP narrow
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5C /step ]
Temp 1 OHP wide
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5C /step ]
Temp 2 185
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5C /step ]
Temp 2 125
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5C /step ]
Temp 2 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 5C /step ]
Temp 2 OHP narrow
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5C /step ]
Temp 2 OHP wide
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 5C /step ]
1-915
[Stand-by Time]
1-915-1 Job Receiving
*BCU
1-916
[Idling Mode]
1-916-1 Mode Set
*BCU
[ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]
0: Off
1: On
Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready just after the
main switch has been turned on.
1-916-2 Idling Time
*BCU [ 10 to 120 / 30 / 10 sec/step ]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed.
1-916-3 PreJob Mode
*BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]
0: Off
1: On
Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready when a print
job arrives at the copier.
1-916-4 Idling Time
*BCU [ 0 to 360 / 0 / 1 sec/step ]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed when special paper is used
and the line speed is 185 mm/s.
SM
5-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
[ 0 to 180 / 60 / 10 seconds/step ]
0: The machine does not shift to the stand-by
mode.
Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode when not receiving a
print start command after receiving a print preparation command.
1-915-2 Job End
*BCU [ 0 to 180 / 30 / 10 seconds/step ]
0: The machine does not shift to the stand-by
mode.
Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode after the last job is
completed.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[OHP/TH Fusing] OHP/Thick Paper Fusing Temperature Correction

(Heating or Pressure Roller)
Specifies the temperature for starting a print job.
The fusing section is already warmed up when the last print job was completed. If
prints are made on OHP or thick paper at this time, the fusing temperature tends to
be higher than the target, causing exit roller marks or a paper jam in the fusing
section.
To prevent this, the print job will not start if the heating and pressure roller
temperatures are higher than the following:
(Target temperature specified by SP1-105-12, -13, -23, -24) - (Temperature specified
by this SP mode (default: 5C for heating roller, 10C for pressure roller))
1-996-4 H:Print Temp
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 5 / 1C /step ]
1-996-5 P:Print Temp
*BCU [ 0 to 20 / 10 / 1C /step ]
1-996-6 PreJob Mode
*BCU
[ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
This SP enables or disables the 30-second fusing unit idling at the start of an OHP
print job. When enabled, idling is done even if the machine is in the ready condition.
1-996
B147/B149/B190
5-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-001
2-001-1
2-001-2
2-001-3
2-001-4
2-001-5
2-001-6
2-001-7
2-001-8
2-001-9
2-001-10
2-001-11
2-001-12
2-001-13
2-001-14
2-001-15
2-001-16
2-001-17
2-101
2-103-1
2-103-2
2-103-3
2-103-4
SM
[Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC or AC component: [Color], Process Speed)
U: Upper, L: Lower
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;
therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3125 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-125,
the values in these SP modes are used for printing.
DC:[K]
*BCU [ 300 to 1000 / 700 / 10 volts/step ] DFU
DC:[Y]
*BCU
DC:[M]
*BCU
DC:[C]
*BCU
Displays the AC component of the charge roller bias adjusted during machine
initialization or process control self-check.
Sets AC bias in the various print modes for test purposes.
If the optimum AC bias cannot be selected because of the upper and lower limits
(SP2-001-10 and 11 for K, SP 2-001-21 and 22 for YMC), this may cause white spots
on images and black spots on background. (In particular, spots may appear if the
room temperature is very low.)
Check the printouts after changing the AC bias with these SP modes (SP2-001-12 to
20) and exiting SP mode. If increasing or decreasing the AC bias for relevant color
solves the spot problem, shift the AC upper and lower limits (SP2-001-10 and 11 for
K, SP 2-001-21 and 22 for YMC) by the value increased or decreased during the test.
NOTE: The AC upper and lower limits have been optimized by the manufacturer;
therefore, these settings should not be adjusted in the field.
AC:[K] 62.5
[ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU
AC:[K] 125
[ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU
AC:[K] 185
[ 0 to 255 / 159 / 1/step ] DFU
AC:[Y] 62.5
[ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU
AC:[Y] 125
[ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU
AC:[M] 62.5
[ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU
AC:[M] 125
[ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU
AC:[C] 62.5
[ 0 to 255 / 40 / 1/step ] DFU
AC:[C] 125
[ 0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU
Sets the upper limit of the AC component adjustable range for black.
During machine initialization and process control self-check, the AC component of the
charge roller bias is automatically adjusted within the range specified by SP2-001-014
through 017.
AC Target [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 255 / 86 / 1/step ] DFU
AC Target [Y]
*BCU [ 0 to 255 / 83 / 1/step ] DFU
AC Target [M]
*BCU [ 0 to 255 / 86 / 1/step ] DFU
AC Target [C]
*BCU [ 0 to 255 / 83 / 1/step ] DFU
[TrimAdjust] Trimming Adjustment
This program adjusts the trimming area (the area in which no image is created).
front
*BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
back
*BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
lead
*BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
trail
*BCU [ 0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
5-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
SP2-XXX (Drum)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-103
2-103-1
2-103-2
2-103-4
2-103-5
2-103-7
2-103-8
2-103-10
2-103-11
2-103-13
2-103-14
2-103-15
2-103-26
2-103-27
2-103-55
2-103-56
2-103-57
2-103-58
2-103-59
2-103-101
2-103-102
2-103-103
2-103-104
2-103-105
2-103-106
2-103-107
2-103-108
2-103-109
2-103-110
[LD Control] LD Power Control

([Color Mode, Color], Process Speed, K or Color mode) P: Power, M: Magnification
Adjusts the laser power by changing the current applied to LD.
Laser power is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting
these data has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default : ON) is activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
P:[K] 62.5 C
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[K] 125 C
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[Y] 62.5 C
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[Y] 125 C
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[M] 62.5 C
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[M] 125 C
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[C] 62.5 C
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[C] 125 C
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 640 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[K] 62.5 K
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[K] 125 K
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[K] 185 K
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 601 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[0 1] 125 K
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 576 / 1/step ] DFU
P:[0 1] 185 K
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 601 / 1/step ] DFU
Main Scan Magnification ([Color], Laser Exposure Frequency)
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the
main scan magnification; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next
line position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5993-013 to 015 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be
effective from the next line position adjustment).
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can
be adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, the
line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
M:[K] 64.3MHz
*BCU [ 0 to 280 / 140 / 1 dot/step ] 1 dot = 20 DFU
M:[Y] 64.3MHz
*BCU
M:[M] 64.3MHz
*BCU
M:[C] 64.3MHz
*BCU
M:[K] 47.6MHz
*BCU
CF:[K,K] 1
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 604 / 1/step ] DFU
CF:[K,K] 2
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 604 / 1/step ] DFU
CF[FC,K]
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU
CF:[FC:Y]
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU
CF:[FC,M]
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU
CF:[FC,C]
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 720 / 1/step ] DFU
CF:[K] OHP/TH
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU
CF:[Y] OHP/TH
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU
CF:[M] OHP/TH
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU
CF:[C] OHP/TH
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / 590 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190
5-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-109
2-109-2
2-109-3
2-109-5
2-109-6
[LD Beam Pitch] LD Beam Pitch

Sets the beam pitch for black in 1200 dpi or 600 dpi mode.
NOTE: After replacing the laser optics housing unit, the data printed on the decal
attached to the new unit must be input with this SP mode.
Pitch 1200
*BCU [ 0 to 255 / 50 / 50 pulse/step ] FA
Pitch 600
*BCU [ 0 to 255 / 42 / 50 pulse/step ] FA
Display 1200
[ 0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step ]
Display 600
[ 0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step ]
[Polygon OFF Timing 1] Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing

2-112
2-112-1 Warming-up
*BCU [ 0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step ]
0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print start command for
the time specified in this SP mode after receiving the print preparation command.
2-112-2 Job End
0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print job for the time
specified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]
[Polygon OFF Timing 2]
Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing
0: Enable, 1: Disable
2-131-1 The polygon mirror motor does not turn on until the copier enters the ready condition
even after receiving the print start command.
NOTE: When a user complains about high frequency noise, enabling this mode can
minimize the noise.
2-201
2-201-1
2-201-2
2-201-3
2-201-4
2-201-5
2-201-6
2-201-7
2-201-8
2-201-9
2-207
2-207-1
2-207-2
2-207-3
2-207-4
SM
[Dev. Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)

Adjusts the development bias.
Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) is
activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
[K] 62.5
*BCU [ 200 to 800 / 500 / 10 V/step ] DFU
[K] 125
*BCU
[K] 185
*BCU
[Y] 62.5
*BCU
[Y] 125
*BCU
[M] 62.5
*BCU
[M] 125
*BCU
[C] 62.5
*BCU
[C] 125
*BCU
[Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
Forces toner to be supplied to the development unit.
The toner supply clutch turns on for 0.7 s and off for 1.3 s.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]
[K]
0: Not execute
[Y]
1: Execute
[M]
[C]
5-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
2-113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-208
2-208-1
2-208-2
2-208-3
2-208-4
2-208-5
2-208-6
2-208-7
2-208-8
2-208-9
2-208-10
2-208-11
2-208-12
2-208-13
2-208-14
2-208-15
2-208-16
2-208-17
2-208-18
2-208-19
2-208-20
2-208-21
2-208-22
2-208-23
2-208-24
2-208-25
[Toner Supply Mode] Toner Supply Mode ([Color])

Selects the toner supply method.
[K]
*BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
[Y]
*BCU 0: Fixed supply (with the supply rates stored
with SP2-208-5 to 8)
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU 1: Fuzzy control supply
2: Proportional control supply (using the Vref
values stored with SP2-224-5 to 8)
Sets the toner supply rate used when the toner supply method (SP2-208-1 to 4) is set
to 0 (fixed supply mode).
Fixed Rate [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step ]
Fixed Rate [Y]
*BCU
Fixed Rate [M]
*BCU
Fixed Rate [C]
*BCU
Specifies the maximum possible toner supply, expressed as a percentage of the
maximum amount of toner that can possibly be supplied for a sheet of paper.
If too much toner is supplied to the development unit especially for black or in the low
humidity condition, this may cause dirty background due to insufficient agitation. This
SP mode limits the maximum possible toner supply for black and only in the low
humidity condition for color.
NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
Upper Limit
*BCU [ 0 to 100 / 63 / 1 %/step ] DFU
#
Adjusts the toner supply amount (fixed rate) when making multiple prints of pages
with low image ratio (coverage).
When printing with a low image ratio, toner concentration is controlled only with Vt
outputs since pixel count is not done for low image ratios. This may cause the
attraction force between toner and carrier to increase, resulting in low image density
on outputs. To prevent this, the machine counts the number of pixels and supplies a
fixed amount of toner if the accumulated number of pixels becomes greater than the
specified level.
*BCU [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step ] DFU
LowCoverage[K]
LowCoverage[Y]
LowCoverage[M]
LowCoverage[C]
Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value is
specified before shipment.
*BCU
[ 0 to 10.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU
Vt Coeff[Bk]
Vt Coeff[Y]
Vt Coeff[M]
Vt Coeff[C]
*BCU
[ 0 to 10.0 / 0.7 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU
Img Coeff[Bk]
Img Coeff[Y]
Img Coeff[M]
Img Coeff[C]
*BCU
[ 0 to 10.0 / 0.1 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU
ImgCrctCoef[Bk]
ImgCrctCoef[Y]
ImgCrctCoef[M]
ImgCrctCoef[C]
B147/B149/B190
5-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-210-5
2-210-6
2-210-7
2-210-8
2-212
2-212-1
2-212-2
2-212-5
2-212-6
2-212-7
2-212-8
2-212-9
2-212-10
2-212-11
2-212-12
2-212-13
2-212-14
2-212-15
SM
[Toner Supply Counter] Toner Supply Counter ([Color])

Displays the total time that the toner supply clutch has been on.
This data is stored in the memory chip on each toner cartridge.
[K]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[Toner Near/End] Toner Near End / End Detection Threshold ([Color])
When the amount of toner amount left in the cartridge becomes less than this value,
the machine starts monitoring the Vt values for toner near end detection.
Start [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 g/step ]
Start [YMC]
*BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner near-end detection.
The machine detects toner near-end when the following happens 10 times
consecutively.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
Near [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 5.0 / 0.4 / 0.1 V/step ]
Near [YMC]
*BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner end detection.
The machine detects toner end when the following happens 10 times consecutively.
Then, the machine stops printing, even during a print job.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
End [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 5.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 V/step ]
End [YMC]
*BCU
Specifies the number of sheets with full image coverage that can be printed after
toner near-end has been detected.
When near-end is detected, the pixels in the images are counted. The machine
detects toner end when the following happens, and the machine stops printing even
during a print job.
image coverage
Pixel count = 5 A4/LT sheets with full
NOTE: The setting of SP2-212-11 has priority for deciding when to stop printing.
Pixel [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step ]
Pixel [YMC]
*BCU
Specifies the minimum number of sheets that can be printed after toner near-end has
been detected.
However, when the following happens 10 consecutive times, the machine stops
printing even during a print job or if this guaranteed minimum has not been met.
Vt > Current Vref value + 1.2V or Vt > 4.8V
Min. Print
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]
Displays the average signal value of the toner end sensor. Printed images can be
weak when the value is larger.
Each toner sensor detects the toner that is falling through the toner path beneath the
toner cartridge. Each sensor outputs 0 when it detects toner in the toner path, or
outputs 1 when it does not detect toner. The signal is 1 if toner is not passing
through the path even though the toner cartridge contains toner. These signals, 0
and 1, are periodically checked and used to calculate the signal average. When
enough toner is in the cartridge, the signal average is a smaller value (0 or its
vicinity). When toner is insufficient, the average is a larger value (1 or its vicinity).
*BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01/step ]
sensor avg [K]
sensor avg [Y]
sensor avg [M]
sensor avg [C]
5-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
2-210
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Toner End ON/OFF] Toner End Detection ON/OFF

Enables or disables toner near-end and end detection (if disabled, the toner supply
clutch on time is still counted).
Use this SP only when tests are necessary under the toner end or toner near end
condition. Specify the default value after the tests.
2-213-1 T End ON/OFF
*BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric, DFU
#
0: Both sensors disabled
1: Both sensors enabled
2: Toner end sensor disabled and TD sensor
enabled
2-213
[TD Vcnt Control] TD Sensor Vcnt Control

2-223
2-223-1 Initialization
*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Vcnt Auto Adjustment when detecting a new development
unit.
When the machine detects a new development unit, developer initialization
automatically starts. During the developer initialization, Vcnt is automatically adjusted
so that Vt is within 3.0 0.1V.
2-223-2 Humidity
*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Humidity Auto Correction. This corrects the Vcnt value for the
current humidity. This correction is applied to both the Vcnt values automatically
adjusted during developer initialization and manually adjusted with SP2-224-1 to 4.
If this correction does not work well under certain environmental conditions or due to
a defective humidity sensor, deactivate the Humidity Auto Correction and adjust the
Vcnt value in SP2-224-1 to 4 (by trial and error).
2-223-3 Toner Fill Up
*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU
0: Deactivate
1: Activate
Activates or deactivates the Toner Fill Up mode, which fills up the toner supply tube
with toner during developer initialization.
This function is required only at machine installation. Although the default is 0, the
factory setting is 1. After toner fill-up occurs during machine installation, the setting
is changed to 0 automatically.
B147/B149/B190
5-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-224-1
2-224-2
2-224-3
2-224-4
2-224-5
2-224-6
2-224-7
2-224-8
2-301
[Vcnt / Vref] Vcnt / Vref ([Color])

Adjusts the Vcnt value manually.
The value in this SP mode is effective until after the next process control self-check.
To always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode
with SP2-208-1 to 4.
*BCU [ 0 to 22.0 / 10.0 / 0.1 V/step ] FA
Vcnt [K]
#
Vcnt [Y]
Vcnt [M]
Vcnt [C]
Adjusts the Vref value manually.
The value in this SP mode is effective until the next process control self-check. To
always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode with
SP2-208-1 to 4.
Vref [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 5.0 / 2.8 / 0.1 V/step ]
Vref [Y]
*BCU
Vref [M]
*BCU
Vref [C]
*BCU
[Transfer Current]
([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper
Adjusts the transfer current for each color and each print mode.
NOTE: If the transfer current is increased too much, image offset may occur
especially in halftone areas.
[K]P S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 A/step ]
[K]P S 185
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 A/step ]
[K]P D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 16 / 1 A/step ]
[K]P D 185
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 1 A/step ]
[K]B S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 A/step ]
[K]B S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 A/step ]
[K]B S 185
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]P S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]P S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]P S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]P S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]P S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]P S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]P S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]P S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]P D 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]P D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]P D 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]P D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]P D 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]P D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]P D 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]P D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
2-301-1
2-301-2
2-301-3
2-301-4
2-301-5
2-301-6
2-301-7
2-301-8
2-301-9
2-301-10
2-301-11
2-301-12
2-301-13
2-301-14
2-301-15
2-301-16
2-301-17
2-301-18
2-301-19
2-301-20
2-301-21
2-301-22
2-30123
2-301- [FC,K]B S 62.5
24
2-301-25 [FC,K]B S 125
SM
*BCU
[ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
*BCU
[ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 A/step ]
5-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
2-224
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-301
2-301-26
2-301-27
2-301-28
2-301-29
2-301-30
2-301-31
2-301-32
2-301-33
2-301-34
2-301-35
2-301-36
2-301-37
2-301-38
2-301-39
2-301-40
2-301-41
2-301-42
2-301-43
2-301-44
2-301-45
2-301-46
2-301-47
2-301-48
2-301-49
2-301-50
2-301-51
2-301-52
2-301-57
2-301-58
2-301-59
2-301-60
2-301-61
2-301-62
2-301-63
2-301-64
2-301-65
2-301-66
2-301-67
2-301-68
2-301-69
2-301-70
2-301-71
2-301-72
[Transfer Current]
([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper
[FC,Y]B S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]B S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]B S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]B S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]B S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]B S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[K]OHP 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]OHP 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]OHP 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 11 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]OHP 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]OHP 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step ]
[K]TH R62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]TH R62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]TH R62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]TH R62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]TH R62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[K]SP S62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 8 / 1 A/step ]
[K]SP S125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 A/step ]
[K]SP S185
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 22 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]SP S62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]SP S62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]SP 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]SP 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]SP 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 13 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]SP 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]SP 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]SP 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[K]TH S62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]TH S62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]TH S62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]TH S62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]TH S62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[K]SP D62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[K]SP D125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 16 / 1 A/step ]
[K]SP D185
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]SP D62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]SP D62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]SP D62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]SP D62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,K]SP D125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,Y]SP D125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,M]SP D125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[FC,C]SP D125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
B147/B149/B190
5-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-309
2-309-5
2-309-6
2-309-7
2-309-8
2-309-9
2-309-10
[Current Paper Size] Transfer Current - Paper Size Correction

Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, OHP
Corrects the transfer current for paper size.
When small paper is used for printing, the transfer current flows to the drum at the
non image areas where the transfer belt touches the OPC drum. This may cause an
abnormal image due to insufficient current at the image areas.
NOTE: Increase only when an abnormal image (insufficient image transfer) occurs on
a small paper size. However, increasing the current too much may cause
image offset.
N LT SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]
N A5 SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.8 / 0.1/step ]
TH LT SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step ]
TH A5 SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]
OHP LT SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step ]
OHP A5 SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 4.0 / 0.1/step ]
[Transfer Ctrl] Transfer Control

2-402
2-402-1 C Mode Posit
*BCU [ 0 to 500 / 170 / 10/step ] DFU
Adjusts the transfer belt position for color printing.
SP2-402-1 is valid only when auto correct (SP2-402-2) is disabled ( 6.7.5).
2-402-2 Auto Correct
*BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step ] DFU
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enable or disable the auto-adjustment of the transfer belt position.
SP2-402-2 validates the setting of SP2-402-1, but does not affect the setting of
SP2-402-3.
2-402-3 Bk Mode Posit
*BCU [ 0 to 500 / 130 / 10/step ] DFU
Adjusts the transfer belt position for monochrome printing.
SP2-402-3 is always valid regardless of the setting in SP2-402-2.
SM
5-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
When SP2-402-2 is enabled, the transfer belt position for color printing is decided in
accordance with the result of the initialization processing ( 6.7.5).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-801
2-801-6
2-801-7
2-801-8
2-801-9
2-801-14
2-801-15
2-801-16
2-801-17
2-801-18
2-801-19
2-801-20
2-801-21
2-801-22
2-801-23
2-801-24
2-801-25
2-802
2-802-1
2-802-2
2-802-3
2-802-4
2-802-5
2-802-6
[PA Roller Current] Paper Attraction Roller Current

([Color], Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed): Current Adjustment
(Paper or By-pass): Paper Size Correction
Adjusts the paper attraction roller current for color printing.
If paper misfeeds occur at the transfer unit in color mode, check and/or adjust the
paper attraction roller current.
NOTE: The magenta development section is close to the paper attraction roller.
Decreasing the current may not cause paper misfeed.
If the current is increased too much, the following image problems may occur
depending on the humidity.
High humidity:
Insufficient image transfer in magenta due to current flow to the magenta OPC drum
Low humidity:
Offset image in magenta halftone areas due to paper charged positive too much
When adjusting the current with this SP mode, the value should be lower than transfer
current.
[FC] S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step ]
[FC] S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step ]
[FC] D 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 A/step ]
[FC] D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step ]
[K] B TH S
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]
[FC] B TH S
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
[K] B OHP
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]
[FC] B OHP
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
[K] B TH D
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 5 / 0.1/step ]
[FC] B TH D
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
[K] SP S
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 8 / 0.1/step ]
[K] SP D
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 12 / 0.1/step ]
[FC] SP S 62.5
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
[FC] SP S 125
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
[FC] SP D 62.5
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
[FC] SP D 125
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 1 / 0.1/step ]
[PA Current Paper Size] Paper Attraction Roller Current - Paper Size Correction
Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, OHP
Adjusts the correction, depending on the paper size.
When small-width paper is used for printing, the paper attraction roller current flows to
the non-image areas of OPC drum where the transfer belt touches the drum. This
may cause paper misfeed due to insufficient current.
To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to 1.5.
NOTE: Adjust only when a paper misfeed occurs with a small paper size. Increasing
the current too much may cause image offset in magenta halftone areas.
N LT SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step ]
N A5 SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step ]
TH LT SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step ]
TH A5 SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step ]
OHP LT SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 2.4 / 0.1/step ]
OHP A5 SEF
*BCU [ 1.0 to 4.0 / 4.0 / 0.1/step ]
B147/B149/B190
5-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Mirror Motor] Mirror Positioning Motor ([Color])

mirror position, which corrects the optically skewed image; however, this will be
automatically corrected at the next line position adjustment.
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be
adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,
the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
2-908-2 [C]
*BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 pulse/step ] DFU
2-908-3 [M]
*BCU
2-908-4 [Y]
*BCU
2-908
2-909-1
2-909-2
2-909-3
2-909-4
2-916
2-916-1
2-916-2
2-916-3
2-916-4
2-916-5
2-916-6
2-916-7
2-916-8
2-916-9
2-916-10
[Main-scan Reg.] Main-scan Registration ([Color])

main scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line
position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-010
to 012 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the
next line position adjustment.
1 dot = 20
[Y]
*BCU [ -500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[K]
*BCU
[Sub-scan Reg.] Sub-scan Registration ([Color Mode, Color], Resolution)
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the sub
scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line position
adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-016 to 021
(this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the next
line position adjustment.
600 dpi: 1 dot = 40, 1200dpi: 1 dot = 20
[K] 1200
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 7510 / 1 dot ] DFU
[FC,K] 1200
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 15038 / 1 dot ] DFU
[FC,Y] 1200
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 10402 / 1 dot ] DFU
[FC,M] 1200
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 1136 / 1 dot ] DFU
[FC,C] 1200
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 5762 / 1 dot ] DFU
[K] 600
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 3755 / 1 dot ] DFU
[FC,K] 600
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 7519 / 1 dot ] DFU
[FC,Y] 600
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 5201 / 1 dot ] DFU
[FC,M] 600
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 568 / 1 dot ] DFU
[FC,C] 600
*BCU [ 0 to 20000 / 2881 / 1 dot ] DFU
[Main Scan Lgth Det] Main-scan Length Detection

Enables or disables the main-scan length detection.
2-919-1 MScan Lgth D
0: Disable
1: Enable
2-919
SM
5-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
2-909
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2-994
2-994-1
2-994-2
2-994-3
2-994-4
[Main Scan Reg Cor] Main-scan Registration Correction ([Color])

Not used. DFU
[Y]
[M]
[C]
[K]
[Motor Reset] Mirror Positioning Motor Reset

Rotates the mirror position motors (CMY) by 250 pulses clockwise; then by 125
pulses counterclockwise. This moves the mirrors back to the initial position. Then, the
settings of SP2-908-002 to 004 are reset to 0.
When the line position adjustment fails, it is one of possible causes when the mirror
position motor locks. Performing this SP mode can move the mirrors back to the
original position if it locks. Then, do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993002).
2-995-1 Motor Reset
*BCU
2-995
B147/B149/B190
5-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP3-XXX (Process)
3-005
3-005-1
3-005-2
3-005-3
3-005-4
3-005-5
3-005-6
[TD Initial] TD Sensor Initialization ([Color])

[K]
Initializes the developer. DFU
[Y]
[M]
[C]
[All Color]
Result
*BCU [ 1 to 9 / - / - ]
1: Success
2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result.
All colors are displayed. Values is displayed in the order K Y C M.
e.g., 1 1 2 1: Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded
See the troubleshooting section for details.
3-006
[Vcnt Initial] Vcnt Initial Setting Display ([Color])

Displays the initial Vcnt value.
[K]
*BCU [ 0 to 240 / 100 / 0.1/step ]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
3-007
3-007-1
3-007-2
3-007-3
3-007-4
[Vcnt Current] Vcnt Current Value Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vcnt value.
[K]
*BCU [ 0 to 240 / - / 0.1/step ]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
Service
Tables
3-006-1
3-006-2
3-006-3
3-006-4
3-008
[Humidity]
3-008-1 Humidity
*BCU [ 0 to 100 / - / 1/step ]
Displays the humidity measured by the humidity/temperature sensor.
SM
5-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Vsg Display] Vsg Display (Front or Rear)

3-107
3-107-1 Vsg Front
*BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]
Displays the Vsg value of the front ID sensor.
Vsg is normally 4.0 0.5 V.
If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, it
leads to SC385.
3-107-2 LED Current Front
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]
Displays the ID sensor LED current adjusted during Vsg adjustment.
3-107-3 Vsg Center
*BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]
Displays the Vsg value of the center ID sensor.
leads to SC385.
3-107-4 LED Current Center
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]
3-107-5 Vsg Rear
*BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]
Displays the Vsg value of the rear ID sensor.
leads to SC385.
3-107-6 LED Current Rear
*BCU [ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]
3-107-7 Vsg avg bk
*BCU [ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]
Displays the average black Vsg value of the center ID sensor.
3-120
3-120-1
3-120-2
3-120-3
3-120-4
3-121
3-121-1
3-121-2
3-121-3
3-121-4
3-122
3-122-1
3-122-2
3-122-3
3-122-4
[Dev. Gamma Target] Development Gamma Target ([Color])

Adjusts the development gamma by changing the Vref value used for toner density
control.
Vref is automatically corrected so that the gamma measured during the process
control self-check becomes the value set with this SP mode 0.15
[K]
*BCU [ 1.00 to 3.00 / 1.90 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step ] DFU
[Y]
*BCU [ 1.00 to 3.00 / 1.65 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step ] DFU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[Dev. Gamma Display] Development Gamma Display ([Color])
Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check.
[K]
*BCU [ 0 to 10 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV /step ]
[Y]
*BCU Normal Range: 1.00 to 2.00
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[Vk Display] Vk Display ([Color])
Displays the current Vk value.
[K]
*BCU
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
B147/B149/B190
[ -255 to 255 / - / 1 V/step ]

Normal Range: -50 to 50
5-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 01/2005
3-123
3-123-1
3-123-2
3-123-3
3-123-4
[Vref Display] Current Vref Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vref value.
[K]
*BCU [ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
3-125
[Process Control]
3-125-1 ON/OFF
*BCU
Enables or disables process control.

3-125-2 LD Control
*BCU
[ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: Fixed (at the value in SP2-103)
1: Controlled by process control
2: Controlled by LD power selection
Selects the LD control mode.

3-125-3 Auto TD Adj.
*BCU
0: Disable
NOTE: The words seen on
1: Initial & Non-use self-check
the display are indicated in
2: Job End & Non-use self-check
Italics.
3: Initial & Job End & Non-use self-check
Specifies when to perform the Auto Toner Density Adjustment. When performing the
Auto Toner Density Adjustment, the machine supplies or consumes toner so that the
development gamma is within 0.15 of the gamma target.
Change if the customer complains of toner density fluctuations. Before changing the
setting away from 0, check whether the forced TD adjustment (3-126-2) is effective. If
the problem is persistent, then change to 1, 2, or 3. However, the machine takes
several minutes to do this adjustment.
3-125-4 ACC
*BCU [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step ]
0: Disable
1: Process Control Self-check
2: Auto TD Adjustment & Process Control Selfcheck
Enables or disables the process control self-check before printing the ACC pattern.
NOTE: If color balance changes during multi-copy runs after ACC is performed, select
1 or 2. Setting 2 can precisely adjust the image density; however, it takes about 6
minutes. Select 1 or 2 depending on the customers requirement.
3-125-5 TD Adj. Cndtn
*BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Unconditional
1: Conditional
Specifies whether temperature and humidity are taken into account when deciding the
timing of the auto toner density adjustment (described in SP 3-125-3).
Timing for the auto toner density adjustment is determined by the setting of SP3-125003. In addition, if SP 3-125-5 is set to 1, the auto toner density adjustment is done
when the temperature and humidity meet specified conditions (same conditions as
used for transfer current correction).
Specify 1 when both temperature and humidity are both high or low.
SM
5-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: OFF (Use the fixed values for VD, VL and
VB set with SP2-001, SP2-103, and SP2-201.)
1: ON
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-125
[Process Control]
3-125-6 TD Adj. Times
*BCU [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
Limits the number of auto toner density adjustments.
The auto toner density adjustment consists of three steps: detecting the development
gamma, supplying or consuming toner, and detecting the development gamma again.
When these three steps are all complete, it means a single auto toner density
adjustment is complete.
3-126
[Forced Self Check] Forced Self-check
3-126-1 Forced Self Check
Performs a forced process control self-check.
3-126-2 Forced TD Adj.
Performs a forced auto toner density
adjustment.
3-902
3-902-1
3-902-2
3-902-3
3-902-4
3-902-5
3-902-6
3-902-7
3-902-8
3-903
3-903-1
3-903-2
3-903-3
3-903-4
3-903-5
3-903-6
3-903-7
3-903-8
3-904
3-904-1
3-904-2
3-904-3
3-904-4
3-904-5
3-904-6
3-904-7
3-904-8
[Pointer Display] Pointer Table Display ([Color])

Displays the number in the pointer table that was selected during the latest process
control self-check.
Printer [K]
*BCU [ 1 to 30 / - / 1/step ]
Printer [Y]
*BCU
Printer [M]
*BCU
Printer [C]
*BCU
CF [K]
*BCU
CF [Y]
*BCU
CF [M]
*BCU
CF [C]
*BCU
[M/A Target] M/A Target ([Color])
Adjusts the M/A (Mass per Area, mg/cm2) value used during the process control selfcheck.
Adjusting this changes the development bias. This causes the solid ID to increase or
decrease. If developer capability causes an ID problem, toner density needs to be
adjusted with SP3-120-1 to 4, depending on the color.
Printer [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 1.50 / 0.60 / 0.05 mg/cm2 /step ] DFU
Printer [Y]
*BCU
Printer [M]
*BCU
Printer [C]
*BCU
CF [K]
*BCU
CF [Y]
*BCU
CF [M]
*BCU
CF [C]
*BCU
[M/A for LD] M/A Target for LD Correction ([Color])
Adjusts the M/A value used during the LD correction mode. This value is effective
when SP3-125-2 LD Control Selection is set to 2.
Adjusting this data effects the image reproduction especially in highlight areas.
Printer [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 0.10 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
Printer [Y]
Printer [M]
*BCU
Printer [C]
*BCU
CF [K]
CF [Y]
CF [M]
*BCU
CF [C]
*BCU
B147/B149/B190
5-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3-905-1
3-905-2
3-905-3
3-905-4
3-905-5
3-905-6
3-905-7
3-905-8
[M/A Target]
Adjusts the target amount of each toner on paper sheets.
These values are optimized before shipment. Do not change the values. Changing
these values does not affect toner density on paper sheets.
Intrvl [K]
Intrvl [Y]
*BCU
Intrvl [M]
*BCU
Intrvl [C]
*BCU
Displays the amount of each toner on the paper.
A problem may have occurred in the copier engine if the value is high or low (i.e., if
the difference between SP3-905-1/2/3/4 and SP3-5/6/7/8 is larger than 0.03
mg/cm2).
Possible problems: Defective TD sensor, defective ID sensor, toner near-end (if the
value is lower than the target), defective toner supply mechanism
Intrvl [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 1.500 / - / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]
Intrvl [Y]
*BCU
Intrvl [M]
*BCU
Intrvl [C]
*BCU
[PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks

3-906
3-906-1 Job End
*BCU [ 0 to 999 / 200 / 1 print/step ]
Specifies the execution timing of the job end process control self-check.
The job end process control self-check is automatically done after a job is completed
when 200 prints have been made since the last self-check.
The counter for the job end process control self-check resets when one of the
following process control self-checks is done.
Initial
Interval: Interrupt
Non-use Time
During Toner End
When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient in
SP3-906-5.
3-906-2 Interrupt
*BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step ]
Specifies the execution timing of the interrupt process control self-check.
The interrupt process control self-check is automatically done if the number of prints
in the job exceeds the number set in this SP mode. When the print job is completed,
the counter is reset, even if the interrupt self check did not occur.
When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient in
SP3-906-5.
3-906-3 Non-use Time 1
*BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step ]
0: Disable
Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.
The non-use time process control self-check is automatically done after the number of
prints set with this SP mode have been made and no prints have been made for the
time set with SP mode 3-906-4 since the last print job.
If the conditions are met, the self-check will be done after the print job is completed.
The counter is reset when the initial process control self-checks is done or when a
print is made.
3-906-4 Non-use Time 2
*BCU [ 0 to 2550 / 480 / 10 minutes/step ]
0: Disable
Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.
SM
5-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
3-905
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks
3-906
3-906-5 K Coefficient
*BCU [ 0 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step ] DFU
Sets the coefficient to calculate the counter value for black-and-white prints.
With the default setting (100), counters used for process control count up by 1 when 1
black-and-white print has been made.
[Vmin Display] Vmin Display ([Color])
3-910
3-910-1 [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01/step ]
Displays the current Vmin value for K
3-910-2 [Color]
*BCU [ 0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01/step ]
Displays the lowest current Vmin value for the colors (CMY).
3-911
3-911-1
3-911-2
3-911-3
3-911-4
3-912
3-912-1
3-912-2
3-912-3
3-912-4
3-913
3-913-1
3-913-2
3-913-3
3-913-4
[Vt Current Display] Vt Current Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vt value.
[K]
*BCU [ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[Vt Average Display] Vt Average Display ([Color])
Displays the average Vt value.
[K]
*BCU [ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[Tonver Supply Time] Toner Supply Time Display ([Color])
Displays the toner supply clutch on time for the most recent page.
[K]
*BCU [ 0 to 5000 / - / 10 ms/step ]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
B147/B149/B190
5-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3-920
[OPC Refresh]
3-920-1 Temperature
*BCU [ 10 to 30 / 25 / 1C /step ]
This SP determines the temperature threshold for determining whether refresh mode
is done just after the machine is switched on.
The charge roller generates NOx (nitrogen oxides), and these contaminate the OPC
drum surface and may cause a smeared image.
Just after the main switch is turned on, if the temperature measured by both the
thermistor located at the right side on the laser optics housing unit and the
temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the temperature specified in this SP
mode, refresh mode is done before initial process control.
During refresh mode, toner is developed on the OPC with 50V development potential
and cleaned to remove NOx. This cycle is repeated a few times.
3-920-2 Humidity
*BCU [ 10 to 90 / 75 / 1%/step ]
This SP determines the humidity threshold for determining whether refresh mode is
done just after the machine is switched on.
Just after the main switch is turned on, if the humidity measured by the
temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the humidity specified in this SP mode,
refresh mode is done before the initial process control self-check.
3-920-3 Prints
*BCU [ 10 to 2550 / 200 / 10 prints/step ]
Specifies how often refresh mode is done.
When the total number of prints since the last refresh mode exceeds the number
specified in this SP mode, refresh mode is done before the job end process control
self-check.
3-920-4 Mode Set
0: Disabled
1: Done at power on and toner end recovery
2: Done at power on, toner end recovery, and
after the specified number of prints.
Enables/disables refresh mode.
NOTE: Refresh mode is done during the toner end recovery self-check after a new
toner cartridge is installed.
3-920-5 Forced
Executes a forced refresh mode.
Use this mode when the image is smeared. It takes about 1 minute.
Also use after replacing the components of the transfer unit (see section 3).
3-920-6 Auto Toner Refresh
*BCU
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
(Auto Toner Refresh)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Performs a toner refresh during the OPC refresh mode by changing the development
bias from 50V to 400V.
Enable this SP mode when dirty background and/or firefly spots appear intermittently
on prints with a low image area ratio.
While making prints with a low image area ratio, developer is agitated with less toner
supplied. This may cause the toner-carrier attraction force to increase or toner to
coagulate.
This sometimes causes firefly spots or dirty background when a large amount of toner
is supplied.
NOTE: When enabling this SP mode, the following SP modes should be changed.
SP3-906-001 Job End Process Control Self-check
200 (Default) -> 100
SP3-920-003 OPC Refresh Mode / Prints
200 (Default) -> 100
SM
5-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Forced Toner Refresh] Forced Toner Refresh

Perform forced toner refresh mode.
When the developer has deteriorated or when prints are made in a very low humidity
condition, dirty background may appear continuously.
When this kind of dirty background appears, check whether or not the development
gamma is within the target (SP3-120 and 121). If the development gamma is not
within the target, do this SP mode.
The machine automatically does the toner refresh mode in the following sequence.
1. Consumes toner in the development unit without toner supply until toner end is
detected
NOTE: If toner is drastically consumed for a short time, this may cause carrier to flow
out. To prevent this, toner is consumed over a long period of time. (It takes about 20
minutes to complete this toner refresh mode).
3-921-1 K
3-921-2 All Color
3-921
3-922
[OPC Refresh2]
Specifies when the OPC refresh is executed for CMY drums, which forcibly creates a
temporary 15mm-wide toner line on the drum surface by applying the development
bias (200V) and turning on the development clutch at the end of a job.
Note that this OPC refresh is a separate process from the one controlled by SP 3-920
and 3-921.
3-922-1 Mode Set
*BCU [ 0 2 / 1 / 1 /step ]
0: Disable (OPC refresh is not executed.)
1: Low coverage (OPC refresh is executed
after an output of low coverage ratio.)
2: Every time (OPC refresh is executed after
every job.)
[P Control Result] Process Control Self-check Result
Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.
All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order K Y C M
e.g., 1 1 9 1: The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successful
See the troubleshooting section for details
3-975-1 P Ctrl Result
*BCU [ 0 to 9999 / - / 1/step ]
3-975
B147/B149/B190
5-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
4-008
[SubScanMagnification] Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment

Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
4-008-1 SubScanMagnification
*CTL [ -1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step ] FA
[Leading Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the subscan direction.
4-010-1 Leading Edge Reg.
*CTL [ -3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
4-010
[Side-to-Side Reg.] Side-to-Side registration Adjustment

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main
scan direction.
4-011-1 Side-to-Side Reg.
*CTL [ -6.0 to 6.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
4-011
4-012-1
4-012-2
4-012-3
4-012-4
[Blank Margin] Blank Margin Adjustment

Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale.
*CTL [ 0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
Leading Edge
Trailing Edge
Left
Right
4-013
[Scanner Free Run]

Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
4-013-1 Lamp: OFF
4-013-2 Lamp: ON
4-017
[Scan Operation]
Makes one scan with generating an F-Gate signal and shading on or off in the
following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
Uses this SP mode to check if the F-Gate signal is properly generated (F-Gate tells
the engine to start printing data).
4-017-1 Shading ON
4-017-2 Shading OFF
SM
5-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
4-012
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-205
[Black ADS Level] DFU
4-205-1 Black ADS Level
*CTL
Do not change the setting. Use SP4-460.
4-301
[APS Operation Check]

Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors.
(See Input Check Table.)
4-301-1 APS Operation Check
4-303
[APS A5size Detection]

Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all
OFF.
4-303-1 APS A5size Check
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: No original
1: A5 Lengthwise
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: A/B
1: 8K/16K
4-305-1 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
4-305
*BCU
[8K/16K Detection]
4-417
[IPU Test Pattern]

Selects the IPU test pattern.
4-417-1 IPU Test Pattern
B147/B149/B190
[ 0 to 16 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Scanned image
1: Grid pattern
2: Slant grid pattern
3: Gradation main scan1
4: Gradation sub scan1
5: Gradation RBGYMCK
6: UCR pattern
7: Color patch 16 (1)
8: Color patch 16 (2)
9: Color patch 64
10: Grid pattern YMCK
11: Color patch YMCK
12: Gray pattern (1)
13: Gray pattern (2)
14: Gradation main scan2
15: Scanned + Grid pattern
16: Scanned + Gray scale
5-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Saturation Adj.] Saturation Adjustment

Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.
4-440-1 Saturation Adj.
*
[ 0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step ]
CTL 0: High
1: Lowest
2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest
4-440
*BCU [ 0 to 128 / 10 / 1 step]

4-460
[Digital Black ADS Level]
4-460-1 Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode.
[Printer V]
R:K
R:C
R:M
R:Y
Y:K
Y:C
Y:M
Y:Y
G:K
G:C
G:M
G:Y
C:K
C:C
C:M
C:Y
B:K
B:C
B:M
B:Y
M:K
M:C
M:M
M:Y
*CTL
[ -127 to 128 / 1 / 1/step]

Specifies the printer vector correction value.
Service
Tables
4-540
4-540-1
4-540-2
4-540-3
4-540-4
4-540-5
4-540-6
4-540-7
4-540-8
4-540-9
4-540-10
4-540-11
4-540-12
4-540-13
4-540-14
4-540-15
4-540-16
4-540-17
4-540-18
4-540-19
4-540-20
4-540-21
4-540-22
4-540-23
4-540-24
[R Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Red

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
4-628-1 R EVEN
4-628-2 R ODD
4-628
SM
5-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-629
4-629-1
4-629-2
4-629-3
4-629-4
[G Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Green

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
G EVEN
controller for Green.
G ODD
G BK EVEN
G BK ODD
[B Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Blue

4-630
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
4-630-1 B EVEN
controller for Blue.
4-630-2 B ODD
[R Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Red (Last Adjustment)
4-661
*BCU This program displays the previous result of
4-661-1 R EVEN
SP4-628.
4-661-2 R ODD
[G Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Green (Last Adjustment)
4-662
*BCU This program displays the previous result of
4-661-1 G EVEN
SP4-629.
4-661-2 G ODD
[B Gain Display (Last Adjust)] Gain Adjustment Blue (Last Adjustment)
4-663
*
4-661-1 B EVEN
This program displays the previous result of
BCU SP4-630.
4-661-2 B ODD
[Reference Adj.: R] Reference Adjustment Red DFU

4-685
4-685-1 Reference Adj.: R
*BCU Do not change the setting. Use SP4-885.
[Reference Adj.: G] Reference Adjustment Green DFU

4-686
4-686-1 Reference Adj.: G
*BCU Do not change the setting. Use SP4-886.
[Reference Adj.: B] Reference Adjustment Blue DFU

4-687
4-687-1 Reference Adj.: B
*CTL Do not change the setting. Use SP4-887.
B147/B149/B190
5-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[DF: Density Adj.] DF Density Adjustment

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is
different.
4-688-1 DF: Density Adj.
*CTL [ 83 to 100 / 86 / 1 %/ step ]
4-688
4-800
[DF: Density Correction]

Sets a coefficient to adjust the image density level when scanning an image with the
ARDF.
4-800-1 R
*CTL [ -20 to 20 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU
4-800-2 G
4-800-3 B
4-885
[Level Convert Adj.: R]
*BCU
[ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]
4-885-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of red.

4-886
[Level Convert Adj.: G]
*BCU
[ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]
4-886-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of green.

4-887
[Level Convert Adj.: B]
*BCU
[ -128 to 127 / 49 / 1/step]
4-903
[Ver. Line Correct]
*CTL
Service
Tables
4-887-1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of blue.

[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
4-903-1 This SP selects the level of the vertical line correction. The vertical line can occur
while the ARDF is feeding the originals from the original tray.
0: Deactivated
1: Very low
2: Low
3: High
4: Very highl
SM
5-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-904
[Scanner IPU Test]
4-904-1 Test1:Register Access
00: OK
11, 12, 13, 14, 15: NG
Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and displays
the result.
4-904-2 Test2: Image Path
00: OK
21, 22, 23, 24, 25: NG
Performs an image path check on the scanner IPU board and displays the result.
4-905
[Dither Selection]
Changes the parameters for error diffusion.
4-905-1 Dither Selection
*CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU
4-907
[VPU Test Pattern]
4-907-1 Test Pattern: R
[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]
0: Default (Scanned Image)
1: Cyan pattern
2: White pattern
3: Cyan Pattern 16 steps
4: Line pattern
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.
4-907-2 Test Pattern: G
[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]
1: Magenta pattern
2: White pattern
3: Magenta Pattern 16 steps
4: Line pattern
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.
4-907-3 Test Pattern: B
[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]
1: Yellow pattern
2: White pattern
3: Yellow Pattern 16 steps
4: Line pattern
Selects the test pattern generated by the scanner IPU board.
4-918
[Manual Gamma Adj.]
4-918-9 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
See Replacement and Adjustment Gamma Correction Copy Mode for how to
use.
*CTL [ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step ]
Offset: Highlight
Offset: Middle
Offset: Shadow
Offset: IDmax
Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
*CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step ] DFU
Option: Highlight
Option: Middle
Option: Shadow
Option: IDmax
B147/B149/B190
5-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4-932
4-932-1
4-932-2
4-932-3
4-932-4
4-999
[Dot Position Cor.] Main Scan Dot Position Correction

Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD.
For details on this adjustment, see Replacement and Adjustment Image Adjustment
- Scanner
*CTL [ 0 to 9 / 5 / 1 /step ]
R: Left
R: Right
B: Left
B: Right
[ADF Scan Glass Dust Check]
4-999-1 Check ON/OFF Change

4-999-2 Detect Level
*CTL
0: OFF/1: ON)
[ 0 to 8 / 5 / 1 /step ]
Service
Tables
0: Lowest 8: Highest
SM
5-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP5-XXX (Mode)
5-024
[mm/inch Display Selection]

Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
5-024-1 mm/inch display
*CTL 0: mm (Europe/Asia)
1: inch (USA)
5-045
[Counter Method]
Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.
NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the
counter value is negative or positive.
5-045-1 Counter Method
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Developments
1: Prints
5-046
[Rom Update Display]

Enables or disables the ROM Update utility. When enabled, this utility will be
displayed in the user program mode.
5-046-1 ROM Update
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 1 /- ] DFU
0: Enable
1: Disable
5-104
[A3/DLT Double Count]

Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for A3/DLT size prints.
5-104-1 Double Count
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Normal count
1: Double count
*CTL
5-113
[Optional Counter Type]
5-113-1 This program specifies the counter type.
0: None
1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
3: Prepaid card
4: Coin rack
8: Key counter + Vendor
*CTL
5-118
[Disable Copying]
5-118-1 This program disables copying.
2: Key card (down)

5: MF key card
9: Bar-code Printer
[0: Not disabled/1: Disabled]
*CTL [0: Yes (removed)/1: Standby (installed but not

Mode Clear Opt. Counter
used)/2: No (not removed)]
Removal
5-120-1 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or
remove an optional counter, check the settings.
5-120
*CTL [0: Feed/1: Exit]

5-121
Counter Up Timing
5-121-1 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to paper feed
and paper exit respectively.
*CTL
5-127
APS Mode
5-127-1 This program disables the APS.
B147/B149/B190
[0: Not disabled/1: Disabled]
5-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-128
Code Mode With Key/Card Option
5-128-1 DFU
*CTL
5-131
Paper Size Type Selection *CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: USA /2: ERP (Europe)]
5-131-1 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB
system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
5-150
5-150-1
By-Pass Length Setting

*CTL 0: Off, 1: On
Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited
to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
*CTL [0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]

5-162
App. Switch Method
5-162-1 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
*CTL
Page Numbering
This program adjusts the position of the page numbers.
5-212-3 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position
[0 99 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
5-212-4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position
[0 99 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
5-212
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
NA :-300 (New York)
EU :+ 60 (Paris)
CH :+480 (Peking)
TW :+480 (Taipei)
AS :+480 (Hong Kong)
5-302-2 Set Time
*CTL [ -1440 to 1440 / 60 / 1 min./step ]
#
5-404
[User Code Counter Clear]

Clear all counters for users.
5-404-1 UCodeCtrClr
SM
[0 to 1 / 1 / 0/step]
0: Not executed
1: Executed
5-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-302
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-501
5501-1
PM Alarm
PM Alarm Level
Rev. 05/2005
*CTL
Specifies the PM alarm level.
[0~9999 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Alarm off
1~9999: Specifies the PM alarm level.
The PM alarm occurs when L x 1000 C, where L is the

specified level and C is the current PM counter value.
5501-2
Original Count Alarm
0: No alarm sounds
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing
through the ARDF 10,000
5-504
5504-1
Jam Alarm
*CTL
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
[0~3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
5-505
Error Alarm
5-507
5-507-1
5-507-2
5-507-3
5-507-128
5-507-132
5-507-133
5-507-134
5-507-141
5-507-142
5-507-160
5-507-164
5-507-166
5-507-172
Supply Alarm
Paper Supply Alarm
Staple Supply Alarm
Toner Supply Alarm
Interval :Others
Interval :A3
Interval :A4
Interval :A5
Interval :B4
Interval :B5
Interval :DLT
Interval :LG
Interval :LT
Interval :HLT
5-508*
5-508-1*
CC Call
*CTL
Jam Remains
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Continuous Door Open
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
Low Call Mode
0: Normal mode, 1: Reduced mode
Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of
calls.
Jam Detection: Time Length
[03~30 / 10 / 1]
Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam. This
setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5-508-2*
5-508-3*
5-508-4*
5-508-11*
B147/B149/B190
*CTL
[0~255 / 50 / 100 copies per step] Japan only

*CTL
0: Off, 1: On, DFU
0: Off, 1: On, Japan only
0: Off, 1: On, DFU
[00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step] DFU
5-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-508-12*
5-508-13*
5-508-21*
5-508-22*
5-508-23*
Jam Detection: Continuous

[02~10 / 5 / 1]
Count
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is
enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
Door Open: Time Length
[03~30 / 10 / 1]
Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
Jam Operation: Time Length
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.
Jam Operation: Continuous
0: Automatic Call
Count
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when consecutive paper jams occur.
Door Operation: Time Length
0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).
Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the service
center. This setting is available for setting only if SP5508 004 is set for 1.
5-611
5-611-1
5-611-2
5-611-3
5-611-4
5-611-5
5-611-6
5-801
5-801-1
5-801-2
5-801-3
5-801-4
SM
[Toner Ratio in 2C]

Adjusts the color balance of a single color (blue, green, or red) by changing the
proportion of color toner (C, M, and/or Y).
B-C
*CTL [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]
B-M
[ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
G-C
[ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]
G-Y
[ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
R-M
[ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1 %/step ]
R-Y
[ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
[Memory Clear]
NOTE: For more information, see NOTE 1 following this table.
All Clear
Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, and
returns all modes and adjustments to their default values.
To execute, hold down for over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and
on again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier has
malfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM.
ENG All
Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below.
SCS
Clears the system settings.
IMH Memory Clr
Clears IMH data. DFU
5-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-610
[ACC Factory Setting]
5-610-4 Recall
Recalls the factory settings.
5-610-5 Overwrite
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
5-610-6 Previous Setting
Recalls the previous settings.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-801-5 MCS
Clears MCS data. DFU
5-801-6 Copier Application
Clears the copy application settings.
5-801-7 Fax Application
Clears the fax application settings.
5-801-8 Printer Application
Clears the printer application settings.
5-801-9 Scanner Application
Clears the scanner application settings.
5-801-10 Network Application
Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the
job login ID.
5-801-11 NCS
Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
5-801-12 R-FAX
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
5-801-13 IPU
Clears the IPU settings
5-801-14 Clear DCS Settings
5-801-15 Clear UCS Settings
5-802
EngineFreeRun
5-802-1 EngineFreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
NOTE:
The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT
printing from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, but
paper is not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a
test.
5-803
5-804
[Input Check]
[Output Check]
See section 5-3-2.

See section 5-3-3.
[Destination Code] Destination Code Display

Displays the destination code.
5-808-1 Destination
*BCU
5-808
[SC Detection ON/OFF] SC Detection ON/OFF

Enable or disables the service call detection (SC codes will be ignored if disabling
this SP mode).
5-809-1 All
0: Enable
1: Disable
5-809-2 Vib Motor
5-809
B147/B149/B190
5-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-810
[SC Reset]
Resets a type A service call condition.
NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
5-810-1 SC Reset
[Machine Serial No.] Machine Serial Number Display
Displays the machine serial number.
5-811-2 SN Display
*BCU
5-811
*
CTL
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on
the Counter List, which can be printed with the users Counter menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be
input).
5-812-2 Facsimile
*CTL
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the users Counter menu if
the Meter Charge mode is selected with SP5-930-1.
This can be up to 13 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be
input).
5-812-3 Supply
*CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the
number and press #.
Press the key to input a pause. Press the Clear modes key to delete the
telephone number.
5-812-4 Operation
*CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and
press #.
Press the key to input a pause. Press the Clear modes key to delete the
telephone number.
5-816
5-816-1
5-816-2
5-816-3
5-816-4
5-816-5
5-816-6
5-816-7
5-816-8
5-816-9
5-816-10
5-816-11
SM
[Remote Service]
I/F Setting
CE Call
Function Flag
Communication Test Call
Device Information Call
Device Information Call
Display Setting
SSL Disable
RCG Connect Timeout
RCG Write Timeout
RCG Read Timeout
Port 80 Enable
*CTL
[ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
0: Disable
1: Enable
5-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-812
[Service Tel. No. Setting]
5-812-1 Service
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-821
[CSS-PI Device Co]
5-821-1 CSS-PI Device Co
5-821-2 RCG IP Address
*CTL
[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
5-824
[NV-RAM Data Upload]

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from
the NVRAM to a flash memory card.
5-824-1
#
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not executed
1: Executed
5-825
[NV-RAM Data Download]

Downloads the UP and SP mode data from a flash memory card to the NVRAM
5-825-1 NvramDownload
#
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not executed
1: Executed
5-828
[Network Setting]
5-828-66 Job Spooling Clear: Start
Time
5-828-69 Job Spooling (Protocol)
5-828-74
5-828-84
5-828-90
5-828-91
5-828-115
5-828-116
Delete Password
Print Settings List
TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON)
Web (0: OFF 1: ON)
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group Name
B147/B149/B190
*CTL
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists

at power on.
0: Data is cleared
1: Automatically printed
Validates or invalidates the job spooling
function for each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: (Reserved)
bit7: (Reserved)
Deletes passwords.
Prints the NCS parameter list
Validates or invalidates the Telnet protocol.
Enables or disables the Web operation.
Specifies the SMB computer name.
Specifies the SMB workgroup name.
5-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-832
5-832-1
5-832-2
5-832-3
5-832-4
5-832-5
5-832-6
5-832-7
5-832-8
5-832-9
5-832-10
5-832-11
[HDD] HDD Initialization

HDD Formatting (ALL)
HDD Formatting (IMH)
HDD Formatting
(Thumbnail)
HDD Formatting (Job Log)
HDD Formatting (Printer
Fonts)
HDD Formatting (User Info)
Mail RX Data
Mail TX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a
Design)
HDD Formatting (Log)
HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only

if there is a hard disk error.
5-833
[Job Log On/Off]

Saves the result of the jobs in the job log. If this mode is enabled, the result is
written on the HDD. If no HDD is installed, this feature is disabled even if this SP is
set to enabled.
5-833-7 JobLog ON/OFF
*CTL
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Capture Settings
*CTL
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
5-836-2 Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from
the initial system screen. The setting for SP58361 has priority
5-836-71 to 5-836-76, Copier and Printer Document Reduction
The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB. [0~2 / 2 / 1]
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed
5-836-71 Reduction for Copy Color
0: 1to-1, 1: , 2: 1/4
5-836-72 Reduction for Copy B&W Text
0: 1to-1, 1: , 0: 1/4
5-836-73 Reduction for Copy B&W Other
0: 1to-1, 1: , 0: 1/4
5-836-74 Reduction for Printer Color
0: 1to-1, 1: , 2: 1/4
5-836-75 Reduction for Printer B&W
0: 1to-1, 1: , 0: 1/4
5-836-76 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ
0: 1to-1, 1: , 0: 1/4
5-836-77 Reduction for Printer Color 1200
5-836-78 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200
5-836-81 to 5-836-86, Stored document format
The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to
the document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed
SM
5-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-836
5-836-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-836-081
5-836-082
5-836-083
5-836-084
5-836-085
5-836-086
5-836-091
5-839
5-839-4
5-839-7
5-839-8
5-839-9
5-839-10
5-839-11
5-839-12
5-839-13
Format for Copy Color
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Format for Copy B&W Text
Format Copy B&W Other
Format for Printer Color
Format for Printer B&W
Format for Printer B&W HQ
Default for JPEG
[5~95 / 50 / 1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
[IEEE1394]
Host Name
Cycle Master
BCR mode
IRM 1394a Check
Unique ID
Logout
Login
Login MAX
*CTL
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
DFU
5-840
[IEEE 802.11b]
5-840-4 Current SSID
*CTL
Enters a unique ID (up to 32 characters long) to identify the device when it is
operating in an area with another wireless LAN network.
5-840-6 Channel Max
*CTL
[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
USA: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU
Note: Do not change the setting
5-840-7 Channel Min
*CTL
[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
USA: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU
Note: Do not change the setting
B147/B149/B190
5-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-840-11 WEP key Select
*CTL
Selects the WEP key.

5-840-18* SSID Key Check
5-840-20 WEP mode
[00~11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
[0~1/0/1]
0: Max. 64-bit (10 characters)
1: Max. 128-bit (10, 26 characters)
Displayed only when the option 801.11b for
wireless LAN is installed.
Determines the operation mode of the WEP key.
5-841-4
5-841-5
5-841-7
5-841-11
5-841-12
5-841-13
5-841-14
[Supply Name Setting]

Tone Name Setting: Black
Tone Name Setting: Cyan
Tone Name Setting:
Yellow
Tone Name Setting:
Magenta
OrgStamp
OrgStamp
Staple Std1
Staple Std2
Staple Std3
Staple Std4
5-844
[USB]
5-844-1 Transfer Rate
*CTL
Specifies supply names. These appear on the

screen when the user presses the Inquiry
button in the user tools screen.
*CTL
[ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Auto Change
1: Full speed
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.

5-844-2 Vendor ID
*CTL
5-844-3 Product ID
*CTL
5-844-4 Device Release Number
*CTL
SM
Service
Tables
5-841
5-841-1
5-841-2
5-841-3
*CTL
Displays the vendor ID. DFU

Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version
number. DFU
5-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-845
5-845-1
5-845-2
5-845-6
5-845-8
5-845-9
5-845-10
Delivery Server Setting

*CTL
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No.
[0~65535 / 3670 / 1]
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
IP Address (Primary)
Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time
[0~999 / 300 / 1]
Netfiles:
Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed
when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and
an external device.
IP Address (Secondary)
Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255
Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the
secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP
address without reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model
[0~4/ 0 / 1]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr Capability
[0~255 / 0 / 1]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Changes the
capability of
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
the registered
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
that the I/O
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
device
registered.
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to 0)
B147/B149/B190
5-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5-846
5-846-1
5-846-2
5-846-3
5-846-4
5-846-5
5-846-6
5-846-7
5-846-8
5-846-10
5-846-50
5-846-70
5-846-71
5-846-72
5-846-73
5-846-74
SM
UCS Settings
*CTL
Machine ID (For Delivery Server)
Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or
IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server)
Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
[2000~50000/ 2000 /1]
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,
and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Model
0: Not used, 1:SG1 Provided,
2: SG1 Package, 3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Changes the model of the transfer server registered for the I/O device.
Delivery Server Capability
Bit 7 = 1
Comment information
Bit 6 = 1
Address direct entry possible
Bit 5 = 1
Mail Rx confirmation possible
Bit 4 = 1
Address book auto update
Bit 3 = 1
Fax Rx function
[0~255 / 0 / 2]
Changes the capability of the server registered for the I/O device.
Delivery Server Retry Timer
[0~255/ 0 /1]
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times
[0~255/ 0 /1]
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
[2000~50000 / 2000 / 1]
Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information
managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout
[1~255 / 60 / 1]
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
Initialize All Directory Info.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,
including all user codes.
LDAP Attribute (Name)
Allows you to enter a search attribute other than
the default mail (cn) for the LDAP server search.
LDAP Attribute (Mail)
the default mail address (mail) for the LDAP
server search.
LDAP Attribute (Fax)
the default facsimile telephone number
(FacsimileTelephoneNumber) for the LDAP server
search.
LDAP Attribute (Organization)
the default organization name (o) for the LDAP
server search.
LDAP Attribute (Organizational Allows you to enter a search attribute other than
Unit)
the default organization unit name (ou) for the
LDAP server search.
5-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-846-80
Backup FCU
5-846-90
Plain Data Forbidden
5-847
5-847-1
5-847-2
5-847-3
5-847-4
5-847-5
5-847-6
5-847-7
5-847-8
5-847-21
5-848
5-848-1
5-848-2
5-848-3
5-848-4
5-848-5
5-848-6
5-848-7
Backs up all directory information on the HDD to

the FCU ROM.
Allows you to prevent the address from plain data.
This is a security function that prevents
unauthorized access to address book data.
0: No check. Address book data not protected.
1: Check. Allows operation of UCS without data
from HDD or SC card and without creating
address book information with plain data.
Net File Resolution Reduction

*CTL
5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data transferred
externally by the Net File page reference function. [0~2 / 2 / 1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.
Net files are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
Rate for Copy Color
0: 1x
Rate for Copy B&W Text
1: 1/2x
Rate for Copy B&W Other
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
Rate for Printer Color
Rate for Printer B&W
Rate for Printer B&W HQ
Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95 / 50 / 1]
Web Service
*CTL
5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
Access Control: Netfile
Bit switch settings.
Protocol
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router
have no effect on capture.
Access Control: Repository
0000: No access control
(only Lower 4 bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Control: DocBox Print
Switches access control on and off.
(only Lower 4 bits)
0000: OFF
Access Control: User Directory
(only Lower 4 bits)
Access Control: Delivery Input
(only Lower 4 bits)
Access Control: Fax Control
(only Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax
(Lower 4 bits)
B147/B149/B190
5-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 05/2005
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Scan
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4
bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Sys
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Copy
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Fax
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Printer
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl
Scanner (Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4
bits)
Repository: max size of
download image
Switches access control on and off.

0000: OFF
5-849
5-849-1
5-849-2
Installation Date
Display
Switch to Print
*CTL
DFU
DFU
5-850
5-850-3
Address Book Function

*CTL Japan Only
Replacement of Circuit Classification
The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at
once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the
G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
5-853
Stamp Data Download

Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM
and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This
SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
Note: This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
5-848-9
5-848-11
5-848-12
5-848-13
5-848-14
5-848-15
5-848-21
5-848-100
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1/K]
5-856
[Remote ROM Update]

Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable
5-856-2 Local Port
*CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5-857
5-857-1
5-857-2
SM
Debug Log Save Function

*CTL
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
0: ON, 1: OFF
Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until
this feature is switched on.
Debug Log Save Function
*CTL
Target (2:HDD 3:SD)
2:HDD, 3:SD Card
Select 3 (SD Card) if the HDD unit is temporarily out of service
5-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-848-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-857-5
5-857-9
5-857-10
5-857-11
5-857-12
5-857-13
5-857-14
5-857-15
5-857-16
5-857-17
5-858
5-858-1
5-858-2
5-858-3
5-858-4
5-859
5-859-1
5-859-2
5-859-3
5-859-4
5-859-5
5-859-6
5-859-7
5-859-8
5-859-9
5-859-10
Rev. 05/2005
Save to HDD
DFU
Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Erase HDD Debug Data
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Free Space on SD Card
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Make HDD Debug
Make SD Debug
Debug Save When
*CTL
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error
codes.
Engine SC Error
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors.
Controller SC Error
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors.
Any SC Error
[0~65535 / 0 / 1]
Jam
Stores jam errors.
Debug Save Key No.

Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4
Key 5
Key 6
Key 7
Key 8
Key 9
Key 10
B147/B149/B190
*CTL
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files
for functions that use common memory on the
controller board. ( 5.10)
[-9999999~9999999 / 0 / 1]
5-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-860-21
5-860-22
*CTL
SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1~168 / 72 / 1]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received
during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
[0~1 / 1 /1]
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
[0~1 / 0 / 1]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. From item not switched.
1: Yes. From item switched.
5-870
Common Key Info Writing

*CTL
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
5-871
HDD Function Disable DFU *CTL [0~1 / 0 / 1] (0: OFF, 1: ON)

Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD.
After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the
setting.
Note: This SP is intended for use during the installation of the security DIMM, an
option that is not yet available.
5-873
SD Card Appli Move
5-873-1 Move Exec
5-873-2 Undo Exec
This SP copies the application programs from the SD

card in SD Card Slot 3.
This SP copies the application programs from the SD
card in SD Card Slot 3. Use this menu to
[Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] Plug & Play Name Selection
Specifies the manufacturer and model name.
5-907-1 Plug/Play
*BCU [ 0 to 11 / 0 / 1/step ] FA
5-907
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SM
MF
Ricoh
Ricoh
Savin
Savin
Gestetner
Gestetner
NRG
NRG
Infotec
Infotec
Lanier
Lanier
5-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Model Name
Aficio 2232C
Aficio 2238C
C3324
C3328
DSc332
DSc338
DSc332
DSc338
ISC 2432
ISC 2838
LD232c
LD238c
NetBeui
Aficio2232C
Aficio2238C
C3324
C3328
DSc332
DSc338
DSc332
DSc338
ISC2432
ISC2838
LD232c
LD238c
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-860
5-860-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-913
Switchover Permission Time

*CTL
[3~30 / 3 / 1 s]
Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the
operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control
of the display.
5-961
Large Capacity Exit Mode

*CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-Tray
finisher is installed.
5-967
Copy Server Set Function

*CTL
0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents
image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this
setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.
5-974
[Cherry Server]
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, Lite or Full, is installed.
5-974-1 Cherry Server Setting
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Lite
1: Full
5-989
5-989-1
5-989-3
5-989-4
5-989-5
5-990
5-990-1
5-990-2
5-990-3
5-990-4
5-990-5
5-990-6
5-990-7
5-990-8
5-990-21
5-990-22
5-990-23
[Loop Back Test]

Executes a communication test with peripherals by using a special tool (connector)
which is unique for each peripheral.
The machine checks if the communication with the peripherals is OK or NG; then
displays the result.
DFU
Duplex
Finisher
PSU
ADF
[SP print mode]
Prints out the SMC sheets.
All (Data List)
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program
Logging Data
Diagnostic Report
Non-Default
NIB Summary
Net File Log
Copier User Program
Scanner SP
Scanner User Program
B147/B149/B190
5-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Jam OFF/ON] Jam ON/OFF

Enables or disables jam detection.
5-991 1 Jam OFF/ON
5-991
5-993-1
5-993-2
5-993-3
5-993-4
5-993-5
5-993-6
SM
[Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment

Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])
M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: Magnification
For example: M Reg = Main scan registration
Mode Selection
0: Never done
1: Done at a) all process control self checks
except after toner end recovery and developer
initialization, b) new PCU detected, and c) the
temperature has changed by 5C since the last
adjustment
2: As for setting 1, except it is not done during
self-checks. However, it is done at the initial
process control self check.
Specifies when the automatic line position adjustment is done.
The size of the 5C difference can be changed with SP5-993-3.
Execute
Use to make a line position adjustment.
Temperature
*BCU [ 3 to 15 / 5 / 1/oC]
Specifies the temperature for starting the line positioning adjustment.
The line position adjustment automatically starts when the temperature differs by the
amount specified in this SP mode from the temperature when the last adjustment was
done.
There are two thermistors on the laser optics-housing unit. The thermistor close to the
fusing unit monitors the temperature for this adjustment.
Interrupt
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during a print job when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
Stand-by
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during stand-by mode when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
Job Start
*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment just before starting a color print job
when the temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the
temperature when the machine woke up from energy saver mode.
5-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-993
0: Enable
1: Disable
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-993-7 Result
*BCU
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment in 4 digits.
5-993-8
5-993-9
5-993-10
5-993-11
5-993-12
5-993-13
5-993-14
5-993-15
5-993-16
5-993-17
5-993-18
5-993-19
5-993-20
5-993-21
5-993-22
5-993-24
5-993-25
First and second digits: Error detected on the rear ID sensor

Third and fourth digits: Error detected on the center ID sensor
Fifth and sixth digits:
Error detected on the front ID sensor
010101
The 6th digit
The 1st digit
Refer to the Troubleshooting section for more details about the two-digit codes.
Exe. Counter
*BCU
Displays how many times the line position adjustment has been executed.
Counts up by +1 normally.
After a forced adjustment and a PCU replacement, it counts up +3
Also includes adjustments done at the factory.
Error Counter
*BCU Displays how many times errors have been
detected during the line position adjustment.
The way that the auto line position adjustment is done can be adjusted using the
following SP modes (SP5-993-010 to 021). These are coefficients used for the
adjustment.
Normally, do not change except if the automatic adjustment gives poor results
immediately after installing a new optics housing unit. Change the value then do a
forced line position adjustment (SP 5-993-2) to check the effects of the changes.
Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-11 by 1.
M Reg. [Y]
*BCU A fine adjustment to the main-scan registration.
M Reg. [M]
*BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA
M Reg. [C]
*BCU 1 dot = 20
M Mag. [Y]
*BCU A fine adjustment to the main-scan
M Mag. [M]
*BCU magnification.
M Mag. [C]
*BCU [ -100 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 %/step ] FA
NOTE: The setting changes in this SP mode
will be affect the next line position
adjustment.
S Reg. 600[Y]
*BCU A fine adjustment to the sub-scan registration
S Reg. 600[M]
*BCU for each color (color registration).
S Reg. 600[C]
*BCU [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA
S Reg. 1200[Y]
*BCU 600dpi: 1 dot = 40
S Reg. 1200[M]
*BCU 1200 dpi: 1 dot = 20
S Reg. 1200[C]
*BCU
Interrupt
*BCU [ 10 to 250 / 100 / 10 sheets/step ]
Specifies the number of sheets to be printed before a line position adjustment is done
during a print job.
SP 5-993-4 must be set to enabled.
When the temperature difference meets the conditions specified in SP5-993-3, the
machine starts counting the number of prints in the job. The machine interrupts the
print job and does the line position adjustment if the number of prints exceeds the
number specified in this SP mode.
If the counted number of prints does not exceed the number specified, the machine
resets the counter, then continues to monitor the temperature and does the line
position adjustment next time.
Mscan Lgth Det
*BCU [ 100 to 990 / 211 / 10 sec/step ]
Performs the main scan length detection when the polygon motor has operated
consecutively for the time specified in this SP mode.
Drm Gear Phase
*BCU [ 0 to 345 / 0 / 15 degrees/step] DFU
Adjusts the phases of the black drum gear and the color drum gear.
B147/B149/B190
5-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-993-26 Initialization
5-993-31
5-993-32
5-993-33
5-993-34
5-993-35
[ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during initialization.
Toner Refresh
*BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables or disables the toner refreshing operation.
Repetitive line position adjustments can cause abnormal outputs such as white spots.
To prevent this, toner is consumed and supplied after line position adjustment.
PPS: 125
This SP checks the transfer PPS in the 125-mm/s mode.
PPS Set: 125
*BCU
[6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 step]
This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the 125-mm/s mode.
PPS: 62.5
This SP checks the transfer PPS in the 62.5-mm/s mode.
PPS Set: 62.5
*BCU
[6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 step]
This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the 62.5-mm/s mode.
Color Adj level
*BCU
[LOW, MID, HIGH ]
This SP specifies the level of color adjustment. This SP sets the following SPs as
listed.
SP3-906-001
SP3-906-002
SP3-906-003
SP3-906-004
SP3-906-005
SP3-993-001
SP3-993-003
SP3-993-004
SP3-993-005
SP3-993-006
SP3-993-022
SP3-993-024
SP3-993-026
HI
200
200
200
480
1.00
1
3
1
0
1
100
105
1
MID
200
0
0
480
1.00
1
5
1
0
1
100
211
0
LOW
255
0
0
480
0.5
1
7
1
0
0
250
422
0
Service
Tables
5-993-27
*BCU
[Unit Detection ON/OFF] Maintenance Unit Detection ON/OFF

5-994
5-994-1 Dev/PCU
*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric DFU
#
0: Enable
1: Disable
Enables or disables PCU and development unit detection.
NOTE: If this mode is disabled, new unit detection also does not function. Use this
mode as a temporary measure, only when the micro-switches are defective.
5-994-2 Oil Supply Unit
#
0: Enable
1: Disable
NOTE: Use this mode as a temporary measure, only when the unit detection
mechanism is defective.
SM
5-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[ColorGapAdj2] Color Gap Adjustment 2

5-995
5-995-20 Trans Drv FB
*BCU Enables or disables the transfer belt feedback
feature.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-997
[Test Pattern]
5-997-1 Tray Selection
5-997 2
5-997-3
5-997-4
5-997-5
[ 0 to 4 / 1 / 1/step ]
0: By-pass Table
1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2
3: Tray 3
4: Tray 4
Selects the tray for making a test print.
NOTE: The machine makes a test pattern on the paper size loaded in the selected
paper tray.
Pattern
[ 0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: None
1: 1-dot sub-scan line
3: 1-dot main-scan line
5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)
7. 1-dot grid pattern (Rough)
9. 1-dot slant grid pattern
11. 1-dot pattern
12. 2-dot pattern
13. 4-dot pattern
14. 1-dot trimming pattern
16. Cross stitch: sub-scan
17. Cross stitch: main-scan
18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)
19. Belt pattern (Vertical)
20. Checkered Flag
21. Grey scale (Vertical)
22. Grey scale (Horizontal)
23. Solid
Selects a test pattern.
Single Color
[0 to 6 / 6 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Red
1: Green
2: Blue
3: Yellow
4: Magenta
5: Cyan
6: Black
Selects the color for making a test pattern.
Color Mode
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Full Color
1: Single Color
Selects the color mode for making a test print.
Resolution
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: 600x600
1: 1800x600
2: 1200x1200
Selects the resolution for making a test print.
B147/B149/B190
5-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 06/2004
5-997-6 By-pass Paper Size
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: A4 LEF
1: LT LEF
2: A3
3: DLT
Selects the paper size for making a test pattern from the by-pass table.
5-997-7 Print
Prints the test pattern with the settings specified with SP5-997-001 to 006.
NOTE: When exiting the SP mode, the test print mode is automatically canceled.
5-998
[Memory Clear]
5-998-1 ENG Setting
Clears the engine settings except for counters.
5-998-2 ENG Counter
Clears all counters.
5-999
New Unit Set
*BCU
[0: Disable/1: Enable]
#
This program makes the machine to start the
initialization processing for a newly installed
unit. You set 1: Enable before installing a
new unit.
PCU: Bk
PCU: Y
PCU: M
PCU: C
Dev. U: Bk
Dev. U: Y
Dev. U: M
Dev. U: C
Fuser
Service
Tables
5-999-1
5-999-2
5-999-3
5-999-4
5-999-5
5-999-6
5-999-7
5-999-8
5-999-9
SM
5-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
6-006
6-006-1
6-006-2
6-006-3
6-006-4
6-006-5
[DF Registration Adj.] DF Registration Adjustment

Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
*CTL [ -3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Side-to-Side
Leading Edge
[ -42 to 42 / 0 / 1 /step ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear
sides.
*CTL [ -42 to 42 / 0 / 1 /step ]
Buckle: Duplex Front
Buckle: Duplex Rear
[ -45 to 45 / 0 / 1 /step ]
Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.
Rear Edge Erase
*CTL [ -20 to 10 / -3 / 1 /step ]
6-007
[ADF Input Check]

Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF.
6-007-1 Group 1
5.2.2
6-007-2 Group 2
6-007-3 Group 3
6-008
6-008-1
6-008-2
6-008-3
6-008-4
6-008-5
6-008-6
6-008-7
6-008-8
6-008-9
[ADF Output Check]

Activates the electrical components for functional check.
It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time.
Fee-in Motor Fwd.
Feed-in Motor Rev.
Drive Motor Fwd.
Reverse Motor Fwd.
Reverse Motor Rev.
Feed Clutch
Inverter Solenoid
Pick-up Motor Fwd.
Pick-up Motor Rev.
6-009
[DF Free Run]

Performs a DF free run in duplex mode or stamp mode.
6-009-1 Duplex Mode
6-009-2 Stamp Mode
[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
6-010-1 Stamp Position Adj.
*CTL [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]
6-010
6-016
[Original Size Priority] Original Size Detection Priority

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original
sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
B147/B149/B190
5-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
6-016-1 Original Size Priority
*CTL
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting 1
A4 (L)
11" x 15"
DLT (L)
LT (S)
LT (L)
LG (L)
A4 (L)
8K (L)
Setting 2
LT (L)
DLT (L)
11" x 15"
US Exec (S)
8" x 10" (L)
F4 (L)
16K (L)
DLT (L)
Bits used for detection differ depending on

destination as shown below.
Bit 7 to 6: Only for Japan
Bit 5 to 2: Only for US
Bit 1 to 0: Only for EU/AA
[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
6-017-1 DF Magnification Adj.
*CTL [ -5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ]
6-017
[Punch Position]
Adjusts the punching position.
Punch 1
US: 2 punch holes
Europe: 2 punch holes
North Europe: 4 punch holes
Service
Tables
6-110
Punch 2
US: 3 punch holes
Europe: 4 punch holes
Increment: Holes move toward the paper center.
Decrement: Holes move toward the paper edge.
6-110 1 MF Fin 1
*BCU [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]
6-110 2 MF Fin 2
*BCU
6-110 3 Booklet Fin
[ -2.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]
6-111
[Staple Position]
Adjusts the stapling position.
Increment: Staple position moves toward the edge of paper.
Decrement: Staple position moves toward the center of paper.
NOTE: Although the adjustable range is 3.5 mm, the stapling position can be
changed only by 1.0 mm when stapling one position at the front or rear side even
when the input value is more than 1.0.
6-111-1 MF Fin
*BCU [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]
6-111-2 Booklet Fin
[ -3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step ]
6-112
SM
[Fold Position]
*BCU
[ -3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step ]
5-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
6-111-1
6-111-2
6-112-3
6-112-4
6-112-5
6-112-6
A3/DLT
B4/LG
A4/LT
A3/DLT
B4/LG
A4/LT
Adjusts the folding positions of the optional

booklet finisher.
6-901
[Multi Bin Set]

Specifies whether or not the optional multi-bin output tray is installed. When installing
the multi-bin output tray, this SP mode should be set to 1.
6-901-1 Multi Bin Set
*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not installed
1: Installed
B147/B149/B190
5-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-001
*BCU Display: 00000000~99999999 min

Working Time
The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by counting
the main motor revolution time. If the amount of time required for the drum to revolve
to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of copies can be used
to analyze problems and could be useful for future product development.
7-002
[Original Counter]
Displays the total original count (number of originals fed) for the selected mode.
Total
*CTL
Copy
Fax
Doc. Svr. Application
Scanner
Others
7-002-1
7-002-2
7-002-3
7-002-4
7-002-5
7-002-6
7-003
7-003-1
7-003-2
7-003-4
7-003-5
7-003-7
7-003-8
7-003-10
7-003-11
7-003-12
7-003-13
7-003-20
7-003-21
7-003-22
7-003-23
7-003-24
7-003-25
7-003-26
7-003-27
7-003-28
7-003-29
7-003-30
[Print Counter] Meter Charge Counter

(Print, Development)
Displays the values of the color counters.
Total Count
*CTL
[ -9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
Copy: B&W
Copy: Full Color
FAX: B&W
Print: B&W
Print: Full Color
*CTL These SP modes are development counters for
Development: CMY
the meter charge mode.
Development: K
*CTL Displays the values of the color counters.
Copy: Single Color
Copy: Twin Color
Total: Full Color
*CTL These SP modes are used for Japanese
market only.
Total: B&W Single
Total: Single
Total: B&W
*CTL This SP mode is print counters for the meter
charge mode.
*CTL These SP modes are used for Japanese
Copy: Full Color
market only.
Print: Full Color
Copy: Color
*CTL These SP modes are print counters for the
meter charge mode.
Copy: B/W
Print: Color
Print: B&W
Total: Color Total
7-007
[Other Counter]
Displays counter values.
7-007-1 Duplex
7-007-2 A3/DLT
7-007-3 Staple
*CTL
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
[Print CountPaper Size] Paper Size Counter

Displays the counter values for each paper size.
7-101-5 A4 LEF
*CTL
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7-101
SM
5-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
SP7-XXX (Data Log)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-101-6
7-101-14
7-101-38
7-101-44
7-101-132
7-101-133
7-101-134
7-101-141
7-101-142
7-101-160
7-101-164
7-101-166
7-101-172
7-101-255
7-105
7-105-1
7-105-2
7-105-3
7-105-4
7-105-5
7-105-6
7-105-7
7-105-8
7-105-9
7-105-11
7-105-12
A5 LEF
B5 LEF
LT LEF
HLT LEF
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
A5 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
HLT SEF
Other
[Print CountPaper Size] Paper Size Counter
Displays the counter values for each paper size.
Normal
*CTL
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
Recycled
Special
Colour
Letterhead
Letterhead
Label
Thick
Used
Index
Others
7-201
[Total Scan Counter]

Displays the total number of scans.
7-201-1 Total Scan Counter
*CTL
7-204
7-204-1
7-204-2
7-204-3
7-204-4
7-204-5
7-204-6
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 scan/step ]
[Print CounterPaper Tray] Paper Feed Section Counter

Displays the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
Bypass
*CTL [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Duplex
7-205
[Total ADF Counter]

Displays the total number of originals fed by the ARDF.
7-205-1 ADF Total Counter
*CTL
7-206
[Staple Counter]
7-206-1 Normal Staple
B147/B149/B190
*CTL
Displays the number of stapler operations.

5-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-206-2 Binding Staple
7-209
[Punch Counter]
Displays the number of times hole punching has been done.
7-209-1 Punch
*CTL
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-401
[Total SC Counter]
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
7-401-1 SC Counter
*CTL
[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-403
7-403-1
7-403-2
7-403-3
7-403-4
7-403-5
7-403-6
7-403-7
7-403-8
7-403-9
7-403-10
[SC History]
Logs the SC codes detected.
The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be
seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
Latest
*CTL
Latest 1
Latest 2
Latest 3
Latest 4
Latest 5
Latest 6
Latest 7
Latest 8
Latest 9
[Total Paper Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of jams detected.
7-502-1 Total Jam
*CTL
[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
Service
Tables
7-502
7-503
[Total Original Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of original jams.
7-503-1 Original Jam counter
*CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ]
7-504
[Paper Jam Location]

D: Duplex, MB: Mail Box, F; Finisher, E: External, I: Internal
ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.
7-504-3 Tray 1: ON
*CTL
7-504-4
7-504-5
7-504-6
7-504-8
7-504-9
7-504-10
7-504-11
7-504-12
7-504-13
SM
Tray 2: ON
Tray 3/LCT: ON
Tray 4: ON
Regist.: ON
External Tray: ON
Internal Tray: ON
Duplex: ON
Duplex Exit 1: ON
Duplex Exit 2: ON
5-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-504-14
7-504-15
7-504-51
7-504-52
7-504-53
7-504-54
7-504-61
7-504-63
7-504-64
7-504-65
7-504-66
7-504-67
7-504-68
7-504-69
7-504-100
7-504-101
7-504-102
7-504-103
7-504-104
7-504-105
7-504-106
7-504-107
7-504-108
7-504-109
7-504-110
7-504-111
7-504-120
7-504-121
7-504-122
7-504-123
7-504-124
7-504-125
7-504-126
7-504-127
7-504-128
7-504-129
7-504-130
7-504-131
7-505
7-505-1
7-505-3
7-505-4
7-505-5
7-505-6
7-505-7
7-505-53
7-505-54
7-505-55
7-505-56
7-505-57
Rev. 11/2005
Duplex Exit 3: ON
Duplex Feed: ON
Tray 1: OFF
Tray 2: OFF
Tray 3/LCT: OFF
Tray 4: OFF
Registration: OFF
External Tray: OFF
Internal Tray: OFF
Duplex: OFF
Duplex Exit 1: OFF
Duplex Exit 2: OFF
Duplex Exit 3: OFF
Duplex Feed: OFF
Finisher Entrance
Finisher Shift Tray 1
Finisher Shift Tray 2
Finisher Staple
Finisher Exit
Finisher Drive
Finisher Tray Up/Down
Finisher Jogger
Finisher Staple
Finisher Exit
Finisher Punch
Finisher Jam Clear
Finisher Entrance: ON
Finisher Entrance: OFF
Finisher STACK Exit
Finisher Folder: ON
Finisher Folder: OFF
Finisher Stapler
Finisher Punch
Finisher Transport Motor
Finisher Paddle Motor
Finisher Stapler Slide Motor / Stapler Folder Motor
Finisher Jogger Motor
Finisher Lift Motor
[Original Jam Detection]
Displays the total number of original jams by location.
At Power On
*CTL
Skew Correction Sensor (On Check)
Interval Sensor (On Check)
Registration Sensor (On Check)
Relay Sensor (On Check)
Inverter Sensor (On Check)
Skew Correction Sensor (Off Check)
Interval Sensor (Off Check)
Registration Sensor (Off Check)
Relay Sensor (Off Check)
Inverter Sensor (Off Check)
B147/B149/B190
5-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-506-5
7-506-6
7-506-14
7-506-38
7-506-44
7-506-132
7-506-133
7-506-134
7-506-141
7-506-412
7-506-160
7-506-164
7-506-166
7-506-172
7-506-255
7-507
7-507-1
7-507-2
7-507-3
7-507-4
7-507-5
7-507-6
7-507-7
7-507-8
7-507-9
7-507-10
7-508
7-508-1
7-508-2
7-508-3
7-508-4
7-508-5
7-508-6
7-508-7
7-508-8
7-508-9
7-508-10
[Jam Count by Paper Size]

Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
A4 LEF
*CTL
[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
A5 LEF
B5 LEF
LT LEF
HLT LEF
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
A5 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
HLT SEF
Others
[Plotter Jam History]
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
Latest
*CTL
Latest 1
Latest 2
Latest 3
Latest 4
Latest 5
Latest 6
Latest 7
Latest 8
Latest 9
Service
Tables
7-506
[Original Jam History]

Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
Latest
*CTL
Latest-1
Latest-2
Latest-3
Latest-4
Latest-5
Latest-6
Latest-7
Latest-8
Latest-9
7-801
[ROM No./Firmware Version]

Displays the version of each firmware
7-80-255 Firmware Version
SM
5-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-803
7-803-1
7-803-2
7-803-3
7-803-4
7-803-5
7-803-6
7-803-7
7-803-8
7-803-9
7-803-10
7-803-11
7-803-12
7-803-13
7-803-14
7-803-15
7-803-16
7-803-17
7-803-18
7-803-19
7-803-20
7-803-21
7-803-22
7-803-23
7-803-24
7-803-25
7-803-26
7-803-27
7-803-28
7-803-29
7-803-30
7-803-31
7-803-32
[PM Counter]
(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:
Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.
Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be
deactivated.
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 9) and is reset to 0.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 9.
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
Paper
S: PCU [K]
S: PCU [Y]
S: PCU [M]
S: PCU [C]
S: Dev. [K]
S: Dev. [Y]
S: Dev. [M]
S: Dev. [C]
S: Oil Supply
PF By-pass
PF Tray 1
PF Tray 2
PF Tray 3
PF Tray 4
S: Fusing
S: Transfer
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current
maintenance unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-10 to 20) and is reset to 0. The total number of
revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-10 to 20.
R: PCU [K]
*BCU Target Revolution: 300,000
R: PCU [Y]
Target Revolution: 319,000
R: PCU [M]
R: PCU [C]
R: Dev. [K]
Target Revolution: 1,142,000
R: Dev. [Y]
R: Dev. [M]
R: Dev. [C]
R: Oil Supply
R: Fusing
R: Transfer
Displays the number of sheets printed until the waste toner bottle becomes full or
toner runs out.
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
S: Waste Toner
S: Toner [K]
S: Toner [Y]
S: Toner [M]
B147/B149/B190
5-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7-803-33 S: Toner [C]

Displays the total operating time for the toner attraction pump.
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 s/step ]
7-803-34 Toner Supply[K]
7-803-35 Toner Supply[Y]
7-803-36 Toner Supply[M]
7-803-37 Toner Supply[C]
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current revolution Target revolution) 100, where Current revolution is the
current value for the counter of the part, and Target revolution is the values of SP7803-17 through 27. This shows how much of the units expected lifetime has been
used up.
The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter
is still less than 100%.
Oil supply unit: When the R% counter reaches 100%, it enters the near-end condition,
not the end condition. The end condition occurs some number of rotations after this
(not adjustable).
NOTE: The machine internally adjusts or compensates as necessary, depending on
conditions of machine usage. Due to this, at the oil supply unit near-end
condition, the R% counter of the oil supply unit can be 100%, lower than
100%, or higher than 100%.
*BCU
7-803-38 R(%): PCU [K]
7-803-39 R(%): PCU [Y]
7-803-40 R(%): PCU [M]
7-803-41 R(%): PCU [C]
7-803-42 R(%): Dev [K]
7-803-43 R(%): Dev [Y]
7-803-44 R(%): Dev [M]
7-803-45 R(%): Dev [C]
7-803-46 R(%): Oil Spply
7-803-47 R(%): Fusing
7-803-48 S: Trans Cln
7-803-49 R: Trans Cln
7-804
7-804-1
7-804-2
7-804-3
7-804-4
7-804-5
7-804-6
7-804-7
7-804-8
7-804-9
7-804-10
7-804-11
7-804-12
SM
[PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

(Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Clears the PM counter.
Press the Enter key after the machine asks Execute?, which will store the PM
counter value in SP7-906-1 to 25 (PM Counter Previous), and reset the value
of the current PM counter to 0.
Paper
PCU [K]
PCU [Y]
PCU [M]
PCU [C]
Dev. [K]
Dev. [Y]
Dev. [M]
Dev. [C]
Oil Supply
PF By-pass
PF Tray 1
5-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 06/2004
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-804-13
7-804-14
7-804-15
7-804-16
7-804-17
7-804-18
7-804-50
PF Tray 2
PF Tray 3
PF Tray 4
Fusing
Transfer
Trans Cln
All
7-807
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
7-807-1 SC/Jam Clear
7-808
[Counter Reset]
7-808-1 Counter Clear
7-810
[Access Code Clear]

Use to clear the access code if the customer forgets the code (password).
7-810-1 Access Code Clear
7-811
[Original Counter Clear]
7-811-1 This program reset the original counter (SP7-002-001 through 006).
7-816
7-816-1
7-816-2
7-816-3
7-816-4
7-816-5
7-816-6
[Tray Clear] Paper Tray Counter Clear

Clears the counters (SP7-204) for the number of sheets fed from the paper feed
stations.
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3/LCT
Tray 4
Duplex
7-826
[MF Error Counter] Japan Only
7-826-1 Error Total
7-826-2 Error Staple
7-827
[MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only
7-832
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

Displays the result of the diagnostics.
7-832-1 Diag. Result
*CTL
B147/B149/B190
5-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7-833
7-833-1
7-833-2
7-833-3
7-833-4
7-833-5
7-833-6
7-833-7
7-833-8
7-833-11
7-833-12
7-833-13
7-833-14
[Coverage] Pixel Coverage Ratio

Displays the image coverage ratio for each color of the last output.
This SP mode displays the coverage ratio of the output, i.e. the ratio of the total
pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper. Note that this
value is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of course
it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: the
type, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration and
developer potential.
*BCU [ 0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]
Last [K]
Last [C]
Last [M]
Last [Y]
Displays accumulated average value of image coverage ratio for each color.
SP 7-833-5 to -8 vs SP 8-831-1 to 4
The averages for K (SP 7-833-5 and SP 8-831-1) are the same.
For CMY, SP 8-831 does not include black-and-white pages in the middle of a colour
job. However, SP 7-833 does include these pages in the average. As a result, the
readings of SP 7-833 will be lower, because these averages include pages for which
there is zero for CMY, but the averages calculated for SP 8-831 do not include these
pages.
*BCU [ 0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step ]
Average [K]
Average [C]
Average [M]
Average [Y]
Displays the total number of toner cartridges replaced.
*BCU [ 0 to 65535 / - / 1 cartridge/step ]
Toner [K]
Toner [C]
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011
Toner [M]
through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001
Toner [Y]
through 004 are the same.
[Coverage Clr] Coverage/Toner Data Clear

7-834
7-834-1 Average
This menu resets the data in SP7-833-005
through 008.
7-834-2 Toner
through 014 and SP8-781-001 through 004.
7-834-3 S: PREV Toner
through 004.
7-834-4 S: Coverage 0-100
through 004, SP8-861-001 through 004, SP 8871-001 through 004, and SP8-881-001
through 004.
7-834-255 All
This menu resets all the data listed above.
7-835
ACC Counter
7-835-1 Copy ACC
7-835-2 Printer ACC
7-836
SM
*CTL
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Displays the number of times ACC has been
done.
Total Memory Size

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
5-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-852
Rev. 03/2005
ADF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter

Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on the
scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4991 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust
Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zeror
7-901
[Assert Info]
Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in
this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
7-901-1 File Name
7-901-2 Number of Lines
7-901-3 Location
7-905
[Alert Display]
7-905-10 Wst Oil: Full
*BCU [ 232 to 464 / 232 / 1 kilo-revolutions/step ]
Specifies the number of revolutions the development drive motor-K can make after
the message, Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full, is displayed.
The machine stops after the motor has made the specified number of revolutions.
This SP specifies the interval from near end to end for the waste oil bottle. 232k
revolutions equals 2.5k prints. If it is set to 464, the end condition is 5.0k prints after
near end.
7-905-14 Oil: Alert: Page
*BCU [ 25.0 to 27.5 / 27.5 / 0.1 kilo-sheets/step ]
Specifies the number of sheets to trigger the oil near-end condition.
NOTE: The target job volume for this SP mode is 5 pages/job.
B147/B149/B190
5-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7-906
7-906-1
7-906-2
7-906-3
7-906-4
7-906-5
7-906-6
7-906-7
7-906-8
7-906-9
7-906-10
7-906-11
7-906-12
7-906-13
7-906-14
7-906-15
7-906-16
7-906-17
7-906-18
7-906-19
7-906-20
7-906-21
7-906-22
7-906-23
7-906-24
7-906-25
7-906-26
7-906-27
7-906-28
7-906-29
7-906-30
7-906-31
7-906-32
7-906-33
7-906-34
7-906-35
[PM Counter: Previous]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
S:PCU [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
S:PCU [Y]
S:PCU [M]
S:PCU [C]
S:Dev. [K]
S:Dev. [Y]
S:Dev. [M]
S:Dev. [C]
S:Oil Supply
S:Fusing
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous
maintenance units.
R:PCU [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
R:PCU [Y]
R:PCU [M]
R:PCU [C]
R:Dev. [K]
R:Dev. [Y]
R:Dev. [M]
R:Dev. [C]
R:Oil Supply
R:Fusing
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner
cartridge.
S:Waste Toner
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
S:Toner [K]
S:Toner [Y]
S:Toner [M]
S:Toner [C]
(Current count Yield count) x 100, where Current count is the current values in the
counter for the part, and Yield count is the recommended yield.
R(%): PCU [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
R(%): PCU [Y]
R(%): PCU [M]
R(%): PCU [C]
R(%): Dev [K]
R(%): Dev [Y]
R(%): Dev [M]
R(%): Dev [C]
R(%): Oil Supply
R(%): Fusing
7-907
[Check Sum]
Displays the check sum of the firmware.
*BCU
7-907-1 Engine Main
7-907-2 Engine MUSIC
SM
5-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 03/2005
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers
SP8-211~SP8-216
SP8-401~SP8-406
SP8-691~SP8-696
What They Do
The number of pages scanned to the document server.
The number of pages printed from the document server
The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an application). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
Prefixes
T:
Total: (Grand Total).
C:
F:
P:
S:
L:
Copy application.
Fax application.
Print application.
Scan application.
Local storage
(document server)
O:
Other applications
(external network
applications, for
example)
B147/B149/B190
What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.)..
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
application when the job was not stored on the
document server.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Refers to network applications such as Web
Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
(Software Development Kit) will also be counted
with this group in the future.
5-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of

displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
Abbreviation
/
>
AddBook
Apl
B/W
Bk
C
ColCr
ColMode
Comb
Comp
Deliv
DesApl
Dev Counter
Dup, Duplex
Emul
FC
FIN
Full Bleed
GenCopy
GPC
IFax
ImgEdt
K
LS
LSize
Mag
MC
NRS
Org
OrgJam
Palm 2
PC
SM
What it means
By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application
More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more
Address Book
Application
Black & White
Black
Cyan
Color Create
Color Mode
Combine
Compression
Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emulation
Full Color
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
No Margins
Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
Large (paper) Size
Magnification
One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS
is used in Japan.
Original for scanning
Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats. Currently not
available.
Personal Computer
5-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
Key for Abbreviations
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Abbreviation
PGS
PJob
Ppr
PrtJam
PrtPGS
R
Rez
SC
Scn
Sim, Simplex
S-to-Email
SMC
Svr
TonEnd
TonSave
TXJob
YMC
YMCK
What it means
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
Print Jobs
Paper
Printer (plotter) Jam
Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Resolution
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scan
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Server
Toner End
Toner Save
Send, Transmission
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the
Counter Reset SP7 808.
B147/B149/B190
5-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
T:Total Jobs
C:Total Jobs
F:Total Jobs
P:Total Jobs
S:Total Jobs
L:Total Jobs
O:Total Jobs
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of times each

application is used to do a job.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
already on the document server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is
specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
SM
5-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-001
8-002
8-003
8-004
8-005
8-006
8-007
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-011
8-012
8-013
8-014
8-015
8-016
8-017
T:Jobs/LS
C:Jobs/LS
F:Jobs/LS
P:Jobs/LS
S:Jobs/LS
L:Jobs/LS
O:Jobs/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the

document server by each application, to reveal how
local storage is being used for input.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8-021
8-022
8-023
8-024
8-025
8-026
8-027
T:Pjob/LS
C:Pjob/LS
F:Pjob/LS
P:Pjob/LS
S:Pjob/LS
L:Pjob/LS
O:Pjob/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs reveal how files printed from the

document server were stored on the document
server originally.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
B147/B149/B190
5-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-031
8-032
8-033
8-034
8-035
8-036
8-037
T:Pjob/DesApl
C:Pjob/DesApl
F:Pjob/DesApl
P:Pjob/DesApl
S:Pjob/DesApl
L:Pjob/DesApl
O:Pjob/DesApl
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs reveal what applications were used

to output documents from the document server.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printed from within the document server mode
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
T:TX Jobs/LS
C:TX Jobs/LS
F:TX Jobs/LS
P:TX Jobs/LS
S:TX Jobs/LS
L:TX Jobs/LS
O:TX Jobs/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the applications that stored

files on the document server that were later
accessed for transmission over the telephone
line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or
as a fax image by I-Fax).
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
scanned from within the document server mode
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8-051
8-052
8-053
8-054
8-055
8-056
8-057
T:TX Jobs/DesApl
C:TX Jobs/DesApl
F:TX Jobs/DesApl
P:TX Jobs/DesApl
S:TX Jobs/DesApl
L:TX Jobs/DesApl
O:TX Jobs/DesApl
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the applications used to send

files from the document server over the
telephone line or over a network (attached to an
e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
SM
5-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-041
8-042
8-043
8-044
8-045
8-046
8-047
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-061
T:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
8-062
C:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8-063
F:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8-064
8-065
8-066
8-067
S:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8-06x 1
Sort
8-06x 2
8-06x 3
8-06x 4
8-06x 5
Stack
Staple
Bookle
t
Z-Fold
8-06x 6
Punch
8-06x 7
Other
B147/B149/B190
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set
for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8 066 1)
Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
Reserved. Not used.
5-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8-071
8-072
8-073
8-074
8-075
8-076
8-077
8-07x 1
8-07x 2
8-07x 3
8-07x 4
8-07x 5
8-07x 6
8-07x 7
T:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
S:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
L:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
1 Page
8 07x 8
21~50 Pages
2 Pages
8 07x 9
51~100 Pages
3 Pages
8 07x 10
101~300 Pages
4 Pages
8 07x 11
301~500 Pages
5 Pages
8 07x 12
501~700 Pages
6~10 Pages
8 07x 13
701~1000 Pages
11~20 Pages
8 07x 14
1001~ Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
SM
5-85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-111
8-113
8-116
8-11x 1
8-11x 2
T:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
fax directly on a telephone line.
L:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
fax on a telephone line using a file stored on the document server.
Documents sent from fax memory are not counted.
B/W
Color
These counters count jobs, not pages.

This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,
including documents stored on the document server.
If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the
job started.
If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination
where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x)
also increments.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8-121
T:IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
8-123
F:IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
8-126
L:IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent using a
file stored on the document server , as fax images using I-Fax.
8-12x 1 B/W
8-12x 2 Color

The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
B147/B149/B190
5-86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-131
T:S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was
used or not.
8-135
S:S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8-136
L:S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL
These SPs count the number of (color or black-and-white) jobs using a file
stored on stored on the document server, and attaching it to e-mail.
8-13x 1 B/W
8-13x 2 Color
8-141
8-143
8-145
8-14x 1
8-14x 2
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
and sent to a Scan Router server.
F:Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
fax mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
B/W
Color

The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a Color job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
SM
5-87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables

If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-151
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
8-155
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
*CTL
and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8-15x 1 B/W
8-15x 2 Color

If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
8-161
8-163
T:PCFAX TX Jobs
F:PCFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of PC Fax

transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it
is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
8-191
8-192
8-193
8-195
8-196
T:Total Scan PGS

C:Total Scan PGS
F:Total Scan PGS
S:Total Scan PGS
L:Total Scan PGS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan
images.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
B147/B149/B190
5-88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8-205
8-211
8-212
8-213
8-215
8-216
T:LSize Scan PGS

*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
S:LSize Scan PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display..
T:Scan PGS/LS
C:Scan PGS/LS
F:Scan PGS/LS
S:Scan PGS/LS
L:Scan PGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

into the document server .
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
SM
5-89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-201
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-221
8-221 1
8-221 2
ADF Org Feeds

*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
Front
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
Back
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
8-231
8-231 1
8-231 2
8-231 3
8-231 4
8-231 5
Scan PGS/Mode
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Large Volume
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded
in the ADF at one time.
SADF
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
Mixed Size
Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the operation
panel.
Custom Size
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Platen
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the originals page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
B147/B149/B190
5-90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
T:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8-242
C:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8-243
F:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8-245
S:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
8-246
L:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8-247
O:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type by Other
applications.
8-241
8-242
8-243
8-245
8-246
8-247
8-24x 1: Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8-24x 2: Text/Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8-24x 3: Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8-24x 4: GenCopy, Pale
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
8-24x 5: Map
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
8-24x 6: Normal/Detail
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
8-24x 7: Fine/Super Fine
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
8-24x 8: Binary
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
8-24x 9: Grayscale
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
8-24x 10: Color
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
SM
5-91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-241
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-251
8-252
8-254
8-256
8-257
T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs show how many times Image Edit

features have been selected at the operation
panel for each application. Some examples of
these editing features are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8-261
T:Scan PGS/ColCr
8-262
C:Scan PGS/ ColCr
8-26x 1 Color Conversion
8-26x 2 Color Erase
8-26x 3 Background
8-26x 4 Other
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs show how many times color creation
features have been selected at the operation
panel.
8-281
8-285
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal
how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery
functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8-291
8-293
8-295
8-296
T:Scan PGS/Stamp
F:Scan PGS/Stamp
S:Scan PGS/Stamp
L:Scan PGS/Stamp
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages stamped

with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
B147/B149/B190
5-92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8-301
8-302
8-303
8-305
8-306
8-30x 1
8-30x 2
8-30x 3
8-30x 4
8-30x 5
8-30x 6
8-30x 7
8-30x 8
8-30x 9
8-30x 10
8-30x 254
8-30x 255
SM
T:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
output page size [SP 8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
5-93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-311
8-315
8-31x 1
8-31x 2
8-31x 3
8-31x 4
8-31x 5
T:Scan PGS/Rez
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
1200dpi ~
600dpi~1199dpi
400dpi~599dpi
200dpi~399dpi
~199dpi
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.
B147/B149/B190
5-94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-325
8-32x 1
8-32x 2
8-32x 3
8-32x 4
8-32x 5
8-32x 6
8-381
8-382
8-383
8-384
8-385
8-386
8-387
T:Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by compression method the total number of pages
scanned.
S:Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by compression method the total number of pages
scanned by the Scan application.
JPEG
JPEG2000
TIFF (Comp OFF)
TIFF (Comp ON)
PDF
Other
T:Total PrtPGS
C:Total PrtPGS
F:Total PrtPGS
P:Total PrtPGS
S:Total PrtPGS
L:Total PrtPGS
O:Total PrtPGS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed

by the customer. The counter for the application
used for storing the pages increments.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
SM
5-95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-321
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-391
8-401
8-402
8-403
8-404
8-405
8-406
LSize PrtPGS
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
T:PrtPGS/LS
C:PrtPGS/LS
F:PrtPGS/LS
P:PrtPGS/LS
S:PrtPGS/LS
L:PrtPGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL

from the document server. The counter for the
application used to print the pages is
incremented.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
B147/B149/B190
5-96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Prints/Duplex
8-421
8-422
8-423
8-424
8-425
8-426
8-427
8-42x 1
8-42x 2
8-42x 3
8-42x 4
8-42x 5
8-42x 6
8-42x 7
8-42x 8
8-42x 9
8-42x 10
8-42x 11
8-42x 12
8-42x 13
*CTL
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
Simplex> Duplex
Duplex> Duplex
Book> Duplex
Simplex Combine
Duplex Combine
2>
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
4>
6>
8>
9>
16>
Booklet
Magazine
These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
SM
5-97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-411
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Booklet
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
4
8
4
8-431
8-432
8-434
8-436
8-437
8-43x 1
8-43x 2
8-43x 3
Magazine
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
4
6
4
7
4
8
4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
Cover/Slip Sheet
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
User Stamp
The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
B147/B149/B190
5-98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8-441
8-442
8-443
8-444
8-445
8-446
8-447
8-44x 1
8-44x 2
8-44x 3
8-44x 4
8-44x 5
8-44x 6
8-44x 7
8-44x 8
8-44x 9
8-44x 10
8-44x 254
8-44x 255
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
SM
5-99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-451
8-451 1
8-451 2
8-451 3
8-451 4
8-451 5
8-451 6
8-451 7
8-451 8
8-451 9
8-451 10
8-461
8-462
8-463
8-464
8-466
8-46x 1
8-46x 2
8-46x 3
8-46x 4
8-46x 5
8-46x 6
8-46x 7
8-46x 8
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Copier
Tray 2
Copier
Tray 3
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 4
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 5
LCT (Option)
Tray 6
Currently not used.
Tray 7
Currently not used.
Tray 8
Currently not used.
Tray 9
Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
Normal
Recycled
Special
Thick
Normal (Back)
Thick (Back)
OHP
Other
B147/B149/B190
5-100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-471
8-471 1
8-471 2
8-471 3
8-471 4
8-471 5
PrtPGS/Mag
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
~49%
50%~99%
100%
101%~200%
201% ~
8-481
8-484
T:PrtPGS/TonSave
*CTL
P:PrtPGS/TonSave
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8-491
8-492
8-493
8-496
8-49x 1
8-49x 2
8-49x 3
8-49x 4
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
C:PrtPGS/Col Mode
F:PrtPGS/Col Mode
L:PrtPGS/Col Mode
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL

in the Color Mode by each application.
8-501
8-504
8-50x 1
8-50x 2
8-50x 3
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
P:PrtPGS/Col Mode
B/W
Single Color
Full Color
*CTL
*CTL

in the Color Mode by the print application.
SM
5-101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-511
8-514
8-514 1
8-514 2
8-514 3
8-514 4
8-514 5
8-514 6
8-514 7
8-514 8
8-514 9
8-514 10
8-514 11
8-514 12
8-514 13
8-514 14
T:PrtPGS/Emul
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
RPCS
RPDL
PS3
R98
R16
GL/GL2
R55
RTIFF
PDF
PCL5e/5c
PCL XL
IPDL-C
BM-Links
Japan Only
Other
SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the
Print application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
B147/B149/B190
5-102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8-521
8-522
8-523
8-524
8-525
8-526
8-52x 1
8-52x 2
8-52x 3
8-52x 4
8-52x 5
8-52x 6
8-52x 7
T:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Fax application.
Note:
Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
Sort
Stack
Staple
Booklet
Z-Fold
Punch
Other
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8-531
SM
Staples
*CTL
This SP counts the amount of staples used

by the machine.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
5-103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-581
8-581 1
8-581 2
8-581 3
8-581 4
8-581 5
8-581 6
8-581 7
8-581 8
8-581 9
8-581 10
8-581 11
8-582
8-582 1
8-582 2
8-582 3
8-582 4
T:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Total
Total: Full Color
B&W/Single Color
Development: CMY
Development: K
Copy: Color
Copy: B/W
Print: Color
Print: B/W
Total: Color
Total: B/W
C:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
8-583
F:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color
output.
8-583 1 B/W
8-583 2 Single Color
8-584
P:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8-584 1 B/W
8-584 2 Single Color
8-584 3 Full Color
8-586
8-582 1
8-582 2
8-582 3
8-582 4
L:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
B147/B149/B190
5-104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-591 1
8-591 2
8-591 3
8-631
8-633
8-63x 1
8-63x 2
O:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
A3/DLT
Duplex
Staple
T:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
B/W
Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8631 and SP8633 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
SM
5-105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-591
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-641
T:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8-643
F:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8-64x 1 B/W
8-64x 2 Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
B147/B149/B190
5-106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-651
8-655
8-656
8-65x 1
8-65x 2
T:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for the Scan application only.
L:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for LS applications only.
B/W
Color
Service
Tables
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
SM
5-107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-661
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8-665
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by the Scan application.
8-666
L:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by LS applications.
8-66x 1 B/W
8-66x 2 Color
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
8-671
T:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8-675
S:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scanto-PC with the Scan application.
8-676
L:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scanto-PC function with the LS applications.
8-67x 1 B/W
8-67x 2 Color
B147/B149/B190
5-108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-681
8-683
T:PCFAX TXPGS
F:PCFAX TXPGS
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC

Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
SP8 683 are the same.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
T:TX PGS/LS
C:TX PGS/LS
F:TX PGS/LS
P:TX PGS/LS
S:TX PGS/LS
L:TX PGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages sent from

the document server. The counter for the
application that was used to store the pages is
incremented.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go
to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored are counted for the application that stored them.
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
8-701
8-701 1
8-701 2
8-701 3
8-701 4
8-701 5
8 741
8-741 1
8-741 2
8-741 3
8-741 4
8-741 5
SM
TX PGS/Port
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
RX PGS/Port
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port
used to receive them.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
5-109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-691
8-692
8-693
8-694
8-695
8-696
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-771
8-771 1
8-771 2
8-771 3
8-771 4
8-771 5
8-781
8-781 1
8-781 2
8-781 3
8-781 4
Rev. 05/2005
Dev Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
Total
K
Y
M
C
Toner Botol Info.
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8781-001 through 004 are the same.
Toner [BK]
The number of black-toner bottle
Toner [Y]
The number of yellow-toner bottle
Toner [M]
The number of magenta-toner bottle
Toner [C]
The number of cyan-toner bottle
8-791
LS Memory Remain
8-801
Toner Remain
*CTL
[0~100/ 0 / 10]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. These SPs
allow the user to check the toner supply at any time.
K
Y
M
C
8-801 1
8-801 2
8-801 3
8-801 4
8-831
8-831 1
8-831 2
8-831 3
8-831 4
8-841
8-841 1
8-841 2
8-841 3
8-841 4
*CTL
This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
Coverage
*BCU
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the average coverage by color. ( SP 7-833)
Average [BK]
Average [Y]
Average [M]
Average [C]
Coverage
*BCU
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. ( SP 7-833)
Last [BK]
Last [Y]
Last [M]
Last [C]
B147/B149/B190
5-110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-851 1
8-851 2
8-851 3
8-851 4
8-861
8-851 1
8-851 2
8-851 3
8-851 4
8-871
8-871 1
8-871 2
8-871 3
8-871 4
8-881
8-881 1
8-881 2
8-881 3
8-881 4
8-891
8-891 1
8-891 2
8-891 3
8-891 4
8-901
8-901 1
8-901 2
8-901 3
8-901 4
SM
Coverage: 0-10%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 11-20%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 21-30%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 31%*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
each color is 31% or higher.
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
PM Counter
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.
S: Toner [BK]
S: Toner [Y]
S: Toner [M]
S: Toner [C]
PM Counter: Previous
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheet output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
S: Toner [BK]
S: Toner [Y]
S: Toner [M]
S: Toner [C]
5-111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
8-851
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8-941
8-941 1
8-941 2
8-941 3
8-941 4
8-941 5
8-941 6
8-941 7
8-941 8
8-941 9
8-951
8-951 1
8-951 2
8-951 3
8-951 4
8-951 5
8-951 6
8-951 7
8-951 8
8-951 9
8-951 10
Machine Status
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
Low Power Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
Off Mode Time
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
Down Time/SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
Down Time/PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.
AddBook Register
*CTL
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code
User code registrations.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Mail Address
Mail address registrations.
Fax Destination
Fax destination registrations.
Group
Group destination registrations.
Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations
for relay TX.
F-Code
F-Code box registrations.
Copy Program
[0~255 / 0 / 255]
Copy application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Fax Program
Fax application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Printer Program
Printer application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner
Scanner application registrations
Program
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
B147/B149/B190
5-112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-801
[Memory Clear]
5-801-3 SCS
5-801-4 IMH
5-801-5 MCS
5-801-6 Copier application
5-801-7 Fax application
5-801-8 Printer application
5-801-9 Scanner application

5-801-10 Netfile application
5-801-11 NCS
5-801-12 IPU
5-801-13 R-Fax
5-998
[Memory Clear]
5-998-1 ENG Setting
5-998-2 ENG Counter

7-808
[Counter Clear]
7-808-1 Counter Clear
SM
SP5-009, 101, 104, 305, 812, 833, 961, and 970

SP7-101, 204, 209, 401, 502, 504, 506, and 507
No SP modes are cleared. But, all files stored in the
HDD are cleared.
No SP modes are cleared.
Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
The following service settings:
Bit switches
Gamma settings (User & Service)
Toner Limit
The following user settings:
Tray Priority
Menu Protect
System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver
I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
PCL Menu
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all
the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the network file application management files
and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)
Clears the IPU settings
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
All engine related SP modes except for the following:

Serial number information
SP modes related to meter charge
Counters and logging data
All counters and logging data related to engine
SP7-101, 204, 209, 502, 504, 506, and 507
5-113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
NOTE: Memory Clear (SP5-801 & 7-808)

The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,
meter charge setting (SP5-930), and meter charge counters (SP7-003) are not
cleared.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each
digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No.
Result
5-803
7
0 or 1
Bit
6
0 or 1
5
0 or 1
4
0 or 1
3
0 or 1
2
0 or 1
Paper end
Paper detected
Activated
(Actuator not
inside sensor)
Deactivated
2 Paper Height Sensor 1
3 Paper Height Sensor 2
4 Tray Set
5-803-2 Paper Tray 2
0 Paper End Sensor
1 Paper Lift Sensor
See Table 1.
Not set
Set
Paper end
Paper detected
Activated
Deactivated
(Actuator not
inside sensor)
See Table 1.
1: Activated
(Actuator inside sensor)
Paper Height Sensor 1

4 Paper Size Switch 1

5-803-3 By-pass Table
0 Paper End Sensor
1 Paper Size 1
2 Paper Size 2
3 Paper Size 3
4 Paper Size 4
5-803-4 Doors
0 Front Door Switch
1 Left Door Switch
2 Right Door Switch
3 Vertical Transport Switch
4 Duplex Inverter Unit Switch
5 Right Door Switch (LCT/PFU)
5-803-5 Paper Feed
0 Relay Sensor
1 Vertical Transport Sensor
2 Upper Relay Sensor (PFU)
3 Lower Relay Sensor (PFU)
4 Registration Sensor
5 Duplex Inverter Sensor
6 Duplex Feed Sensor
B147/B149/B190
0
0 or 1
Reading
Description
5-803-1 Paper Tray 1

0 Paper End Sensor
1 Paper Lift Sensor
2
3
1
0 or 1
See Table 2.
1: Pushed
Paper end
Paper detected
See Table 3.
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Paper not detected

Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
5-114
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Paper not detected

Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Not full
Not set
Set
0 to 1 : New unit installed
Set
Not set
1 to 0 : New unit installed
US
Europe
Not Set
Set
Not full
Full
Not locked
Not locked
Not locked
Not locked
Not locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Not end
Not end
Not end
Not end
End
End
End
End
Not H.P.
Not contact
Not full
Not set
H.P.
Contact
Full
Set
Activated
(Actuator inside
sensor)
Activated
(Actuator inside
sensor)
Deactivated
6
Drum Gear Position Sensor - CMY

Deactivated
SM
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Full
5-115
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-803-6 Paper Exit

0 Fusing Exit Sensor
1 Paper Exit Sensor
2 Duplex Exit Sensor 1
5 Exit Upper Limit Sensor
5-803-7 Fusing Unit
0 Fusing Unit (Set)
1 Fusing Unit (New)
2 Oil Supply Unit (Set)
3 Oil Supply Unit (New)
4 European Version
5 Waste Oil Bottle Set Sensor
6 Waste Oil Sensor
5-803-8 Motor Lock
0 Development Drive Motor - CMY
1 Development Drive Motor - K
2 Fusing Fan Motor
3 Air Pump Motor - MY
4 Air Pump Motor - CK
5-803-9 Dev. Unit/ PCU
0 Development Unit - K
1 Development Unit - C
2 Development Unit - M
3 Development Unit - Y
4 PCU - K
5 PCU - C
6 PCU - M
7 PCU - Y
5-803-10 Toner End Sens
0 Black Toner
1 Cyan Toner
2 Magenta Toner
3 Yellow Toner
5-803-13 Others
0 LD H.P. Sensor
1 Transfer Belt Sensor
2 3 Used Toner Sensor
4 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor
5 Drum Gear Position Sensor - K
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-803
Bit
Reading
Description
5-803-15 Mail Box 1 (Not used)

0 Tray 1 Paper Overflow Sensor
1 Tray 1 Paper Sensor
5-803-16 Mail Box 2 (Not used)
0 Vertical Transport Sensor 1
1 Vertical Transport Sensor 2
2 Door Safety Switch
Not full
Paper not detected
Not full
Paper not detected
Not full
Paper not detected
Not full
Paper not detected
Full
Paper detected
Full
Paper detected
Full
Paper detected
Full
Paper detected
Paper not detected

Paper not detected
Opened
Paper detected
Paper detected
Closed
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007

6-007
Bit
6-007-1 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6-007-2 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6-007-3 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Original width sensor 4
Skew correction sensor
Original set sensor
Original length sensor 1*
Original stopper HP sensor
Pick-up HP sensor
Top cover Sensor
Lift sensor
Inverter sensor
Exit sensor
Registration sensor
Interval Sensor
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
Reading
0
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Original stopper up
Cover closed
Cover closed
Pick-up roller up
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
1
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Original stopper down
Cover opened
Cover opened
Pick-up roller down
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
NOTE: The original length sensors detect the following paper sizes: B5 (sensor 1),
LG (sensor 2), and A4 (sensor 3).
B147/B149/B190
5-116
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

Remaining paper
Full
Nearly full
Near end
Almost empty
Low: Deactivated, High: Activated (actuator inside sensor)

Paper height sensor 1
Paper height sensor 2
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

Models
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
81/2" x 14" SEF *1
B4 SEF *1
81/2" x 11" SEF *2
A4 SEF *2
11" x 81/2" LEF *3
11" x 81/2" LEF *3
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
B5 LEF
A5 LEF
A5 LEF
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0: Not pushed, 1: pushed

Switch Location
2
3
4
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
Service
Tables
NOTES:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

Models
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
81/2" x 11" SEF
A4 SEF
8" x 13" SEF
F SEF
A5 SEF
51/2" x 181/2" SEF
B6 SEF
Post Card
Post Card
SM
Bit No.
4
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
3
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
5-117
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Table 4: Original Size Detection

Original Size
A4/A3 version
A3
B4
F4
A4-L
B5-L
A4-S
B5-S
A5-L, A5-S
B147/B149/B190
Length Sensor
LT/DLT version
11" x 17"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (8" x 13")
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5"
L3
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
L2
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
L1
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
5-118
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Width
Sensor
W2
W1
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
SP4-301
display
132
141
165
133
142
5
14
128
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.1 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

CH: Charge
PF: Paper Feed
TS: Toner Supply
CW: Clockwise
CCW: Counterclockwise
MB: 4-bin Mailbox
DI: Duplex Inverter
SM
Description
Lift M UP (1)
Lift M DOWN(1)
Lift M UP(2)
Lift M DOWN(2)
By-pass CL
Pick-up SOL
PF CL (1)
PF CL (2)
PF GRP SOL
Regist CL
Junction SOL
Oil Supply SOL
Fusing CL
Wst Tn Vib M
K Dev CL
C Dev CL
M Dev CL
Y Dev CL
K Dev M H
K Dev M M
K Dev M L
K Dev M Card
FC Dev M H
FC Dev M M
FC Dev M L
TS CL [Y]
TS CL [M]
TS CL [C]
TS CL [K]
Valve SOL [K]
Valve SOL [C]
Valve SOL [M]
Valve SOL [Y]
Toner Sply Mt1
Toner Sply Mt2
Air Supply [Y]
Air Supply [M]
Air Supply [C]
Air Supply [K]
T End Sens [Y]
Tray 1 Lift Motor / UP

Tray 1 Lift Motor / DOWN
Tray 2 Lift Motor / UP
Tray 2 Lift Motor / DOWN
By-pass Feed Clutch
Pick-up Solenoid
Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 1
Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 2
Grip Roller Release Solenoid
Registration Clutch
Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
Oil Supply Unit Solenoid
Fusing Clutch
Waste Toner Vibration Motor
Development Unit Clutch - K
Development Unit Clutch - C
Development Unit Clutch - M
Development Unit Clutch - Y
Development Motor - K / High Speed
Development Motor - K / Middle Speed
Development Motor - K / Low Speed
Black Development Motor - Thick paper
Color Development Motor - 185mm/s
Color Development Motor - 125mm/s
Color Development Motor - 62.5mm/s
Toner Supply Clutch for Yellow
Toner Supply Clutch for Magenta
Toner Supply Clutch for Cyan
Toner Supply Clutch for Black
Air Flow Valve solenoid for Black
Air Flow Valve solenoid for Cyan
Air Flow Valve solenoid for Magenta
Air Flow Valve solenoid for Yellow
Toner Supply Motor 1 - yellow and magenta
Toner Supply Motor 2 - cyan and black
Air Pump Motor and Valve for Yellow
Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta
Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan
Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black
Toner End Sensor - Y
5-119
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
5-804
5-804-1
5-804-2
5-804-3
5-804-4
5-804-5
5-804-6
5-804-7
5-804-8
5-804-9
5-804-10
5-804-11
5-804-12
5-804-13
5-804-14
5-804-19
5-804-20
5-804-21
5-804-22
5-804-23
5-804-24
5-804-25
5-804-26
5-804-27
5-804-28
5-804-29
5-804-30
5-804-31
5-804-32
5-804-33
5-804-34
5-804-35
5-804-36
5-804-37
5-804-38
5-804-39
5-804-40
5-804-41
5-804-42
5-804-43
5-804-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-804
5-804-45
5-804-46
5-804-47
5-804-50
5-804-51
5-804-52
5-804-53
5-804-54
5-804-55
5-804-56
5-804-57
5-804-58
5-804-59
5-804-65
5-804-66
T End Sens [M]

T End Sens [C]
T End Sens [K]
PSU Fan
Fusing Fan H
Fusing Fan L
M Fan
Belt M CW
Belt M CCW
Belt M Break
Fusing Relay
Heat Lamp
Pressure Lamp
Drum M L CW
Drum M M CW
5-804-67
5-804-76
5-804-77
5-804-78
5-804-79
5-804-80
5-804-81
Drum M H CW
PF M L CW
PF M M CW
PF M H CW
PF M Feed
By-Pass M L CW
By-Pass M C CW
5-804-82
5-804-89
5-804-90
5-804-91
5-804-92
5-804-93
5-804-94
5-804-95
5-804-96
5-804-97
5-804-98
5-804-99
5-804-100
5-804-101
5-804-102
5-804-103
5-804-104
5-804-105
5-804-106
5-804-107
5-804-108
5-804-109
5-804-110
5-804-111
By-Pass M M CW
CH DC [Y]
CH DC [M]
CH DC [C]
CH DC [K]
CH AC [FC] 62.5
CH AC [K] 62.5
CH AC [FC] 125
CH AC [K] 125
CH AC [FC] 185
CH AC [K] 185
Dev DC [Y]
Dev DC [M]
Dev DC [C]
Dev DC [K]
Dev AC [FC] 62.5
Dev AC [K] 62.5
Dev AC [FC] 125
Dev AC [K] 125
Dev AC [FC] 185
Dev AC [K] 185
Transfer [Y]
Transfer [M]
Transfer [C]
B147/B149/B190
Description
Toner End Sensor - M
Toner End Sensor - C
Toner End Sensor - K
PSU Cooling Fan Motor
Fusing Fan Motor / High Speed
Fusing Fan Motor / Low Speed
Laser Optics Housing Unit Cooling Fan
Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Clockwise
Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Counterclockwise
Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Break
Fusing Relay
Heating Roller Fusing Lamp
Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Low Speed / Clockwise
Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Middle Speed /
Clockwise
Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / High Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / High Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Feed Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Thick paper or OHP mode /
Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
Charge DC Bias for Yellow / 125 mm/s
Charge DC Bias for Magenta / 125 mm/s
Charge DC Bias for Cyan / 125 mm/s
Charge DC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s
Charger AC / Full Color / 62.5 mm/s
Charger AC / Black / 62.5 mm/s
Charger AC / Full Color / 125 mm/s
Charger AC / Black / 125 mm/s
Charger AC / Full Color / 185 mm/s
Charger AC / Black / 185 mm/s
Development DC Bias for Yellow
Development DC Bias for Magenta
Development DC Bias for Cyan
Development DC Bias for Black
Development AC Bias for Color - 62.5 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Black - 62.5 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Color - 125 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Black - 125 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Color - 185 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Black - 185 mm/s
Transfer Current for Yellow
Transfer Current for Magenta
Transfer Current for Cyan
5-120
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5-804
5-804-112
5-804-113
5-804-114
5-804-115
5-804-116
5-804-117
5-804-118
5-804-119
5-804-120
5-804-121
5-804-122
5-804-123
5-804-124
5-804-125
5-804-126
5-804-127
5-804-128
5-804-129
5-804-130
5-804-131
5-804-132
5-804-133
5-804-134
5-804-136
5-804-137
5-804-141
5-804-142
5-804-143
5-804-144
5-804-145
5-804-146
5-804-147
5-804-148
5-804-149
5-804-150
5-804-151
5-804-152
5-804-153
5-804-154
5-804-155
5-804-156
5-804-157
5-804-158
5-804-159
5-804-165
Transfer [K]
Cleaning Bias
PA Roller Bias+
PA Roller BiasDevAC TRG [FC]
DevAC TRG [K]
DevPWM TRG [K]
DevPWM TRG [C]
DevPWM TRG [M]
DevPWM TRG [Y]
CHdcPWM TRG [K]
CHdcPWM TRG [C]
CHdcPWM TRG [M]
CHdcPWM TRG [Y]
CHac1 TRG [FC]
Chac2 TRG [FC]
Chac3 TRG [FC]
CHac1 TRG [K]
Chac2 TRG [K]
Chac3 TRG [K]
ID Sensor LED
TD Vcnt
Memory Chip
PCU Cln Bias K
PCU Cln Bias YMC
Polygon M 29
Polygon M 21
LD FC[K]62.5
LD FC[K]125
LD FC[Y]62.5
LD FC[Y]125
LD FC[M]62.5
LD FC[M]125
LD FC[C]62.5
LD FC[C]125
LD1 [K] 62.5
LD1 [K] 125
LD1 [K] 185
LD2 [K] 62.5
LD2 [K] 125
LD2 [K] 185
LD [K]62.5
LD [K]125
LD [K]185
PSU M
5-804-166 PF CL PFU (1)

5-804-167 PF CL PFU (2)
SM
Description
Transfer Current for Black
Transfer Belt Cleaning Roller Bias
Paper Attraction Roller Bias
Paper Attraction Roller Bias
Development AC Trigger for Color
Development AC Trigger for Black
Development PWM Trigger for Black
Development PWM Trigger for Cyan
Development PWM Trigger for Magenta
Development PWM Trigger for Yellow
Charge DC PWM Trigger for Black
Charge DC PWM Trigger for Cyan
Charge DC PWM Trigger for Magenta
Charge DC PWM Trigger for Yellow
Charge AC1 Trigger for Color
Charge AC1 Trigger for Black
ID Sensor LED
TD Sensor / Vcnt
Memory Chip / Power (5V) Supply
PCU Cleaning Bias Black
PCU Cleaning Bias YMC
Polygon Motor / 29.528
Polygon Motor / 21.850
LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 62.5
LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 125
LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 62.5
LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 125
LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 62.5
LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 125
LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 62.5
LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 125
LD1 Power for Black / 62.5
LD1 Power for Black / 125
LD2 Power for Black / 62.5
LD Power for Black / 62.5
LD Power for Black / 125
LD Power for Black / 185
Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU: Paper Supply Unit) /
Motor
Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 1
Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 2
5-121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5-804
5-804-168 Pick-up SOL PSU
5-804-170
5-804-171
5-804-172
5-804-173
5-804-174
5-804-176
5-804-177
5-804-178
5-804-179
5-804-180
5-804-181
5-804-182
5-804-183
5-804-184
5-804-185
5-804-186
5-804-187
5-804-188
5-804-189
5-804-190
5-804-191
5-804-192
5-804-193
5-804-194
5-804-195
5-804-196
5-804-197
5-804-198
5-804-199
5-804-200
5-804-201
5-804-202
5-804-203
5-804-204
5-804-205
5-804-206
5-804-207
MB M
MB SOL1
MB SOL2
MB SOL3
MB Gate SOL
Duplex SOL
DI M1 62.5CCW
DI M1 65CCW
DI M1 125CCW
DI M1 130CCW
DI M1 185CCW
DI M1 193CCW
DI M1 370CCW
DI M1 370CW
DI M1 450CW
DI M2 62.5CCW
DI M2 65CCW
DI M2 125CCW
DI M2 130CCW
DI M2 185CCW
DI M2 193CCW
DI M2 370CCW
DI M2 370CW
DI M2 450CW
DI M2 OFF
DI M12 62.5CCW
DI M12 65CCW
DI M12 125CCW
DI M12 130CCW
DI M12 185CCW
DI M12 193CCW
DI M12 370CCW
DI M12 370CW
DI M12 450CW
PF M 125CCW
PF M 230CCW
PF M 370CCW
B147/B149/B190
Description
Pick-up Solenoid / Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU:
Paper Supply Unit)
4-bin Mailbox Main Motor
4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 1
4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid
Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 65 / Counterclockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Clockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / OFF
Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 65 / Counterclockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 370 / Clockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 450 / Clockwise
Duplex Feed Motor / 125 / Counterclockwise
5-122
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.2 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997)
Test Pattern Printting
SP5-997-001
Selects the tray in which

desired paper size is
loaded.
SP5-997-002
Selects a pattern.
SP5-997-003
Selects a color if printing

the test pattern in the
Single Color mode.
SP5-997-004
Selects the Single Color

or Full Color mode.
SP5-997-005
Selects the resolution.
Tray or by-pass
By-pass
Selects the desired

paper size.
SP5-997-006
Tray
SP5-997-007
Prints the test pattern.
B146S913.WMF
SM
5-123
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
Test Pattern Selection (SP5-997-002)

0: None
11. 1-dot pattern
12. 2-dot pattern
13. 4-dot pattern
16. Cross stitch: sub-scan
17. Cross stitch: main-scan
18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)
19. Belt pattern (Vertical)
20. Checkered Flag
21. Grey scale (Vertical)
22. Grey scale (Horizontal)
23. Solid
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1-001
1-001-1
1-001-2
1-001-3
1-001-4
1-001-5
1-001-6
1-001-7
1-001-8
[Bit Switch]
Bit Switch 1 Settings
*CTL Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU
[Clear Setting]
1-003
1-003-1 Initialize Printer System
Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode.
1-003-3 Delete Program
[Print Summary]
1-004
1-004-1 Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
[Display Version]
1-005
1-005-1 Disp. Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1-006
[Sample/Locked Print]
*CTL 0: Linked, 1: On
1-006-1 Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document
server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When
you select 1, the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode
SP5-967.
1-101
1-101-1
1-101-2
1-101-3
1-101-4
[Data Recall]
Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the
previous setting, or c) the current setting.
*CTL
Factory
Previous
Current
ACC
[Resolution Setting]
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
1-102-1 1200x1200 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 1200x1200 Text, 1800x600,
Text, 600x600 Text
1-102
1-103
[Test Page]
Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma
adjustment.
B147/B149/B190
5-124
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
1-103-1 Color Gray Scale
1-103-2 Color Pattern
1-104
1-104-1
1-104-2
1-104-3
1-104-4
1-104-21
1-104-22
1-104-23
1-104-24
1-104-41
1-104-42
1-104-43
1-104-44
1-104-61
1-104-62
1-104-63
1-104-64
[Gamma Adjustment]
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu.
Black: Highlight
*
[ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
CTL
Black: Shadow
Black: Middle
Black: IDmax
Cyan: Highlight
Cyan: Shadow
Cyan: Middle
Cyan: IDmax
Magenta: Highlight
Magenta: Shadow
Magenta: Middle
Magenta: IDmax
Yellow: Highlight
Yellow: Shadow
Yellow: Middle
Yellow: IDmax
[Save Tone Control Value]

Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma Adj. menu item as the current
setting. Before the machine stores the new current setting", it moves the data
currently stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory storage
location.
1-105-1 ToneCtlSave
Service
Tables
1-105
[Toner Limit]
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
*CTL [ 100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]
1-106-1 Toner Limit: Photo
1-106-2 Toner Limit: Text
[ 100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step ]
1-106
SM
5-125
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE

SP1-xxx (System and Others)
1-004
1-004-1
1-005
1-005-1
1-007
1-007-1
[Compression Type]
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
Compression Type
*
[ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
CTL 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase margin]
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
Erase Margin
*
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
CTL
*
[1: Send/2: Store Only/3: Send & Store]
CTL
This program specifies how scanned data is processed as default.
[Store Priority]
B147/B149/B190
5-126
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)
2-002-2
2-002-7
2-002-8
2-002-11
2-002-12
2-002-13
2-002-14
2-002-15
2-002-16
2-002-17
2-002-18
2-002-19
2-002-20
2-002-21
2-002-22
2-002-23
2-002-24
2-002-25
2-002-26
2-002-27
2-002-28
2-002-29
2-002-30
2-002-31
SM
[Text (Print) mode settings]

MTF Filter Coefficient
*
(Main scan)
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step ] DFU
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter.
If this is 0, the MTF filter is not applied.
*
[ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step ] DFU
(Sub scan)
CTL
As above, for sub scan
Smoothing Filter
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 1 / 255/step ] DFU
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
A larger value could cause moir to appear in the image.
Scanner Gamma
*
[ 0 to 6 / 4 / 11/step ] DFU
CTL 0: Standard
1: Smooth
2: Clearly
3: Liner
4: Text image for the delivery function
5: Text/photo image for the delivery function
6: Photo image for the delivery function
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when using
binary picture processing mode.
Notch No.7: (Lighter): Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
*
CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7: (Lighter): Contrast
Notch No.7: (Lighter): Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.4 (Middle): Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.4 (Middle): Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.4 (Middle): Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.1: (Darker): Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.1: (Darker): Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.1: (Darker): Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
5-127
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
2-002
2-002-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
2-003
2-003-1
2-003-2
2-003-7
2-003-8
2-003-11
2-003-12
2-003-13
2-003-14
2-003-15
2-003-16
2-003-17
2-003-18
2-003-19
2-003-20
2-003-21
2-003-22
2-003-23
2-003-24
2-003-25
2-003-26
2-003-27
2-003-28
2-003-29
2-003-30
2-003-31
[Text (OCR) mode settings]

*
(Main scan)
CTL
[0 to 255 / 11 / 1/step ] DFU
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text/Photo mode.
*
[ 0 to 255 / 11 / 1/step ] DFU
(Sub scan)
CTL
Smoothing Filter
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text/Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
Scanner Gamma
*
[ 0 to 11 / 5 / 1/step ] DFU
CTL
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text/Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 215 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 200 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 185 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.4: (Middle): Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.4: (Middle): Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.4: (Middle): Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 150 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 130 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to -255 / 110 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190
5-128
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
2-004-2
2-004-7
2-004-8
2-004-11
2-004-12
2-004-13
2-004-14
2-004-15
2-004-16
2-004-17
2-004-18
2-004-19
2-004-20
2-004-21
2-004-22
2-004-23
2-004-24
2-004-25
2-004-26
2-004-27
2-004-28
2-004-29
2-004-30
2-004-31
SM
[Text/Photo mode settings]

*
(Main scan)
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step ] DFU
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text/Photo mode.
*
[ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1/step ] DFU
(Sub scan)
CTL
Smoothing Filter
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 2 / 1/step ] DFU
Selects the smoothing pattern for Text/Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
Scanner Gamma
*
[ 0 to 11 / 6 / 1/step ] DFU
CTL
Selects the scanner gamma type for Text/Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
*
CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to -255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
5-129
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
2-004
2-004-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
2-0052-005-1
2-005-2
2-005-7
2-005-8
2-005-9
2-005-11
2-005-12
2-005-13
2-005-14
2-005-15
2-005-16
2-005-17
2-005-18
2-005-19
2-005-20
2-005-21
2-005-22
2-005-23
2-005-24
2-005-25
2-005-26
2-005-27
2-005-28
2-005-29
2-005-30
2-005-31
[Photo mode settings]

(Main scan)
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 2 / 1/step ] DFU
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Photo mode.
*
[ 0 to 255 / 2 / 1/step ] DFU
(Sub scan)
CTL
Smoothing Filter
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 7 / 1/step ] DFU
Selects the smoothing pattern for Photo mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
Scanner Gamma
*
[ 0 to 11 / 7 / 1/step ] DFU
CTL
Selects the scanner gamma type for Photo mode when using binary picture
processing mode.
Dither Matrix Filter
*
[1 to 11 / 5 / 1 step] DFU
CTL
Selects the dither matrix type for Photo mode when using binary picture processing
mode.
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
*
CTL [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190
5-130
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
2-006-2
2-006-7
2-006-8
2-006-11
2-006-12
2-006-13
2-006-14
2-006-15
2-006-16
2-006-17
2-006-18
2-006-19
2-006-20
2-006-21
2-006-22
2-006-23
2-006-24
2-006-25
2-006-26
2-006-27
2-006-28
2-006-29
2-006-30
2-006-31
SM
[Gray scale mode settings]

*
(Main scan)
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step ] DFU
Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction when using grayscale
processing mode.
If this is 0, the MTF filter is not applied
*
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step ] DFU
(Sub scan)
CTL
Smoothing Filter
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU
Selects the smoothing pattern when using grayscale processing mode.

Scanner Gamma
*
[ 0 to 11 / 11 / 1/step ] DFU
CTL
Selects the scanner gamma type when using grayscale processing mode.
Notch No.7 (Lighter): Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
*
CTL
Notch No.7 (Lighter): Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7 (Lighter): Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
5-131
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
2-006
2-006-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
2-007
2-007-1
2-007-2
2-007-3
2-007-4
2-007-5
2-007-6
2-007-11
2-007-12
2-007-13
2-007-14
2-007-15
2-007-16
2-007-17
2-007-18
2-007-19
2-007-20
2-007-21
2-007-22
2-007-23
2-007-24
2-007-25
2-007-26
2-007-27
2-007-28
2-007-29
2-007-30
2-007-31
2-007-32
2-007-33
2-007-34
2-007-35
2-007-36
2-007-37
2-007-38
[Full Color (Text) mode settings]

*
(Main scan)
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU
processing mode.
*
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU
(Sub scan)
CTL
Smoothing Filter
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 4 / 1/step ] DFU

Adjusts the scanner gamma for RGB.
*
R-Gamma Curve
[ 0 to 11 / 9 / 1 /step ] DFU
CTL
G-Gamma Curve
B-Gamma Curve
*
Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
CTL
Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7(Lighter): R - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7(Lighter): G - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7(Lighter): B - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: R - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: G - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: B - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: R - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6 G - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: B - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: R - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: G - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.6: B - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.4(Middle): R - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190
5-132
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2-007-39
2-007-40
2-007-41
2-007-42
2-007-43
2-007-44
2-007-45
2-007-46
2-007-47
2-007-48
2-007-49
2-007-50
2-007-51
2-007-52
2-007-53
2-007-54
2-007-55
2-007-56
2-007-57
2-007-58
2-007-59
2-007-60
2-007-61
2-007-62
2-007-63
2-007-64
2-007-65
2-007-66
2-007-67
2-007-68
2-007-69
2-007-70
2-007-71
2-007-72
2-007-73
SM
Notch No. 4(Middle): G - Brightness

Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Brightness
Notch No. 4(Middle): R - Contrast
Notch No. 4(Middle) G - Contrast
Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Contrast
Notch No. 4(Middle): R - Threshold
Notch No. 4(Middle): G - Threshold
Notch No. 4(Middle): B - Threshold
Notch No.1(Darker): R - Brightness
Notch No. 1(Darker): G - Brightness
Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Brightness
Notch No. 1(Darker): R - Contrast
Notch No. 1(Darker) G - Contrast
Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Contrast
Notch No. 1(Darker): R - Threshold
Notch No. 1(Darker): G - Threshold
Notch No. 1(Darker): B - Threshold
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
5-133
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
SCANNER SP MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
2-008
2-008-1
2-008-2
2-008-3
2-008-4
2-008-5
2-008-6
2-008-11
2-008-12
2-008-13
2-008-14
2-008-15
2-008-16
2-008-17
2-008-18
2-008-19
2-008-20
2-008-21
2-008-22
2-008-23
2-008-24
2-008-25
2-008-26
2-008-27
2-008-28
2-008-29
2-008-30
2-008-31
2-008-32
2-008-33
2-008-34
2-008-35
2-008-36
2-008-37
2-008-38
[Full Color (Photo) mode settings]

*
(Main scan)
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 5 / 1/step ] DFU
processing mode.
*
[ 0 to 255 / 5 / 1/step ] DFU
(Sub scan)
CTL
Smoothing Filter
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ] DFU

Adjusts the scanner gamma for RGB.
*
R-Gamma Curve
[ 0 to 10 / 10 / 1 /step ] DFU
CTL
G-Gamma Curve
B-Gamma Curve
*
Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
CTL
Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Contrast
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7 (Lighter): R - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7 (Lighter): G - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.7 (Lighter): B - Threshold
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
Notch No.4 (Middle): R - Brightness
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
B147/B149/B190
5-134
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2-008-39
2-008-40
2-008-41
2-008-42
2-008-43
2-008-44
2-008-45
2-008-46
2-008-47
2-008-48
2-008-49
2-008-50
2-008-51
2-008-52
2-008-53
2-008-54
2-008-55
2-008-56
2-008-57
2-008-58
2-008-59
2-008-60
2-008-61
2-008-62
2-008-63
2-008-64
2-008-65
2-008-66
2-008-67
2-008-68
2-008-69
2-008-70
2-008-71
2-008-72
2-008-73
2-021
2-021-1
2-021-2
2-021-3
SM
Notch No. 4 (Middle): G - Brightness

Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Brightness
Notch No. 4 (Middle): R - Contrast
Notch No. 4 (Middle) G - Contrast
Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Contrast
Notch No. 4 (Middle): R - Threshold
Notch No. 4 (Middle): G - Threshold
Notch No. 4 (Middle): B - Threshold
Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Brightness
Notch No.1 (Darker): G - Brightness
Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Brightness
Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Contrast
Notch No.1 (Darker) G - Contrast
Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Contrast
Notch No.1 (Darker): R - Threshold
Notch No.1 (Darker): G - Threshold
Notch No.1 (Darker): B - Threshold
*
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU

[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ] DFU
[Compression ratio of gray-scale]

Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three
settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
*
Compression ratio (Normal image)
[ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ]
CTL [ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ]
Compression ratio (High quality image)
Compression ratio (Low-quality image)
[ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
5-135
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
SCANNER SP MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
2-022
2-022-1
2-022-2
2-022-3
2-022-4
2-022-5
2-022-6
2-022-7
Rev. 01/2005
[ACS settings]
Color judge rate
*
[ 1 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step ]
CTL
This menu specifies the area ratio that is checked by the auto-color sensing feature.
Color gap Notch No.1
*
[ 0 to 255 / 30 / 1 /step ]
CTL
*
[ 0 to 255 / 28 / 1 /step ]
CTL
*
[ 0 to 255 / 25 / 1 /step ]
CTL
*
[ 0 to 255 / 22 / 1 /step ]
CTL
*
[ 0 to 255 / 10 / 1 /step ]
CTL
This program specifies the color difference for each image density level.
Adjustment value of threshold
*
[ -127 to 127 / -110 / 1 /step ]
NOTE: Requires System firmware v1.21 CTL
or newer.
This menu specifies the threshold of the auto-color sensing feature.
B147/B149/B190
5-136
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET
5.5 REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET

5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use the following
procedure.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-orPress and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine
beeps once, release both buttons. After Now loading. Please wait is displayed for
a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal
operation.
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
Service
Tables
2. Hold down and then press System Settings.

NOTE: You must press first.
B146S914.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system
settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
SM
5-137
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REBOOT / SYSTEM SETTING RESET
Copier Setting Reset

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
NOTE: You must press first.
B146S915.WMF
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier
Document Server settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
B147/B149/B190
5-138
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Rev. 05/2005
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the
firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted
into SD Card Slot 3 on the right side of the controller box.
5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE

There are 16 types of firmware as shown below.
Engine - Main
Engine - Music
Engine - DSP
System
Netfile Application
Printer Application
Scanner Application
Fax Application
NIB
Scanner IPU
Operation Panel
Fax FCU
Language
(16 languages)
WebDocBox
WebSys
SG3-PRE1
PS3
SM
Function
Printer engine control
Line position adjustment
Operating system
Feature application
Feature application
Feature application
Feature application
Network Interface
Scanner control
Panel control
Fax control
Language firmware
Two languages can be
selected from 16
languages.
Document server
application
Web Service application
Optional G3 fax control
Printer Description
Language
Location of
firmware
BCU Flash ROM
BCU MUSIC CPU
BCU DSP CPU
Flash ROM on the
controller board
Flash ROM on the
controller board
Printer/scanner
SD card
Printer/scanner
SD card
Flash ROM on the
controller board
Flash ROM on the
controller board
IPU Flash ROM
Operation Panel
FCU
Operation Panel
Flash ROM on the

controller board
Flash ROM on the
controller board
FCU
SD Card
5-139
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Message displayed
Engine
Music
DSP
Onboard System
Netfile DocBox
Onboard Printer
Onboard Scn
Opt DIMM Fax
Network Support
Scanner IPU
Ope Panel. XX
Jupi FCU (XXX)-1
LANG.1
LANG.2
Web Document Box

Web Support
SG3DREI-1
Option PS3
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
Type of firmware
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Rev. 06/2004
5.6.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

An SD card is a precision device, so always observe the following precautions
when handling SD cards:
Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card. Never insert the SD
card into the slot with the power on.
After the power has been switched on, never remove the SD card from the
service slot.
Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD
card.
Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature,
high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them. Never
drop an SD card or expose it to other shock or vibration.
Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware update
software:
Upload means to send data from the machine to the SD card, and download
means to send data from the SD card to the machine.
To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touchscreen of the LCD, or press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the
operation panel. For example, Exit (0) displayed on the screen means you can
touch the Exit button on the screen, or press the button on the operation
panel of the copier.
Before starting the firmware update procedure, always make sure that the
machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job from arriving
while the firmware update is in progress.
5.6.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE
Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire romdata folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the romdata folder, copy the B149 folder onto the
card.
3. If the card already contains folders up to B149, simply copy the necessary
firmware files (e.g. B149xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
B147/B149/B190
5-140
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. Turn the main power switch off.

2. Remove the slot cover of SD Card Slot
3 ( x 1).
[C]
3. With the label on the SD card [B]

facing as shown in the diagram, insert
the SD card into SD Card Slot 3 [C].
[B]
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot

so it locks in place.
5. Make sure the SD card is locked in
place.
NOTE: To remove the SD, push it in
to unlock the spring lock and
then release it so it pops out of [A]
the slot.
B146S901.WMF
6. If the machine is connected to a network, disconnect the network cable from

the copier.
7. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version
update screen appears on the LCD in English.
Update Menu
(1)
Service
Tables
Firmware
Language Data(2)
Exit(0)
B146S916.WMF
KEY
Firmware (1)
Language Data (2)
Exit (0)
SM
WHAT IT DOES
Press this button on the touch-screen (or on the 10-key pad) to open
the firmware update screen.
Press this button on the touch-screen (or on the 10-key pad) to open
the language update screen.
Press this key on the touch-screen (or on the 10-key pad) to quit the
update procedure and return to normal machine operation.
5-141
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
NOTE: The firmware update and language update cannot be performed during the
same session. If you need to do both, do the firmware update, switch the
machine off and on to confirm the successful update of the firmware, then
do the language update.
8. Touch Firmware (1) to open the firmware update screen.
PCcard -> ROM Page01

Printer
(1)
Engine
(2)
OpePanel.DOM
(3)
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
G0000000
0.01
B0705254
2.16:16
B0705370
1.22
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
G0000000
0.0X
B0705254
2.16:16
B0705370
2.00
Exit(0)
B146S917.WMF
ROM/NEW
ROM:
NEW:
WHAT IT MEANS
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version presently
installed. The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The first
line is the module number, the second line the version name.
9. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the
operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.
B147/B149/B190
5-142
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
10. After pressing the module button, or entering the appropriate number with the
10-key pad to select the module, the Verify and Update keys appear at the
bottom of the screen.
NOTE: The screen below shows only the Printer option selected for update.

Printer
(1)
Engine
(2)
OpePanel.DOM
(3)
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
Verify(./*)
G0000000
0.01
B0705254
2.16:16
B0705370
1.22
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
Exit(0)
G0000000
0.0X
B0705254
2.16:16
B0705370
2.00
UpDate(#)
B146S918.WMF
WHAT IT DOES
Press this button (or ) to verify the selected module.
Press this button (or ) to upgrade the selected module.
Press this button (or ) to return to the previous screen.
Service
Tables
KEY
Verify (./*)
Update(#)
Exit(0)
11. To start the update, touch UpDate (#) (or ).
SM
5-143
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
After selecting Update, three lines are displayed on the screen:

PCcard -> ROM
Loading
Printer
*****_ _ _ _ _
Printer
B146S919.WMF
The first line tells you what is happening, the second line is the name of the
module, and the third line tells you about the progress of the operation. As the
update progresses, the underscores (_) in the progress bar are replaced by
asterisks.
The update is finished after all 10 underscores are replaced by asterisks.
NOTE: The progress bar (*****_ _ _ _) is not displayed for the operation panel
firmware after you touch OpePanel. While the LCDC firmware is
updating, the power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals. When
the update is finished, the power key flashes on and off slower at 3 s
intervals.
When the update is finished, you will see a screen like the one below:
PCcard -> ROM
Update done.
Printer Card No.: 1/1
B146S920.WMF
The first line prompts you that the update is finished, and the second line tells
you the name of the module that has just been updated.
NOTE: If you have selected more than one module for updating, only the
screen for the last module updated will be displayed.
B147/B149/B190
5-144
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
12. When you see the Update Done message, switch the copier main power
switch off.
13. Press in the SD card to release it, then remove it from the slot.
14. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
If an error occurs during the download, an error message will be displayed in
the first line.
PCcard -> ROM
No Valid Data
E24
Exit(0)
The error code consists of the letter E and a number. The example above
shows error E24 displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table.
( 5.6.8)
SM
5-145
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
B146S921.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during
the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.
PCcard -> ROM
Reboot after card insert.
E82
BLC2 eplot Card No.:1/1
B146S922.WMF
Recovery After Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the
firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be
guaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does not
complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operation
of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to be displayed until the ROM
is updated successfully.
In this case, just insert the card once again and switch on the machine to continue
the firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display.
B147/B149/B190
5-146
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.4 VERIFYING A SUCCESSFUL UPDATE

Follow this procedure to verify that a module has been updated successfully.
1. Switch off the main power switch.
2. If the SD card is not in the machine, insert it into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial screen
appears on the LCD in English.
Update Menu
Firmware
(1)
Language Data(2)
Exit(0)
B146S923.WMF
Service
Tables
4. Press Firmware (1) to open the firmware update screen.

Printer
(1)
Engine
(2)
OpePanel.DOM
(3)
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
G0000000
0.01
B0705254
2.16:16
B0705370
1.22
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
G0000000
0.0X
B0705254
2.16:16
B0705370
2.00
Exit(0)
B146S924.WMF
SM
5-147
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5. On the touch-screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key
on the operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to verify
6. After pressing the key, the items selected for verification are displayed in
reverse and the Verify and Update keys appear at the bottom of the screen.
7. To start the verification, touch Verify (./* (or press ).
After selecting Verify, two lines are displayed on the screen:
PCcard -> ROM
Verify done.
B146S925.WMF
The first line tells you the status of the verification for the item selected from the
menu, and the second name tells you the name of the item verified.
NOTE: If you selected more than one item for verification, the Verify Done
message is displayed only once for the last module verified.
9. When you see the Verify Done message, switch the copier main power switch
off.
10. Press in the SD card to release it, then remove it from the slot.
11. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
B147/B149/B190
5-148
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Error during Verification

If anything abnormal is detected during verification, an error message is
displayed:
PCcard -> ROM
Verify Error
B146S926.WMF
The second line tells you the name of the module where the error was detected.
Service
Tables
If an error occurs during verification, switch the printer off and download the
firmware from the SD card again.
SM
5-149
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.5 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL

Follow this procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main switch on.
4. After about 45 seconds the initial screen opens in English.
5. Touch OpePanel.
Printer
(1)
Engine
(2)
OpePanel.DOM
(3)
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
ROM:
Verify(./*)
G0000000
0.01
B0705254
2.16:16
B0705370
1.22
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
NEW:
Exit(0)
G0000000
0.0X
B0705254
2.16:16
B0705370
2.00
UpDate(#)
B146S927.WMF
6. Touch UpDate(#) (or ) to start the update.

After about 9 seconds, the downloading starts.
While the data is downloading, the operation panel goes off and the main
power on key flashes in red at 0.5 s intervals. When the update is finished, the
same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals.
7. Switch the copier main power switch off, remove the SD card, then switch the
copier on again.
B147/B149/B190
5-150
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.6 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA

The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard
disks:
When the machine is installed.
After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software, so execute SP5853 to download the
fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.
2. Select SP5853 then press Execute. The following screen opens while the
stamp data is downloading.
PCcard -> ROM
Loading
Stamp Data
B146S928.WMF
The download is finished with the message prompts you to close.

Processing finished. Switch on the
main power switch.
Note: May re-set automatically.
Close
B146S929.WMF
3. Press the Close button then cycle the copier off and on again.
SM
5-151
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
**_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Follow this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
NOTE: This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is
replaced.
1. Before switching the machine off, execute SP5990 001 (SMC Print). You will
need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Switch the copier main power switch off.
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3, then switch the copier on.
4. Execute SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) then press the Execute key
When uploading is finished, the following files are coped to an NVRAM folder
on the SD card. The fileis saved to the path and filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number B1490017:
NVRAM\B1490017.NV
5. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card
that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the
data was uploaded.
NOTE: NVRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded to the
same SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Follow this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the
machine.
If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between
the controller and BCU is defective, the NVRAM data download may fail.
If the download fails, repeat the download procedure.
If the second attempt fails, enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print
you created before uploading the NVRAM data. ( 5.6.6)
2. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main power switch on.
4. Execute SP5825 001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the Execute key.
NOTE: In order for the NVRAM data to download successfully, the serial
number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the download will fail.
This procedure downloads the following data to the NVRAM:
Total Count
C/O, P/O Count
B147/B149/B190
5-152
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.8 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE

Many languages are available for selection, but only two can be selected for
switching. Follow this procedure to select the two languages, either of which can be
selected for the user interface on the operation panel.
2. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45
seconds.
4. Touch the Language (2) on the screen (or press ).
Download Language
LANG. 1(1)
LANG. 2(2)
LC D C R O M
N ow Lang.
Japanese
B 0705370
Lang.C ard
------
S elect Lang.
2.87
-----English - U K 2.87
------
-> ------------> ------------
---------------------------------------------------------
Exit(0)
Service
Tables
B146S930.WMF
5. Touch LANG. 1(1) or LANG 2(2)

Key
LANG. 1(1)
LANG. 1(2)
Exit(0)
SM
What it does
Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the next
screen so you can select the 1st language.
Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the next
screen so you can select the 2nd language.
Touch this key on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to quit the update
procedure and return to normal screen.
5-153
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
6. To select the 1st Language, touch LANG 1(1).

-orTo select the 2nd Language, touch LANG(2).
(7)
Italian
(1)
S panish
(2)
D utch
(3)
N orw egian
(4)
D anish
(6)
(9)
Exit(0)
B146S931.WMF
7. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) Language.
If a language is already selected, it will be displayed in reverse.
Touching Exit(0) also returns the previous screen.
8. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch (7) or (9) on
the screen (or press or ) to display more choices.
B147/B149/B190
5-154
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
After you select a language, the Download Screen opens.

The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating is displayed.
To the right of the selection, the first column displays the language currently
selected and the 2nd column displays the language selected to replace that
language.
The example below shows that the download will replace Japanese with
Italian as the 1st language.
Download Language
LANG. 1(1)
LANG. 2(2)
LC D C R O M
N ow Lang.
Japanese
B 0705370
Lang.C ard
------
S elect Lang.
2.87
-----English - U K 2.87
------
-> Italian
-> ------------
2.88
-------------------------------------------
Exit(0)
UpDate(#)
9. Touch Update(#) on the screen (or press ) to start the download.

Another screen with a progress bar is not displayed while the language is
downloading.
While the language is downloading:
The operation panel switches off.
The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
10. After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switch
off, then remove the SD card from the slot.
11. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.
SM
5-155
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
B146S932.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 12/2005
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.9 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be displayed in the first
line. The error code consists of the letter E and a number (E20, for example).
Error Message Table
Code
20
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
33
Cannot access memory

Cannot decompress
compressed data
Error occurred when ROM
update program started
SD card access error
No HDD available for stamp
data download
Data incorrect for continuous
download
Data incorrect after download
interrupted
Incorrect SD card version
34
Module mismatch - Correct

module is not on the SD card)
35
Module mismatch Module on

SD card is not for this machine
36
Cannot write module Cause

other than E34, E35
44
Engine module download

failed
Operation panel module
download failed
Stamp data module download
failed
Controller module download
failed
50
Electronic confirmation check

failed
40
42
43
Meaning
Cannot map logical address
B147/B149/B190
Solution
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use
another SD card.
HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
corrupted.
Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt
fails, replace controller board.
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use
another SD card.
HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Insert the SD card with the remaining data required
for the download, the re-start the procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended
module download, then repeat the installation
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
corrupted.
SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct
data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
data then install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the SD
card and try again, or replace the BCU board.
card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
card and tray again, or replace controller board.
Write Protect switch on SD card is ON.
5-156
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.7.1 OVERVIEW
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5-873) enables you to copy
application programs from an SD card to another SD card.
The machine has three SD card slots. It can use two of themSlot 1 and Slot 2as
the storage of application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance work only. You
cannot use three SD cards at the same time as the application program storage. If
your application programs are in three or more SD cards, choose one or two SD
cards from them, and save all the application programs into the SD card(s).
Extreme caution should be exercised when using SD Card Appli Move:
1. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application
program from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to
use the SD card after you copy the application program from the card to
another card.
2. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer.
Normal operation is not guaranteed when such SD card is used.
4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy another
data to the SD card that stores PostScript data.
SM
5-157
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
3. Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from
the card to another card. This is because: The SD card can be the only proof
that the user is licensed to use the application program. You may need to
check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC

The menu Move Exec (SP5-873-001) enables you to copy application programs
from the original SD card to another SD card.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is
copied into this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.
The application program is copied from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 Move Exec.
7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
B147/B149/B190
5-158
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC

The menu Undo Exec (SP5-873-002) enables you to copy back application
programs from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when,
for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec
(SP5-873-001).
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied
back into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.
The application program is copied back from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 Undo Exec.
7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 1
10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 and insert it to SD Card Slot 1.
NOTE: This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are
used by the machine.
Service
Tables

12. Check that the application programs run normally.
SM
5-159
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5.8.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics
just after the power has been turned on.
Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or
during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
Power ON
Diagnostic RAM Check
NG
Not initialized
Power-on or
Detailed
CPU Check
NG
SC820
Detailed
ASIC Check
NG
SC821
Standard RAM
Conection Check
NG
SC827
Optional RAM
Connection Check
NG
SC829
Clock Generator Check
NG
SC838
ROM Sum Check
NG
SC828
Standard RAM Detailed

Check
NG
SC829
Optional RAM Detailed

Check
NG
Not use optional RAM
Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
Detailed Check
NG
Error Logged
Power-on
Optional NVRAM
Detailed Check
Standard NVRAM
Check
NG
Error Logged
Optinoal HDD Check

Optional NVRAM Check
SC824
NG
Font Header Check
IEEE1284 Loop-back
Check
NG
SC826
NG
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
Real Time Clock Check
NG
Error Logged
Real Time Clock

Detailed Check
Font ROM Sum Check

Network Check
NG
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
Engine I/F Check
SC826
NG
END
NG
Error Logged
Interrupt Check
NG
Error Logged
Memory Chip Check
NG
Error Logged
A
B146S933.WMF
B147/B149/B190
5-160
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is
powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually
in order to test other components or conditions that are not tested during selfdiagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the
machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.
No.
G0219350
Name
Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the
Centronics I/F port.
2. Hold down , press and hold down , and then while pressing both keys at
the same time, switch on the machine.
Service
Tables
You will see Now Loading on the touch-panel, and then you will see the
results of the test.
The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnostic
report after completing the test.
Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected
during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
Refer to section 4.2 for details about the error codes.
SM
5-161
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USER PROGRAM MODE
5.9 USER PROGRAM MODE

5.9.1 MENU
System Settings
General Features
Panel Tone
Warm Up Notice
Copy Count Display
Function Priority
Print Priority
Function Reset Timer
Output: Copier
Output: Document Server
Output: Facsimile
Output: Printer
<F/F4> Size Setting
Tray Paper Settings
Paper Tray Priority: Copier
Paper Tray Priority:
Facsimile
Paper Tray Priority: Printer
Tray Paper Size: Tray 2
Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Tray 1
Paper Type: Tray 2
Cover Sheet Tray
Slip Sheet Tray
Timer Settings
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
System Auto Reset Timer
Copier/Document Server
Auto Reset Timer
Facsimile Auto Reset
Timer
Scanner Auto Reset Timer
Set Date
Set Time
B147/B149/B190
Interface Settings
Network
Parallel Interface
Print List
File Transfer
Delivery Option
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP before SMTP
Reception Protocol
POP3/IMAP4 Settings
Key Operator's E-mail
Address
E-mail Reception Port
E-mail Reception Interval
Maximum Reception Email Size
E-mail Storage in Server
Default User
Name/Password (Send)
Program/Change/Delete
E-mail Message
Subject
Scanner Recall Interval
Time
Number of Scanner
Recalls
E-mail Account
5-162
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Key Operator Tools

User Code Management
Key Counter Management
External Charge Unit
Management
Key Operator Code
Extended Security
Display/Print Counter
Display/Clear/Print
Counter per User Code
Print Address Book:
Destination List
Panel Off Level
Address Book
Management
Address Book
Group
Address Book:
Transfer Request
Address Book: Change
Order
Address Book: Edit Title
Address Book: Select Title
Auto Delete File
Delete All Files
Password Management for
Stored Files
AOF
Program/Change LDAP
Server
User LDAP Server
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USER PROGRAM MODE
Maintenance
Auto Color Calibration
Color Registration
Copier Document Server Features
SM
Reproduction Ratio
Shortcut R/E 1
Shortcut R/E 2
Shortcut R/E 3
Enlarge 1
Enlarge 2
Enlarge 3
Enlarge 4
Enlarge 5
Priority Setting: Enlarge
Reduce 1
Reduce 2
Reduce 3
Reduce 4
Reduce 5
Reduce 6
Priority Setting: Reduce
Ratio for Create Margin
R/E Priority
Edit
Front Margin: Left/Right
Back Margin: Left/Right
Front Margin: Top/Bottom
Back Margin: Top/Bottom
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto
Margie: T to T
1 Sided 2 Sided Auto
Margie: T to B
Erase Boarder Width
Erase Original Shadow in
Combine
Erase Center Width
Front Cover Copy in
Combine
Copy Order in Combine
Image Repeat Separation
Line
Double Copies Separation
Line
Separation Line in
Combine
Orientation Magazine
5-163
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Stamp
Preset Stamp
User Stamp
Date Stamp
Page Numbering
Input/Output
Switch to Batch
SADF Auto Reset
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper
Continue
Auto Sort
Memory Full Auto Scan
Restart
Letterhead Setting
Adjust Color Image
Background Image of ADS
(Full Color/Two Color)
Color Sensitivity
A.C.S. Sensitivity
A.C.S. Priority
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
General Features
Auto Paper Select Priority
Paper Display
Original Type Display
Original Type Priority
Original Photo Type
Priority
Auto Tray Switching
Duplex Mode Priority
Copy Orientation in Duplex
Mode
Original Orientation in
Duplex Mode
Change Initial Mode
Maximum Copy Quantity
Tone: Original Remains
Job End Call
Copy Function Key: F1
Document Server Storage
Key: F1
Key: F2
Key: F3
Key: F4
Key: F5
Clear Bypass Mode
Color Mode Priority
Two Color Mode Priority
Auto Image Density
Priority
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USER PROGRAM MODE
Facsimile Features
General Settings/Adjustment
Memory/Immediate
Transmission Switch
Text Size Priority
Original Type Priority
Auto Image Density
Adjust Scan Density
Select Title
Change Initial Mode
Adjust Sound Volume
Program Fax Information
Scan End Reset
TX Stamp Priority
Line Priority Setting
Program Economy Time
On Hook Mode Release
Time
Quick Operation Key 1
Reception Settings
Switch Reception Mode
Authorized RX
Forwarding
RX File Print Quantity
2 Sided Print
RX Reverse Printing
Paper Tray
Specify Tray for Lines
Checkered Mark
Center Mark
Print Reception Time
E-mail Settings
Internet Fax Settings
Maximum E-mail Size
SMTP RX File Delivery
Setting
Key-Operator Tools
Standard Message
Store/Change/Delete Auto
Document
Scan Size
Print Journal
Transmission Page Count
Forwarding
Memory Lock RX
ECM
Parameter Setting
Program Special Sender
Box Setting
Transfer Report
Program Confidential ID
Program Polling ID
Program Memory Lock ID
Reception File Setting
Stored RX File User Code
Setting
Printer Features
Paper Input
Bypass Paper Size
List/Test Print
Multiple List
Configuration Page
Error Log
Menu List
PCL Configuration/Font
Page
PS Configuration/Font
Page
Hex Dump
Maintenance
Menu Protect
4 Color Graphic Mode
B147/B149/B190
System
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
B&W Page Detect
Duplex
Copies
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
PCL Menu
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
Host Interface
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
5-164
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USER PROGRAM MODE
Scanner Features
Scan Settings
Default Scan Settings
Wait Time for Next
Original: Exposure Glass
Wait Time for Next
Original(s): SADF
Original Setting
Original Feed Type Priority
Mixed Original Sizes
Priority
Original Orientation Priority
Change Initial Mode
Auto Color Select: Mode
Priority
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level
Destination List Settings

Destination List Display
Priority 2
Select Title
Send Settings
TWAIN Standby Time
File Type Priority
Compression (Black &
White)
Compression (Gray
Scale/Full Color)
Print & Delete Scanner
Journal
Maximum E-mail Size
Divide & Send E-mail
E-mail Information
Language
Sender's Name Default
(Language)
Inquiry
Print Inquiry List
Service
Tables
Counter
Print Counter List
SM
5-165
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USER PROGRAM MODE
5.9.2 DISPLAY
Selecting Menu
To start the UP mode (User Tools/Counter), press the key. The initial screen
is displayed.
User Tools/Counter
System Settings
Exit
Copier/Document Server
Features
Francais
Facsimile Features
Maintenance
Printer Features
Inquiry
Scanner Features
Counter
B146S908.WMF
For the list of the menus and submenus, see section 5.9.1, Menu.
Inquiry
The menu Inquiry displays the information specified by the corresponding SPs:
Information
Consumables
Telephone number to order
Machine maintenance/Repair Telephone number
Sales representative
Telephone number
B147/B149/B190
5-166
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Specified by
SP5-812-003
SP5-812-001
SP5-812-004
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Rev. 11/2005
5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main
features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is
saved automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Then
ask the user to reproduce the problem.
5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has
been switched on and a target has been selected.
Service
Tables
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
Press S then use the 10-key pad to enter .
Press and hold down # for more than 3 seconds.
Touch Copy SP.
On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 1 On/Off.
B178S001.JPG
3. On the control panel keypad, press 1. Then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is 0 (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
SM
5-167
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
4.
Rev. 11/2005
Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under
5857 Save Debug Log, touch 2 Target, enter 2 with the operation panel
key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press .
B178S002.JPG
NOTE: Select 3 SD Card to save the debug information directly to the SD

card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1
Engine SC Error
Controller SC Error
Any SC Error
Jam
Saves data when an engine-related

SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controllerrelated SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
you specify by entering code number.
Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press ON for each selection. This example
shows Engine SC Error selected.
B178S003.JPG
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch 3 Any SC Error, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
B178S004.JPG
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. Troubleshooting.
B147/B149/B190
5-168
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Rev. 11/2005
6.
Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch 5859.
Under 5859 press the necessary key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered.
B178S005.JPG
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
KEY NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
COPY
4848 (COPY)
2224 (BCU)
PRINTER
2222 (SCS)
2223 (SRM)
256 (IMH)
1000 (ECS)
1025 (MCS)
4400 (GPS)
4500 (PDL)
4600 (GPS-PM)
2000 (NCS)
2224 (BCU)
SCANNER
WEB
5375 (Scan)
5682 (NFA)
3000 (NCS)
2000 (NCS)
5682 (NFA)
6600 (WebDB)
3300 (PTS)
6666 (WebSys)
2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (0).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym
ECS
GPS
GSP-PM
IMH
MCS
Meaning
Engine Control Service
GW Print Service
GW Print Service Print Module
Image Memory Handler
Memory Control Service
Acronym
NFA
PDL
PTS
SCS
SRM
NCS
Network Control Service
WebDB
Meaning
Net File Application
Printer Design Language
Print Server
System Control Service
System Resource
Management
Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on

the HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected
with SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.
SM
5-169
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Rev. 11/2005
Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you
want.
B147/B149/B190
5-170
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Rev. 11/2005
5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please
instruct the user to do the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data for any other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site.
Such problems also include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and
select the hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want to
use this feature.
1. Press S (Clear Modes). on the operation panel when the error occurs.
2. On the control panel, enter 01. Then hold down \ for at least 3 seconds
until the machine beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to the
hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
Service
Tables
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the
service representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD
to an SD card.
SM
5-171
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Rev. 11/2005
5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015
Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
SP5857-016
Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD (it takes some time to
complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may be
switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this
SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already
created on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded. A new log
file does not need to be created. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to
delete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do SP5857-016.
SP5857-017
Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a

completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card (it takes some
time to complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may
be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute
this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file
already created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded;
a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card. Then do SP5857-017.
B147/B149/B190
5-172
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
Rev. 11/2005
5.11 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board
DIP SW No.
1 to 4
OFF
ON
Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.
BCU Board
Set the DIP switch on the BCU as listed in the table.
Model
North/South
America
Europe
Asia
Taiwan
Korea
China
DIP Switch
1
4
B147/B190
B149
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Service
Tables
When the DIP switch is incorrectly set, one of the following error occurs:
SC195
SC902
Fusing Unit Setting Error
SM
5-173
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
2
27
10
26
25
11
24
12
23
K
22
13
Y
21
14
15
20
16
19
17
B146D901.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
SM
Scanner HP sensor
ADF exposure glass
2nd scanner (2nd carriage)
Scanner lamp
1st scanner (1st carriage)
Original width sensor
Original length sensor
Scanner motor
Exposure glass
Sensor board unit (SBU)
Toner cartridge
Laser optics housing unit
Polygon mirror motor
By-pass feed table
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Transfer unit
Rotation encoder
Tray 2
Tray 1
Waste oil bottle
Waste toner bottle
Waste toner vibrator
Duplex feed unit

Transfer belt cleaning unit
ID sensor
Development unit (each color)
PCU (each color)
Fusing unit
6-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH

1
12
11
10
9
K
8
Y
C
3
M
4
5
6
B146D911.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Original tray
Original exit tray
By-pass tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Optional paper feed unit/LCT
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Duplex inverter unit

Duplex feed unit
To optional finisher
To optional finisher
External Tray
Standard tray
The two-tray finisher requires an optional paper feed unit or the LCT. The duplex
inverter unit has two exits for the two-tray finisher. When the one-tray paper feed
unit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit. When
the two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray
finisher from the lower exit.
B147/B149/B190
6-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
8
9
4
5
6
1. Scanner motor:
Drives the scanner unit.
2. Development drive
motor-K:
Drives the development unit for black, the fusing unit, and the paper
exit section.
3. Development drive
motor-CMY:
Drives the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow), the

registration roller, and the waste toner collection coils from the PCUs.
4. Drum drive motor-CMY:
Drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
5. Transfer belt contact

motor:
Moves the transfer belt into contact and away from the color PCUs.
6. Paper feed motor:
Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2/by-pass tray).
7. Drum drive motor-K:
Drives the black PCU and the collection coil in the waste toner bottle.
8. Transfer unit drive

motor:
Drives the transfer unit.
9. Waste toner vibration

motor:
Makes vibration to prevent the waste toner from clogging the waste
toner path.
SM
6-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
B146D912.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE

Overview
Solenoids
Fax Controller
Unit
Clutches
G3 board
Handset
Fans
HDD
SD card
(Printer/
scanner)*
Tray motors
Toner pumps
Chips (toner
cartridge)
Trans. unit
drive motor
Ethernet*
Base Engine
Control Unit
IEEE1284*
Motherboard
Controller
Sensors
IEEE1394
Wireless
LAN
Waste toner
vibrator
Bluetooth
Polygon motor
USB
Synch.
detectors
File format
converter
SBU
IPU Board
LD boards
Scanner
I/O Board
Paper feed
unit/LCT
Sub Power Supply Unit
Operation
panel
Fusing lamps
Finisher
controller
High volt.
supply unit
ARDF
controller
Feed motor
High volt.
supply (T. unit)
Main Power
Supply Unit
Driver
board
Scanner
motor
Trans. unit
drive motor
Duplex unit
motors
Develop.
motors
Duplex unit
solenoid
Drum motors
Standard
component
Optional
component
B146D913.WMF
* The SD card (printer/scanner), the IEEE 1284 interface, and the Ethernet
interface are optional components for the Asia model.
B147/B149/B190
6-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Descriptions
BCU (Base Engine Control Unit):
The BCU controls all the mechanical components. The BCU has three CPUs (Main,
MUSIC, and DSP). The CPUs control the following functions:
Main CPU
Engine sequence
Engine operation
Timing for peripherals
High voltage supply, laser, and fusing
Sensors, drive board, and solenoids
Motors
MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) CPU
TD sensor
Memory chip on the toner cartridge
DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
DRB:
The DRB (driver board) controls the paper feed motor, development motors
(color/black), drum drive motors (color/black), transfer unit drive motor, and transfer
voltage.
IPU:
The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processes
digital signals.
SBU:
The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD (charge-coupled device) and an analog-todigital conversion circuit.
Operation Panel Board:
Controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad.
Motherboard:
The motherboard is the main circuit board connecting with the BCU, FCU,
controller, IPU, and main power supply unit.
SM
6-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Controller:
The controller connects to the BCU through a PCI bus. The controller handles the
following functions:
Machine-to-host interface
Operation panel interface
Network interface
Interfacing and control of the optional USB, Bluetooth, IEEE1394,
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM
LD Drive Board:
This is the laser diode drive circuit board.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
FCU:
The FCU (fax controller unit) manages the fax programs and communicates with
the controller to share copier resources.
Scanner I/O Board:
The scanner I/O board is a circuit board that transmits control signals, image data,
and electricity.
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS

2, 6
1
5
3
8
10
4
Y
9
C
M
7
B146D500.WMF
This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams for
color printing. Each PCU consists of a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and
blade. From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.
A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs, and the toner image on each drum is
transferred to the paper.
The paper path is inclined about 38 degrees to make the machine as compact as
possible.
B147/B149/B190
6-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Drum charge:
The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge
Laser exposure:
The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrors and
reaches the drum. The beam creates a latent image on the drum by turning the
laser beam on and off.
Development:
The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the
drum surface. This machine uses four independent development units (one for
each color).
Image transfer:
The charge applied to the transfer roller attracts the toner from the drum to the
paper. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the paper.
Cleaning for OPC drum:
The cleaning brush and blade remove any toner remaining on the drum surface
after image transfer to the paper.
Quenching for OPC drum:
Quenching is done by illuminating the entire area of the drum surface with the laser
at the end of every job.
Paper attraction:
Paper is attracted to the transfer belt by the charge applied to the paper attraction
roller.
Separation:
Paper separates from the transfer belt when the belt curves away from it.
ID sensor:
The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (one at the front, center, and rear).
The ID sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. The
ID sensor output is used for process control and for automatic line position, skew,
and color registration adjustments for the latent image.
SM
6-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt:

The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller inside
the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.1 OVERVIEW
This machine provides the following two forms of process control:
Potential control
Toner supply control
The process control facilities of this machine have the following features:
Three ID (image density) sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID
sensor is used for process control. The front, center, and rear ID sensors are
used for line positioning and other adjustments.
TD (toner density) sensor.
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL

Overview
Potential control controls development to maintain the density of the toner images
on the drums. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability and
toner density.
The machine uses the ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer belt and
the density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process control
self check.
The machine determines the following depending on the ID sensor output and a
reference table in memory.
VD: Drum potential without exposure to adjust this, the machine adjusts the
charge roller voltage.
VB: Development bias
VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure to adjust this, the machine
adjusts the laser power.
(In addition, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.)
This process controls the development potential so that the maximum amount of
toner applied to the drum is constant. However, to control the development
potential to improve reproduction of highlight parts of images, the laser power
control method can be changed. This depends on the setting of SP3-125-2. The
default setting is 1 (normal control method). To change to the highlight range
control method, set this SP to 2.
If SP3-125-1 is set to 0 (Off), the machine does not do the potential control, but
uses the development bias adjusted with SP2-201-1 to -9, the charge roller voltage
adjusted with SP2-001-1 to -9, and the laser power selected with SP2-103-1 to -27.
However, these SPs should normally not be adjusted in the field.
B147/B149/B190
6-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Process Control Self Check

This machine carries out potential control using a procedure called the process
control self check. There are seven types of process control self check, categorized
according to their execution timing.
1. Forced
This is done when SP3-126-1 is used.
2. Initial
This starts automatically when the power is turned on or when recovering from
energy saver mode, but only if the fusing unit pressure roller temperature is
60C or less.
3. Interval: Job End
This starts automatically at the end of a print job when the total print counter for
this feature exceeds 200 (this can be changed with SP3-906-1). After any
process control is done (except for forced process control), the counters are
reset to 0.
4. Interval: Interrupt (default: not done)
This interrupts printing and then starts automatically when the machine makes
a certain number (A) of continuous color prints in the same job and the main
scan length detection is executed. After it is completed, the machine continues
to make prints.
The value A can be adjusted with SP3-906-2 (default: off).
At this time, only VREF is corrected. Potential control (VD, VB, VL correction) is
not done.
M is adjusted with SP3-906-4 and N is adjusted with SP3-906-3.

6. After Toner End Recovery
This starts after recovery from a toner end condition.
7. After Developer Initialization
The machine executes the Auto Toner Density Adjustment (SP3-125-003). This
starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occurs
automatically after a new development unit has been installed.
SM
6-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
5. Non-use Time (default: not done)

This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for a certain time
(M) after it makes more than a certain number (N) of prints.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE
Start
VSG adjustment
Step 1
ID sensor solid pattern generation
Step 2
Sensor pattern density detection
Step 3
Toner amount calculation
Step 4
VD, VB, VL selection and VREF adjustment
Step 5
ID sensor highlight pattern generation
Step 6
Sensor pattern density detection
Step 7
VL (LD power) selection
Step 8
Default: off
End
B146D501.WMF
Step 1: VSG Adjustment

This machine uses three ID sensors (direct reflection type). They are located at the
front, center, and rear of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used for
process control. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt's reflectivity and the
machine calibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows.
VSG = 4.0 0.5 Volts
This calibration compensates for the transfer belt's condition and the ID sensor
condition, such as dirt on the surface of the belt or ID sensor.
B147/B149/B190
6-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation

12 mm
15 mm
Left
Transfer belt
B146D502.WMF
First, the machine agitates the developer for between 15 and 30 seconds until the
fluctuation in TD sensor output becomes less than 0.3V.
Third, the machine makes the second series of grade patterns in the same order as
the first series. The development bias and charge roller voltage are different from
those of the first series.
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 solid-color squares for each color (5
squares in the first series and another 5 squares in the second series). This data
goes to memory.
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation

The amount of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is
calculated for each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensor
output value from each grade of the pattern.
SM
6-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Second, the machine makes the first series of grade patterns. See the diagram;
this 5-grade pattern is made in black, in yellow, in cyan, and in magenta (20
squares in total). They are made by changing the development bias and charge
roller voltage. The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage
is always the same.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment

M/A
Development Bias
B0
B1
Bn-1
Bn
Target
M/A
Charge Bias
C0
C1
Cn-1
Cn
LD Power
L0
L1
Ln-1
Ln
Development Bias
B146D503.WMF
The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on the
transfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades. The machine now
selects the development bias and charge roller voltages for the target M/A for each
color by referring to a table in memory.
The way that the laser power (VL) is selected depends on the setting of SP3-125-2.
If it is set to 0, the LD power is fixed at the value of SP2-103-1, to -27.
If it is set to 1, LD power is selected using the same memory table as mentioned
above.
If it is set to 2, LD power is determined by ID sensor highlight pattern generation
(steps 6 to 8 later in this procedure).
The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time so that the
development gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3120-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
NOTE: The patterns on the transfer belt are cleaned by the transfer belt cleaning
unit.
Allowable changes to VD, VB, and VL as a result of process control:
This depends on the process control type as follows.
Forced : No limit
Initial, After Developer Initialization: 80 volts
Interval (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): 40 volts
Interval (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.)
Steps 6 to 8 are carried out only if SP3-125-2 is set to 2. (Default: Steps 6 to 8
are not used)
B147/B149/B190
6-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation

12 mm
15 mm
Left
Transfer belt
B146D504.WMF
The machine makes a 10-grade pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color.
The pattern consists of 10 squares. Each of the squares is 12 mm x 15 mm, and is
a dot-pattern squares (not solid-color squares like in the process of step 2). They
are made using constant bias and charge roller voltages selected from one of the
types mentioned above, and the various grades are made by changing the LD
power.
The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 grade-pattern squares for each color.
This data goes to memory.
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection

The machine determines the relationship
between the amount of toner on the transfer
belt and the laser power for each of the 10
grades. The machine now selects the laser
power to get the target M/A.
M/A
Target
M/A
LD Power
B146D505.WMF
SM
6-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB

[A]
[B]
Left
Transfer belt
B146D506.WMF
Highlight Pattern
The M/A target (mass-per-area target) is the target toner amount in a given area.
To adjust the toner amount, a highlight pattern [B] is created on the transfer belt at
the following times during each print job.
Job
Black-and-white printing
Color printing
Interval
After every four pages
After every one page
Color of highlight pattern

Black
One of four colors
For color jobs, the order of pattern generation is K Y M C K Y M

C.... The highlight pattern is created about 2 cm after the trailing edge of the
paper [A].
Adjustment Process
The machine generates a highlight pattern (just one grade) of a specified density.
The center ID sensor checks the density and the machine adjusts VREF by
comparing the reading with the target of each color (SP3-905-1 to 4). When this
adjustment is not sufficient, the machine adjusts VCNT too.
B147/B149/B190
6-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

Overview
Toner supply control uses the following to determine the amount of toner to be
supplied. This is done before every development for each color.
Density of the toner in the developer (as detected by the TD sensor) - VREF, VT
Pixel count
The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in the
development unit, while accommodating to changes in the development conditions
through the potential control mechanism. Environmental changes and the number
of prints made are also used in the calculation.
The amount of toner supplied is determined by the on time of the toner supply
clutch. The total on time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chip
for the relevant toner cartridge. The amount of toner supplied also depends on the
process line speed for the current job. The machine supplies the calculated amount
of toner for each color.
Toner Supply Control Modes

This machine has three toner supply control modes. They are selected with SP2208-1 to -4.
2. Proportional control mode

This mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes faulty. Only the
TD sensor is used to control toner supply. The machine uses the VREF that is
stored in SP2-224-5 to -8.
3. Fixed supply mode
This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. The amount of toner
supply can be adjusted with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect
(the default setting is 5%).
SM
6-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
1. Fuzzy control mode

This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor, ID sensor, and
pixel count are used in this mode.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
B146D507.WMF
Introduction
Toner Near End
To determine the toner near end status, the controller considers the following
information:
TD sensor [A] in the development unit
Operation time counter of the toner attraction pump [B]
Memory chip [C] on the toner cartridge
Toner end sensor [D]
There are two different toner near-end detection procedures (after here, referred to
as Toner Near End Detection 1 and Toner Near End Detection 2). If either of
these detect near end, the machine enters the near-end condition.
Toner End
To determine the toner end status, the controller considers the following
information:
TD sensor [A] in the development unit
Pixel counter
B147/B149/B190
6-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Toner Near End Detection 1

The controller considers the information from the TD sensor.
1) The controller checks that the following condition is satisfied ten times
consecutively:
VREF + 0.4 V < VT
NOTE: The condition can be adjusted with SP2-212.
2) If the above condition is satisfied, toner is supplied to the development unit.
The messages, Loading Toner and Please wait, are displayed.
3) The controller checks the above condition again.
a) If the condition is satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is in
the toner near end status. The messages, Toner is almost empty,
Replace Toner Cartridge(s), and Xxxxx, are displayed; where Xxxxx
indicates the color, such as cyan.
b) If the condition is not satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is
not in the toner near end status. The machine resumes its normal
operation.
Toner Near End Detection 2

The controller considers the information from the operation time counter of the
toner attraction pump, the memory chip on the toner bottle, and the toner end
sensor.
1) To calculate the toner amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the controller
considers the operation time counter of the toner attraction pump and the
initial amount of the toner (recorded in the memory chip).
NOTE: The weight can be adjusted with SP2-212-1 and -2.

a) If the signals indicate the toner amount has fallen to a certain level
(determined by SP 2-212-12 to -15), the controller decides that the
machine is in the toner near end status. The messages, Toner is almost
empty, Replace Toner Cartridge(s), and Xxxxx, are displayed; where
Xxxxx indicates the color, such as cyan.
b) If the signals indicate the toner amount is not less than a certain level,
the controller decides that the machine is not in the toner near end status.
The machine resumes its normal operation.
SM
6-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
2) If the amount reaches the predefined weight (default: 100 g), the controller
checks the signals from the toner end sensor.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Toner End Detection

The machine flags the toner end status when one of the conditions below is
detected for a toner color. The messages, No Toner, Replace Toner Cartridge,
and Xxxxx, are displayed; where Xxxxx indicates the color, such as cyan.
VREF + 0.5 V < VT (ten times consecutively)
The pixel counter counts up the equivalent of 50 A4 sheets of pixels (100%
coverage) since near-end was detected.
However, if fewer pages have been made since near-end than the number
guaranteed with SP 2-212-11 (default: 10 pages), printing will continue.
NOTE: If one of the following conditions is detected 10 consecutive times, the
machine flags a toner end condition regardless of the number of pages
printed since near-end.
VREF + 1.2 V < VT
VT > 4.8 V
After the machine detects toner end for black, it cannot print until the toner
cartridge is replaced. If cyan, magenta, or yellow are in a toner end condition
during standby mode, the machine can print with black and white only; color
printing is disabled.
NOTE: If the yellow, cyan, or magenta toner ends during a color printing job, the
job is suspended until toner is supplied. If new color toner is not installed,
the user can print black-and-white jobs but not color jobs.
Toner End Recovery

The machine assumes that the toner cartridge has been replaced if either of the
following occurs when the near-end or end status exists:
The upper right cover is opened and closed.
The main switch is turned off and on.
The machine then starts to supply toner to the development unit. After supplying
toner, the machine clears the toner near-end or end status if the following
conditions are detected.
Vt [0] Vt [3] > 0.5V
Vt Vref > 0.3V
B147/B149/B190
6-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION

After installing a new development unit, you set Enable in SP5-999-005, 006, 007,
or 008 for the machine to detect the new unit. When detecting a new unit, the
copier initializes the developer.
First, the copier agitates the developer for about 100 seconds. Second, it adjusts
VCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) so that VT (TD sensor output) becomes 3.5
0.1 volts. Third, the copier stores this VT as VREF.
VCNT is corrected for the current humidity every print job. VCNT is also corrected for
the total number of prints, to prevent the developer Q/M from varying.
If the humidity correction is giving poor
results (for example, if the humidity sensor
[A] is broken), it can be disabled with SP2223-2. Then a value for VCNT must be input
manually using SP2-224-1 to -4 (adjust by
trial and error).
During developer initialization, the machine
forcibly supplies toner because there is no
toner inside the toner transport tube at
installation. Then the machine does the
process control self check.
[A]
Detailed
Descriptions
B146D903.WMF
SM
6-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.3 SCANNING
6.3.1 OVERVIEW
8
10
9
B146D904.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor
6. Scanner motor
2. ADF exposure glass
7. Exposure glass
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage)
8. Sensor board unit (SBU)
4. Scanner lamp
9. Original length sensor
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage)
10. Original width sensor
The original on the exposure glass or ARDF exposure glass reflects the light
emitted from the scanner lamp. The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensor
board by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners. The sensor board converts the CCD
analog signals into digital signals.
When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass, the scanner motor
pulls the 1st and 2nd scanners via mechanical linkage. The original is scanned
from left to right as shown above.
When the original is fed from the optional ARDF, it is automatically transported
onto the ARDF exposure glass, and to the original exit. The original does not stay
on the glass, but keeps going to the exit. The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their
home positions.
B147/B149/B190
6-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B146D508.WMF
The 1st and 2nd scanners [A] are driven by the scanner motor [B] through the
scanner drive pulley, scanner drive shaft [C], and two scanner wires [D].
- Book mode -
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the

magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done by
image processing on the IPU board.
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner
motor speed using SP4-008.
- ARDF mode The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner H.P sensor
detects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ARDF motor feeds the original
through the ARDF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the
sub-scan direction is done by changing the ARDF motor speed. Magnification in
the main scan direction is done in the IPU board, like for book mode.
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ARDF
motor speed using SP6-017
SM
6-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The SBU board controls the scanner drive motor. The 2nd scanner speed is half
that of the 1st scanner.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B146D905.WMF
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length
sensors [B] detect the original length.
The SBU controller on the SBU board checks each sensor status when the
platen cover sensor is activated as it is closed. It detects the original size by the
on/off signals received from each sensor.
If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open, the SBU controller on the
SBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is
pressed.
L1 L2
L3
W1
W2
B146D509.WMF
B147/B149/B190
6-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
Original Size
Metric
version
A3
B4
F4
A4-L
B5-L
A4-S
B5-S
A5-L, A5-S
Length Sensor
Width
Sensor
Inch version
L3
L2
L1
W2
W1
11" x 17"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (8" x 13")
8.5" x 11"
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
X
11" x 8.5"
5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5"
SP4-301
display
132
141
165
133
142
5
14
128
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present

For other combinations, Cannot detect original size. will be indicated on the
operation panel display.
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machine's productivity.
However, if the by-pass tray is used, note that the machine assumes that the copy
paper is lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the bypass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area,
disregarding the original size sensors.
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

The anti-condensation heater is available as an optional unit. The anticondensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors, which may occur when
the scanner unit is, for example, carried from a cold room to a warm room. Such
condensation can cause abnormal images.
SM
6-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Original size detection using the ARDF is described in the manual for the ARDF.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.4.1 OVERVIEW
CCD
SBU
IPU
FCU
Option
Mother Board
LD Board
HDD
Controller
BCU
M
C
Y
Memory
K
B146D917.WMF
Memory
The CCD (Charged Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals.
The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital
signals. It sends these signals to the IPU (Image Processing Unit).
The IPU processes the image, then the image data is sent to the controller.
B147/B149/B190
6-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM
O R(B)
E
CCD
O
E
O B(R)
E
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
SBU
Controller
R 10 bit
Field
Memory
G 10 bit
Field
Memory
B 10 bit
8 bit
ASIC
8 bit
8 bit
IPU
SBU
B146D929.WMF
Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification
Odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals from the CCD are amplified by
operational amplifiers.
2. Signal Composition
The amplified signals (even-pixel and odd-pixel for each RGB color) are
combined by the MPX circuit after A/D conversion.
White Level Correction

A white plate is on the back of the left scale. When you turn the switch on, the
scanner scans this plate to see the actual white level. To compensate the
difference between the actual white level and the ideal white level (target white
level), the CCD-gain control is conducted.
Others
The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if the original is scanned by
using ARDF.
SM
6-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
A/D Conversion
The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1024 gradations) digital
signals.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Black Level Correction

Improves image reproduction for high-density areas.
Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels are
masked off, and should produce a pure black signal.
This is subtracted from the value of each pixel.
Calculated for each scan line.
Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine
scans down the page.
Adjustments
The properties of the scanner unit, which are necessary for controlling the scanner
VPU (video processing unit), are stored in the NVRAM on the controller.
After replacing the SBU, adjust the following:
SP4008
SP4010
SP4011
Scanner sub-scan magnification

Scanner leading edge registration
Scanner side-to-side registration
VPU Test Mode

To make sure the scanner VPU control is functioning, output the VPU test pattern
with SP4-907. ( 4. Troubleshooting for details)
B147/B149/B190
6-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM
SBU
Shading Correction
Picture Elemnet Correction
Scanner Correction
Filter
ASIC1
ADS
Color Correction
Main Scan Magnification
I/F
Image Separation
Controller
Printer Correction
BCU
PCI BUS
ASIC3
ASIC2
Gradation Processing
ASIC4
IPU
Controller
Option
FCU
B146D931.WMF
Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at the
edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or variations
among pixels of the CCD.
SM
6-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Shading Correction
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction

Picture element correction does two things.
1. Completion of the scan line correction process.
2. Correction if the CCD is not perpendicular to the light.
The green CCD line is taken as a standard.
Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match.
Use SP 4-932-1 to 4-932-4 to change the vertical line correction level
( 3. Replacement and Adjustment Image Adjustments).
Scan Line Correction

R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 lines apart (8 lines total) when full size
magnification is used.
Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory.
The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnification
ratio.
If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to the
closest integer, but further correction is needed ( Picture Element
Correction).
Image Separation
The machine separates the original image into text and photo (dot screen) areas.
Edge Separation
Used to locate text and line diagrams
Locates areas of strong contrast.
Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.
Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.
Only uses data from the green CCD.
Dot Screen Separation
If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.
Colored Text Separation
Identifies whether the text areas pixels are black or color.
Based on:
1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.
2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.
B147/B149/B190
6-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
ACS (Auto Color Select)
Black and white first
Signal Level
255
204 (50% UCR rate)
153 (50% UCR rate)
Color first
102 128
(40% UCR rate)
255
RGB common data
(50% UCR rate)
RGB signal after scanner correction

B146D510.WMF
B146D511.WMF
The Auto Color Select determines if an original is black/white or color. Black copy
mode or full color mode is automatically selected.
Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels.
RGB video signals are compared.
Detailed
Descriptions
If the maximum difference among RGB signals is within a certain range, the
original is considered black and white.
SM
6-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)
255
255
0
Dark
1023
Light
Dark
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
255
Light
B146D513.WMF
B146D512.WMF
The RGB video signals from the CCD are sent to the IPU section. This signal is
proportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).
Scanner gamma correction inverts the video signals. The shading circuit converts
the signal from 10-bit to 8-bit.
The IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in Fig. 2.
This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion (conversion is done
later in the image process).
The same table is used for R, G, and B signals.
B147/B149/B190
6-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Filtering
Appropriate software filters are applied to the RGB video signals.
Varies depending on the results of auto text/photo separation (or on the selected
original mode).
RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas
Edge emphasis applied to text areas.
Background Density Control

Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certain
threshold.
The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).
Users can select a different threshold for each mode.
Detailed
Descriptions
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection)

Full color mode
1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original.
2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.
Black and white mode
1) Determines the peak white level.
2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line.
3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white
background.
4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for
A/D conversion.
5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.
SM
6-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Color Conversion
Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for
the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the
RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.
Conversion Matrix
The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix
operation.
Simple color copying.
No special modes applied.
To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.
Color Conversion Table
Original Color
Toner
Y
M
C
K
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
User Program Mode

When the user selects one of the following special modes, the values in this table
may fall between 0 and 1.
Photo mode
Glossy Photo
Printed Photo
Copied Photo
Others
Generation Mode
Pale Mode
Map Mode
Two-color mode
Separates black areas and colored areas.
Converts black areas to a color selected by the user.
All other areas are converted to a second color selected by the user.
( the operator's manual for details)
B147/B149/B190
6-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Main Scan Magnification

While the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge the original in
the sub-scan direction, the ASIC2 chip on the IPU board handles reduction and
enlargement in the main scan direction.
Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot be
squeezed or expanded).
Imaginary points are calculated, corresponding to a physical enlargement or
reduction.
Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the
image data for the nearest two true points.
The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.
Detailed
Descriptions
NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial
convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of a
service manual and will not be covered here.
SM
6-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Printer Gamma Correction
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
B146D515.WMF
B146D514.WMF
Ideally, the gamma curves for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black should be
identical, as shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical
components can result in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.
Printer characteristics are much more variable than the scanner. Printer gamma
needs recalibration and adjustment from time to time.
The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction.
ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text).
After ACC, the gamma curve for each color can be adjusted with service
programs (SP4-909 to SP4-918).
4 different modes:
1) ID max.
2) Shadow (High ID)
3) Middle (Middle ID)
4) Highlight (Low ID)
If the previous gamma curve was better, it can be recalled.
Factory settings can be loaded using SP 5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new
values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,
since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings
may no longer be suitable.
Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings using SP5610-5.
B147/B149/B190
6-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
ID Max.
This mode adjusts the total image density
as shown in figure 3.
Fig. 3
B146D516.WMF
Shadow (High ID)

The High ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 6 and Level 9 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 4).
Fig. 4
B146D517.WMF
Fig. 5
Detailed
Descriptions
Middle (Middle ID)

The Middle ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 3 and Level 7 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 5).
B146D518.WMF
Highlight (Low ID)

The Low ID mode adjusts the image density
between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color
gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure
6).
Fig. 6
SM
6-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B146D519.WMF
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern

The test pattern has eight 17-step
gradation scales for each color (CMYK),
including background white, for Text
and Photo modes.
Dark
ACC automatically calibrates the printer

gamma curve. The user starts the ACC
process.
Light
K
C
1. The user prints an ACC Test

Pattern.
M
Y
2. The user places the test pattern on

the exposure glass.
K
C
3. The copier makes 8 scans to read

each color scale.
4. The copier corrects the printer

gamma by comparing the ideal
settings with the current image
density.
5. The copier combines the corrected

gamma curve with the Shadow,
Middle, and Highlight values
currently in memory.
B146D520.WMF
6. The copier then calculates the ID

max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based on data from the ACC scan.
7. The corrected printer gamma curves can be adjusted further using SP modes
(SP4-909 to SP4-918).
Error Diffusion
Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix.
IPU Board Test

You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2.
( 4. Troubleshooting for details)
B147/B149/B190
6-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE DATA PATH
6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH
SBU
CCD
IPU
FCU
Option
Mother Board
LD Board
HDD
BCU
Controller
M
C
Y
Memory
K
B146D917.WMF
SBU IPU Controller (HDD/Memory) IPU Controller (straight through)

BCU
Printer Application
Controller IPU (through) Controller BCU
Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits)

SBU IPU Controller (HDD/Memory)
Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)

Transmission: SBU IPU FCU
Reception: FCU IPU Controller (straight through) BCU
SM
6-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Copier Application
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
17
18
2
3
16
4
5
15
6
7
14
8
13
12
11
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-E

LD unit-Y
LD unit-K
LD Mirror-M
LD unit-M
LD unit-C
F-theta lens-M, C
Synchronizing detector board-M, C-S
Synchronizing detector board-M, C-E
B146D521.WMF
10. OPC drum-M

11. WTL
12. OPC drum-C
13. OPC drum-Y
14. OPC drum-K
15. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-S
16. F-theta lens-Y, K
17. Polygon mirror motor
18. LD Mirror-K
This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latent
images on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).
There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units.
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes to do dual beam writing (this is only
done for black-and-white printing; for full color printing, only one of the beams is
used).
Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum, but for
yellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This is because the units
for magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror from the units for
yellow and black.
B147/B149/B190
6-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH

[D]
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[E]
B146D522.WMF
The laser beams for cyan [C] and yellow [A] are directed to the upper part of the
polygon mirror [B], and those for magenta [E] and black [D] are directed to the
lower part of the polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) deflect the
laser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror.
The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode (see below).
Mode
B/W
(except
OHP/Thick
paper)
Color
(except
OHP/Thick
paper)
OHP/Thick
SM
Resolution
(dpi)
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
Polygon motor
speed (rpm)
Process line
speed (mm/s)
Print speed
(ppm)
21,850
185
38
1,200 x 1,200
29,528
125
28
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
29,528
125
28
1,200 x 1,200
29,528
62.5
14
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
29,528
62.5
10
6-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Remarks
Dual beam
writing
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The WTL [F] corrects the main scan line; without this component, the line bends
out towards the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the WTL is adjusted
in the factory.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR
[B]
[B]
[A]
[A]
B146D523.WMF
Overview
The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD), one at each
corner of the laser optics housing unit.
Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine recognizes each color from
the time that they are detected. The two LSDs at the right [A] are used for magenta
and cyan, and the two [B] at the left are used for yellow and black.
Main Scan Start Detection

For magenta and cyan, the LSD at the rear detects the start of the main scan. For
yellow and black, the LSD at the front detects the start of the main scan.
Clock Frequency Adjustment

Each pair ensures that the number of laser clock pulses in the main scan is
constant. If the count for one particular beam varies from normal, the LD clock
frequency for that beam is adjusted.
If the board at the end position is defective, this cannot be detected. In such case,
you must disable the detection feature with SP2-919-1.
B147/B149/B190
6-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING

Dual Beam Mechanism
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes. Each face of the polygon mirror writes
two main scan lines. This only happens for black and white printing.
Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism

[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
1
2
3
B146D524.WMF
There is a spring [A] at the front end of the black LD unit [E], and there is a
positioning motor [D] at the right end. The spring pushes the unit clockwise, while
the motor pushes it counterclockwise. These two components drive the unit to one
of the following three positions:
600-dpi position []
1,200-dpi position []
Home position
[]
Before it is driven to the 600-dpi position or the 1,200-dpi position, the black LD unit
is set to its home position. When driven from one position to another, the unit goes
as follows:
600-dpi position Home position 1,200-dpi position
1,200-dpi position Home position 600-dpi position
The home position is detected by the home position sensor [B]. When the unit is in
its home position, the actuator [C] is out of the sensor. The 600-dpi and 1,200-dpi
positions are determined by the distance from the home position. The distance is
calculated from the operation time of the LD positioning motor.
SM
6-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
B146D525.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position

The machine changes the main scan resolution between 600 and 1,200 dpi for
black and white printing by rotating the LD unit, except for OHP sheets and thick
paper (remains at the 600 dpi position).
The table lists the printing modes and the positions of the black LD unit.
Mode
Monochrome
Color
Position
600-dpi position
1,200-dpi position
600-dpi position
600-dpi position
600 dpi
1,200 dpi
600 dpi
1,200 dpi
After the laser optics housing unit has been replaced, the beam pitch for 600 dpi
and 1,200 dpi must be adjusted (SP2-109-2, -3).
B147/B149/B190
6-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH
+24V
Right Door SW
+5V
PSU
Front Door and

Left Door SW
CN361-1
CN350-6
LD5V CN101-10
RELAY
CN221-3
CN401-48 (C)
CN221-2
CN401-49 (C)
LDB (C)
CN361-2
Two safety switches are used to turn the

relay off. One switch is used for the front
cover and upper left cover. This safety
switch is off when either of the two
covers is opened. Another safety switch
is used for the right door.
E-MAC: Enhanced Modulation ASIC
on CMOS
LDB: LD Drive Board
(included in the LD Unit)
E-MAC
CN222-3
CN401-48 (M)
CN222-2
CN401-49 (M)
LDB (M)
E-MAC
CN223-3
CN401-48 (K)
CN223-2
CN401-49 (K)
Front and Upper Left Cover Switch
LDB (K)
E-MAC
The micro switch [A] on the PSU is

activated or deactivated by the actuator
[B] when the front cover or the upper left
cover is opened and closed.
CN224-3
CN401-48 (Y)
CN224-2
CN401-49 (Y)
LDB (Y)
BCU
E-MAC
B146D923.WMF
[A]
[B]
B146D526.WMF
SM
6-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
A relay on the PSU ensures technician

and user safety and prevents the laser
beam from inadvertently switching on
during servicing. This relay turns off
when the front cover, upper left cover, or
right door is opened, and cuts the power
(+5V) supplied to the LD board for each
color through the BCU.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Error Messages
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B146D918.WMF
Cooperating with other switches, the LD safety switches help display error
messages related to external covers. When one or more covers are open, the
messages, Cover is open as shown and Close it, are displayed with a diagram.
The diagram indicates which cover is open. The table lists the diagram indications
and the switch conditions. Note that some diagram indications take precedence
over others.
Diagram indication
Upper left cover
Duplex unit
Front cover
Right door
[A] Upper left

cover switch
Open
(any)
Closed
Closed
Condition
[B] Duplex unit
[C] Front door
switch
switch
(any)
(any)
Open
(any)
(any)
Open
(any)
Closed
[E] Right door

switch
(any)
(any)
(any)
Open
NOTE: 1) In the table, any indicates the condition does not affect the diagram
indication.
2) The left door switch [D] is closed when the upper left cover switch [A] is
closed.
B147/B149/B190
6-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Overview
YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color
KY, KC, KM:
Spaces between a black line and a color line
Front
Center
Rear
Y
YY
KK
C
M
CC
MM
KY
YY
KC
KM
KY
KK
YY
KC
KM
CC
KK
CC
KY
KC
KM
MM
MM
Y
K
C
M
During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are created eight
times on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC,
KM) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller takes
the average of the spaces, and adjusts the following positions and magnification:
Sub scan line position for YCM
Main scan line position for KYCM
Magnification ratio for KYCM
Skew for YCM
After the patterns are measured, the transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the transfer
belt. If an error is detected three times consecutively, SC285 is generated.
SM
6-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
B146D527.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Summary of Each Adjustment

Sub scan line position for YCM
The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM is based on the line position
for K (color registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines of
each color in the pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct,
the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this,
it changes the laser write timing for that color.
Main scan line position for KYCM

If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it
changes the laser write start timing for each scan line.
Magnification adjustment for KYCM

If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the
LD clock frequency for the required color.
Skew for YCM

The adjustment of the skew for YCM is based on the line position for K.
B147/B149/B190
6-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment timing depends on several SP mode settings. Among
them, the mode selection, SP5-993-001, takes precedence over the others. The
table below lists the conditions and the processes to be executed. Note that the
adjustments of the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, and
magnification are executed under the same conditions.
The numbers in the mode selection column indicate the setting of SP 5-993-001.
For details, refer to the description for SP 5-993-001 in the SP table.
Condition
Process
control
Temperature
difference
1 or 2
0, 1, or 2
Setting
Job End
Interrupt
Non-use Time 1, 2
Recovery (fusing
tempera-ture 60C or
lower)
Standby
Job start
Interrupt
Main scan length detection
Recovery (fusing temperature over
60C)
Replacement of development unit or
PCU
Forced self check
S-pos. : Sub-scan line position

M-pos. : Main scan line position
Magni. : Magnification
SP3-906-001
SP3-906-002
SP3-906-003, 004
S-pos./
M-pos./
Magni.

Skew
None
SP5-993-003, 005
SP5-993-003, 006
SP5-993-003, 04, 022
SP5-993-024

*
SP5-993-026
None
SP5-993-002
: Executed
* : Executed one time when the
conditions are met twice
NOTE: 1) Recovery includes turning on the main switch.

2) Fusing temperature is measured by the thermistor in the fusing unit.
Other temperature is measured by the sensors on the laser optics
housing unit.
3) You can use SP5-993-035 to select one of the three frequency levels of
color adjustment.
SM
6-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Mode
selection
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Main Scan Skew Adjustment

[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B146D528.WMF
The 3rd mirror positioning motors for magenta [A], cyan [B], and yellow [C] adjust
the angle of the 3rd mirrors [B] respectively, based on the 3rd mirror position for
black. This mechanism corrects main scan skew.
6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES

To improve reproduction in the copy mode, the machine generates the print image
with 2 bits per pixel. Different parameters are used for the copy and print modes as
shown in the table below.
Function
Gradation for printing
LD control
Pointer table display
M/A target
M/A target for LD correction
B147/B149/B190
Copy Mode
2 bits / pixel
SP2-103-101 to -110
SP3-902-5 to -8
SP3-903-5 to -8
SP3-904-5 to -8
6-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Mode
1 bit / pixel
SP2-103-1 to -59
SP3-902-1 to -4
SP3-903-1 to -4
SP3-904-1 to -4
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Rev. 06/2004
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1
2
3
B146D529.WMF
1. Cleaning brush roller

2. Charge roller (non-contact)
3. OPC drum
4. Cleaning brush
5. Waste toner collection auger
6. Cleaning blade
This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU consists
of an OPC drum, non-contact charge roller, cleaning brush, and cleaning blade.
The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).
The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller
is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not
adjustable in the field.
.
SM
6-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
K
Y
C
M
G080D927.WMF
The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black.
The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment.
B147/B149/B190
6-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS

[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
B146D530.WMF
The machine uses these sensors to detect if the drum motors rotate. When it
detects that the drum motor is not moving, SC440 appears. These sensors also
help the machine to initialize the relative positions of the gears when turning on the
main switch and initializing. This prevents phase fluctuation between printouts.
There is an interrupter [E] on each of the black [D] and yellow [C] drum gears. The
drum gear position sensors [F][G] detect the positions of these interrupters
respectively. The sensors check that the two interrupters are parallel. This
mechanism makes sure that output quality does not vary. The cyan [B] and
magenta [A] drum gears operate with the yellow drum gear because these three
drum gears are linked through other gears [H][I].
In the ready status, the two interrupters stay in a parallel position. If they are not in
a parallel position (as shown in the illustration), the machine adjusts the position of
the black drum gear.
SM
6-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Mechanism
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Initialization Process and SC Codes

When a drum gear position sensor has found an error, SC code 440-1 or 440-2 is
displayed. The table lists the steps of the initialization process, possible errors, and
corresponding SC codes.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Initialization process
The four drums are simultaneously
operated for seven seconds. The two
drum position sensors detect the two
drum gear interrupters several times.
The time lags between detection of

the black drum gear interrupter and
detection of the yellow drum gear
interrupter are checked. The average
time lag is calculated.
The black drum is operated. The
position of the gear is adjusted
according to the average time lag.
Possible error
The black drum gear
interrupter is not detected.
The yellow drum gear
interrupter is not detected.
Both black and yellow drum
gear interrupters are not
detected.
The black drum gear

interrupter is not detected
( NOTE).
SC code
440-1
440-2
440-1
440-1
NOTE: If the connector of the black drum position sensor has been connected to
the yellow drum position sensor (and the connector of the yellow drum
position sensor, to the black drum position sensor), no error occurs in step
1 and step 2.
B147/B149/B190
6-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING
[B]
[A]
B146D531.WMF
This machine uses a non-contact charge roller [A] to reduce ozone. The noncontact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge. The high voltage
supply board C, B, which is located at the rear of the machine, applies a dc and
ac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to ensure that
the charge given to the drum is as uniform as possible.
The diameter of the roller is 11.14 mm (circumference about 35 mm). The gap
between a drum and the corresponding charge roller is about 50 m.
The cleaning brush roller [B], which always contacts the charge roller, cleans the
charge roller.
The charge roller can generate small amounts of nitrogen oxide gases (known as
NOx), which may be absorbed by the surface of the drum. This can cause
unfocused copies. To avoid this, the film of NOx is removed at power on, at the end
of a job (if more than 200 prints), and when a toner cartridge has been replaced.
SP3-920-1 to -4 determine when this procedure (known as refresh mode) is done.
It can also be executed at any time (using SP3-920-5) if the prints are smeared.
Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the
end of every job.
SM
6-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process
control is enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 0). However, if process control is
switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 1), the dc voltage is the value stored in
SP2-001-1 to -9 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING
[B]
[C]
[A]
B146D532.WMF
The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner remaining on the drum. The
cleaning blade [B] then scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports the
toner towards the waste toner collection duct.
B147/B149/B190
6-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION
[F]
[G]
[E]
[J]
[H]
[M]
[K]
[I]
[B]
[L]
[D]
[A]
B146D906.WMF
[C]
The waste toner from the collection augers in the four PCUs drops into the waste
toner collection duct from the four openings [F][G][H][I] at the rear of the PCUs. The
toner collection coils [J][K][L] in the duct transport this waste toner towards the
waste toner bottle [A]. The coils [J][K][L] are driven by development drive motorCMY. The openings and PCUs correspond as follows: black [F], yellow [G],
cyan [H], magenta [I].
The waste toner from the transfer belt cleaning unit drops into the waste toner
collection duct from another opening [E].
The end of the waste toner collection duct is in the waste toner bottle [A]. There are
three openings [B][C] and one collection coil [D] in this part. The waste toner drops
into the bottle through the openings. The collection coil [D] is driven by drum drive
motor-K.
SM
6-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Waste Toner Path
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Waste Toner Vibrator

The waste toner vibrator contains one motor [M]. The motor operates for about one
second at a time. Its vibration prevents the waste toner from clogging the waste
toner path.
The table lists the conditions under which the motor operates.
Machine status
Motor operation
During machine start (machine

initialization)
Two times
At the beginning of the process

control
One time
Printing jobs that output five or less

papers
At the job end if 3 or more papers have been output

since the previous operation (of the motor) ()
Printing jobs that output 6 or more

papers
Every five papers and at the job end ()
Suppose: The copier executes two jobs, the first job outputs one paper, and the
second job outputs two papers. In this case, the motor operates one time at the
end of the second job (see ).
Suppose: The copier executes one job, and the job outputs 12 papers. In this case,
the motor operates one time during the fifth printing, one time during the tenth
printing, and one more time at the job end (see ).
Suppose: The copier executes two jobs, the first job outputs one paper, and the
second job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the motor operates one time during the
fifth printing of the second job, one time during the tenth printing of the second job,
and one more time at the end of the second job (see ; This case does not satisfy
condition ).
B147/B149/B190
6-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION

[A]
[B]
B146D533.WMF
The waste toner bottle set switch [A] detects the bottle when it is placed in the
machine.
When the bottle contains a certain amount of waste toner, the sensor is
deactivated. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full and
displays Waste Toner is Almost Full.
After that, the machine can print about 2,500 more sheets. After printing 2,500
sheets, it displays Replace Waste Toner, and after the end of the job, the
machine cannot be used until the bottle is replaced or emptied.
NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated on the assumption that the paper size
is A4 and that the coverage ratio of each color is 5%.
SM
6-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The waste toner sensor [B] detects the weight of the bottle and informs when it is
almost full.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8
Rev.06/2004
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.1
OVERVIEW
3
6
4
5
B146D534.WMF
4. TD sensor
5. Mixing auger (left)
6. Development roller
1. Doctor blade
2. Developer hopper
3. Mixing auger (right)
This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Each
contains 280 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied to
the development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface of
the roller.
The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by
the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field.
The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit
has a TD sensor.
The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (circumference about 56.5 mm).
B147/B149/B190
6-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.2 DRIVE
[A]
B146D535.WMF
Detailed
Descriptions
[B]
B146D536.WMF
The development drive motor-K [A] drives the development roller for black through
gears and a clutch. This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.
The gear trains are indicated in the diagram by dotted lines.
The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta,
cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives the
registration roller.
SM
6-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION
[A]
[B]
B146D537.WMF
Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward to
agitate the developer.
This happens during the process control self check, during toner supply, and during
development.
B147/B149/B190
6-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
[B]
[A]
B146D930.WMF
There are both ac and dc bias voltages. The ac bias improves toner transfer to the
drum.
The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control is
enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to 0). However, if process control is switched off,
(i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to 1), the dc bias is the value stored in SP2-201-001 to
009 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
The ac bias cannot be adjusted.
SM
6-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The high voltage supply board [A] supplies development bias to the development
roller via the receptacle [B] at the rear of each development unit.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

[D]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[B]
[A]
[G]
[H]
[H]
B146D538.WMF
Overview
[J]
The air transport system agitates the toner [H] in the toner cartridges [G]. Toner is
transported to the development unit [A] by the toner attraction pump [B] (each
cartridge has a separate pump). This provides a more stable way to transport fine
powder than previous methods.
Toner Agitation and Attraction

The rear air pump [D] supplies air to the yellow and magenta toner cartridges, while
the front air pump [E] supplies air to the black and cyan toner cartridges. Air
agitates all the toner in each cartridge. The pumps and four valves [C] control the
air flow. Mixed with air, the toner passes part of the way along the transport tube [J]
towards the toner attraction pump. This pump draws the toner the rest of the way
( Toner Transport).
The air pump turns on to supply air to the toner cartridges for one second under
any of the following conditions:
During normal operation, when the on time for a toner supply clutch
reaches a certain value
When forced toner supply (SP2-207) is done
When forced toner density adjustment (SP3-126-002) is done
At toner end recovery
Developer initialization
The filter [F] on the inner package of the toner cartridge ensures that the internal
pressure does not become too high.
B147/B149/B190
6-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Air Flow and Toner Flow

[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B146D539.WMF
The toner goes through the inner pipe [A], and reaches the toner tube [E] at the
bottom end of the pipe. On its way to the toner tube, the toner passes the sensor
windows [G]. These windows are at the front side and the rear side of the pipe, and
are transparent. The light emitted from the toner end sensor [D] goes through this
area if the toner is not going through the pipe.
The air flow generated by the air pump goes through the outer pipe [B], and comes
out of the four openings at the top end.
Toner Near End Detection

Toner end sensors [D] detect toner near end conditions ( 6.2.6).
SM
6-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The air tube [F] and the toner tube [E] are connected to the joint [C] at the bottom
of the toner cartridge holder. This joint contains an inner pipe [A] and an outer pipe
[B]. These two pipes are L-shaped. The inner pipe goes through the outer pipe,
and is longer than the other.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Toner Transport
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
B146D540.WMF
Each toner attraction pump has the same mechanism. The pump (toner attraction
pump) [A], which consists of the toner supply clutch [B], rubber tube [C], and rotor
[D], attracts the toner in the toner transport tube [E] toward the development unit.
The toner supply clutch drives the rotor, which draws the toner in from the cartridge
and passes it to the development unit. When supplying toner, the clutch is on for
0.7 second and off for 1.3 seconds. The clutch turns on and off as many times as
necessary to supply the appropriate amount of toner. The amount of toner depends
on the results of toner supply control.
Motor drive comes from the development drive motors.
B147/B149/B190
6-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Shutter Mechanism
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[A]
B146D541.WMF
The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism.
When the development unit is placed in the machine, the protrusion [A] on the
development unit opens the shutter [B] in the pump, and the protrusion [C] on the
pump opens the shutter [D] in the development unit. When both shutters are open,
toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump.
When the development unit is removed, the shutter spring [E and F] pulls and
closes the shutter.
The memory chip [A] on each toner cartridge

stores the total on time of the toner supply
clutch. This is used to calculate the amount of
toner remaining in the toner cartridge. The chip
is also used to detect whether the cartridge is
installed (if the cartridge is not installed, the
machine does not detect a signal from the
memory chip).
Detailed
Descriptions
6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION

[A]
B146D542.WMF
SM
6-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9
PAPER FEED
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
1
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
16
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
15
14
13
B146D543.WMF
9. Separation roller - By-pass feed

10. Transport roller
11. Vertical transport roller
12. Feed roller - tray 2
13. Separation roller - tray 2
14. Pick-up roller - tray 2
15. Paper tray 2
16. Paper tray 1
Pick-up roller - tray 1

Feed roller - tray 1
Separation roller - tray 1
Relay roller
Registration roller
Feed roller - By-pass feed
Pick-up roller - By-pass feed
By-pass feed table
There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100
sheets).
The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system.
Tray 1 can only hold A4 or letter paper. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes.
B147/B149/B190
6-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.2 DRIVE TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[H]
[I]
[F]
[Q]
[J]
[K]
[L]
[M]
[G]
[N]
[O]
[P]
B146D545.WMF
B146D544.WMF
When tray 1 and tray 2 are inside the machine, their pick-up rollers [H][K] are
always in contact with each top sheet of the paper stack. On the other hand, the
pick-up roller [P] of the by-pass tray stays away until the by-pass pick-up solenoid
[Q] turns on. When the paper feed clutch [B][C][D] turns on, the pick-up, feed
[I][L][N], and separation [J][M][O] rollers start rotating to feed the paper. The paper
feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates.
SM
6-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanisms in tray 1 [E], tray
2 [F], and the by-pass tray [G], using clutches and complex trains of gears (the
locations of the gear trains are indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT TRAYS 1 & 2
[G]
[F]
[E]
[H]
[A]
[B]
[I]
[D]
[C]
B146D546.WMF
The tray 1 set switch [A] and tray 2 paper size switches [B] detect when the paper
trays [C] are placed in the machine. When the machine detects that a tray has
been placed in the machine, the tray lift motor [D] rotates and the coupling gear [E]
on the tray lift motor engages the pin [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray lift
arm [I] lifts the tray bottom plate [H] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detects
that the top of the stack is at the paper feed position.
B147/B149/B190
6-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2

[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[C]
[B]
B146D547.WMF
For tray 1, there is no size switch. The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT; this
can be changed with SP1-902-1.
For tray 2, four paper size switches, working in combination, detect the paper size
as shown in the table below. The actuators are on the side plate [A]. The side plate
is moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].
Models
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
*1
81/2" x 14" SEF
B4 SEF *1
81/2" x 11" SEF *2
A4 SEF *2
11" x 81/2" LEF *3
11" x 81/2" LEF *3
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
B5 LEF
A5 LEF
A5 LEF
1 [D]
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Switch Location
2 [E]
3 [F]
4 [G]
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
NOTE:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4
The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected
(if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).
SM
6-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
1: Pushed
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2

[A]
[C]
[B]
B146D548.WMF
Two paper height sensors, working in combination, detect the amount of paper in
the tray.
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever moves up
and the actuator [A] (on the pressure lever drive shaft) rotates.
Remaining paper
Full
Nearly full
Near end
Almost empty
Paper height sensor 2 [B]

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Paper height sensor 1 [C]

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF: No actuator
6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler
and the paper end sensor deactivates.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout in
the tray bottom plate, and this activates the paper end sensor.
B147/B149/B190
6-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.7 REGISTRATION
[A]
[B]
B146D549.WMF
The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew.
The paper buckle can be adjusted with SP1-003-1 to - 8.
SM
6-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the registration roller [B] using a
clutch and a complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated by
dotted lines in the above diagram).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED

This machine has three process line speeds (for feed from registration roller to
fusing unit) depending on the mode and selected resolution
Mode
B/W
Color
OHP/Thick
Resolution
(dpi)
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
Line speed
(mm/s)
Print speed
(ppm)
185
38
125
28
125
28
62.5
14
62.5
10
During a monochrome print job, the machine changes the line speed if there is a
page with color in the middle of the job. However, it will not change the line speed if
there is a monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.
Paper feed from tray to registration roller
Fusing, paper exit to standard tray, and mailbox
Duplex invert and feed
Finisher
B147/B149/B190
Line speed (mm/s)

230
A bit slower than Process line speed
370
450
6-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[A]
[G]
B146D550.WMF
The grip roller release mechanism reduces the pressure of the grip roller [E].
To solve this possible problem, the grip roller release mechanism is activated
under the following conditions:
1) B4 paper or longer is being fed.
2) The machine is operating in the full-color mode.
3) The leading edge of the paper has been fed in the transfer unit.
The spring [A] is always pressing the grip roller against the transport roller [B].
When the above conditions are met, the solenoid [F] turns on, the lever [C] pushes
the grip roller shaft [D], and the grip roller moves away from the paper.
SM
6-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The grip roller transports a sheet of paper to the transfer unit. When the transfer
unit starts to feed the leading edge of the paper [G], the trailing edge has still not
reached the grip roller. So the paper is handled by the transfer unit and the grip
roller at the same time. If the handling speeds are not the same, this may skew the
paper. Longer paper sizes are more affected by the speed difference than shorter
sizes. From the viewpoint of image crispness, multi-color images are more easily
affected than mono-color images.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10 DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
B146D551.WMF
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Exit sensor 1
Junction gate
Duplex feed sensor
Duplex inverter sensor
Junction mylar 3
Junction mylar 2
Exit sensor 3
Junction mylar 1
Exit sensor 2
For duplex printing, the second page (rear side) is printed first.
To print on the second side, the duplex inverter unit (on the side of the machine)
inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the duplex feed unit (inside
the machine).
The duplex feed unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section.
When both sides have been printed, the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper out
to the finisher.
If the mailbox or standard exit tray (on top of the machine) was selected to
receive the duplex copies, the print will not enter the duplex unit after the second
side has been printed. The junction gate inside the machine directs it upwards to
the selected tray.
Duplex copies are not fed out to the external tray (on the left of the machine).
B147/B149/B190
6-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION

Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF
There are three sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The
interleave method is used.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.
The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
[A]
7
4
[B]
B146D552.WMF
Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF

There are two sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The
interleave method is used.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages.
The number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
[A]
1
1
[B]
SM
8
4
7
4
B146D553.WMF
6-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
B146D554.WMF
The duplex inverter motor 1 [A] drives the paper exit roller 1 [B], paper transport
roller [C], paper exit roller 2 [D], and upper inverter roller [E].
The duplex inverter motor 2 [F] drives the exit roller 3 [G], paper exit roller 4 [H],
and lower inverter roller [I].
B147/B149/B190
6-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE)
[B]
[A]
This shows how the machine feeds paper through the duplex unit to the external
tray [A], when duplex mode is not selected.
NOTE: The paper cannot be fed out to the external tray if duplex printing is
selected.
The junction gate [B] directs the paper from the fusing unit out to the external tray if
thick paper or OHP mode is selected, or if the external tray is selected as the
output tray with the operation panel or the printer driver.
SM
6-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
B146D555.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT
[A]
[C]
[B]
B146D556.WMF
B146D557.WMF
This shows how the machine feeds paper back into the machine after side 1 is
printed.
The junction gate [A] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [B] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 3 [C]. Then, the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 3 directs the paper back into the machine for the second
side.
The next page shows how the paper is fed out to the finisher after both sides are
printed.
B147/B149/B190
6-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER

With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit
[B]
[D]
[A]
[D]
[C]
B146D559.WMF
B146D558.WMF
The paper is fed out to the finisher from the upper exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 1 [D]. Then, the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 1 directs the paper out to the finisher.
With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit
[A]
[D]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B146D561.WMF
B146D560.WMF
The paper is fed out to the finisher from the lower exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 2 [D], but before it passes junction
mylar 3 [E]. Then, the paper is switched back and junction mylar 2 directs the
paper out to the finisher.
SM
6-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

Drive
[A]
B146D562.WMF
The duplex feed motor [A] drives all paper transport rollers.
Feed-in and feed-out
[A]
B146D563.WMF
The duplex feed unit feeds the paper from the duplex inverter unit to the relay roller
[A].
B147/B149/B190
6-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
11
1
2
10
3
8
7
4
6
5
G080D701.WMF
7. Cleaning blade
8. Toner collection auger
9. Cleaning brush
10. Cleaning unit
11. ID sensor
Transfer unit drive motor

Transfer belt
Rotation encoder
Paper attraction roller
Transfer roller
Back-up roller
Paper is fed to the transfer belt before image transfer begins. The paper attraction
roller charges the paper to ensure that the paper is attracted to the belt.
The magenta, cyan, yellow, and black color images transfer to the paper while the
transfer belt feeds the paper past the drums towards the fusing unit. A positive
charge is applied to the paper under the transfer belt, opposite each drum, to
transfer the toner from the drums onto the paper. The back-up roller ensures that
the contact area between the drum and belt is sufficient.
The cleaning unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface with the cleaning blade
and brush. The waste toner collected from the belt is transported to the waste toner
bottle.
There are three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID sensor
detects the image density of the patterns generated on the transfer belt for process
control. The other function of the ID sensors is for automatic line position
adjustment. All ID sensors are used for this.
SM
6-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE

Drive Motor
[B]
[A]
B146D564.WMF
The transfer unit drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit via
the timing belt and gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the process
line speed.
B147/B149/B190
6-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rotation Encoder
[A]
[C]
[B]
B146D914.WMF
An encoder [C] is on one of the rollers. This encoder checks the rotation speed of
the transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder, and adjusts
the rotation speed of the transfer belt.
The encoder contains a disk that has 300 notches on its surface [B]. These
notches are read by the sensor [A]. The controller counts the number of notches
that the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusually
large number of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controller
ignores such unusual signals. Thanks to this feature, incorrect reading does not
affect the rotation speed.
Ignored
Filter H
Filter L
Ignored
Time
B146D915.WMF
Filter H: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its possible highest.
Filter L: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its possible lowest.
SM
6-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Number of notches
(read by the sensor)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B146D565.WMF
The transfer roller [D] applies a current to transfer the toner to the paper on the
transfer belt [A]. The high voltage supply board Transfer applies a current to the
transfer roller and the paper attraction roller [C].
These currents are automatically corrected for paper size, temperature (measured
by the thermistor on the right side of the laser optics housing unit), and humidity
(measured by the humidity sensor).
Available adjustments are summarized below.
The transfer roller current for each printing mode (color or B/W, resolution, paper
type) can be adjusted with SP2-301-1 to -56. The by-pass tray settings are used
when the duplex unit has not been installed and the user is making duplex prints
manually from the by-pass tray. There is a correction for narrow-width paper with
SP2-309-1 to -4.
The current for paper attraction can be adjusted with SP2-801-1 to -9. There is a
correction for narrow-width paper with SP2-801-10 to -13.
The back-up roller [E] makes a wider contact area between the drum [B] and the
belt. The transfer exit roller [F] is charged to 2 kV. The roller prevents the toner
from being scattered while the paper is leaving the transfer unit.
The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface.
B147/B149/B190
6-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
B146D567.WMF
The cleaning brush [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and removes waste
toner from the belt. The cleaning blade [D] in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner off
the transfer belt. The toner collection auger [E] transports the toner towards the
waste toner collection duct.
SM
6-85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
The transfer belt cleaning unit removes toner (during printing) and the ID sensor
patterns (during process control or automatic line position adjustment) on the belt.
Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The transfer
unit drive motor [A] drives the unit.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B146D568.WMF
Mechanism
The transfer belt contact and release mechanism improves the lifetime of the
transfer belt and drums.
The drum for black always contacts the belt, but the transfer belt moves away from
the other drums during monochrome printing.
In the standby mode, the transfer belt contacts only the black drum. The transfer
belt comes away from the black drum when you turn the release lever
counterclockwise.
When the machine prints a color page, the machine waits until the previous page
has gone through the transfer unit. Then the transfer belt contact motor [C] turns on
and a cam [D] moves the lower end [E] of the transfer belt upward, so that it
contacts the other three drums.
The machine does not release the transfer belt from the color drums during the job,
even if a monochrome page comes again. This is because the total printing speed
reduces if the transfer belt changes position often.
The belt comes away from the color drums if the job is interrupted by any error
except a power failure.
NOTE: If a power failure occurs when the transfer belt is in contact with the drum,
the belt stays in this position. To release the belt, swing out the controller
box, and turn the drive gear [B] manually.
B147/B149/B190
6-86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Transfer Belt Sensor

The transfer belt sensor [A] works as the detection sensor during machine
initialization, and works as the position sensor during machine operations.
Before machine initialization, the lower end of the transfer belt is in the home
position. When initialization starts, the transfer belt contact motor lifts the lower end
until the actuator has passed the sensor, and lowers it to its home position. This
action actuates the sensor in a certain pattern.
The table lists the sensor actuation patterns.
Machine status
Sensor pattern
Initialization
On Off On Off On
Standby (Default)
On
Operation
B/W printing
On
Color Printing
Off
On: The actuator is out of the sensor.
Off: The actuator is interrupting the sensor.
Copier ACS
The Auto Color Select manages the transfer belt and PCUs. To print color pages,
the ACS lifts the transfer belt and operates the four PCUs. To print black and white
pages, the ACS manages the transfer belt and the PCUs as follows:
1. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in the lower position and operates the black
PCU (does not operate the other PCUs) if the first print of a job is a black and
white page.
3. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in

the upper position and keeps
Color
Color
Color
K
K
K
K
operating the four PCUs after the first
color page. Note that all PCUs are in
K PCU
Four PCUs
operation even when black and white
pages are processed.
B146D935.WMF
The ACS works when the user pushes
the Auto Color Select key from the operation panel. The table lists which PCUs are
in operation.
Auto Color Select
B/W Only
Black PCU
Original
Color Only
Four PCUs
Full Color
Black and White
Four PCUs
Black PCU
Four PCUs
Black PCU
Key
SM
6-87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B/W and Color

Black PCU or four
PCUs
Four PCUs
Black PCU
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
2. The ACS lifts the transfer belt to the upper position and operates the four PCUs
if a color page appears in the job.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer ACS
The user can validate or invalidate the ACS from the following menu: > Printer
Features > System > B&W Page Detect. The ACS works when B&W Detect is on,
and does not work when B&W detect is off. The tables list which PCUs are in
operation.
B&W Page Detect: On
Printer Driver
Black and White
Color
B/W Only
Black PCU
Black PCU
Print
Color Only
Black PCU
Four PCUs
B/W and Color

Black PCU
Black PCU or four
PCUs
B&W Page Detect: Off

Printer Driver
Black and White
Color
B147/B149/B190
B/W Only
Black PCU
Four PCUs
Print
Color Only
Black PCU
Four PCUs
6-88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B/W and Color

Black PCU
Four PCUs
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12 FUSING
6.12.1 OVERVIEW
15
3
14
4
13
5
12
6
11
7
10
8
B146D569.WMF
Oiling roller
Oil supply roller
Heating roller
Heating roller fusing lamp
Heating roller thermostat
Heating roller thermistor
Fusing belt
Pressure roller thermistor
9. Pressure roller thermo fuse

10. Pressure roller fusing lamp
11. Pressure roller
12. Hot roller
13. Junction gate
14. Cleaning roller
15. Oil supply unit
A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional
hot and pressure roller system.
The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing
belt quickly.
The hot roller is made of sponge, which flattens slightly, also increasing the
fusing nip. This roller does not contain a fusing lamp.
Each of the heating and pressure rollers has a fusing lamp.
NA: 770W for the heating roller, 350W for the pressure roller
EU: 700W for the heating roller, 325W for the pressure roller
The heating roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor control the
temperature of these lamps.
Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. To
change between on/off control and phase control: SP1-104-1.
The oil supply roller supplies oil to the fusing belt through the oiling roller. This
mechanism spreads the oil on the fusing belt evenly.
SM
6-89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B146D570.WMF
[G]
Belt and Rollers

Development drive motor-K drives the pressure roller [G], hot roller [B], oil supply
roller [C], and oiling roller [D] through the gear train. The heating roller [E] is driven
by the pressure with the fusing belt [F].
Fusing Clutch
The fusing clutch [A] turns off and cuts the drive power when the fusing unit does
not need to operate. This mechanism prevents the belt and rollers from wearing
and saves the fusing oil.
NOTE: The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on the
transfer belt during process control and line position adjustment.
B147/B149/B190
6-90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Fusing Temperatures
When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays
on until the thermistor detects the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises the
temperature to the printing temperature.
The fusing temperature for each mode is as follows.
Temperature of
Pressure Roller
Energy saver
level 1
100C
130C
Standby mode
NA: 175C
EU: 170C
NA: 145C
EU: 140C
NA: 125C
EU: 130C
Color
Resolution
(dpi)
1,200 x 1,200
150C
1,800 x 600
600 x 600
180C
160C
1,800 x 600
600 x 600
All
All
NA: 180C
EU: 175C
NA: 185C
EU: 180C
165C
175C
1,200 x 1,200
145C
1,800 x 600
600 x 600
NA: 165C
EU: 170C
1,200 x 1,200
165C
1,800 x 600
600 x 600
175C
NA: 160C
EU: 155C
NA: 155C
EU: 160C
150C
155C
NA: 120C
EU: 125C
NA: 135C
EU: 150C
NA: 135C
EU: 145C
NA: 145C
EU: 155C
1,200 x 1,200
Black and white
OHP
Thick
Color
(duplex)
Black and white

(duplex)
Note
If SP1-104025 is set to 4
The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-4 to
-28.
When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to those
specified by SP1-104-25.
The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. The
difference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2.
SM
6-91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Temperature of
Heating Roller
Mode
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Temperature Corrections
To prevent excessive glossiness caused by fusing temperature overshoot, the
following SP modes are available:
1-913: Fusing temperature is reduced after this number of pages during the
job.
1-914: This shows how much the temperature is reduced
If a job using OHP or thick paper starts while the fusing unit is still warm, the fusing
temperature could be higher than the target for this type of paper, causing marks
on the output. To prevent this problem, we have the following SP modes:
1-996-4, 5: These SPs specify a limit, above which printing will not start.
Overheat Protection
If the heating or pressure roller temperature becomes higher than 210C, the CPU
cuts off the power to the fusing lamp. SC543 for the heating roller or SC553 for the
pressure roller is generated.
If thermistor overheat protection fails, there are the thermostat for the heating roller
and two thermofuses for the pressure roller in series with the common ground line
of the fusing lamp.
If the thermostat temperature becomes higher than 215C, the thermostat
opens, removing power from the fusing lamp.
If either of the two thermofuses temperature becomes higher than 126C, the
thermofuse opens, removing power from the fusing lamp.
NOTE: These thermofuses make a series circuit.
In either case, the machine stops operation.
B147/B149/B190
6-92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING

Oil Supply Pad and Roller
[B]
Front
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
Rear
B146D571.WMF
Detailed
Descriptions
The fusing oil makes it easier for paper to separate from the fusing belt and roller
after fusing. The oil [C] from the oil supply pad [B] is supplied to the oil supply roller
[A]. The oil supply roller rotates and supplies a bit of oil to the oiling roller [D]. The
oiling roller applies the oil to the fusing belt [E].
SM
6-93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Oil Supply Mechanism

Rear
[A]
[B]
[C]
[G]
Front
[F]
[E]
B146D572.WMF
[D]
When the solenoid [A] turns on, the solenoid lever [B] pushes the oil supply lever
[C] on the fusing unit. The movement is transmitted by the link [D] and the bracket
[E] to the oil supply roller [F]. The roller is lifted and touches the oil supply pad [G].
B147/B149/B190
6-94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12.5 WASTE OIL
[A]
[I]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[E]
[D]
B146D919.WMF
Excess fusing oil is collected in the waste oil bottle [H] through the pipe [I]. There is
a feeler [E] behind the waste oil bottle holder [G]. The feeler is linked to the bottle
set sensor [D]. The feeler is pushed when the bottle is in the holder and the holder
is set in place.
NOTE: 1) The feeler goes through an opening [F] on the rear side of the holder.
The bottle pushes the feeler directly.
2) The bottle set sensor is checked when the main switch is turned on or
when the front or left door is opened and closed.
If the sensor does not detect the bottle, the message, Waste Oil Bottle Setting
Error, is displayed. This message is cleared after the bottle is set and the front
cover is closed (or the main switch is turned off and on). Just opening and closing
the cover does not clear the message.
NOTE: With this error message, another message, Waste Oil Bottle is Almost
Full, can be displayed ( Waste Oil Sensor).
SM
6-95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Bottle Set Sensor
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Rev. 06/2004
Waste Oil Sensor

There is an enclosed area [A] on the rear left shoulder of the waste oil bottle. On
the inside wall of this area are two pinholes, through which the waste oil can flow
into the enclosed area. This enclosed area contains an actuator [B], which
interrupts the waste oil sensor [C] if no oil is in the area.
When the amount of waste oil becomes large enough for the waste oil to flow into
the area, the actuator floats on the oil. When the actuator leaves the waste oil
sensor, the message, Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full, is displayed on the
operation panel.
NOTE: With this error message, another message, Waste Oil Bottle Setting
Error, can be displayed ( Bottle Set Sensor).
After this message appears, the copier can operate until the number of rotations of
development drive motor K reaches the value specified with SP7-905-010. When
the number has reached this value, an error message is displayed and the copier
stops its operation. When you dispose of the waste oil, the machine resumes its
normal operations (no need to switch the machine off/on).
6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B146D573.WMF
The fusing oil supply unit [A] contains a fuse [B] in a circuit between the fusing unit
and the BCU board. The fuse opens shortly after a new unit has been installed in
the machine and the power is switched on. When the power is turned on or the left
cover is closed, the BCU checks whether a new fusing oil supply unit is installed by
checking the fuse condition. If the fusing oil supply unit has been replaced, the
machine detects the new unit and automatically resets the counter for the unit.
Oil near-end is detected by counting the number of prints made. The machine
indicates oil near-end 2,500 sheets before the life of the oil supply unit runs out.
This timing can be changed with SP7-905-14. . When the number has reached this
value, an error message is displayed and the copier stops its operation.
B147/B149/B190
6-96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12.7 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Overview
Operation Sw. Off

-orAuto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Stand-by Mode
Energy Saver Key ON

-orPanel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 10 s)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off

-orAuto Off Timer
Panel-Off Mode (1&2)
Return Time Less Than 3s Panel-Off Level 1

Return Time Less Than 10s Panel-Off Level 2
Energy Saver Timer

(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off
-orAuto Off Timer
Low Power Mode
Return Time Less Than 30 s
Auto Off Mode

Off Mode
FAX: RX, etc.
Printer Data in
Operation Sw. On
Platen Cover Open / Close
Original Set ADF
Return Time Less Than 101 s
After Printing
Off Stand-by Mode
B146D936.WMF
This machine has two types of energy saver mode as follows.

1) Panel-off mode
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.
Panel off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Panel Off
Timer
Auto off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Auto Off
Timer
Auto off disabling: User Tools System Settings Key Operator Tools
AOF (Always ON). This disables the auto off mode.
SM
6-97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Panel Off Mode

Entering the panel off mode
The machine enters the panel off mode under the following condition:
The panel off timer runs out.
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second.
If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in the
energy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode without going into
the panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the panel off timer is
larger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off mode effective, specify
a value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer and auto off timer.
What happens in panel off mode

When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept at
the temperatures indicated in the table below, and the operation panel indicators
are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program
(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each
fusing lamp rises to print the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The return time from the panel off mode to stand-by mode is less than 30 seconds.
Mode
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
On
On
Panel off
B147/B149/B190
Fusing Temperature
+24V
System +5V
Heating roller: 100oC

Pressure roller: 130oC
On
On
6-98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Auto Off Mode

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machines condition when it
enters the Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the following
is done.
The auto off timer runs out.
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off.
If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode.
Error or SC condition
Image data is stored in the memory
During memory TX or polling RX
The handset is off hook
An original is in the ARDF
The ARDF is open
Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes
the print job.
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
return time is less than 99 seconds.
Mode
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
Fusing Lamp
+24V
System +5V
Off
Stand-by
Off
Off
Off
(On when printing)
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
SM
6-99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Note
+5VE is
supplied
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
Off Mode
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER EXIT
6.13 PAPER EXIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B146D920.WMF
B146D574.WMF
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
To standard paper tray

To external paper tray
Junction gate
Junction gate solenoid
After fusing, the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or the
external paper tray. The junction gate solenoid [D] controls the junction gate as
follows:
To the standard paper tray: The junction gate

solenoid is off (default)
To the external paper tray: The junction gate

solenoid is on.
Development drive motor-K drives the exit rollers.
B147/B149/B190
6-100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER EXIT
6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION

[A]
When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that the
paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit, and stops printing.
SM
6-101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
B146D921.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.1 OVERVIEW
The printer/scanner unit is provided as a standard unit for North America and
Europe models. For other models, install the printer/scanner unit to use scanner
functions.
AL Option
AL Option
Printer/
Scanner
PS3
SD Card
RAM
(256 MB)
RAM
(256 MB)
RAM
(256 MB)
2.5" HDD
2.5" HDD
SD Slot 1
SD Slot 2
SD Slot 3
SDRAM
DIMM
SDRAM
DIMM
SDRAM
DIMM
IDE
IDE
AS Option
IEEE1284
NIB
AS Option
Local BUS
System
Flash ROM
(16 MB)
CLARINET
NVRAM
(128 kB)
CPU
PCI BUS
CONTROLLER
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
BCU
IEEE1394/
Wireless LAN/
Bluetooth
File Format
Converter
FCU
NCU
AL Option
AL Option
AL Option
AL Option
AS Option: Optional component for Asia model
(standard component for other models)
AL Option: Optional component for all models
: Optional printer/scanner for Asia model
(standard component for other models)
B146D924.WMF
The controller is based on the GW (Grand Work) architecture.

CPU: RM7065C-533 (496 MHz)
CLARINET:
This is one of the GW-architecture ASICs. It uses a 124 MHz bus to interface with
the CPU and memory. CLARINET controls the interface, memory, local bus,
interruption processing, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel,
IEEE1284, and image processing.
Flash ROM: The 16-MB flash ROM is for the system program.
B147/B149/B190
6-102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
SDRAM DIMM (3 slots):

The controller has 512-MB resident SDRAM. You can expand the memory up to
768 MB (256 MB x 3).
NVRAM:
The 128-KB NVRAM stores the engine/controller settings and logs.
Ethernet:
100Base-TX/10Base-T is an optional component for the Asia model, and a
standard component for other models.
IEEE1284 Interface:
The IEEE1284 interface is a standard component for the Europe and North
America models, and an optional component for other models.
NIB:
The network interface board is a standard component for the Europe and North
America models, and an optional component for other models.
Interface Option:
You can install one of the four network components (USB 2.0, IEEE1394, Wireless
LAN, Bluetooth).
Detailed
Descriptions
HDD:
Two 40-GB HDDs are among standard components. Each hard disk is partitioned
as shown below. You cannot change the partition sizes.
SM
6-103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.2 HARD DISK

Overview
The capacity of the hard disk is 80 GB. The controller partitions it into several
drives and allocates them for different functions. You can initialize these partitions
as necessary ( SP5-832). The table lists the contents of the hard disk.
Contents
Images
Thumbnails
Job logs
Printer fonts
User information
Mail RX data
Mail TX data
Designer data
Logs
Ricoh interfaces
Volatile/
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Volatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Volatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Capacity (MB)
37,500
25,000
2,400
10
500
100
200
1,000
1,256
1,000
150
500
Initialization
(SP5-832)
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
Volatile: The data is lost when you turn the main switch off.
Nonvolatile: The data is retained when you turn the main switch off.
Data Transfer
The copier executes the direct memory access
(DMA) two times as fast as the conventional DMA.
The controller has two identical hard disk drives.
One HDD interface connects these drives with the
memory. There is a 32-bit data bus between the
memory and the HDD interface; and a 16-bit data
bus between the HDD interface and each hard
disk drive (two 16-bit data busses in total).
Memory
HDD Interface
When receiving 32-bit data from the memory, the

HDD interface divides them into two 16-bit data
and transfers them to each hard disk drive. Hard
disk drive 1 stores data in an address; hard disk
drive 2 stores data in an address. These two
addresses correspond with each other. When
HDD 1
receiving two 16-bit data from two corresponding
addresses of the hard disk drives, the HDD
interface combines them and transfers 32-bit data to the memory.
HDD 2
B146D937.WMF
If a bad sector is found in an address of one hard disk drive, the sector in the
corresponding address of the other hard disk drive is also treated as a bad sector.
B147/B149/B190
6-104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

RPCS Driver
Host
Printer
Engine
Controller
ICM Engine/
ICM profile
8-bit K
RGB
RPCS Driver
Matching
RCM profile
RGB
Gray
Correction
UCR/BG
Corrected
RGB
8-bit
CMYK
Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits
Dithering & ROP
CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
B146D932.WMF
PCL5c Driver
Host
Printer
Engine
Controller
(Matching by Host)
RGB
PCL Driver
RGB
Decode
&
Scale
8 bits
RGB
8 bits
ICM Engine/
ICM profile
Detailed
Descriptions
RGB 8 bits
Color
Matching
CMY
8 bits
RGB CMY
Correction
CMY
8 bits
Dithering
&
ROP
CMY
1 bit
BG/UCR,
Gray Correction
Toner Limitation
CMYK
1 bit
B146D933.WMF
SM
6-105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
PS3 Driver
XYZ
Color
Matching
CMYK
8 bits
RGB
Vivid
Super Vivid
None
RGB
to
XYZ
BG/UCR
(RGB
Correction)
CMYK
CMYK
8 bits
CMYK
CMYK
Dither and RIP
Fine
Fine Super
Gamma
XYZ
PS Driver
Toner Limitation
CRD
Gray Correction
CIE
to
XYZ
CIE ABC
CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
CMM/
ICC/ICM
Profile
B146D934.WMF
CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on the
characteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.
With PS3 and PCL5c, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module on
the controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.
CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to Off.
Gray Correction
Gray correction processes gray with the K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)

The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,
some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.
Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is
stored in NVRAM.
B147/B149/B190
6-106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo
Adjustable range: 100% to 400%
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Dithering
converts 8-bit data to 1-bit or 2-bit data. However, these dither patterns create the
illusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern is
selected depending on the selected resolution.
Detailed
Descriptions
RIP: Raster Image Processing

ROP: Raster Operation
SM
6-107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Rev. 05/2005
6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

Sample Print
This feature was formerly known as Proof Print. This function gives users a
chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run.
The maximum number of pages is 1,000. It is 1,100 pages total, including
jobs from locked print and collation.
The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 2.5 GB. This
partition is also used by the collation and locked print features.
Locked Print
Using this feature, the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until
the user inputs an ID at the machines operation panel. This ID must match the ID
that has been input with the printer driver.
The maximum number of pages is 1,000. It is 1,100 pages total, including
jobs using sample print and collation.
Locked print uses the same hard disk partition as sample print and collation,
which is 2.5 GB.
B147/B149/B190
6-108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING

Print data can be spooled (stored) in the machines HDD, and the machine starts to
print when data transfer is complete. Since the machine stores all data first before
printing, the host computer is freed up more quickly.
NOTE: 1) The supported print protocols are IPP and LPR.
2) The default setting for this feature is off. The user must switch it on
using UP mode to enable this feature.
The size of the HDD partition for job spooling is 1 GB.
The partition can hold up to 150 jobs.
Related SP Modes
Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode (SP5-828-069) for each
protocol.
Detailed
Descriptions
The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SP
mode, even when the customer switches it on with the user mode.
SM
6-109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Paper Source Selection

Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)
The Tray Priority setting
determines the start of the tray
search when the user selects Auto
Tray Select with the driver. The
machine searches paper trays for
the specified paper size and type.
When no tray contains paper that
matches the paper size and type
specified by the driver, the controller
stops printing until the user loads the
correct paper.
Priority Tray
Start of
Tray Search
Tray 1
Tray 2
LCT (Optional)
The Tray Priority setting can be

specified in the following menu:
> System Settings > Tray Paper
Settings > Paper Tray Priority:
Printer.
NOTE: The by-pass feed table is not part of the tray search.
Tray 3 (Optional)
Tray 4 (Optional)
B146D575.WMF
Tray Locking
If Tray Locking is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the locked tray in the
tray search process.
The Tray Locking setting can be specified in the following menu: > System
Settings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Tray # > Apply Auto Paper Select
(where the # indicates the tray number).
NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Locking is always
enabled).
Manual Tray Select

If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,
the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.
B147/B149/B190
6-110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Auto Continue
Overview
When this function is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,
15 minutes) for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray. If the timer
runs out, the machine starts printing, even if there is no paper tray which matches
the paper size and paper type specified by the driver.
The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way:
The interval can be set with the following menu: > Printer Features > System
> Auto Continue.
NOTE: The default setting for this feature is Off.
Auto Tray Select

When there is no paper tray that
matches the paper size and type
specified by the driver, the machine
searches for any tray that has paper,
and prints from the first tray it finds.
The start of the tray search is the
tray selected as the priority tray.
Priority Tray
Start of
Tray Search
Tray 1
Tray 2
LCT (Optional)
Tray 3 (Optional)
Tray 4 (Optional)
Manual Tray Select

The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do not
match the setting specified from the driver.
If Auto Continue is disabled, the machine waits until the user loads the correct
paper in the tray.
SM
6-111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
B146D576.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Paper Output Tray

You can select output trays as follows: User Tools > System Settings > Tray Paper
Settings. If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies the
default tray, the output tray selected with this user tool will be used.
Output Tray Selected

If the machine cannot print to the selected output tray, it prints to the default
paper output tray.
If paper overflow is detected at the selected output tray, the controller suspend
printing.
Stapling
The optional two-tray finisher and booklet finisher can staple papers. Both finishers
support the following stapling positions:
[A]
[A]: One staple (vertical) is at the rear right
corner.
[B]: Two staples (vertical) are at the right
[B]
Paper exit
middle edge.
[C]: One staple (vertical) is at the front right
[C]
corner.
[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front right
corner.
[D]
The two-tray finisher supports the following
stapling position (the booklet finisher does
[E]
not):
[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front right
corner.
The booklet finisher supports the following
stapling position (the two-tray finisher does
not):
[E]: Two staples (vertical) are at the center.
B146D922.WMF
The table lists the number of papers that the finishers can staple.
Position
Two-tray finisher
Booklet finisher
A4, B5, LT
50 sheets
50 sheets
[A][B][C][D]
[A][B][C][D]
[E]
Paper size
A3, Ledger, Legal
30 sheets
25 sheets
10 sheets
NOTE: For more paper sizes, see the specifications.
B147/B149/B190
6-112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Punching
To enable a finisher to punch out holes, you must install the optional punch unit to
it. Each punch unit needs the dedicated punch unit. Note that these punch units
are not interchangeable with each other. To make two holes on a sheet of paper,
you must install the two-hole type; to make three, the three-hole type; and to make
four, the four-hole type. The table shows which type you can install to your finisher.
Finisher model
Two holes
Three holes
Four holes
North America
N/A
Europe (excluding
North Europe)
N/A
North Europe
N/A
N/A
Detailed
Descriptions
: Available
N/A: Not available
SM
6-113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ETHERNET BOARD
6.15 ETHERNET BOARD
Connector
GW PHY Bus I/f
6.15.1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT
EEPROM
LED
PHY DP83843
XTL
25 MHz
LED
Filter Modue
Connector
LAN I/F
B146D579.WMF
Function Blocks
PHY (Physical Layer Device)
EEPROM
Description
Completely standardized physical layer device for the
functions of each device in the network.
Stores the MAC address.
The physical layer device, the lowest layer of the OSI reference model, refers to
the physical components of the network: cables, connectors, and so on. OSI, the
Operating Standard Interface, is a framework upon which networking standards are
arranged. It is commonly diagramed as a layered cake.
B147/B149/B190
6-114
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ETHERNET BOARD
6.15.2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION

The NIB is a standard IEEE802.3u type which implements 10/100Mbps auto
negotiation. System initialization sets the network for 10Mbps/100Mbps.
[A]
[B]
B146D580.WMF
LED [B] (Green)
SM
Indicates the operation mode:

On: 100 Mbps mode
Off: 10 Mbps mode
Indicates the link status:
On: Link Safe
Off: Link Fail
6-115
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed
Descriptions
LED [A] (Orange)
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)
6.16 IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)

6.16.1 OVERVIEW
An IEEE1394 interface board is available as an option for this machine to provide
high speed connectivity through what is commonly called Firewire or i.LINK (Sony).
Some important advantages of Firewire are:
High speed data transmission at 400 Mbps.
Easier connectivity (many devices can be connected without a host).
Devices in a computer can be connected to external devices on a shared bus.
IEEE1394 supports two printing methods: 1) SCSI Print, and 2) IP Over 1394. IP
Over 1394 supports printing by setting an IP address, and SCSI supports printing
without an IP address.
Software Application
TCP/IP (Virtual)
Port
SCSI (Virtual)
Port
IP over 1394
Ethernet
Port
IEEE1394 Port
SCSI Printing
IEEE802.11b
(Wireless LAN)
Port
IP over 1394
Printing
B146D581.WMF
NOTE: 1) Windows Me and Windows XP support IP over 1394.

2) Windows XP and 2000 support IEEE1394 SCSI printing.
B147/B149/B190
6-116
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IEEE1394 BOARD (FIREWIRE)
Detailed
Descriptions
When the host computer powers up, it queries all the devices connected to the bus
and assigns each one an address, a process called enumeration. Here are some
general features of Firewire:
Firewire is Plug-and-Play.
Firewire devices are hot pluggable (they can be plugged while the system is
operating).
Firewire uses 64-bit fixed addressing, based on the IEEE 1212 standard. There
are three parts to each packet of information sent by a device over FireWire:
10-bit Bus ID. Used to determine the Firewire bus where the data came from.
6-bit Physical ID. Used to identify the device that sent the data.
48-bit Storage Area. Capable of addressing 256 terabytes of information for
each node
The Bus ID and Physical ID comprise the 16-bit Node ID. 64,000 nodes are
allowed on each system.
Up to 16 hops are allowed (4.5 m/hop) for a total of 72 meters devices are daisychained.
Firewire allows its devices to draw power from the Firewire connection. Two
power connectors in the cable can supply power (8 to 40 V, 1.5 amp max.)
An important element of Firewire is its support of isochronous devices.
When isochronous devices are in the isochronous mode, data streams between
the device and the host in real time with guaranteed bandwidth and no error
correction. Essentially, this means that a device like a digital camcorder can
request that the host computer allocate enough bandwidth for the camcorder to
send uncompressed video in real time to the computer. The camera can sent
data via the Firewire connection in a steady flow to the computer without
anything disrupting the process. This is one of the main reasons why 1394 has
been widely adopted by the consumer electronics industry.
SM
6-117
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USB
6.17 USB
6.17.1 SPECIFICATIONS
USB connectivity is provided as an option for this machine.
Interface:
Data rates:
USB 1.1, USB 2.0

480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed), 1.5 Mbps (low speed)
High speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.
6.17.2 USB 1.1/2.0

USB (Universal Serial Bus) offers simple connectivity for computers, printers,
keyboards, and other peripherals. In a USB environment, terminators, device IDs
(like SCSI), and DIP switch settings are not necessary.
USB 1.1 provides the following features:
Plug & Play. As soon as a new device is connected via USB, the operating
system recognizes it, and the appropriate driver is installed for it automatically if
the driver is available. If the driver is not available, a message prompts the user
for the driver disk for immediate installation.
Hot swapping (cables can be connected and disconnected while the computer
and other devices are switched on)
No terminator or device ID required
Data rates of 12 Mbps (full speed), and 1.5 Mbps (low speed)
Common connectors for different devices
Bi-directional data communication between device and host computer via a 4byte header and DEVICE ID.
USB 2.0 is an evolution of the USB 1.1 specification. It uses the same cables,
connectors, and software interfaces so the user will see no change. It provides an
easy-to-use connection to a wide range of products with a maximum data rate of
480Mbps (high speed).
Up to 127 devices can be connected and 6 cascade connections are allowed.
Power is supplied from the computer and the maximum cable length is 5 m.
B147/B149/B190
6-118
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USB
6.17.3 USB CONNECTORS

USB is a serial protocol and a physical link, which transmits all data on a single pair
of wires. Another pair provides power to downstream peripherals. The USB
standard specifies two types of connectors, type A connectors for upstream
connection to the host system, and type B connectors for downstream connection
to the USB device.
Type A connector
Type B connector
B146D582.WMF
B146D583.WMF
6.17.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT

The controller has the type B receptacle (CN10).
Detailed
Descriptions
B146D928.WMF
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
SM
Signal Description
Power
Data
Data +
Power GND
Wiring Assignment
Red
White
Green
White
6-119
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USB
6.17.5 REMARKS ABOUT USB

The machine does not print reports specifically for USB.
Only one host computer is allowed for the USB connection.
After starting a job using USB, do not switch the printer off until the job has been
completed. When a user cancels a print job, if data transmitted to the printer has
not been printed at the time of cancellation, the job will continue to print up to the
page where the print job was cancelled
When the controller board is replaced, the host computer will recognize the
machine as a different device.
Related SP Mode
USB Settings is in SP5-844. Data rates can be adjusted to full speed fixed (12
Mbps). This switch may be used for troubleshooting if there is a data transfer error
using the high speed mode (480Mbps).
Data rates can also be adjusted using the UP mode USB Setting in the Host
Interface in the System menu. This mode can be accessed only when the Enter,
Escape, then Menu keys are pressed to enter the UP mode.
B147/B149/B190
6-120
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)
6.18 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)

The IEEE 802.11b wireless LAN interface card is available as an option for this
machine.
A wireless LAN is a flexible data communication system used to extend or replace
a wired LAN. Wireless LAN employs radio frequency technology to transmit and
receive data over the air and minimize the need for wired connections.
With wireless LANs, users can access information on a network without looking
for a place to plug into the network.
Network managers can set up or expand networks without installing or moving
wires.
Most wireless LANs can be integrated into existing wired networks. Once
installed, the network treats wireless nodes like any other physically wired
network component.
Flexibility and mobility make wireless LANs both effective extensions of and
attractive alternatives to wired networks.
Standard applied:
Data transmission rates:
Network protocols:
Bandwidth:
IEEE802.11b
Speed
Distance
11 Mbps
140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps
200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps
270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps
400 m (437 yd.)
TCP/IP, Apple Talk, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX
2.4GHz
(divided over 14 channels, 2400 to 2497 MHz for each channel)
LED Indicators
LED
LED 1 (Green)
LED 2 (Orange)
SM
Description
Link Status
Power Distribution
ON
Linked
Power On
6-121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OFF
No Link
Power Off
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be active at the same time as the Ethernet LAN.
The following user tool setting determines which LAN is active: System
Settings Interface Settings Network - LAN Type.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.18.2 TRANSMISSION MODES

Wireless communication has two modes: 1) ad hoc mode, and 2) infrastructure
mode.
Ad Hoc Mode
The ad hoc mode allows
communication between each device
(station) in a simple peer-to-peer
network. In this mode, all devices
must use the same channel to
communicate. In this machine, the
default transmission mode is ad hoc
mode and the default channel is 11.
First, set up the machine in ad hoc
mode and program the necessary
settings, even if the machine will be
used in the infrastructure mode.
B146D584.WMF
To switch between ad hoc and

infrastructure modes, use the
following user tool: Host Interface
Menu - IEEE802.11b - Comm Mode
Infrastructure Mode
The infrastructure mode allows
communication between each
computer and the printer via an
access point equipped with an
antenna and wired into the network.
This arrangement is used in more
complex topologies. The wireless LAN
client must use the same SSID
(Service Set ID) as the access point in
order to communicate.
Access Point
B146D585.WMF
B147/B149/B190
6-122
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.18.3 SECURITY FEATURES

SSID (Service Set ID)
The SSID is used by the access point to recognize the client and allow access to
the network. Only clients that share the same SSID with the access point can
access the network.
NOTE: 3) If the SSID is not set, clients connect to the nearest access point.
4) The SSID can be set using the web status monitor or telnet.
Using the SSID in Ad hoc mode

When the SSID is used in ad hoc mode and nothing is set, the machine
automatically uses ASSID as the SSID. In such a case, ASSID must also be set
at the client.
NOTE: SSID in ad hoc mode is sometimes called Network Name.
Some devices automatically change from ad hoc mode to infrastructure mode
when the same SSID is used in ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode. In such a
case, to use the device in ad hoc mode, use a specified SSID in infrastructure
mode and use ASSID in the ad hoc mode.
MAC Address
When the infrastructure mode is used, access to the network can also be limited at
the access points using the MAC address. This setting may not be available with
some types of access points.
SM
6-123
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)

WEP is a coding system designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to
unlock encoded data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There
are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys. However, this machine supports only 64 bit WEP.
NOTE: The WEP key can be set using the Web Status Monitor or Telnet.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.18.4 WIRELESS LAN TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES

Communication Status
Wireless LAN communication status can be checked with the UP mode W.LAN
Signal in the Maintenance menu. This can also be checked using the Web Status
Monitor or Telnet.
The status is described on a simple number scale.
Status Display
Good
Fair
Poor
Unavailable
Communication Status
76 ~ 100
41 ~ 75
21 ~ 40
0 ~ 20
NOTE: Communication status can be measured only when the infrastructure mode
is being used.
Channel Settings
If a communication error occurs because of electrical noise, interference with other
electrical devices, etc., you may have to change the channel settings.
To avoid interference with neighboring channels, it is recommended to change by 3
channels. For example, if there are problems using channel 11 (default), try using
channel 8.
25MHz
Channel
MHz
1
2,412
25MHz
2,437
10
11
12
13
2,462
B146D586.WMF
B147/B149/B190
6-124
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
If there are problems using the wireless LAN, check the following.
1) Check the LED indicator on the wireless LAN card.
2) Check if IEEE802.11b is selected in the following user tool: Host Interface
menu - Network Setup - LAN Type.
3) Check if the channel settings are correct.
4) Check if the SSID and WEP are correctly set.
Detailed
Descriptions
If infrastructure mode is being used,

1) Check if the MAC address is properly set.
2) Check the communication status.
If the communication status is poor, bring the machine closer to the access
point, or check for any obstructions between the machine and the access
point.
If the problem cannot be solved, try changing the channel setting.
SM
6-125
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BLUETOOTH
6.19 BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth wireless provides radio links between mobile computers, mobile phones
and other portable handheld devices.
Bluetooth contains the following features.
Cheaper compared to the IEEE802.11b wireless LAN.
Many protocols for infrared transmission (IrDA) can be used with Bluetooth.
A Bluetooth device can connect to other Bluetooth devices without any settings.
Standard applied:
Bluetooth 1.1 (Bluetooth Special Interest Group)
Data transfer rates:
1 Mbps
Bandwidth:
2.4GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS)
Piconet. Bluetooth devices communicate with each other device in the ad hoc
mode. This network is called a Piconet. A Piconet may contain a maximum of 8
Bluetooth devices.
There is one master device and seven slave devices in a Piconet. The master
device controls the hopping frequency and timing, as well as storing the ID codes
of the slave devices. The master and slave devices can be swapped. Once the
master device leaves the Piconet, a slave device becomes the new master.
Machines with the Bluetooth option become potential slave devices to connect to
the PC.
FHSS (Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum). The Bluetooth device divides
2402 to 2480 MHz into 79 channels of 1 MHz width, and changes the channel 1600
times per second. If other devices in the LAN are using the same radio band,
Bluetooth can avoid interference from the other devices.
Frequency
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Time
B146D587.WMF
B147/B149/B190
6-126
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BLUETOOTH
6.19.2 BLUETOOTH PROFILES

A Bluetooth device will not operate if it is located to close another Bluetooth device.
However, the Bluetooth device should support the protocols to communicate with
each other. There are many types of Bluetooth and service protocols. These are
listed below.
Here are 14 profiles for Bluetooth as follows.
Generic Access Profile
Service Discovery Profile
Cordless Telephony Profile
Intercom Profile
Serial Port Profile
Headset Profile
Dial-up Networking Profile
Fax Profile
LAN Access Profile
Generic Object Exchange Profile
Object Push Profile
File Transfer Profile
Synchronization Profile
Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile
Serial Port Profile (SPP) and Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP) are
used for the printer products.
SPP is used is place of the serial port, while HCRP is used in place of the parallel
port.
Public and Private Mode. The PC can browse Bluetooth devices. The machines
default is public mode. The PC cannot browse the machine if it has been changed
to private mode.
PIN Code (Personal Identification Number). When the PIN code is used, the PC
connects to the device that sent the PIN code. The PIN code is a 4 digit number.
This machine uses the last four digits of the machine's serial number. It cannot be
changed.
SM
6-127
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
6.19.3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER FUNCTIONS
6.20 SCANNER FUNCTIONS

The printer/scanner unit is provided as a standard unit for North America and
Europe models. For other models, install the printer/scanner unit to use scanner
functions.
6.20.1 IMAGE PROCESSING FOR SCANNER MODE

The image processing for scanner mode is done in the IPU chip on the BCU board.
The IPU chip chooses the most suitable image processing methods (gamma
tables, dither patterns, etc) depending on the settings made in the driver.
The image compression method can be selected with SP mode (MR/MH/MMR for
binary picture processing, JPEG for grayscale processing).
Whether the user selects the image mode using the driver (TWAIN mode) or from
the operation panel (Delivery mode), the IPU chip does the image processing using
the appropriate image processing methods mentioned above.
Image Data Path

1. Image Store/Image Delivery Mode
Image
Scanning
SBU
Image
Processing
Image
Compression
BCU
File
HDD
NIB
Controller
Server
B146D926.WMF
The user can select the following modes from the LCD.
1) Delivery only
2) Store only
3) Store and delivery
After image processing and image compression, all image data for the job are
stored in the printer controller HDD using TIFF file format (binary picture
processing) or JPEG file format (grayscale processing). The type of TIFF format
used depends on the users scanner settings.
When delivery mode is selected, the controller creates a file which contains the
destination and page information, then the controller sends the file to a server.
B147/B149/B190
6-128
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER FUNCTIONS
2. Twain Mode
Image
Scanning
SBU
Image
Processing
Image
Compression
BCU
Im age
NIB
Controller
PC
B146D927.WMF
After image processing and image compression, the data (TIFF or JPEG) is sent
to the scanner Twain driver directory on the computer.
6.20.2 SCANNER ACS (AUTO COLOR SELECTION)

The scanner auto-color selection (ACS)
function determines if an original is black
and white or color, so that the black and
white mode or the full color mode is
automatically selected.
Signal
level
Comparing RGB video signals, the ACS

processes the original as black and white
if the maximum difference among RGB
signals is within a certain range.
SM
6-129
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B
B146D938.WMF
B147/B149/B190
Detailed
Descriptions
After the above processing, the G signals

are further processed to make black and
white data (a pixel is black or white, not
gray). In this processing, the following
R
information is compared:
The G signal level
The threshold (calculated from the average G signal level)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)
6.21 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

In previous models (such as A-C2, R-C2), DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copy
and print jobs from the document server and convert them to TIFF. However, this
software-based conversion was slow for many users.
So, for this machine, this conversion has been made hardware-based, using the
optional File Format Converter. Without the File Format Converter, copy and print
jobs cannot be downloaded to a PC (or e-Cabinet) from the document server.
Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can be
selected by the SP modes: JPEG, and TIFF.
In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The time
to create TIFF and JPEG files will be shortened with the File Format Converter,
especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customer
selects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image first
then converts it to PDF. So, the total time to create a PDF is also shortened with
the File Format Converter.
B147/B149/B190
6-130
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 09/2004
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 BASIC
Configuration:
Desktop
Print Process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Number of scans:
Resolution:
Scan: 600 dpi

Print: 600 dpi
Gradation:
Scan: 8 bits/pixel
Original type:
Sheets, book, objects
Max. original size:
A3/11" x 17"
Original reference
position:
Left rear corner
Copy speed:
Normal
B147: 24 cpm (color) or 32 cpm (black & white)
OHP/Thick
B147, B149, B190: 10 cpm (color/black & white)
ADF 1 to 1
First copy (normal

mode):
Color: 10 seconds or less

Black & white: 8 seconds or less
Warm-up time:
101 seconds or less (23C, 50%)
Print Paper Capacity:

(80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2

By-pass tray: 100 sheets
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2, Optional
LCT: 2000 sheets
Print Paper Size:
(Refer to Supported Paper Sizes.)

Tray 1
Tray 2
By-pass
Optional Tray
LCT
Printing Paper
Weight:
SM
Minimum
Maximum
A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
A3/11" x 17"
90 x 148 mm
305 x 458 mm/12" x 18"
A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
A3/11" x 17"
A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Standard tray:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Optional paper tray:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
By-pass tray:
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)
7-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Specifications
Print: 2 bits/pixel
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Paper
Capacity:
Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)

External exit tray: 100 sheets (face up)
Continuous copy:
Up to 999 sheets
Zoom:
Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)

Fixed:
North America
25%
50%
65%
73%
78%
85%
93%
100%
121%
129%
155%
200%
400%
Memory:
Europe
25%
50%
65%
71%
75%
82%
93%
100%
115%
122%
141%
200%
400%
Standard: 768 MB (Europe and North America model)/

512 MB (other models*)
* One expansion slot is available.
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America)

220 V 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8A (for Europe)
Power Consumption:
Maximum
Energy Saver
120V
1440 W or less
15 W or less
230V
1500 W or less
18 W or less
Printing
Stand-by
Low power mode
Mainframe Only
68 dB or less
42 dB or less
40 dB or less
Full System
72 dB or less
Noise Emission:
(Sound Power Level)
NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh

standard methodology.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Copier: 670 x 698 x 859 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 33.8")
Copier + 1-Tray PFU: 670x 698 x 1,020 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 40.2")
Copier + 2-Tray PFU or LCT: 670 x 698 x 1,118 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 44.0")
Weight:
B147/B149/B190
Less than 120 kg (265 lb.) [excluding toner]
7-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 09/2004
SPECIFICATIONS
1.2 PRINTER
Printer Languages:
PCL5c
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Resolution and
Gradation:
PCL5c:
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
Adobe PostScript 3:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
RPCS:
NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)
Printing speed:
B147
Color
Monochrome
B149
Color
Monochrome
B190
Color
Plain paper
32 ppm
32 ppm
28 ppm
24 ppm
24 ppm
14 ppm
38 ppm
38 ppm
28 ppm
28 ppm
28 ppm
14 ppm
28 ppm
20 ppm
20 ppm
20 ppm
20 ppm
14 ppm
Thick/OHP
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
Resident Fonts:
PCL5c:
35 Intelli fonts
10 TrueType fonts
Adobe PostScript 3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces:
Bi-directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1..................... Standard

Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)...................... Standard
USB 2.0 ............................................................... Optional
IEEE1394............................................................. Optional
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)............................... Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless)............................................. Optional
SM
7-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Specifications
Monochrome
Resolution
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 09/2004
Network Protocols:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk, SMB
First Print Speed:
Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)

Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)
1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner
Resolution:
Main scan/Sub scan

600 dpi
Available scanning
Resolution Range:
Twain Mode:
100 ~ 1200 dpi
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales:
1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scanning
Throughput
(ARDF mode):
B/W: 28 ppm LEF

Color: 24 ppm LEF
Interface:
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,

Wireless LAN
Compression
Method:
B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)

Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG
B147/B149/B190
7-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

2.1 PAPER FEED
LCT
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
Y
Y
#
Y
#
Y
8" x 13"
8.5" x 13"
N
N
Y
#
Y
N
N
8.25" x 13"
267 x 390 mm
195 x 267 mm
267 x 195 mm
Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
Maximum:
305 x 458 mm
4.125" x 9.5"
N
N
N
N
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
N
N
N
N
3.875" x 7.5"
114 x 162 mm
162 x 229 mm
110 x 220 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
A3 W
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
A6 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
B6 SEF
Ledger
Letter SEF
Letter LEF
Legal SEF
Half Letter
SEF
Executive
SEF
Executive
LEF
F SEF
Foolscap
SEF
Folio SEF
12" x 18"
297 x 420 mm
210 x 297 mm
297 x 210 mm
148 x 210 mm
210 x 148 mm
105 x 148 mm
257 x 364 mm
182 x 257 mm
257 x 182 mm
128 x 182 mm
11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
8.5" x 14"
8K
16K SEF
16K LEF
Custom
Com10
Env.
Monarch
Env.
C6 Env.
C5 Env.
DL Env.
Europe/Asia
Bypass
Tray
Size (W x L)
Tray 1
Tray
2/3/4
5.5" x 8.5"
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y*
N
N
N
Y
#
Y /Y*
Y
N
Y
N
#
Y /Y*
#
Y /Y*
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
7.25" x 10.5"
10.5" x 7.25"
Tray
2/3/4
LCT
Bypass
Tray
N
N
N
Y*
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
#
Y /Y*
Y
N
Y
#
Y /Y*
Y
#
Y /Y*
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
#
Y
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
Y
#
Y
N
N
Y
#
Y
N
N
Y
#
Y
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
#
Y
#
Y
#
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
#
Y
#
Y
Tray 1
#
#
#
Remarks:
Y
Y#
Y*
N
SM
Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.

Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
Not supported
7-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Specifications
North America
Paper
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2.2 PAPER EXIT

Paper
Size (W x L)
A3 W
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
A6 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
B6 SEF
Ledger
Letter SEF
Letter LEF
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF
Executive SEF
Executive LEF
F SEF
Foolscap SEF
Folio SEF
12" x 18"
297 x 420 mm
210 x 297 mm
297 x 210 mm
148 x 210 mm
210 x 148 mm
105 x 148 mm
257 x 364 mm
182 x 257 mm
257 x 182 mm
128 x 182 mm
11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
8.5" x 14"
5.5" x 8.5"
7.25" x 10.5"
10.5" x 7.25"
8" x 13"
8.5" x 13"
8.25" x 13"
267 x 390 mm
195 x 267 mm
267 x 195 mm
Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
Maximum:
305 x 458 mm
4.125" x 9.5"
3.875" x 7.5"
114 x 162 mm
162 x 229 mm
110 x 220 mm
8K
16K SEF
16K LEF
Custom
Com10 Env.
Monarch Env.
C6 Env.
C5 Env.
DL Env.
Internal Tray
(Face Down)
External Tray
(Face Up)
2-tray
Finisher
Booklet
Finisher
Duplex
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y*
N
N
N
Y
Y*
Y*
N
Y
Y
Y*
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Remarks:
Y
N
Y*
Supported
Not supported
Stack only (Booklet not supported)
B147/B149/B190
7-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Size (width x length)
[mm]
A3 (297 x 420) L
B4 (257 x 364) L
A4 (210 x 297) L
A4 (297 x 210) S
B5 (182 x 257) L
B5 (257 x 182) S
A5 (148 x 210) L
A5 (210 x 148) S
B6 (128 x 182) L
B6 (182 x 128) S
11" x 17" (DLT)
11" x 15"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (LG)
8.5" x 13" (F4)
8.25" x 13"
8" x 13"(F)
8.5" x 11" (LT)
11" x 8.5" (LT)
8" x 10.5"
8" x 10"
5.5" x 8.5" (HLT)
8.5" x 5.5" (HLT)
8K (267 x 390)
16K L (195 x 267)
16K S (267 x 195)
7.25" x 10.5"
(Executive)
10.5" x 7.25"
(Executive)
Platen
ARDF
Inches
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No*
No
No
No
No
Metric
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Inches
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes**
Yes**
Yes
Yes**
Yes**
No
No
Yes**
Yes**
No
Yes**
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Metric
Yes
Yes
Yes**
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes**
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes**
Yes**
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes**
No
**: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.
SM
7-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Specifications
*: When the message Cannot detect original size appears, use SP4-303 to
detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer allows you to select which components to install.
3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

Printer
Language
PCL 5c
PS3
RPCS
Windows
95/98/ME
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
NT4.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
2000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
XP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows
2003
Yes
Yes
Yes
Macintosh
No
Yes
No
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is
provided with the driver.
3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 8.6 or later versions.
3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE

Software
Agfa Font Manager 2000
(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,
NT4)
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,
NT4)
SmartNetMonitor for Client
(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,
NT4)
Printer Utility for Mac

(Mac)
IEEE1394 Utility
(Win2000)
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
(Win95/98/ME, 2000/XP,
NT4)
LAN-Fax Driver
B147/B149/B190
Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.
A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB

setup utilities are also available.
A printer management utility for client users.
A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP
network.
A peer to peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This
provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.
This software provides several convenient functions for printing
from Macintosh clients.
This utility solves problems with Windows 2000.
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal document
management software and can manage both image data
converted from paper documents and application files saved in
each clients PC.
This software enables you to fax documents directly form your
PC. Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be
installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)
7-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SCANNER
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.
Scanner Drivers
Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003
Specifications
Scanner Utilities
Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP
Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003
SM
7-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
[A]
[I]
[B]
[C]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[E]
B146V902.WMF
[F]
Item
Machine
Code
Remarks
Copier
B146
Platen cover
G329
ARDF
B597
Booklet finisher
B602
Punch unit (for B602)
B647
Two-tray finisher
B599
Punch unit (for B599)
B377
Multi-Bin output tray
G306
One-tray paper feed unit
B601
Two-tray paper feed unit
B598
LCT
B600
B147/B149/B190
One from the two

One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one
from [D], [E], and [F]
Requires [I]
One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one

from [D], [E], and [F]
Requires [G]
One from [G], [H], and [I]
One from the three
7-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[J]
[I]
[F]
[G]
[H]
B146V903.WMF
[K]
IEEE 1284
Machine
Code
Remarks
Standard
Ethernet
B594
Distributed with the optional printer/scanner

for the Asia model
IEEE 1394
B581
USB 2.0
B596
Wireless LAN
B582
Bluetooth
G377
File Format Converter
B609
Printer/Scanner
B612
Standard for the Europe and North America

models; Optional for other models
Hard Disk Drive
Standard
256 MB DIMM
G332
Distributed with the optional printer/scanner

for the Asia model
PostScript 3
G369
SM
One from the four
7-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Specifications
Item
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
5.1 ARDF
Paper Size/Weight:
Simplex
Duplex
Size
Weight
Size
Weight
A3 to B6, DLT to HLT

40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)
A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
50 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Table Capacity:
80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Standard
Position:
Rear left corner
Separation:
Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport:
Roller transport
Original Feed Order:
From the top original
Supported Magnification
Ratios:
Copy
Fax
Color
Black & white
50 to 200 %
32.6 to 200 %
48.9 to 200 %
Power Source:
DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption:
60 W or less
Dimensions (W D H):
570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4 x 20.4 x 5.9)
Weight:
12 kg
B147/B149/B190
7-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Paper Feed System:
Paper Height Detection:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Weight
Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)

Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
FRR system
3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)
DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)
50 W
540 x 600 x 172 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 6.8")
18 kg (39.7 lb.)
5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Paper Feed System:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Weight

60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
500 sheets x 2 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
FRR system
3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)
50 W
540 x 600 x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 10.7")
25 kg (55.2 lb.)
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Paper Feed System:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Weight
SM
A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)

60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
2000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
FRR system
5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near End)
50 W
540 x 600 x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 10.7")
25 kg (55.2 lb.)
7-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Specifications
5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT

Print Paper Size:
No punch mode:
A3/11" x 17" to A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
Punch mode:
2 holes: A3/11" x 17" to A4/81/2" x 11" (SEF)
A4/81/2" x 11" to A5 (LEF)
3 holes: A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (North Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Staple mode:
A3/11" x 17" to B5/81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight:
No punch mode:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Punch mode:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 23 lb.)
Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled
Tray Capacity:
Upper tray:
500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5, A5 (LEF)
250 sheets: 11" x 17", A3, 81/2" x 14", B4
Lower tray (default mode stapled output only goes to
tray 2):
2000 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 11" (SEF)
500 sheets: A5 (LEF)
Lower tray (multi-tray staple mode stapled output can
go to either tray):
1500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 11" (SEF)
500 sheets: A5 (LEF)
Staple capacity:
Single size:
50 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5
30 sheets: A3, B4, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
Mixed size:
30 sheets: A4 (LEF) & A3, B5 (LEF) & B4,
81/2" x 11" (LEF) & 11" x 17"
Staple position:
7 positions
1-staple: 4 positions (Top Left, Top Right,
Top Left-Oblique, Top Right-Oblique)
2-staples: 3 positions (Left, Top, Right)
B147/B149/B190
7-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Staple replenishment:
Cartridge (5000 staples)
Power consumption:
48 W
680 x 620 x 1030 mm (26.8" x 24.4" x 40.6")
Weight
Without punch unit:
53 kg (116.9 lb.)
With punch unit:
55 Kg (121.3 lb.)
5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER

Paper Size:
A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT
Booklet Paper Size:
A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF
Paper Weight:
Stack/Sort mode:
60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb.)
Booklet mode:
64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 21 lb.)
Tray Capacity:
1,000 sheets:
500 sheets:
Booklet Tray Capacity:
2 to 5 sheets/booklet: 20
6 to 10 sheets/booklet: 10
Staple capacity:
30 sheets
Booklet capacity:
10 sheets
Staple position:
3 positions (excluding booklet mode)

1-staple: 2 positions (Top right, Top left)
2-staples: 1 positions (Left)
Staple replenishment:
Cartridge (5000 staples)
Specifications
A4, LT, B5
A3, B4, DLT, LG
SM
7-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Number of Bins
Paper Size

Paper Weight
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Stack Capacity
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Tray 1:
100 sheets
Tray 2:
100 sheets (A4/smaller than 81/2" x 11")

250 sheets (B4/81/2" x 14")
B147/B149/B190
7-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ARDF B597
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................................................................................ 2
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER...................................................................... 2
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT ................................................................................ 3
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/ REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH
SENSORS ........................................................................................................... 4
1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS .................................................................. 5
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER ............................................................................... 5
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS ...................................................... 6
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR/PICK-UP HP
SENSOR ............................................................................................................. 6
1.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR ..................................... 7
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH ....................... 8
1.12 EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................................... 9
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID.................................................................................... 9
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................. 9
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................10
2.1 TIMING CHARTS ....................................................................................... 10
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE ............................... 10
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE .............................. 11
2.2 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................13
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 13
3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 13
3.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................... 13
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..........................................................14

4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS ................................................................................ 14
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................... 16
4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM ......................................................................... 16
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ........................................................ 18
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM ............................................................ 19
4.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ........................................................... 19
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION ..................................................... 20
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES ............................. 20
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................... 21
4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS............................................................. 21
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................... 22
4.6 STAMP ....................................................................................................... 23
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597

1.1 COVERS
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
B597R110.WMF
[F]
[E]
B597R111.WMF
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
Front cover ( x 2)
Rear cover ( x 2)
Top cover ( x 1, x 2)
Original tray ( x 1, x 1)
Platen sheet (Velcro pads)
Original exit tray ( x 2). Slide to the right and then pull out.
CAUTION
The hinge of the ARDF is spring-loaded and becomes much lighter with all
the covers removed. After removing all the covers, lay a heavy book on the
front right corner of the ARDF to prevent it from springing up
unexpectedly.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
[A]
Open the top cover.

[A]: Original feed unit
Press it toward you on its shaft to
release and lift out.
B597R101.WMF
1.3 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER

Original feed unit (! 1.2)
[A]: Pick-up roller ( x 1)
[A]
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597R102.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED BELT
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED BELT

[B]
[A]
B597R103.WMF
[C]
[D]
B597R104.WMF
Original feed unit and original pick-up roller (! 1.2, 1.3)

[A]: Shaft ( x 1)
NOTE: Before removing the shaft, note carefully the positioning of the spring
[B]. This must be reset during re-installation.
[C]: Feed belt cover (Timing belt, gear, shaft, springs x 2)
NOTE: Do not lose the springs.
[D]: Original feed belt
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/
REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS
1.5 SKEW CORRECTION/INTERVAL/

REGISTRATION/ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS
[A]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[B]
B597R105.WMF
[D]
B597R106.WMF
Open the top cover.

[A]: Upper original guide ( x 3).
[B]: Skew correction sensor ( x 1)
[C]: Interval sensor ( x 1)
[D]: Registration sensor ( x 1)
[E]: Original width sensor bracket ( x 1, x 4)
[F]: Original width sensors
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS
Raise the original table.

[A]: Lower cover of original tray ( x 4)
[B]: Original length sensor-1 ( x 1)
[C]: Original length sensor-2 ( x 1)
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
1.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

[B]
[C]
[A]
B597R107.WMF
1.7 SEPARATION ROLLER

[A]

[A]: Separation roller cover
[B]: Separation roller ( x 1)
[B]
B597R108.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS
1.8 INVERTER /ORIGINAL SET SENSORS

Rear cover. (! 0)
[A]: Lower the original stopper by rotating
the pick-up motor
[B]: Feed guide plate ( x 4, stepped
screw)
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
NOTE: Raise the original tray before

you re-install the paper feed guide.
Separation roller, torque limiter ( x 1) (!
1.7)
[C]: Bracket ( x 1, x 1)
[D]: Inverter sensor ( x 1)
[E]: Original set sensor ( x 1)
B597R109.WMF
[A]
1.9 PICK-UP MOTOR/ORIGINAL STOPPER HP

SENSOR/PICK-UP HP SENSOR
Rear cover (! 0)
[A]: Pick-up motor ( x 1, x 2, Timing
belt)
[B]: Sensor bracket ( x 2, x 1)
[C]: Pick-up HP sensor
[D]: Original stopper HP sensor
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B597R114.WMF
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
1.10 TRANSPORT MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR
[A]
B597R113.WMF
[C]
[B]
[D]
B597R112.WMF
Rear cover (! 0)
[A]: Pick-up roller assembly ( x 1, x 3, x 3)
[B]: Motor bracket ( x 3, x 2, Timing belt x 2)
[C]: Transport motor ( x 2, Spring x 1)
[D]: Inverter motor ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH
1.11 FEED MOTOR, SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER

CLUTCH
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B597R115.WMF
Rear cover (! 0)
[A]: Motor bracket ( x 5, x 1)
[B]: Feed motor ( x 2)
[C]: Clutch stopper ( x 1)
[D]: Skew correction roller clutch ( x 1)
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.12 EXIT SENSOR
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
EXIT SENSOR
[B]
Open the ARDF.

[A]: Pull the platen sheet off halfway.
[B]: Open the exit guide plate.
[C]: Exit guide plate cover ( x 2)
[D]: Exit sensor ( x 1, x 1)
[A]
[C]
[D]
1.13 STAMP SOLENOID

Rear cover (! 0)
B597R116.WMF
[A]
Open exit guide plate (! 1.12)

[A]: Exit guide plate cover ( x 1)
[B]: Stamp solenoid ( x 1, x 1)
[B]
B597R201.WMF
1.14 CONTROLLER BOARD

Rear cover (! 0)
[A]: Controller board ( x 4, all )
[A]
B597R202.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TIMING CHARTS
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 TIMING CHARTS
2.1.1 A4(S)/LT(S) SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE
0
500
500
1000
1500
2000
500
1000
1500
2000 (ms)
RXD
TXD
Original Set Sensor
ON
OFF
Pick-up Motor
CCW
OFF
CW
Original Stopper H.P Sn.
ON
OFF
Original Pick-up H.P Sn.
ON
OFF
Feed Motor
CCW
OFF
CW
1600 pps
1600 pps
1600 pps
3979 pps
Feed Clutch
ON
OFF
Skew Correction Sn.
ON
OFF
Interval Sn.
ON
OFF
Registration Sn.
ON
OFF
Transport Motor
CCW
OFF
DF Gate
OFF
ON
Exit Sn.
ON
OFF
Inverter Motor
ON
OFF
6800 pps
4385 pps
3433 pps
8268 pps
JAM6
JAM7
JAM5
JAM4
JAM3
JAM2
JAM1
B597T900.WMF
B597
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TIMING CHARTS
500
500 1000 1500
2000 2500 3000 3500
500 1000 1500
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
2.1.2 A4(S)/LT(S) DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE

2000 2500
RXD
TXD
Original Set Sensor
ON
OFF
CCW 1600 pps

OFF
CW 1600 pps
ON
Original Stopper H.P Sn.
OFF
Pick-up Motor
Original Pick-up H.P Sn.
ON
OFF
Feed Motor
CCW
OFF
CW
Feed Clutch
ON
OFF
Skew Correction Sn.
ON
OFF
Interval Sn.
ON
OFF
Registration Sn.
ON
OFF
Transport Motor
CCW
OFF
OFF
ON
DF Gate
Exit Sn.
ON
OFF
Inverter Motor
CCW
OFF
CW
Inverter Sol.
ON
OFF
Inverter Sn.
ON
OFF
1600 pps
6800 pps
3979 pps
4385 pps
3433 pps
8268 pps
2322 pps
73 mm
5138 pps
73 mm
JAM9
JAM8
B597T901.WMF
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JAM DETECTION
2.2 JAM DETECTION

1
B597T905.WMF
1. Registration sensor
4. Inverter sensor
2. Interval sensor
5. Exit sensor
3. Skew correction sensor
6. Scanning position
Jam Site
Original stopper HP
sensor (Jam 1)
Pick-up HP sensor
(Jam 2)
Skew correction
sensor jam (Jam 3)
Transport jam
(Jam 4)
Registration sensor
(Jam 5)
Exit jam (Jam 6)
Exit jam (Jam 7)
Inverter sensor jam
(Jam 8)
Interval sensor jam
(Jam 9)
B597
Cause
Original stopper home position could not be detected within 1000 ms
after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating counterclockwise.
Pick-up roller home position could not be detected within 1000 ms
after the pick-up motor switched on and started rotating clockwise.
The skew correction sensor does not turn on after the feed motor
has fed the original 185 mm.
The interval sensor does not turn on after the feed motor has fed the
original 141 mm.
The registration sensor does not turn on after the interval sensor
turned on and the original has been fed 117 mm.
The exit sensor does not turn on after the transport motor has fed
the original 124 mm.
The exit sensor does not turn off after the exit sensor turned on and
the original has been fed 294 mm.
The inverter sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed
The interval sensor does not turn on after the inverter motor has fed
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DPS101
2 3
0 0
0 0
0 1
0 1
1 0
1 0
1 1
1 1
0 0
0 0
0 1
0 1
1 0
1 0
1 1
1 1
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Description
Normal operating mode, with/without stamp.
Not used
Not used
Not used
Feed motor rotation (pull-out mode) 6800 pps (1-2 phase)
Feed motor rotation (feed mode) 4385 pps (1-2 phase)
Transport motor rotation 8268 pps (2W1-2 phase)
Inverter motor rotation 7720 pps (1-2 phase)
Free run: one-sided original 100% (color mode)
Free run: one-sided original 100% (b/w mode)
Free run: two-sided original 100% (color mode)
Free run: two-sided original 100% (b/w mode)
Free run: one-sided (fax mode) 48% (b/w mode)
Free run: one-sided (mixed original size mode) 100% (color mode)
3.2 TEST POINTS

No.
TP100
TP101
TP103
TP104
Label
(GND)
(Vcc)
(TXD)
(RXD)
Monitored Signal
Ground
+5V
TXD to the copier
RXD from the copier
3.3 FUSES
No.
FU101
SM
Function
Protects the 24 V line.
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MAIN COMPONENTS
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 MAIN COMPONENTS
15
16
17
18
14
13
12
11
10
B597D103.WMF
1 Pick-up roller
10 Exit sensor
2 Original tray
11 Idle roller 3
3 Original length sensor 1
12 Idle roller 2
4 Original length sensor 2
13 Transport roller
5 Reverse table
14 Registration sensor
6 Inverter roller
15 Idle roller 1
7 Junction gate
16 Original width sensor
8 Separation roller
17 Skew correction roller
9 Exit roller
18 Feed belt
Pick-up Mechanism: Picks up the originals for scanning.

Feed/Separation Mechanism: Comprised of the feed belt and separation roller,
feeds and separates the originals, and corrects skew.
Original Size Detection Sensors: Comprised of 4 width sensors and 2 length
sensors, detect the sizes of the originals.
Original Transport Mechanism: Comprised of the transport roller, ADF exposure
glass, and exit roller.
Original Reverse/Exit Mechanism: Exit/junction gate.
B597
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
11
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
3
4
5
10
9
8
7
B597D102.WMF
1 Feed motor
7 Inverter roller
2 Feed belt
8 Exit roller
3 Pick-up roller
9 Separation roller
4 Pick-up motor
10 Transport roller
5 Transport motor
11 Skew correction roller
6 Inverter motor
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

4.3.1 BASIC MECHANISM
"
&
[B] B5
[C] LG
[A]
B597D110.WMF
The original size is detected by four original width sensors [A] and two original
length sensors, [B] and [C].
The machine determines the original width when the leading edge of the original
activates the registration sensor.
The ARDF detects the original size by combining the readings of the four width
sensors and two length sensors, as shown in the table on the next page.
B597
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Size (Width x Length)
Width Sensor
Length Sensor
B5
LG
&
"
A3 L* (297 x 420 mm)

B4 L (257 x 364 mm)
A4 L (210 x 297 mm)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON
-
ON
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
A4 S*2 (297 x 210 mm)

B5 L (182 x 257 mm)
B5 S (257 x 182 mm)
A5 L (148 x 210 mm)
A5 S (210 x 148 mm)
B6 L (128 x 182 mm)
B6 S (182 x 128 mm)
DLT L (11" x 17")
11" x 15" L
10" x 14" L
LG L (81/2" x 14")
F4 L (81/2" x 13")
F L (8" x 13")
LT L (8.5" x 11")
LT S (11" x 8.5")
71/4" x 101/2" L
101/2" x 71/4" S
8" x 10" L
HLT L 51/2" x 81/2"
HLT S 81/2" x 51/2"
267 x 390 mm
195 x 267 mm
267 x 195 mm
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
*1 L: Lengthways
*2 S: Sideways
ON: Paper present
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.3.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size
mode.
Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original
document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but
the document length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed
is slightly slower.
Document length detection
From when the registration sensor switches on until the interval sensor switches
off, the CPU counts the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines
the length of the original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the
image cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the
document length has been accurately detected. The length must be determined
before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
An original follows this path during transport:

1. Document length detection ! Scanning glass ! Inverter table
2. Inverter table ! Scanning glass ! Inverter table (restores original order)
3. Inverter table ! Scanning glass (image scanned) ! Exit tray
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the rate of
reduction/enlargement has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In
order to store the scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected document
width x 432 mm) is prepared. Next, only the portion of the image up to the detected
document length is read from memory and printed.
B597
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
4.4 ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM

4.4.1 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
[G]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
B597D109.WMF
[I]
[H]
B597D505.WMF
When the original is put on the original table, it contacts the original stopper [A] and
pushes the actuator [B] out of the original set sensor [C].
When Start is pressed, the pick-up motor [D] turns on and the original stopper
cam [E] rotates. The original stopper lowers and releases the original.
Next, the pick-up roller cam [F] lowers the pick-up roller, and then the feed motor
[G (at this location but not shown in the drawing)] turns on to feed the top sheet of
paper. After being fed from the pick-up roller, the top sheet is separated from the
stack by the separation roller [H] and the feed belt [I].
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL FEED-IN MECHANISM
4.4.2 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION

[B]
[A]
[C]
B597D202.WMF
This mechanism is the same as the skew correction used by the registration roller
in the main machine.
The feed motor and the skew correction clutch control the skew correction roller.
Immediately after separation, the skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading
edge of the original. The feed belt [B] moves the paper slightly until it presses
against the skew correction roller [C] and buckles slightly to correct any skew.
4.4.3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES

[A]
B597D303.WMF
After performing skew correction, the feed motor runs at a speed higher than its
original speed in order for the next original to catch up to the one ahead of it. This
reduces the gap between the leading edge of the next original with the trailing edge
of the one ahead.
When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [A], the feed
motor slows to match the speed of paper transport.
B597
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
4.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

4.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
[C]
[A]
[B]
B597D104.WMF
The transport motor drives the transport roller [A] and the exit roller [B]. When the
leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor [C], the transport motor
rotates the transport roller. The transport roller then feeds the original through
scanning area. After scanning, the original is fed out by the exit roller to the exit
tray.
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
4.5.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
[B]
Shortly after the transport motor has been

turned on, the inverter solenoid is
activated and junction gate [A] opens. The
original is then scanned and transported
towards the reverse table [B].
[A]
B597D105.WMF
[E]
Shortly after the original exit sensor [C]

detects the trailing edge of the original, the
inverter solenoid turns off and the junction
gate [D] closes.
Next, the inverter motor turns on and the
inverter roller [E] starts rotating to feed the
original from the reverse table.
[C]
[D]
B597D107.WMF
Then the original is fed to the transport roller

and the scanning area [F] (where the
reverse side is scanned).
[F]
After scanning the reverse side of the original,
the original is then sent to the reverse table
[G] a second time and turned over. This
ensures that the double-sided original will be
properly stacked in the correct order, front
side down, in the original exit tray [H].
B597D106.WMF
[G]
[H]
B597D108.WMF
B597
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAMP
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder B597
4.6 STAMP
[C]
[A]
[B]
B597D201.WMF
NOTE: This function is only for fax mode.

The stamp [A] is located between the transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C].
When the original reaches the stamp, the transport motor stops and the stamp
solenoid turns on if the page is sent successfully (immediate transmission) or
stored successfully (memory transmission). After stamping, the ARDF feed motor
re-starts to feed out the document.
NOTE: The position of the stamp can be adjusted with the Stamp Position
Adjustment SP mode.
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B597
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6

2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 8
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVER REPLACEMENT

1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[A]
B601R102.WMF
One-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit
B601
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[B]
[A]
[C]
B601R101.WMF
1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
[B]
[A]
B601R103.WMF
1. Rear cover (! 1.1)

One-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit
B601
3. Main board [B] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
[A]
B601R104.WMF
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

2. Bracket [B] ( x 1)
3. Bushing
[B]
4. Paper feed clutch [C]
[C]
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601R105.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B601R106.WMF
1. Right cover [A]
One-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit
B601
2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2, x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
3
4
B601D001.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B601
Pick-up Roller
Paper Feed Roller
Relay Roller
Separation Roller
Tray
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
5
6
7
8
9
10
7
11
14
12
13
B601D101.WMF
8. Lift Sensor
9. Paper Feed Clutch
10. Vertical Guide Switch
11. Tray Lift Motor
12. Relay Sensor
13. Paper Height 2 Sensor
14. Paper Height 1 Sensor
Paper Size Switch 1

Paper Size Switch 2
Paper Size Switch 3
Paper Size Switch 4
Main Board
Paper Feed Motor
Paper End Sensor
One-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit
B601
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
2
5
3
4
B601D102.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B601
Paper Feed Motor

Paper Feed Clutch
Paper Feed Roller
Separation Roller
Pick-up Roller
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6

2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 8
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVER REPLACEMENT
Two-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit B598
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[A]
B598R102.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[B]
[A]
[C]
B598R101.WMF
1. Paper tray
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
Two-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit B598
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
[B]
[A]
B598R103.WMF

3. Main board [B] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT MOTORS
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS

[A]
2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
B598R104.WMF
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

[A]

2. Paper feed clutches [A] ( x 1, 1
bracket, 1 bushing)
B598R105.WMF
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
Two-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit B598
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
[A]
B598R107.WMF
[B]
B598R108.WMF
1. Vertical transport cover [A] (1 hook)

2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2, x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1 OVERVIEW
1
10
3
4
9
5
6
7
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B598
B598D001.WMF
6. Lower Paper Feed Roller

7. Lower Separation Roller
8. Lower Pick-up Roller
9. Lower Tray
10. Upper Tray
Upper Pick-up Roller

Upper Paper Feed Roller
Upper Relay Roller
Upper Separation Roller
Lower Relay Roller
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Two-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit B598
9
10
11
25
12
13
24
14
23
15
22
16
21
17
20
19
18
B598D101.WMF

15. Lower Lift Sensor
16. Lower Tray Lift Motor
17. Lower Paper End Sensor
18. Lower Relay Sensor
19. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor
20. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor
21. Upper Relay Sensor
22. Paper Size Switch 4

5. Main Board
6. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor
7. Paper Feed Motor
8. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor
9. Upper Lift Sensor
10. Upper Paper Feed Clutch
11. Upper Paper End Sensor
12. Upper Tray Lift Motor
13. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1
11
2
10
9
8
3
7
4
5
B598D102.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B598
7. Lower Pick-up Roller

8. Upper Separation Roller
9. Upper Relay Roller
10. Upper Paper Feed Roller
11. Upper Pick-up Roller
Tray Motor
Upper Paper Feed Clutch
Lower Paper Feed Clutch
Lower Relay Roller
Lower Separation Roller
Lower Paper Feed Roller
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME.................................... 1
1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ........................................................................ 1
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE.......................................................... 2
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ............................................................ 3
1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH.................................. 5
1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 6
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT...................................................................................... 7
1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS ......... 8
1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER ...................................... 9
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 10

2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 10
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................ 10
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................. 11
2.2 PAPER FEED............................................................................................. 12
2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE .................... 13
2.4 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 14
2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION................................................................... 15
2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM............................................. 16
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION................................................... 17
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME
1. To draw the tray out, press the
stopper [A] on the guide rail.
[A]
B600R101.WMF
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
2. To install the tray, set the tray on the

guide rails, keep the tray level, and
push the tray in.
1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR

1. Pull out the large capacity tray.
[C]
2. Left tray rear side fence [A] ( x 2)

3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 1)
4. Connector of the rear fence HP
sensor [C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
5. Rear fence HP sensor [D] ( x 1)
B600R102.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE

[A]
[B]
A4
A4
Lt
Lt
B600R103.WMF
1. Screws [A] [B]

2. Change the position of the side fences.
3. Change the position of the rear fence HP sensor (! 1.2).
4. Before securing the right tray side fence, load the paper in the right tray, and
adjust the fence.
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

[B]
[A]
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[C]
B600R104.WMF
1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Left tray side fence [A] ( x 2)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x1)
4. Left tray paper end sensor [C] ( x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR
[A]
B600R105.WMF
[B]
B600R106.WMF

2. Tray lift motor [B] ( x 3, x 1)
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
[C]
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[A]
[B]
B600R107.WMF

2. Tray motor [A] ( x 6, x 1)
4. Stack transport clutch [C] ( x 2, 2 bushings, 1 gear)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED CLUTCH
1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH
[B]
[A]
B600R108.WMF

2. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Bushing
4. Paper feed clutch [B]
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[A]
[C]
[B]
B600R109.WMF
1. Stack transport clutch (! 1.6)

2. Paper feed clutch (! 1.7)
3. Paper feed unit cable [A]
4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [B].
5. Paper feed unit [C] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS
1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND

RELAY SENSORS
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B600R111.WMF
1.
Paper feed unit (! 1.8)
2. Sensors
Upper limit [A]
Relay [B] ( x 1, 1 bracket)
Right tray paper end [C]
NOTE: To remove the upper limit [A] or paper end sensor[C], press the lever [D]
and hold it down.
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER
1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[C]
[A]
[B]
B600R110.WMF
1. Paper tray unit

3. Separation roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Feed roller [C] ( x 1)
NOTE: If the rollers are incorrectly installed, the one-way clutch does not work.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW

2.1 OVERVIEW
10
11
B600D001.WMF
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B600
12
Paper Height Sensors 5

Pick-up Roller
Upper Limit Sensor
Paper Feed Roller
Relay Sensor
8. Relay Roller
9. Separation Roller
10. Paper Height Sensors 2
12. Lower Limit Sensor
13. Left Paper End Sensor
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
9
10
11
12
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
13
14
15
16
17
B600D101.WMF
20
19
1. End Fence Home Position Sensor

2. Left Tray Paper End Sensor
3. Paper Height Sensor 4
5. Paper Size Sensor
6. Main Board
7. Side Fence Open/Closed Sensor
8. Tray Sensor
9. Tray Motor
SM
18
11. Upper Limit Sensor

12. Paper Feed Clutch
14. Right Tray Paper End Sensor
17. Lower Limit Sensor
18. Tray Lift Motor
19. Relay Sensor
20. Stack Transport Clutch
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.2 PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[C]
B600D102.WMF
This product uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.

The paper feed unit consists of the pick-up roller [A], paper feed roller [B],
separation roller [C], and relay roller.
There is a torque limiter (ferrite powder type) in the back of the separation roller.
B600
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER

RELEASE
[C]
[E]
B600D107.WMF
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[A]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[D]
B600D108.WMF
To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
separation and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pick-up roller to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and
the separation roller to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT
2.4 TRAY LIFT

[F]
[E]
[G]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B600D103.WMF
[B]
When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray sensor on the back face
turns on and the tray lift motor [A] starts. The base plate lift shaft [B] is coupled to
the lift motor at shaft [C], so the base plate of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pick-up roller and lifts it up.
When this occurs, the actuator enters the upper limit sensor, the sensor turns off
and the lift motor stops. When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is
gradually lowered, and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor (turning the
sensor on). When this happens, the lift motor begins turning again. The tray will
then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor (turning the sensor off
again).
When the tray is removed from the printer, the coupling between the lift motor and
base plate lift shaft is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free fall
(using a damper [D] to slow the fall and prevent damage).
B600
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NEAR END/END DETECTION
2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION

This tray holds two stacks of paper, so the machine needs to monitor the status of
both these stacks. There are seven sensors to do this.
There are also two height sensors ([F] in the diagram on the previous page) and an
end sensor in the left tray (paper storage side) ([G] in the diagram on the previous
page). When there is no paper in both trays, paper end is detected.
The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensor
outputs, as shown in the following table.
Amount of paper
100%
Right Tray Paper End Sensor
Left Tray Paper End Sensor
"
"
"
$
"
"
"
75%
"
"
"
$
"
$
"
50%
"
"
$
$
"
"
"
"
"
"
$
$
$
"
"
"
"
$
$
$
$
"
$
$
"
"
"
$
"
"
"
"
"
$
$
"
$
"
"
$
$
"
$
"
Amount of paper
25%
Right Tray Paper End Sensor
Left Tray Paper End Sensor
$
"
$
"
"
"
$
$
$
$
"
"
$
$
$
$
"
Near-end
"
"
$
$
$
$
$
"
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
"
$
$
$
$
End
"
$
$
$
Right tray paper end sensor: " = Low (no paper), $ = High (paper present)
Other sensors: " = Low (paper present), $ = High (no paper)
The following diagram is the sensor layout, as viewed from the front.
Paper Storage Side
Paper Feed Side
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 5
Paper Height
Sensor 4
Paper End
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor2
Paper Height
Sensor 3
Paper End
Sensor 2
B600D112.WMF
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
In the right tray (paper feed side), three height sensors ([E] in the diagram on the
previous page) measure the height of the stack, and an end sensor detects when
all the paper is used up. As the amount of paper remaining in the tray decreases,
the base plate rises and the actuator activates the paper height sensors. When
paper runs out in the right tray, the stack in the left tray is moved across to the right
tray.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM
2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM

[E]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B600D104.WMF
When the paper in the right tray is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transport
clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the left
tray to the right tray.
While the stack is being moved, it pushes the side fence aside, and the side fence
open/closed sensor [D] detects that the fence is open.
After the stack has been moved across, a spring in the side fence moves the side
fence back, and the sensor detects that the fence is closed. Then, the tray motor
reverses until end fence home position sensor [E] is deactivated.
B600
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION

[A]
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[B]
[C]
B600D106.WMF
[E]
[D]
B600D111.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] and
causes the actuator to enter the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops and
the actuator leaves the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper in
the tray.
When the tray is being pulled out, the lever [E] lifts the pick-up roller and this also
lifts up the feeler.
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TWO-TRAY FINISHER
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... 1
1.1.2 INNER COVER.................................................................................... 1
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 2
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 2
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR ................. 3
1.5 STAPLER TRAY........................................................................................... 3
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ....... 4
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 5
1.8 LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 5
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................... 7
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS......................................................... 8
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR........................................................ 8
1.12 STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................................... 8
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR.......................................................... 9
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR ..................................................................................... 9
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS .............................................................................. 9
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR............. 10
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................. 10
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH........................................................ 10
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD ......................................................................... 11
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ............................................... 11
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 12
2.1 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12
3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 13
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS............................................................................ 13
3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 13
3.3 FUSES........................................................................................................ 13
. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 14

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 14

DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
TRAY SHIFTING ........................................................................................ 17
4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS............................................................. 17
Tray 1 (Upper Tray) ............................................................................... 17
Tray 2 (Lower Tray) ............................................................................... 18
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS .............................................................. 19
4.5.1 TRAY 1 .............................................................................................. 19
Introduction ............................................................................................ 19
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Normal and sort/stack modes ................................................................ 19
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 20
Tray 1 release mechanism..................................................................... 21
4.5.2 TRAY 2 .............................................................................................. 22
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ............................................................... 23
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 24
Vertical Paper Alignment .......................................................................24
Horizontal Paper Alignment ...................................................................24
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ............................................................................ 25
4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 25
Stapler Rotation ..................................................................................... 25
Side-to-Side Movement .........................................................................25
4.7.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 26
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT ......................................................... 27
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 28
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................... 28
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ........................................................ 29
B599
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS

1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS
[A]
1. Top cover [A] ( x 4)

NOTE: If the shift tray below is
blocking the screw hole,
remove the shift tray.
[D]
[B]
[C]
3. Front door [C]

4. Rear cover [D] ( x 4)
[E]
B599R151.WMF
1.1.2 INNER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL
COVERS)
2. Inner cover [A] ( x 3, tabs [B] x 3)
[A]
[B]
B599R102.WMF
[B]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
5. Right cover [E] ( x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
POSITIONING ROLLER
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

1. Open the front door.
2. Positioning roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Belt [B]
[B]
[A]
B599R103.WMF
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR
[B]
1. Top cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS)
[C]
[A]
2. Open transport door [A]

3. Bracket [B] ( x 1, ( x 1)
4. Tray 1 exit sensor [C]
B599R104.WMF
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE

SENSOR
1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
[B]
2. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1)

3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] ( x
1, x 1)
[A]
4. Stapler tray entrance sensor [D]

[C]
B599R105.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[D]
1.5 STAPLER TRAY
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B599R106.WMF
B599R107.WMF
1. External covers, front door, inner cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS, 1.1.2
INNER COVER)
2. Two clamps [A]
3. Harnesses [B] ( x 8)
4. Stapler tray [C] ( x 2 [D], x 2 [E])
NOTE: At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER

LIMIT SWITCH
[B]
[D]
B599R201.WMF
[A]
[F]
[C]
[E]
[G]
B599R109.WMF
[H]
B599R110.WMF
1. External covers (! 1.1.1)

2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
3. Place one hand under tray 1 (the upper tray), press in on the gear [B] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
4. Tray 1 back fence [C] ( x 4)
5. Sensor stay [D] ( x 2, ( x 4)
6. Plastic bracket [E] ( x 1)
7. Stack height sensors [F]
8. Metal bracket [G] ( x 1)
9. Upper limit switch [H]
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

1. Tray 1 back fence (! 1.6)
2. Exit guide plate motor [A] ( x2,
x1)
NOTE: Disengage the shaft of the exit
guide plate motor from the
ring.
B599R111.WMF
1.8 LIFT MOTORS
[A]
1. Top cover and rear cover (! 1.1.1)

2. Tray 1 back fence [A] (! 1.6)
3. Sensor stay [B] ( x 4)
[B]
B599R203.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LIFT MOTORS
4. Motor bracket [C] ( x 3, x 2)
[C]
B599R204.WMF
5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] ( x 2, drive belt)

6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] ( x 2, drive belt)
[D]
[E]
B599R205.WMF
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LOWER EXIT SENSOR
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR

1. Front door, external and internal
covers. (! 1.1)
2. Exit guide plate motor (! 1.7)
3. Guide plate [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Pull the shaft toward you
through the round hole.
[A]
B599R112.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
4. Guide plate exit assembly [B] ( x 1,

x 1)
[B]
5. Anti-static brush [C] ( x 2)
B599R113.WMF
[C]
6. Bracket guide exit [D] ( x 2)

7. Lower exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1)
[E]
[D]
B599R114.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

[B]
1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
[C]
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
[A]
4. Feeler [C]
5. Lower stack height sensors [D]
[D]
B599R116.WMF
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR

1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
3. Tray 2 shunt position sensor [B] ( x
1)
[B]
[A]
B599R202.WMF
1.12 STAPLER UNIT

1. Open the front door
[A]
2. Stapler unit [A] ( x 1, x 2)

NOTE: Hold the stapler holder [B] with
one hand as you remove the
stapler. Do not twist or rotate
the stapler bracket as you
remove it.
[B]
B599R117.WMF
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

1. Stapler unit (! 1.12)
[D]
2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder [A].
[C]
3. Stapler cover [B] ( x 1)

4. Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1)
5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D]
[B]
[A]
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR
B599R118.WMF
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS

[A]
1. Tray 1 [A] ( x 1)
3. Front tray cover [C] ( x 1)
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
2. Rear tray cover [B] ( x 1)

[B]
4. Bottom tray cover [D] ( x 2)

[C]
[D]
B599R207.WMF
5. Bottom bracket [E] ( x 3)
[E]
B599R208.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY 1 INTERIOR
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR

[B]
1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Gear disk [A] ( x 1)
3. Tray shift sensors [B] ( x 1 each).
4. Tray release sensor [C] ( x 1)
[B]
[C]
[A]
B599R210.WMF
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)
2. Motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)
3. Tray 1 shift motor [B] ( x 3, belt x 1)
[A]
[B]
B599R209.WMF
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)
2. Back fence lock clutch [A] ( x 1, x
1)
B599R211.WMF
[A]
B599
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FINISHER MAIN BOARD
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Main PCB [A] ( x 6, All )
B599R206.WMF
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use the
appropriate SP mode.
To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with the
punch unit.
1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3, x 5)
3. Spacers [B]
The punch position can be adjusted
by up to 4 mm using combinations
of the 3 spacers provided with the
finisher.
[B]
[A]
B599R119.WMF
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Shift 1
Shift 2
Staple
Jam
Entrance sensor:
no detection
Entrance sensor:
no detection
Upper exit sensor:
no detection
Upper exit sensor:
jam
Lower exit sensor:
no detection
!
!
!
!
!
!
Lower exit sensor:

jam
Stapler tray
entrance sensor:
no detection
Stapler tray
entrance sensor:
jam
Lower tray exit
sensor: no
detection
Content
After the exit sensor in the main machine
went off, the entrance sensor did not switch
on for at least 2 s.
After the entrance sensor switched on, it did
not remain on for at least 150 ms.*1
After the entrance sensor switched on, the
upper exit sensor did not remain on for at
least 59 pulses. *2
After the upper exit sensor switched on, it
did not switch off within 150 ms. *1
After the entrance sensor switched on, the
lower exit sensor did not switch on within 59
pulses. *2
After the lower exit sensor switched on, it did
not switch off within 150 ms. *1
After the entrance sensor switched off, the
stapler tray entrance sensor did not switch
on within 102 pulses.*2
After the stapler tray entrance sensor
switched on, it did not switch off within 59
pulses.*1
After the transport motor switched on, the
lower tray exit sensor did not switch on
within 1260 ms.
*1
: Timing for A4 L (differs according to paper size).
*2
: Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.
B599
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
1
0
1
0
DPS101
2 3
0 0
1 1
0 0
4
0
0
1
Mode
Description
Default.
Free run.
Transportation
No paper.
See the note below.
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
NOTE: The following procedure repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
1) Make sure that the main switch is turned off.
2) Turn on DIP SW101-4 on the main board.
3) Turn on the main switch.
4) After the fisher completes the initialization, turn off DIP SW101-4.
Finisher automatically repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
3.2 TEST POINTS

No.
TP101
TP102
TP103
TP104
Label
GND
5V
RXD
TXD
Monitored Signal
Ground
5V
Received command data
Transmitted command data
3.3 FUSES
No.
FU101
SM
Function
Protects 24 V.
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
GENERAL LAYOUT
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1
8
2
3
7
4
6
5
B599D118.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
Upper junction gate

Punch unit (option)
Stapler junction gate
Pre-stack tray
5.
6.
7.
8.
Stapler
Stapler tray
Tray 2
Tray 1
Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode,
the stack always goes out to the lower exit.
Stapler junction gate: Directs paper either to the lower exit or to the stapler tray.
Pre-stack tray: When stapling multiple prints (A4 LEF, LT LEF, B5 LEF only) in the
staple mode, the first sheet of the second print waits here for the next sheet to feed
while the previous stack is stapled. After the second print is fed, the first and
second sheets are fed together to the pre-stack tray. This delay allows enough time
for the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed.
Shift trays: Tray 1 (upper) and tray 2 (lower) shift side to side in the sort mode,
and raise and lower to receive ejected prints.
Stapler tray jogger: Employs positioning rollers and jogger fences to align stacks
for stapling.
Punch unit: Punches holes in stacked prints.
B599
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

4
2
14
13
12
11
15
16
8
B599D104.WMF
17
18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SM
B599D103.WMF
10. Lower transport motor

11. Pre-stack motor
12. Upper transport motor
13. Punch motor
14. Entrance motor
15. Stack feed-out motor
16. Jogger motor
17. Stapler motor
18. Stapler rotation motor
Tray 1 lift motor

Entrance roller
Tray 2 lift motor
Upper exit roller
Tray 1 shift motor
Exit guide plate motor
Lower exit roller
Tray 2 shift motor
Exit motor
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATES
4.3 JUNCTION GATES

The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations.
In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junction
solenoid [A] is on, and the prints go to the upper exit
(tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode).
[A]
B599D205.WMF
In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gate

solenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] are
off, and prints go to the lower exit.
[A]
[B]
B599D206.WMF
[A]
In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off and

the stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and prints go
to the stapler tray.
[B]
B599
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599D207.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY SHIFTING
4.4 TRAY SHIFTING

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[D]
B599D106.WMF
Tray 1 (Upper Tray)

In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets.
The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position of
tray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].
After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the gear
disk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side.
Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is a
cut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift
sensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops.
The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite
direction until the other shift sensor is activated.
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY SHIFTING
Tray 2 (Lower Tray)
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B599D105.WMF
In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints.
The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when the
tray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from side
to side (not just the tray).
After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters the
tray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints is
delivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previous
position.
B599
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5.1 TRAY 1
[I]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[H]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[F]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[G]
B599D204.WMF
Introduction
The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
Normal and sort/stack modes

When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. To
do this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated.
During printing, if upper stack height sensor 2 [E] is actuated, the tray 1 lift motor
lowers the tray for a specified time.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator [F] will pass through the tray 1
overflow 1 sensor [G]. When the actuator drops below the sensor (to deactivate the
sensor), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the
overflow limit.
The upper limit switch for tray 1 [H] prevents the drive gear from being damaged if
the upper stack height sensor 1 should fail. If the tray is raised to the tray
positioning roller [I], the switch will automatically cut the power to the tray 1 lift
motor.
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Staple Mode
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[F]
[C]
B599D204.WMF
In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only go
to the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paper
exit.
Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1
then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated.
When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out of
the way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F]
detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2).
The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2
sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack height
has exceeded the overflow limit.
B599
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Tray 1 release mechanism
[A]
When tray 1 is selected for staple mode, tray

1 must be moved down to the lower paper
exit. However, to move past the sensors at
the lower exit, the tray must be moved away
from the finisher.
Then, the tray 1 shift motor stops, then the

tray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1.
[D]
[B]
[C]
B599D201.WMF
When the tray 1 lower limit sensor is

activated (as described on the previous
page), the tray has moved past the sensors
at the lower exit. The tray 1 shift motor turns
on again until the gear disk activates the
tray shift sensor [E]. This moves the tray
back against the finisher.
[E]
Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects that

the tray is at the correct height.
B599D202.WMF
When tray 1 is at the lower exit, the tray lock

solenoid [F] is on, and the lever [G] locks the
tray. This prevents the user from moving the
tray out of position (the first tray has some
play when it is at the lower position).
[F]
[I]
Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exit

area, the tray lock solenoid [F] turns off to
unlock the tray. In addition, the back fence
lock clutch [H] turns on to hold the back
fence [I]. This prevents the springs inside
the back fence from suddenly contracting
(these springs normally keep the tray steady
during side-to-side shift).
[G]
[H]
B599D203.WMF
Then, tray 1 is released and it moves up to

the upper exit area.
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
To do this, the tray 1 shift motor turns until

the cut-out in the gear disk enters the tray
release sensor [A]. At this time, the arm [B]
has reached position [C], and is pushing
against the plate [D], in towards the finisher.
However, the plate is fixed, so the tray
moves out away from the finisher.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.5.2 TRAY 2
[H]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
Overflow condition
[D]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[F]
Multi Tray Staple Mode
[C]
Normal Mode
B599D500.WMF
[G]
B599D109.WMF
The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1.
When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when the
tray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see
Normal Mode in the above diagram).
In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machine
detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the
actuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D].
The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and
stops the tray 2 lift motor.
The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.
B599
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
NOTE: This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L.

During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activates
the entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B].
The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the
paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving
the pre-stack tray.
At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the second
sheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by the
pre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge of
the second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then both
sheets are sent to the stapler tray together.
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D200.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[D]
B599D110.WMF
In staple mode, each sheet of print paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when
it arrives in the stapler tray.
Vertical Paper Alignment

After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], the
positioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push the
positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.
The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of
the paper against the stack stopper [D].
Horizontal Paper Alignment

When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor [E] turns on and the jogger fences
[F] move to the waiting position, which is 8 mm wider on both sides than the
selected paper.
When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor, the
jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences 5 mm towards the paper. After a
short time, the jogger motor turns on again for the horizontal paper alignment then
returns to the waiting position.
B599
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT
[D]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
B599D113.WMF
The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the
requirements of the selected stapling mode.
Stapler Rotation
After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit
[B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler moves
from front to rear of the finisher.
When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves to
the stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees
(clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.
Side-to-Side Movement
The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by
the size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the stapler
moves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear stapling
position. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order.
After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position,
determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].
SM
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D112.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.2 STAPLER
[D]
[B]
[C]
B599D208.WMF
[A]
The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.
As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. When
stapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staple
hammer motor then stops.
The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple
cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the stapler
cassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If this
condition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print job
will not stop.
The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling
position. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns on
to transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staple
sheet.
If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam message
to appear on the operation panel.
B599
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT

[A]
[C]
[I]
[B]
[D]
[G]
[E]
[F]
[H]
B599D114.WMF
When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exit
guide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide plate
sensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.
After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E]
on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G].
The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have
started to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stack
feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home
position sensor [H].
When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guide
safety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. This
prevents damage to the users fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the tray
is moving up.
SM
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D115.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is
provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B599D102.WMF
[B]
[H]
[I]
B599D101.WMF
[F]
[G]
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A]. Each sheet is
positioned and punched by pressure from above. A certain time after the trailing
edge of the paper passes through the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor
turns on and the paper stops. Then the punch clutch [C] turns on to make the
punch holes.
The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor [D]. When the cut-out in the
punch shaft disk [E] enters the punch HP sensor, the punch clutch turns off.
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch
holes, the punch hole motor [F] turns on until the disk changes the status of the
punch hole switch [G] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [H]
and the punch cam [I] have moved to one side or the other to change the number
of holes.
B599
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[C]
B599D153.WMF
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.
SM
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOOKLET FINISHER
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1
1.1 REGULAR TRAY.......................................................................................... 1
1.2 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2.1 FRONT COVER................................................................................... 1
1.2.2 REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER ................................. 3
1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER ...................................................................... 5
1.3 SIDE GUIDE................................................................................................. 6
Removal................................................................................................... 6
Reassembly ............................................................................................. 6
1.4 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 7
Removal................................................................................................... 7
Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase.......................................................... 10
1.5 FOLDING UNIT .......................................................................................... 13
Removal................................................................................................. 13
Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase .................................................. 15
1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE ....................................................... 16
1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT........................................................................... 16
1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT ..................................................................... 18
1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT ........................................................................... 20
1.8 TRANSPORT ............................................................................................. 22
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR ...................................................................... 22
1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER ..................................................................... 22
1.9 STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 24
1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER ....................................................... 24
1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE..................................................................... 25
1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER....................................................... 27
Removal................................................................................................. 27
Reassembly ........................................................................................... 29
1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD ..................................................................................... 30
1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................. 30
1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD............................. 30
1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER....................................... 32
1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR..................................... 32
1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR ............................................................... 34
1.11.3 CONTROLLER ................................................................................ 35
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD .............................................................. 35
1.11.5 LED BOARD .................................................................................... 36
1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD ................ 37
1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION............................................. 38
Sensor Voltage ...................................................................................... 38
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Punch Type............................................................................................ 39
EEPROM ............................................................................................... 39
2. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................ 40

2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ........................................................................... 40
Punch Controller Board.......................................................................... 40
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 41
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 41

DRIVE ........................................................................................................ 42
CONTROLLER ........................................................................................... 43
STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 44
3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT.............................................................................. 44
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 44
Stack-Tray Belt ...................................................................................... 44
3.4.2 SORT................................................................................................. 45
3.4.3 STACK............................................................................................... 46
Paddle.................................................................................................... 46
Stack-Tray Stopper ................................................................................ 46
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 47
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 48
Home Position ....................................................................................... 48
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 48
Safety Feature ....................................................................................... 48
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE .............................................................................. 49
Action..................................................................................................... 49
Drive ...................................................................................................... 49
Home Position ....................................................................................... 49
Paper Position ....................................................................................... 50
3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 51
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 51
Stack-Tray Belt Home Position .............................................................. 51
3.5 STAPLING.................................................................................................. 52
3.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 52
3.5.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 53
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 53
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 53
Sensors.................................................................................................. 53
3.5.3 POSITIONING ................................................................................... 54
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 54
Home Position and Ready Position........................................................ 54
Staple Position ....................................................................................... 55
3.6 REGULAR TRAY........................................................................................ 57
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 57
Ready Position....................................................................................... 57
Paper Sensor......................................................................................... 58
B602
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Paper Full .............................................................................................. 58

Fail Safe Feature ................................................................................... 58
3.7 SADDLE STITCH ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.2 STACK TRAY .................................................................................... 60
3.7.3 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 60
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT ....................................................................... 61
3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Mechanism....................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Home Position.................................................................. 62
Folder Rollers Mechanism ..................................................................... 63
Folder Rollers Home Position ................................................................ 63
Shape of Folder Rollers ......................................................................... 64
3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 65
3.8.1 REGISTRATION................................................................................ 65
Slide Unit ............................................................................................... 65
Home Position ....................................................................................... 65
Registration............................................................................................ 65
3.8.2 PUNCH.............................................................................................. 67
Types of Punch Unit............................................................................... 67
Drive ...................................................................................................... 67
Home Position ....................................................................................... 67
Two Holes and Four Holes .................................................................... 68
Two or Three Holes ............................................................................... 69
SM
iii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGULAR TRAY

1.1 REGULAR TRAY
Regular tray [A] ( x 4)
[A]
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R901.WMF
1.2 COVERS
1.2.1 FRONT COVER
[A]
[B]
B602R988.WMF
B602R987.WMF
1. Joint guard [A] ( x 2)

2. Front lower cover [B] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
[A]
3. Open the front door [A].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob
[B].
5. [C] x 2
[C]
[B]
B602R902.WMF
6. Front cover [D]
[D]
B602R903.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
1.2.2 REAR COVER
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B602R905.WMF
B602R904.WMF
Booklet Finisher
B602
Rear cover [A] ( [B] x 2, [C] x 1)

NOTE: One of the screws is under the mylar [D].
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)
2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
[B]
3. Screw (on the right top cover holder) [A]

NOTE: Remove the regular tray [B] if it is
in its upper position.
[A]
B602R907.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
[D]
[A]
[B]
B602R908.WMF
[C]
B602R906.WMF
4. Open the left top cover [A].

5. Fastener [B]
6. Strap [C]
7. Tray upper cover [D] ( x 1, x 1)
8. Right top cover (with the right top cover holder)
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER

2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
3. Left top cover (! 1.2.3)
4. [A] x 1
[A]
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R910.WMF
5. Upper right cover [B]

( [C] x 1, 4 hooks)
[B]
[C]
B602R911.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SIDE GUIDE
1.3 SIDE GUIDE

[C]
Removal
1. Regular tray (! 1.1)
3. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
4. Regular tray holders [A][B]
( x 1 for each)
5. [C] x 4
6. Side-guide fastener [D]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B602R912.WMF
7. Open the side guide [E] and release

the feeler link [F]. (The diagram shows [F]
the view seen from the top.)
8. Side guide
[E]
B602R913.WMF
Reassembly
Place the feeler link [A] between the feeler [B] and
the side guide. After installing the side guide, check
that the feeler link moves with the feeler.
[A]
B602R914.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
1.4 STAPLER UNIT

Removal
CAUTION: Do not remove the stapler [A] [B]
from the stapler unit. The stapler and the
staple holder [B] must be in their original
positions.
[A]
B602R915.WMF
1. Open the front door [C].
[C]
Booklet Finisher
B602
2. Release the lever [D] and pull out the

stapler unit.
[D]
B602R989.WMF
3. Stapler knob [E]

4. Jam-release knob [F] ( x 1)
5. Front cover [G] ( x 3)
[E]
[F]
[G]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602R990.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
6. Gear cover [A] (2 hooks)

7. Side cover [B] ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
B602R918.WMF
8. Gear [C] ( x 1), gear [D] ( x 1), and

timing belt [E]
[E]
9. Spacer (behind gear [C])

10. Gear (behind the spacer)
[C]
11. Belt guide [F]

( x 1, Spring [G] x 1, [H] x 1)
[D]
12. Tension bracket [I]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[F]
B602R919.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
13. Timing belt [A]

14. Gear [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B602R920.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase

If you remove the gears [A][C] and timing belt [B],
you must adjust the phase of the gears when you
reassemble the machine. These gears and the belt
decide when the staple holder sends a staple and
when the stapler bends the staple. The diagram
shows the view seen from the rear.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B602R917.WMF
1. By rotating the timing-belt gear [A],

align the hole in the staple-holder gear
[B] with the hole in the frame [C].
[A]
[C]
[B]
B602R921.WMF
B602
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
2. To fix the gear in position, place a thin

tool [A] such as an Allen key or
screwdriver through the holes.
[A]
B602R922.WMF
[B]
[D]
[C]
B602R923.WMF
4. To fix the gear in position, place a thin

tool [E] such as an Allen key or
screwdriver through the holes.
[E]
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602R924.WMF
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
3. By rotating gear [B], align the hole in cam

[C] with the hole in the frame [D].
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
5. Install the timing belt [A].
[A]
B602R925.WMF
6. Align the blue mark [B] on the gear with

the hole [C] in the frame, and install the
gear.
[C]
NOTE: The stapler is in the home

position when the blue mark and [B]
the hole are aligned.
B602R926.WMF
7. Remove the two thin tools that you

placed earlier to secure the gears in
position.
[D]
8. Install the spring [D], spacer [E], gears

[F][G], and timing belt [H].
[E]
9. Reassemble the whole stapler unit.
[H]
10. Check the operation.

[F]
[G]
B602R927.WMF
B602
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FOLDING UNIT
1.5 FOLDING UNIT

Removal
2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
3. Open the right cover [A].
4. Magnet bracket [B] ( x 2)
5. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)
6. Tension plate [D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B602R991.WMF
7. Rotate the shaft [F] clockwise and lower

the folder plate [E].
[E]
NOTE: You may have to rotate the

shaft about 20 times (7,200).
[F]
B602R929.WMF
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FOLDING UNIT
8. Timing belt [A] ( x 1, 1 spacer)

9. Two connectors [B][C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
B602R930.WMF
10. Stapler unit [D] (! 1.4).

11. Folding unit [E] ( [F] x 3)
[D]
[F]
[E]
B602R931.WMF
B602
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FOLDING UNIT
Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase

If you remove gears from the folding unit, you must adjust the phase of the gears
when you reassemble the folding unit.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
Booklet Finisher
B602
[F]
B602R932.WMF
B602R994.WMF
1. Arrange the folding rollers [A] and cam [B] as shown in the diagram.
2. Install the gears as follows:
Align either of the two " marks [C] on the cam gear with one of the "
marks [D] on the relay gear. The " marks on the relay gear must be at one
o'clock [D] and five o'clock [E] respectively.
Align the other " mark on the relay gear [E] with the protruding plastic tab
(#) on the roller gear [F].
NOTE: When you have correctly installed the gears, the shorter teeth on the relay
gear [D] are at the upper right, and the longer teeth are at the lower left.
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE
1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT
[A]
[B]
[B]
B602R934.WMF
[A]
1. Left top cover, tray upper cover (! 1.2.3)
2. Side guide (! 1.3)
3. [A] x 2
4. [B] x 5, 2 standoffs
5. Release the front lock [D] and the rear
lock [C] on the mechanical link of the
stack-tray stopper.
[C]
[D]
B602R935.WMF
B602
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6. [A] x 3
7. Open the cable fasteners [B].
8. Release the cables [C].
[C]
[A]
B602R936.WMF
9. Timing belt [D] ( x 1, 1 spacer)

10. 2 standoffs [E]
[E]
[D]
[F]
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602R937.WMF
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
11. [A] x 2
12. Slide the stack tray [B] to the rear and
lift it.
[B]
[A]
B602R938.WMF
1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT

CAUTION: Do not damage the jogger fences.
1. Stack tray (!1.6.1)
2. Place the stack tray unit on a level
surface. Check that the fences [A] are in
safe positions.
[A]
B602R939.WMF
B602
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. Timing belt [A]

4. [B] x 2
[A]
B602R940.WMF
5. Jogger fence unit [C]
[C]
B602R941.WMF
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT
1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Stapler unit (! 1.4).
3. Connector holder [A] ( x 1)
4. Release all the cables (on the stapler
motor unit) [B] from the clamps.
5. Release the cables [D] ( x 2 [from
the stapler motor unit or from the
controller])
[D]
[B]
[A]
B602R942.WMF
[E]
6. Cable fastener [E] ( x 2)
B602R944.WMF
7. Release the cables ( x 2)

[F]
B602R945.WMF
B602
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT
8. [A] x 3
B602R946.WMF
9. Stapler motor unit [B] ( [C] x 1)
[C]
B602R947.WMF
[B]
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRANSPORT
1.8 TRANSPORT
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR
[B]
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Cable guide [A] ( x 1)
3. Transport motor (with the timing belt
behind) [B] ( x 1, x 3)
[A]
B602R948.WMF
1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER

2. Upper cover (! 1.2.3)
3. Upper right cover (! 1.2.4)
4. Transport motor (!1.8.1)
5. [A] x 1
6. Bushing [B] ( x 1)
[A]
[B]
B602R949.WMF
B602
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRANSPORT
[A]
7. [A] x 2
[D]
8. Gear [B]
[B]
9. Gear (with the pin behind) [C]

10. Bushing [D] ( x 1)
11. [E] x 1
12. Paper guide [F]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B602R951.WMF
13. Transport roller [G]
[G]
B602R952.WMF
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R950.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
1.9 STACK TRAY

1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER
[B]
1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)

2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise
and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].
[A]
B602R953.WMF
3. Release the stack tray upper roller [C]

from the shaft [D].
[C]
B602R954.WMF
[D]
B602
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
[B]
4. Lift up the stack tray upper roller [A],

and push it down.
[A]
5. In the same manner, remove the

other roller [B].
B602R955.WMF
Booklet Finisher
B602
1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE

[B]
2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise

and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].
[A]
B602R953.WMF
SM
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3. Push the bottom of the guide [A] and

release the rear side of it.
[A]
B602R956.WMF
4. Push the bottom of the guide [B] and

release the front side of it.
[B]
B602R957.WMF
5. Paddle [C]
[C]
B602R958.WMF
B602
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER

Removal
2. Slide the jogger fences (the front
fence [A] to the front, the rear fence
[B] to the rear) and remove them.
[B]
[A]
B602R959.WMF
3. Tray stopper [C] (2 clips)

Booklet Finisher
B602
[C]
B602R960.WMF
[D]
4. Paper guide [F] ( [D] x 1)
[F]
B602R961.WMF
SM
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
5. Paper guide [A] ( [B] x 1)
[B]
[A]
B602R962.WMF
6. Slide the bushing [C] ( x 2).
[C]
B602R963.WMF
[F]
7. Stack tray lower roller unit [E] ( [F] x

4)
[E]
B602R964.WMF
B602
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
[B]
8. Stack tray lower roller [A]

9. Belt [B]
[A]
B602R965.WMF
Reassembly
When reassembling, align the positions of
the belt pawls [A][B].
Booklet Finisher
B602
[A]
[B]
B602R966.WMF
SM
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CIRCUIT BOARD
1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD

1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Controller board [A]
(all 's, x 1, 3 hooks)
NOTE: After replacing the controller
board, remove the NVRAM on
the old board and install it on the
new board.
[A]
B602R967.WMF
1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD

1. Stapler unit (! 1.4)
2. Guide [A] ( x 2)
[A]
B602R969.WMF
B602
30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CIRCUIT BOARD
3. Turn the knob [B] until you see the

screw [C] (on the home position sensor
board) through the opening. The home
position board moves to the front when
you turn the knob clockwise.
[B]
4. [C] x 1
[C]
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R970.WMF
5. Home position board [D]

( x 1, 1 flat cable)
[D]
SM
31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602R971.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR
1. Right top cover (! 1.2.3)
2. Chad box [A]
[A]
B602R993.WMF
3. Release the cables [B] ( x 1).
[B]
B602R973.WMF
B602
32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B602R974.WMF
5. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddle

finisher.
Booklet Finisher
B602
6. Washer [B] ( x 1)
7. Base cover [C] ( x 2, [D] x 2) (The
diagram shows the view seen from the
bottom.)
[B]
[C]
B602R975.WMF
[D]
SM
33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
8. Sensor unit [A] ( x 2, x 3)
B602R976.WMF
9. Punch unit motor [B] ( x 2)
[B]
B602R978.WMF
1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR

[A]
1. Remove the whole punch unit from

the saddle finisher.
2. Registration motor [A]
( x 1, x 2
B602R979.WMF
B602
34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.11.3 CONTROLLER
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Punch unit controller [A] (all 's, x 2)
NOTE: After replacing the punch unit controller,
adjust the sensor voltage and specify the
punch type (! 1.11.7). After replacing
the EEPROM, make the controller
initialize the new EEPROM (! 1.11.7).
[A]
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R980.WMF
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD

1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)
2. Release the cables [A]
[B]
3. Board cover [B] ( x 1)
[A]
B602R981.WMF
SM
35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
4. Photo sensor board [A] ( x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the photo sensor
board, adjust the sensor voltage
(! 1.11.7).
B602R982.WMF
1.11.5 LED BOARD

[A]
1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)
2. LED board [A] ( x 1, x 1)
NOTE: After replacing the LED board,
adjust the sensor voltage (!
1.11.7).
B602R983.WMF
B602
36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD

1. Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)
2. Remove the whole punch unit from the
saddle finisher.
3. Protector [A] ( x 2)
[A]
B602R984.WMF
4. Sensor board [B] ( x 1)

Booklet Finisher
B602
NOTE: After replacing the sensor board,

1.11.7).
[B]
B602R985.WMF
5. LED board [C] ( x 1, x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the LED board,
1.11.7).
[C]
B602R986.WMF
SM
37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
Sensor Voltage
You make the controller adjust the LED
voltage of the sensors after you have
replaced any of the following units and
components:
Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)
Photo sensor board (! 1.11.4)
LED board (! 1.11.5)
Chad box full sensor board (! 1.11.6)
Chad box LED board (! 1.11.6)
B602R995.WMF
[H]
Perform as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = OFF, 3 = ON, 4 = OFF [H].
2. Push SW1002 [C] or SW1003 [D]. The controller starts to adjust
the LED voltage of the sensors.
3. Wait until LED1001 [E], LED1002 [F], and LED1003 [G] light.
This indicates the controller ends the adjustment.
[I]
4. Set the DIP switch as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4 =
OFF.
B602R996.WMF
B602R997.WMF
B602
38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Punch Type
[J]
After you replace the punch-unit controller, specify the punch type
as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = ON [J].
2. Push SW1002 [C] to select a punch type. As you push SW1002,
the three LEDs [E][F][G] change as shown in the table. These
LEDs indicate which punch type you have selected.
Punch Type
2 holes
2 or 3 holes
4 holes*
4 holes**
LED1001
Lights
Lights
LED1002
Lights
Lights
B602R998.WMF
LED1003
Lights
** For the North Europe model

* Four the other models
3. Push SW1003 [D]. The LEDs blink.
Booklet Finisher
B602
[K]
4. Push SW1003 again. The controller stores the punch type in the
EEPROM.
5. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [K].
B602R997.WMF
[L]
EEPROM
After you replace the EEPROM [A], make the controller initialize the
new EEPROM as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch on the punch-unit controller board as follows:
1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = OFF [L].
2. Push SW1002 and SW1003 at the same time. The controller
starts initializing the EEPROM.
B602R999.WMF
3. Wait until LED1001, LED1002, and LED1003 light. This

indicates that the initialization ends.
[M]
4. Adjust the sensor voltage (! Sensor Voltage).

5. Specify the punch type (! Punch Type)
6. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [M].
B602R997.WMF
SM
39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
2. SERVICE TABLES
2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Punch Controller Board
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
SW1001
1
OFF
ON
ON
ON
B602
2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Mode
Default
Sensor voltage adjustment
Punch type setting
EEPROM initialization
40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Description
See 1.11.7.
See 1.11.7.
See 1.11.7.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
GENERAL LAYOUT
3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1
6
7
8
9
20
10
19
18
11
17
Booklet
Finisher
B602
12
13
16
14
15
B602D901.WMF
11. Stack-tray transport roller

12. Folding plate
13. Folder rollers
14. Booklet exit roller
15. Booklet tray
16. Booklet stopper
17. Stapler
18. Stack-tray lower roller
19. Stack-tray belt
20. Stack-tray upper roller
1. Regular tray
2. Jogger fence
3. Exit roller
4. Paddle
5. Stack tray stopper
6. Transport roller
7. Cam*
8. Punch*
9. Punch base*
10. Chad box*
* Installed with the optional punch unit.
SM
41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE
3.2 DRIVE
4
5
8
B602D902.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B602
Paddle motor
Transport motor
Stapler slide motor
Stack-tray exit motor
Stapler/folder motor
6.
7.
8.
9.
Rear fence motor

Front fence motor
Lift motor
Finisher controller
42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CONTROLLER
3.3 CONTROLLER
Finisher
Punch (optional)
Motor
Controller board
Controller
board
Sensor
CPU (IC13)
EEP-ROM (IC12)
Motors
Communication IC
(IC11)
Clutches
EP-ROM (IC6)
Booklet
Finisher
B602
Switches
Regulator IC (IC1)
Sensors
Main unit
Controller board
B602D903.WMF
The finisher controller board communicates with the controllers of the optional
punch unit and the copier or printer. Listed below are the functions of important
ICs:
CPU (IC13): Controls the sequence or the processing.
EEP-ROM (CS12): Stores adjustment settings.
Communication IC (IC11): Contains the program.
EP-ROM (IC6): Communicates with other controllers.
Regulator IC (IC1): Generates 5-volt power source.
SM
43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3.4 STACK TRAY

3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT
Mechanism
The exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray. The rollers and belts on the
stack tray transport the paper to the regular tray. The finisher operates like this
even when it handles one sheet of paper.
[A]
Phase 1: The transport motor drives the

exit roller [A] to transport the paper to the
stack tray.
Phase 2: The paddle motor operates in
reverse to lower the stack-tray upper
roller [B] onto the paper.
Phase 3: The stack-tray exit motor
drives the stack-tray upper roller [B], the
stack-tray lower roller [E], and the stacktray belts [C] to transport the paper to the
regular tray.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B602D904.WMF
Stack-Tray Belt
The stack tray has two stack-tray belts. Each stack-tray belt has a paper support
[D] on its surface. As stack-tray exit motor rotates the stack-tray belts
counterclockwise (viewed from the machine front), the paper supports moves
counterclockwise. While moving, these paper supports transport the paper from the
stack tray to the regular tray.
For the home position of the stack-tray belt, see Stack-Tray Belt Home Position in
section 3.4.5.
B602
44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3.4.2 SORT
The finisher can sort and stack the paper. To do this, it uses the stack tray and the
regular tray.
[B]
Phase 1: The exit roller transports the

paper on the stack tray [A]. The front
fence motor or the rear fence motor drives
the jogger fence [B] to push the paper to
the front or rear. The jogger fence handles
the next paper in the same way, and
pushes the paper in the same direction.
[A]
For the jogger fence mechanism, see

section 3.4.4.
[C]
Paper Size
300 mm and longer
Shorter than 300 mm
Booklet
Finisher
B602
Phase 2: When the number of papers on

the stack tray reaches one of the following
numbers, the stack-tray upper roller, the
stack-tray lower roller, and the stack-tray
belts (! 3.4.1) transport the paper stack
[C] to the regular tray.
Number of Sheets
10
30
[D]
Phase 3: The finisher repeats Phase 1
and Phase 2 until it finishers handling the
first set of paper.
Phase 4: For the next set, the finisher
conducts phases 1 through 3 again. This
time, the other jogger fence pushes the
paper in the opposite direction in phase 1.
[E]
B602D905.WMF
Every time phase 3 ends, the finisher stacks one set of paper on the regular tray.
The diagram shows the paper stack [D] on the regular tray after the finisher stacks
four sets of paper. The arrow [E] indicates the direction of paper travel.
SM
45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3.4.3 STACK
Paddle
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B602D906.WMF
B602D907.WMF
There are four paddles [C] above the stack tray. These paddles push down the
paper [B] to the stack-tray stopper [D]. This aligns the right edges of the paper
(viewed from the machine front). The paddle motor [A] drives these paddles.
Stack-Tray Stopper
The stack-tray stopper [E] remains standing (as shown in the diagram) while the
exit roller is transporting the paper to the stack tray.
Before the stack-tray upper and lower
rollers transport the paper to the stapler
(! 3.5 and 3.7), the stapler slide motor
starts to move the stapler to the machine
front. The stapler pushes the mechanical
link of the stack-tray stopper (! 1.6.1).
This link pulls down the stack-tray
stopper.
[E]
B602D908.WMF
B602
46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism
[A]
[B]
B602D906.WMF
B602D909.WMF
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[C]
B602D910.WMF
The paddle motor [A] drives the stack-tray guide. The stack-tray guide stays away
from the paper (the upper position [B]) under either of the following conditions:
When the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray
When the jogger fences adjust the direction of the paper
The paddle motor drives the stack-tray guide onto the paper (the lower position [C])
under either of the following conditions:
When the stapler operates
When the stack-tray upper roller, stack-tray lower roller, and stack-tray belt
transport the paper
SM
47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

The paddle motor [A] moves the timing
belts [B][G], which drive the cam [D]. The
cam pushes up the first lever [C], which
pushes down the second lever [H]. The
second lever lowers the stack-tray guide
[I].
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[A]
[F]
Home Position
The actuator [F] moves with the cam [D].
The actuator interrupts the home position
sensor [E] while the cam does not push
the first lever [C] (in other words, while the
stack-tray guide is in its upper position).
[G]
[K]
[J]
[H]
Stapler Switch
The second lever [H] moves with the
stapler-switch actuator [J]. When the first
lever pushes the second lever (in other
words, when the stack tray guide is in its
lower position), the actuator pushes the
stapler switch [K], turning it on. The stapler
can operate only when this switch is on.
[I]
Safety Feature
The stapler switch, along with the stackB602D949.WMF
tray guide mechanism, works as a safety
feature. The stapler operates only when the stack-tray guide is in the lower position.
When the stack-tray guide is in this position, the user cannot access the stapler
through the opening between the stack-tray guide and the stack tray. Therefore,
staples do not injure the user.
B602
48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
[B]
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE
[I]
[G]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[H]
B602D911.WMF
Action
There are two jogger fences: the front fence [A] and the rear fence [B]. These two
jogger fences adjust the position of the paper [C] on the stack tray.
Drive
The front-jogger-fence motor [D] and the rear-jogger-fence motor [E] drive the
jogger fences.
Home Position
There are two home position sensors: the front-fence home-position sensor [F] and
the rear-fence home-position sensor [G]. Each jogger fence is linked to an actuator
[H][I]. When the main switch is turned on, the front and rear fence motors drive the
jogger fences until each home position sensor detected its actuator.
SM
49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[F]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
Paper Position
To align the paper to the front of the
stack tray, the jogger fences operate as
follows:
The rear fence [A] pushes the
paper [B] to the front each time the
exit roller transports the paper to
the stack tray.
The front fence [C] stays at the
front side.
Rear
[A]
[B]
[C]
Regular tray
Front
B602D912.WMF
Rear
To align the paper to the rear side of the

stack tray, the jogger fences operate as
follows:
The rear fence [D] stays at the
rear side.
The front fence [E] pushes the
paper [F] to the rear each time the
exit roller transports the paper to
the stack tray.
[D]
[E]
[F]
Regular tray
Front
B602
50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602D913.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT

[A]
[I]
[F]
[G]
[H]
B602D906.WMF
[B]
[C]
B602D915.WMF
[E]
[J]
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[K]
B602D914.WMF
[D]
B602D916.WMF
Mechanism
The paper in the stack tray is transported to the regular tray as follows:
1. The paddle motor [A] moves the stack-tray guide to its lower position [G].
2. The stack-tray exit motor [B] drives the stack-tray upper roller [F], the stack-tray
lower roller [H], and the stack-tray belt [I]. The stack-tray belt has a pair of
paper supports [K] that push the paper [C] (! 3.4.1).
3. When the paper supports have left the home position, the controller starts to
count the pulses of the stack-tray exit motor.
4. When the pulse count reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
paddle motor moves the stack-tray guide to its upper position [J].
5. The paper supports keep pushing the paper to the regular tray [D].
Stack-Tray Belt Home Position

When the stack-tray belt is at its home position, one of the paper supports [K]
pushes the actuator of the home position sensor [E].
SM
51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
3.5 STAPLING
3.5.1 OVERVIEW
[B]
The finisher staples the paper as

follows:
[A]
Phase 1: The exit roller transports the

paper to the stack tray [A] until the
number of papers reaches a specified
number.
Phase 2: The jogger fences [B] adjust
the position of the paper. For the jogger
fence mechanism, see section 3.4.4.
[D]
[C]
Phase 3: The stapler [C] staples the

paper.
Phase 4: The stapled paper [D] is
transported to the regular tray.
When the finisher has conducted
phases 1 through 4, it starts the same
processing from phase 1.
B602D917.WMF
B602
52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
3.5.2 STAPLER
Mechanism
[A]
B602D918.WMF
Booklet
Finisher
B602
B602D919.WMF
B602D920.WMF
The stapler/folder motor [A] drives the stapler (! Action and Drive in section
3.5.3).
Stapler Switch
See Stapler Switch in section 3.4.3.
Sensors
There are three sensors inside the stapler:
Staple Home Position Sensor: The staple home position sensor detects the
cam position.
Staple Sensor: The staple sensor detects the staples in the cartridge.
Staple Ready Sensor: The staple ready sensor detects the upper end of
the staple.
The staple home position sensor above is different from the home position sensor
on the bottom of the stapler (! 3.5.3).
SM
53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
3.5.3 POSITIONING
Front
[A]
[C]
[B]
[K]
[D]
[J]
[I]
[E]
[F]
[G]
Rear
[H]
B602D921.WMF
Action and Drive

There is one stapler [A] in the finisher. The stapler is on six rails [C][D][E][I]. The
rail [C], rail [D], rail [I], and rail [J] transmit the drive power:
The rail [C] and rail [I] transmit the drive power of the stapler/folder motor.
The stapler uses this power to staple the paper (! 3.5.2).
The rails [D] and [J] transmit the drive power of the staple slide motor [H].
This drive power moves the stapler to the front or rear.
In the diagram above, [B] is the paper stack on the stack tray.
Home Position and Ready Position

The home position sensor [G] is at the bottom of the stapler; the sensor blade [F] is
on the frame of the unit. The controller references the home position sensor to set
the stapler in its ready position. Note that the stapler is not in the home position
when it is ready. The controller sets the stapler in the ready position as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
You turn the main switch on (or you close the front door of the finisher).
The slide motor drives the stapler from the rear side to the front side.
The home position sensor detects the sensor blade. The slide motor stops.
The slide motor starts in reverse to drive the stapler to the rear side. The
controller starts to count the pulses of the motor.
5. When the pulse count reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the slide motor. The stapler is in its ready position.
B602
54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
Staple Position
The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor to calculates the
distance between the ready position (! Home Position and Ready Position) and
the staple position
Front-End One Staple
[A]
[C]
1. Before the stapler slide motor starts,

the stapler is in the ready position [C].
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide
the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor.
[B]
3. While moving to the front, the stapler

lowers the stack-tray stopper [B] (!
Stack-Tray Stopper in 3.4.3).
[D]
Booklet
Finisher
B602
4. When the pulse count reaches the

B602D922.WMF
predefined number (not adjustable),
the controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the stapling
position [D].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler [A].
[F]
Rear-End One Staple

1. The stapler is in the ready position [F].
[E]
2. The stapler/folder motor drives the

stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
The stapler does not move to the front.
The stack-tray stopper [E] keeps
standing
B602D923.WMF
SM
55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
[G]
Two Staples
[H]
1. Before the stapler slide motor starts,

the stapler is in the ready position [G].
[J]
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide

the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor.
[I]
3. While moving to the front, the stapler

lowers the stack-tray stopper [J].
B602D924.WMF
4. When the pulse count reaches the

predefined number (not adjustable), the controller stops the stapler slide motor.
The stapler is in the first stapling position [H].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler.
6. The stapler slide motor starts to slide the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of he stapler slide motor.
7. When the pulse cont reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the second stapling
position [I].
8. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
Saddle Stitch
1. The stack-tray upper and lower rollers
transport the paper to the stapler unit
until the center of the paper [K]
reaches the stapling positions (!
3.7.4).
2. The stapler operates as described in
the previous paragraph (! Two
Staples).
B602D925.WMF
B602
56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[K]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGULAR TRAY
3.6 REGULAR TRAY
[A]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[G]
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[D]
[H]
[I]
B602D926.WMF
Action and Drive

The lift motor [I] drives the regular tray to adjust its height.
Ready Position
Before the stack-tray rollers and belts transport the paper to the regular tray, the lift
motor sets the regular tray in the ready position:
1. The lift motor lowers the regular tray. The controller references the lift motor
encoder sensor [D] to count how many turns the motor makes.
2. When the number of turns reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the lift motor.
3. The lift motor operates in reverse, lifting the regular tray.
4. The paper height sensor [F] detects the edge [G] of the tray or the top of the
paper stack (!Paper Sensor). The lift motor stops.
SM
57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGULAR TRAY
Paper Sensor
As illustrated in the previous paragraph (! Ready Position), the paper height
sensor [F] can detect either the tray edge or the paper stack. Therefore, the signals
from the paper height sensor are not enough to let the controller know if any paper
is on the tray.
To find the paper on the regular tray, the controller references the paper sensor [E].
This sensor detects the paper but does not detect the tray.
Paper Full
While the stack-tray rollers and belts continue to transport the paper to the regular
tray, the ready position becomes lower (! Ready Position). When the number of
paper reaches about 500 sheets, the paper full sensor [B] is interrupted by its
actuator. When the number of paper reaches about 1,000 sheets, the lower limit
sensor [C] is interrupted by its actuator. To decide the paper-full status, the
controller considers these sensor signals and the paper sizes. The table lists the
paper sizes and the numbers of paper in the paper-full status.
Paper Size
A3, B4, DLT, LG
Smaller sizes
Number of Paper
About 500 sheets
About 1,000 sheets
Fail Safe Feature

When the regular tray reaches its uppermost position, the upper limit sensor [A]
detects it. The finisher stops its operation.
The regular tray does not reach this position in normal operations. The upper limit
sensor works as a failsafe feature. If the regular tray fails to actuate the paper
height sensor [F] because of some hardware error, this failsafe feature works.
B602
58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
3.7 SADDLE STITCH

3.7.1 OVERVIEW
Booklet
Finisher
B602
B602D927.WMF
The saddle stitch process consists of the following four phases:

1. The stack tray aligns the paper (!3.7.2).
2. The stapler staples the paper (! 3.7.3).
3. The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper in the folding
position (! 3.7.4).
4. The folding plate and folder rollers cooperate to fold the paper and to transport
it to the booklet tray (! 3.7.5).
SM
59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.2 STACK TRAY

The stack tray operates as follows:
[A]
[B]
1. The stack-tray stopper aligns the right

edges of the paper in the stack tray (!
Stack-Tray Stopper in 3.4.1).
2. The jogger fences adjust the position of
the paper (! 3.4.4).
3. When a specified number of paper [A] is
stacked, the paddle motor operates in
reverse to lower the stack-tray guide and
the stack-tray upper roller [B] onto the
paper.
[C]
4. The stack-tray exit motor drives the

stack-tray upper roller and lower roller to
transport the paper to the stapler unit.
B602D928.WMF
5. The booklet clutch [D] turns on. This

clutch transmits the driver power of the
transport motor to the stack-tray
transport roller [C].
[D]
B602D950.WMF
3.7.3 STAPLER
The stapler waits for the paper in the ready position, and operates when the paper
is set to the stapler positions (! 3.5.3). When the finisher is processing one sheet
of paper, the stapler does not staple the paper.
B602
60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT
[A]
B602D931.WMF
B602D930.WMF
The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper as follows:
1. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the folder home position
sensor [A], the controller starts to count the pulses of the transport motor.
2. When the pulse count reaches the number equivalent to the distance [B]
between the stapler and the folding plate, the transport motor stops. The center
of the paper is in the folding position.
SM
61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT

Folding Plate Mechanism
[E]
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B602D932.WMF
B602D933.WMF
The folding plate is driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folding plate operates as
follows:
1. The folding plate waits for the stack-tray transport roller to transport the paper.
2. When the center of the paper is set in the folding position, the stapler/folder
motor drives the folding plate [C] and the folder rollers [D]. The folding plate
presses the paper between the folder rollers.
3. The folder rollers feed the paper about 10 mm, the folding plate returns to its
home position. The folder rollers keep feeding the paper.
Folding Plate Home Position

The home position of the folding plate is detected by the folder home position
sensor [E]. The actuator [F] is linked to the folding plate by way of cam [A] and
lever [B] (though they are separated in the diagram).
The sensor also detects the home position of the folder rollers (! Folder Rollers
Home Position).
B602
62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
Folder Rollers Mechanism

[F]
[A]
[G]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[E]
B602D935.WMF
B602D934.WMF
The folder rollers are driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folder rollers operate
as follows:
1. The folder rollers [B] feed the paper pressed by the folding plate.
2. The folder rollers and the booklet exit rollers [C] feed the paper [D] and
transport it to the booklet tray [E].
Folder Rollers Home Position

The home position of the folder rollers is detected by the folder home position
sensor [F]. The folder home position sensor blade [A] is linked to the folder rollers
by way of the gears [G][H] (though they are separated in the diagram).
The sensor also detects the home position of the folding plate (! Folding Plate
Home Position).
SM
63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
Shape of Folder Rollers

Folding Plate
[A]
B602D936.WMF
Viewed from the front or rear, each folder rollers is a half-circle [A] except both
ends and middle. This structure prevents the rollers from crumpling the paper stack.
B602
64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

3.8.1 REGISTRATION
[C]
Slide Unit
The slide unit includes the punch motor
[C], the punch [A], and paper edge and
size sensors [B]. This unit is driven by the
registration motor [E].
[B]
[A]
Home Position
The home position of the slide unit (in
other words, the home position of the
paper edge sensors) is detected by the
registration home position sensor [F].
[F]
Registration
Booklet
Finisher
B602
B602D937.WMF
[E]
Registration is executed as follows:

1. When the paper [D] comes from the main
unit, the leading edge [I] of the paper is
detected by the paper edge sensor [H].
[G]
[D]
2. The registration motor starts to operate.

The slide unit [G] moves to the front.
[H]
[I]
SM
65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602D938.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. One of the paper size sensors [A] that

corresponds to the paper size detects the
rear end [B] of the paper.
[A]
[B]
4. When the slide unit is set in place, the

registration motor stops its operations.
B602D939.WMF
5. When the paper edge sensor [C] detects the

trailing edge of the paper, the transport
motor [D] (of the finisher) stops.
[C]
B602D940.WMF
[D]
B602D941.WMF
B602
66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.8.2 PUNCH
Types of Punch Unit
There are four types:
2 holes
2 or 3 holes (The user can select 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching from
the operation panel or the printer driver.)
4 holes
4 holes
There are two 4-hole types: for the North Europe models and for the other models.
Drive
[C]
[A]
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[D]
[B]
B602D942.WMF
The diagram shows the 2 or 3 holes type, which has five punch cams [B]: two of
them are for 2-hole punching and the other three are for 3-hole punching. The
punch motor [A] drives the punch cams.
Home Position
The controller uses two sensors, the home position sensor [D] and the encoder
sensor [C], to set the punch cams in the home position. The controller fine-adjusts
the home position by referencing the encoder sensor signals.
SM
67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Two Holes and Four Holes

When the finisher punches holes, the punch motor drives all punches at the same
time.
[A]
Phase 1
1) The punch is in the home position.
1)
The punch home position sensor [A]
is on. When the first sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a forward
turn.
2) When the punch cam has made a
90-degree turn, a hole is punched.
180-degree turn, the punch comes
back to the home position. Note that
the punch cam [B] is not in the
previous position.
Phase 2
4)
4) The punch is in the home position.
The punch home position sensor is
on. When the second sheet of paper
is set, the punch cam starts a
backward turn.
5) When the punch cam has made a 90degree turn, a hole is punched.
6) When the punch cam has made 180degree turn, the punch comes back
to its home position. Note that the
punch cam is not in the previous
position but in the same position as
the start fo phase 1.
2)
3)
[B]
B602D943.WMF
5)
6)
B602D944.WMF
Phase 3
Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.
B602
68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Two or Three Holes

There are five punches. When the finisher punches holes, the punch drives all
punches at the same time. But three of them do not reach the paper (when the
finisher is punching two holes), or two of them do not reach the paper (when the
finisher is punching three holes).
Phase 1
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
[A]
B602D946.WMF
Standby
Working
Standby punches operate as

follows:
1) When the first sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a
forward turn.
90-degree turn, the punch is away
from the paper.
180-degree turn, the punch is
back to the home position.
Working punches operate as

follows:
1) The punch is in the home
position. The punch home
position sensor [A] is on. When
the first sheet of paper is set, the
punch cam starts a forward turn.
180-degree turn, a hole is
punched.
180-degree turn, the punch
comes back to the home position.
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position.
SM
69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[B]
B602D945.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Phase 2
4)
5)
6)
4)
5)
6)
[A]
B602D948.WMF
[B]
B602D947.WMF
Standby
Working
Working punches operate as

follows:
4) The punch is in the home
position. The punch home
position sensor [A] is on. When
the next sheet of paper is set, the
punch cam starts a backward
turn.
90-degree turn, a hole is
punched.
180-degree turn, the punch
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position but in the
same position as the start of
phase 1.
Standby punches operate as

follows:
4) When the next sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a
backward turn.
90-degree turn, the punch is away
from the paper.
180-degree turn. the punch
Phase 3
Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.
B602
70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX OPTION TYPE 2238

B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX OPTION B603

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 1
1.2 FAX UNIT ..................................................................................................... 3
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 3
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 4
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT .................................................................................. 6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 6
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 7
1.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT ............................................................. 10
1.5 EXPANSION MEMORY ............................................................................. 11
1.6 HANDSET .................................................................................................. 12
Accessory Check ................................................................................... 12
Installation Procedure ............................................................................ 13
2.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 14
2.2 FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES................................................ 22
SC871 FCU Flash ROM Abnormal ........................................................ 22
FCU Flash ROM Access Limit Exceeded .............................................. 22
SRAM Abnormal .................................................................................... 22
Expansion SRAM Abnormal .................................................................. 22
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................23
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 23
3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 23
Entering and Exiting SP mode ............................................................... 23
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)............................................................................ 25
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings).................................................................. 25
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions) ..................................................................... 26
SP5-XXX (Initializing)............................................................................. 26
SP6-XXX (Reports)................................................................................ 27
SP7-XXX (Tests) ................................................................................... 29
3.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 30
3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 30
3.2.2 FAX SWITCHES................................................................................ 41
3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 45
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 50
3.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES............................................................................... 59
3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES............................................................................... 67
3.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 73
3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ......................................... 83
3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ....................................................... 83
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.4.2 PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 84
3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................... 88
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .........................................89

4.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 89
4.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................... 90
4.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................... 90
4.2.2 MBU................................................................................................... 91
4.2.3 NCU (US) .......................................................................................... 92
4.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA) ....................................................................... 93
4.2.5 SG3-D BOARD .................................................................................. 94
4.3 ADDRESS BOOK....................................................................................... 95
With Printer Scanner Unit ...................................................................... 95
Without Optional Printer Scanner Unit (Asia Model Only)...................... 95
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................96
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................... 96
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ............................................ 97
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 99
B603
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
Fax Option
B603
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
WARNING
1. Never install telephone writing during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
5. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an
electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
6. Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the
vicinity of the leak.
CAUTION
1. Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main switch, and
disconnect the power cord.
2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if
a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same
or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Discard
batteries in accordance with the manufactures instructions and local
regulations.
NOTE FOR AUSTRALIA
Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line cord
which meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
The flowchart illustrates your installation procedure.
Start
Do you install the

expansion memory?
No
Yes
Install the fax unit
to the copier.
Install the expansion

memory to the fax unit.
Do you install
the handset?
Do you install the fax
function upgrade unit?
No
No
Yes
Install the handset
to the copier.
Yes
Install the fax function
upgrade unit to the fax
unit.
Specify necessary
settings.
Do you install
the optional G3 unit?
No
Check the operations.
Yes
Install the optional G3
unit to the fax unit.
End
B603I910.WMF
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT
Fax Option
B603
1.2 FAX UNIT

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Fax key ................................................................................2

2. Fax panel.............................................................................2
3. Stamp ..................................................................................1
4. G3 decal ..............................................................................1
5. Serial number decal.............................................................1
6. FCC decal (for North America model only) ..........................1
7. Cable holder ........................................................................1
1
7
4
B603I906.WMF
NOTE: You need the cable holder when installing the optional handset (for the
North America model only).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT
CAUTION
Before installing this option, do the following:
1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer
buffer.
2. Press the operation switch to be the standby mode. Make sure the
power LED is not lit then, turn off the main switch and disconnect the
power cord and the network cable.
1. Remove the option cover [A]

( x 2).
[B]
2. Turn the battery switch on [B].

3. Install the fax unit [C] ( x 2).
4. Attach the serial number decal [D] on
the rear cover.
5. Attach the FCC decal on the rear
cover (only for USA/Canada).
[A]
[D]
B603I911.WMF
[C]
[E]
[F]
[H]
6. Remove the key cover [E] and install

one of the fax keys [F].
[G]
7. Remove the panel cover [G] and

install the fax panel [H].
B603I902.WMF
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
B603
FAX UNIT
8. Attach the G3 decal [A].
B603I903.WMF
[A]
9. Install the stamp [B] to the ADF [C] (if installed).
10. Connect the telephone line to the LINE 1 jack at
the left of the machine.
[C]
[B]
G307I105.WMF
12. Wait until the following messages are displayed:

Function Problems
Functional problems with facsimile.
Data will be initialized.
13. Touch OK on the touch panel. The initialization starts.
14. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.
15. Enter the service mode and program the serial number into the fax unit (SP3102-000). The serial number can be found on the serial number decal (attached
to the machine in step 4).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. NCU.....................................................................................1
2. Interface board ....................................................................1
3. G3 board..............................................................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................1
5. Flat cable .............................................................................1
6. Spacer .................................................................................4
7 Screw M3 x 6 ........................................................................6
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603I908.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CAUTION
1. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer
buffer.
2. Press the operation switch to be the standby mode. Make sure the
power LED is not lit then, turn off the main switch and disconnect the
power cord and the network cable.
[B]
B604I901.WMF
[A]
1. Remove the LINE 2 cover [A] on the fax-controller board.

2. Remove the fax controller board [B] ( x 1, x 4).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
[E]
[G]
[D]
[F]
B604I903.WMF
3. Install the four spacers [A] to the rear of the fax-controller unit.
4. Install the interface board [B] on the spacers.
5. Install the flat cable [C] to the interface board.
6. Connect the flat cable to the fax-controller board [D] (the connector is on the
front of the fax-controller board).
7. Connect the G3 board [E] to the interface board ( x 2).
NOTE: See the diagram above and connect the G3 board to the correct slot.
Leave the other slot openthis slot is used by some local models.
8. Connect the cable [F] to the G3 board.
NOTE: The core [G] is on an end of the cable. Connect this end to the G3
board.
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Fax Option
B603
[B]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B604I902.WMF
9. Install the fax-controller board (with the G3 board and interface board) [A] to the
fax-controller base [B] ( x 4, x 1).
10. Install the NCU [C] to the fax-controller unit ( x 4).
11. Connect the cable [D] on the G3 board to the NCU.
12. Fix the cable to the clamp [E].
13. Install the fax unit to the copier.
15. Enter the service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to 1.
17. Print out the system parameter list and check that G3 is listed as an option.
18. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT
1.4 FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE UNIT

CAUTION
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
[A]
[C]
[B]
A892I901.WMF
1. Turn on the DIP switch [A].

NOTE: The DIP switch works as the power switch.
2. Attach the spacer [B].
3. Install the fax function upgrade unit [C].
5. Enter the service mode. Set bit 7 of system switch 1E to 1.
B603
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXPANSION MEMORY
Fax Option
B603
1.5 EXPANSION MEMORY

CAUTION
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
[A]
G578I901.WMF
Install the expansion memory [A] into the memory slot.
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
HANDSET
1.6 HANDSET
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Base bracket........................................................................1
2. Handset cradle ....................................................................1
3. Handset ...............................................................................1
4. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................4
B603I909.WMF
B603
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
HANDSET
Fax Option
B603
[E]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[F]
B603I907.WMF
1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown.
3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D].
4. Attach the cradle to the bracket [B] ( x 2), then replace the label [C].
5. Install the handset [E] on the cradle.
6. Connect the cable [F] to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine.
7. Attach the cable holder [G].
NOTE: The cable holder is distributed with the fax unit (not with the handset).
8. Fix the cable to the holder.
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code
0-00
Meaning
DIS/NSF not detected within
40 s of Start being pressed
0-01
DCN received unexpectedly
0-03
Incompatible modem at the

other end
CFR or FTT not received
after modem training
0-04
0-05
B603
Unsuccessful after modem

training at 2400 bps
Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal is incompatible.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
0-06
Meaning
The other terminal did not
reply to DCS
0-07
No post-message response
from the other end after a
page was sent
0-08
The other end sent RTN or

PIN after receiving a page,
because there were too
many errors
0-14
Non-standard post message

response code received
SM
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
0-15
Meaning
The other terminal is not
capable of specific
functions.
0-16
CFR or FTT not detected

after modem training in
confidential or transfer mode
0-17
Communication was
interrupted by pressing the
Stop key.
Facsimile data not received
within 6 s of retraining
0-20
0-21
EOL signal (end-of-line)

from the other end not
received within 5 s of the
previous EOL signal
0-22
The signal from the other

end was interrupted for
more than the acceptable
modem carrier drop time
(default: 200 ms)
B603
The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
following functions, or the other terminals memory is
full.
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a
line problem.
Cross reference
If the Stop key was not pressed and this error keeps
occurring, replace the operation panel.

Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Check the connections between the FCU, NCU,
& line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
Defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
0-23
Meaning
Too many errors during
reception
0-30
The other terminal did not

reply to NSS(A) in AI short
protocol mode
0-32
The other terminal sent a

DCS, which contained
functions that the receiving
machine cannot handle.
Polarity changed during
communication
The communication mode
specified in CM/JM was not
available
(V.8 calling and called
terminal)
0-52
0-70
0-74
The calling terminal fell back

to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect ANSam
after sending CI.
0-75
The called terminal fell back

could not detect a CM in
response to ANSam
(ANSam timeout).
The calling terminal fell back
could not detect a JM in
response to a CM
(CM timeout).
0-76
SM
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits
0 and 1
settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
Check the protocol dump list.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
Retry communication.
The other terminal did not have a compatible
communication mode (e.g., the other terminal
was a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
A polling tx file was not ready at the other
terminal when polling rx was initiated from the
calling terminal.
The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due
to noise, etc.
ANSam was too short to detect.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The terminal could not detect ANSam.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
noise, etc.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
0-77
Meaning
The called terminal fell back
could not detect a CJ in
response to JM
(JM timeout).
0-79
The called terminal detected

CI while waiting for a V.21
signal.
0-80
The line was disconnected

due to a timeout in V.34
phase 2 line probing.
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 3 equalizer training.
due to a timeout in the V.34
phase 4 control channel
start-up.
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart
sequence.
0-81
0-82
0-83
0-84
0-85
0-86
0-87
0-88
2-10
2-11
B603

due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 phase 4 control
channel start-up.
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 control channel restart.
because the other terminal
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
The control channel started
after an unsuccessful
primary channel.
because PPR was
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
The modem cannot enter tx
mode
Only one V.21 connection
flag was received
The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
noise, etc.
A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot
pass JM to the other end.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
T.30 mode.
The guard timer expired while starting these
phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
signal level can cause these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
Try making a call at a later time.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
dedicated tx parameters.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.

If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The other terminal was incompatible.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
The receiving terminal restarted the control

channel because data reception in the primary
channel was not successful.
This does not result in an error communication.
Try using a lower data rate at the start.
Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
Replace the FCU.

Replace the FCU.
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Meaning
Modem clock irregularity
Modem initialization error
2-20
Abnormal coding/decoding
(cpu not ready)
JBIG compression or
reconstruction error
2-23
2-24
JBIG ASIC error
2-25
JBIG data reconstruction

error (BIH error)
error (Float marker error)
error (End marker error)
error (Timeout)
The machine resets itself for
a fatal FCU system error
The machine resets itself
because of a fatal
communication error
Line current was cut
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-50
2-51
4-01
4-10
5-00
5-01
5-10
5-20
5-21
5-22
SM
Communication failed
because of an ID Code
mismatch (Closed Network)
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
Data construction not
possible
Data reconstruction not
possible
DCR timer expired
Storage impossible because
of a lack of memory
Memory overflow
Mode table overflow after
the second page of a
scanned document
Replace the FCU.
Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.
Replace the FCU.
Fax Option
B603
Code
2-12
2-13

Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
JBIG data error
Check the senders JBIG function.
Update the MBU ROM.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the

FCU.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
Check the line connector.

Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
Replace the FCU or the NCU.
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
programmed correctly, then resend.
The machine at the other end may be defective.
Replace the FCU.
Temporary memory shortage.

Test the SAF memory.
Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
Wait for the messages which are currently in the
memory to be sent or delete some files from
memory.
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
5-23
Meaning
Print data error when
printing a substitute rx or
confidential rx message
5-24
Memory overflow after the

second page of a scanned
document
5-25
6-00
SAF file access error

G3 ECM - T1 time out
during reception of facsimile
data
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
G3 ECM - EOR was
received
G3 ECM - RTC not detected
6-01
6-02
6-04
6-05
G3 ECM - facsimile data

frame not received within 18
s of CFR, but there was no
line fail
6-06
G3 ECM - coding/decoding
error
6-08
G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received

in reply to PPS.NULL
6-09
G3 ECM - ERR received
6-10
G3 ECM - error frames still

received at the other end
after all communication
attempts at 2400 bps
6-21
V.21 flag detected during

high speed modem
communication
The machine resets the
sequence because of an
abnormal handshake in the
V.34 control channel
6-22
6-99
B603
V.21 signal not stopped

within 6 s
Test the SAF memory.
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
Try using a lower resolution setting.
Wait for the messages which are currently in the
memory to be sent or delete some files from
memory.
Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.

Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
Defective FCU.
The other terminal may be defective.
The other end pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
See code 6-05.
Check for line noise.
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
dedicated tx parameter for that address).
The other terminal may be defective or
incompatible.
Check for line noise.
If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
FCU.
Replace the FCU.
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
22-00
22-01
Meaning
Original length exceeded the
maximum scan length
Memory overflow while

receiving
22-02
Tx or rx job stalled due to

line disconnection at the
other end
22-04
The machine cannot store

received data in the SAF
23-00
Data read timeout during

construction
25-00
The machine software

resets itself after a fatal
transmission error occurred
V.34 modem error
F0-xx
SM
Divide the original into more than one page.
Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower
the scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an
another fax machine, if the machines printer is
busy or out of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
The job started normally but did not finish
normally; data may or may not have been
received fully.
Restart the machine.
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
Restart the machine.
Replace the FCU
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
Replace the FCU.
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES
2.2 FAX SC CODE AND ERROR MESSAGES

SC871 FCU Flash ROM Abnormal
Message:
Flash ROM error.

Quick Dial Table is Unavailable
Please call service.
The flash ROM mounted in the fax unit where the address book is stored has been
detected as abnormal.
Replace the FCU.
FCU Flash ROM Access Limit Exceeded

Message:
Flash ROM replacement is now

necessary for the Quick Dial Table.
The access limit of the flash ROM mounted in the fax unit has exceeded the limit.
You can continue to use the machine after this error occurs.
Replace the FCU.
SRAM Abnormal
Message:
Functional problems with facsimile.

Data will be initialized.
This message may appear immediately after the fax unit is installed, or when the
SRAM (backup RAM) is detected abnormal.
On this message screen:
Initialize SRAM.
Set the SRAM backup switch to ON.
Expansion SRAM Abnormal

Message:
Some data will be deleted by installing Fax Memory Board.

Will you continue to install it? If you want to cancel, turn main power switch
off and take the Board out.
This message may appear immediately after installation of the Function Upgrade
Kit, or when the SRAM (backup RAM) is detected abnormal.
On this message screen:
Initialize the expansion SRAM
For the Function Upgrade Kit, set the backup switch to ON.
B603
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is
open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the
network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory
for reading or writing data.
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
Entering and Exiting SP mode
1
.
Press the Clear Mode key.
2 Use the keypad to enter 107.

.
3
.
Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
Fax SP
4
.
5
.
On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.
Exit
SM
Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
108
109
B603
Mode No.
System Switch
001 032
00 1F
Function
Change the bit switches for system settings

for the fax option
! Section 3.2 Bit Switches
IFAX SW (! Internet Fax (IFAX) Model J-C1 Service Manual)
Printer Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for printer settings
for the fax option
Communication Switch
001 032
00 1F
Change the bit switches for communication
settings for the fax option
G3-1 Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the standard G3 board !
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
G3-2 Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the optional G3 board
G4 Internal Switch
001 032
00 1F
Change the bit switches for the optional
ISDN settings ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches
(Japan Only)
G4 Parameter Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for optional ISDN
parameters ! Section 3.2 Bit Switches
(Japan Only)
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)
2
101
102
Mode No.
RAM Read/Write
001
Memory Dump
001
G3-1 Memory Dump
002
004
103
104
G3-2 Memory Dump

G4 Memory Dump
G3-1 NCU Parameters

001 023 CC, 01 22
G3-2 NCU Parameters
001 023 CC, 01 22
Function
Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
! Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses
Print out RAM data for the fax board. !
Section 3.5 Service RAM Addresses
Print out RAM data for the SG3-1 board.
Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
(Japan Only)
NCU parameter settings for the standard
G3 board. ! Section 3.3 NCU Parameters
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. ! Section 3.3 NCU Parameters
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)
3
101
102
103
104
SM
Mode No.
Service Station
001
Fax Number
002
Select Line
Serial Number
000
PSTN-1 Port Settings
001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
PSTN-2 Port Settings

001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
Transmission
Disabled
Function
Enter the fax number of the service station.
Select the line type.
Enter the fax units serial number.
Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
If the customer does not want to receive
transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the G32 line.
line, change this SP to on.
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3
106
201
Mode No.
ISDN Port Settings
001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
Transmission
Disabled
FAX Switches
001 032
00 1F
Function
Select the line setting for the ISDN line. If
the machine is installed to the PABX line,
select PABX. (Japan Only)
Enter the PSTN access number for ISDN
line. (Japan Only)
line, change this SP to on. (Japan Only)
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the ISDN line.
(Japan Only)
Change the bit switches for scanner
settings for the fax option
! Section 3.2.2 Fax Switches
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)
4
101
102
103
104
106
001
001
001
001
001
Mode No.
FCU ROM Version
Error Codes
G3-1 ROM Version
G3-2 ROM Version
G4 ROM Version
107
001
Charge ROM Version
Function
Displays the FCU ROM version.
Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
Displays the G3-1 modem version.
Displays the G3-2 modem version.
Displays the G4 (ISDN) ROM version.
(Japan Only)
Not used.
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5
101
102
103
104
B603
Mode No.
Initialize SRAM
000
Erase All Files
000
Reset Bit Switches
000
Factory setting
000
Function
Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
Resets the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP6-XXX (Reports)
6
101
102
103
Mode No.
System Parameter List
000
Service Monitor Report
000
105
106
G3 All
Communications
002
G3-1 (All
Communications)
003
G3-1 (1
Communication)
004
G3-2 (All
Communications)
005
G3-2 (1
Communication)
G4 Protocol Dump List
001
Dch + Bch 1
002
Dch
003
Bch 1 Link Layer
004
Dch Link Layer
005
Dch +Bch 2
006
Bch 2 Link Layer
All Files print out
000
Journal Print out

001
All Journals
002
SM
Touch the ON button to print the system

parameter list.
Touch the ON button to print the service
monitor report.
G3 Protocol Dump List

001
104
Function
Specified Date
Prints the protocol dump list of all

communications for all G3 lines.
communications for the G3-1 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-1 line.
communications for the G3-2 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-2 line.
Prints the protocol dump lists for the G4
line. (Japan Only)
Prints out all the user files in the SAF

memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
The machine prints all the communication
records on the report.
The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6
107
B603
Mode No.
Log List Print out
001
All log files
002
Printer
003
SC/TRAP Stored
004
Decompression
005
Scanner
006
JOB/SAF
007
Reconstruction
008
JBIG
009
Fax Driver
010
G3 CCU
011
Fax Job
012
CCU
013
Scanner Condition
Function
These log print out functions are for
designer use only.
These log print out functions are for

designer use only.
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
B603
SP7-XXX (Tests)
These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
SM
Function
G3-1 Modem Tests
G3-1 DTMF Tests
Ringer Test
G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
Recorded Message Test
G3-2 Modem Tests
G3-2 DTMF Tests
G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
IG3-1 Modem Tests (Japan Only)
IG3-1 DTMF Tests (Japan Only)
IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) (Japan Only)
IG3-2 Modem Tests (Japan Only)
IG3-2 DTMF Tests (Japan Only)
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
3.2 BIT SWITCHES

WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Dedicated transmission
parameter programming
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
2
Not used
Technical data printout on the
Journal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-101-001
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
transmission parameters.
Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
Do not change the setting.
1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
are listed on the Journal for each G3
communication.
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04

(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
B603
30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
2
Rx level calculation
SP No. 1-101-001
COMMENTS
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by 16 to get the rx level.
3
4
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
Not used
Do not change the settings.
Line error mark on the received If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left edge
page
of the page at any place where a line error occurred
0: Disabled
in the data. Such errors are caused by a noisy line
1: Enabled
for example.
G3/G4 communication
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display
parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled
because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
Protocol dump list output after
This is only used for communication
each communication
troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
1: On
this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
Not used
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate
Resolution
Compression mode
Communication
mode
SM
336: 33600 bps

168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps
144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps
120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps
96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps
72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps
48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps
24: 2400 bps
S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
ECM: With ECM
NML: With no ECM
31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Width and
reduction
I/O rate
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
0: 0 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
Note:
40 is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
Not used
0
to
1
2
Communication error reset
3
4
5
6
to
7
B603
Not used
File retention time
0: Depends on User Parameter
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
Not used
Memory read/write by RDS
Bit 7 6
Setting
0
0
Always disabled
0
1
User selectable
1
0
User selectable
1
1
Always enabled
SP No. 1-101-003
COMMENTS
0: OFF/1: ON
Bit 2 turns on or off the communication error reset
switch. When this switch is on, the system forcefully
terminates the job under the following conditions:
1. A communication job has started, and
2. The job does not end within an hour.
After terminating the job, the system goes back to
the ready status. When this switch is on, the system
can automatically recover from a communication
error. You cannot adjust the timer for the second
condition above.
1: A file that had a communication error will not be
erased unless the communication is successful.
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
RDS operations to take place. RDS will
automatically be locked out again after a certain
time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Length of time that RDS is
to temporarily switched on when
7
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to User selectable
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Program registration list output
key display selection
1-2 Not used
3
Printing dedicated tx
parameters on Quick/Speed
Dial Lists
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
4-7
Not used
SP No. 1-101-004
COMMENTS
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
Switch 02 are set to User selectable.
The default setting is 24 hours.
SP No. 1-101-005
COMMENTS
This setting determines whether the key to print the
program registration list is displayed on the screen.
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
each).
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).
SM
33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0
Addition of image data from
confidential transmissions on
the transmission result report
1
Inclusion of communications on
the Journal when no image
data was exchanged.
2
Automatic error report printout

Printing of the error code on the

error report
0: No 1: Yes
Not used
Power failure report
4
5
B603
Conditions for printing the

protocol dump list
0: Print for all communications
1: Print only when there is a
communication error
Priority given to various types
of remote terminal ID when
printing reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number
1: Dial label > Tel. number >
RTI > CSI
SP No. 1-101-010
COMMENTS
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
page of confidential messages will be printed on
transmission result reports.
0: Communications that reached phase C (message
tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
1: Communications that reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
This switch becomes effective only when system
switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
dump list only for communications with errors.
This bit determines which set of priorities the
machine uses when listing remote terminal names
on reports.
Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
Quick/Speed Dial number.
34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Continuous polling reception
Dialing on the ten-key pad

when the external telephone is
off-hook
On hook dial
Not used
Line used when the machine
falls back to G3 from G4 if the
other end is not a G4 machine
0: PSTN 1: ISDN (Japan Only)
6
7
SP No. 1-101-011
COMMENTS
This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
0: On hook dial is disabled.
This bit switch has no effect if Communication
Switch 07 bit 0 is set to 0.
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Action when the external
handset goes off-hook
0: Manual tx and rx operation
1: Memory tx and rx operation
(the display remains the same)
4-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-101-015
COMMENTS
0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
possible.
1: The display stays in standby mode even when
the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Country/area code for
to functional settings (Hex)
7
00: France 11: USA
01: Germany 12: Asia
02: UK
13: Japan
03: Italy
14: Hong Kong
04: Austria 15: South Africa
05: Belgium 16: Australia
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand
07: Finland 18: Singapore
08: Ireland
19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz.
1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain
22: Hungary
0F: Israel
23: Czech
10: Canada 24: Poland
SP No. 1-101-016
COMMENTS
This country/area code determines the factory
settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
settings and communication parameter RAM
addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code: Function 06, parameter C.C.
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
0
TTI printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1
TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4)
printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge (Japan Only)
2-6 Not used
7
Use of parallel memory
transmission with G4
transmission
0: Disabled 1: Enabled (Japan
Only)
B603
SP No. 1-101-018
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
that the customer considers to be important (G3
transmissions).
Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4)

overprints information that the customer considers
to be important.
CIL: Command Information Line (Group 4)
Do not change the factory setting.
This determines whether parallel transmission can
be used with a G4 transmission or not.
Note that this bit is only effective if Parallel Memory
transmission is enabled (User Parameter 07 - bit 2).
36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 12
No
FUNCTION
0
TTI/CIL printing position in the
to main scan direction
7
SP No. 1-101-019
COMMENTS
TTI/CIL: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If
the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwrite
the file number which is on the top right of the page.
On an A4 page, if the CIL is moved over by more
than 50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 15
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Going into the Energy Saver
mode automatically
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-022
COMMENTS
1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
active even in the Energy Saver mode.

System Switch 19
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Selects a temporary address
for the number PC-FAX #.
6
7
SM
Number of jobs controlled for

PC-FAX TX
0: 64 Jobs
1: No limitations (but
conforms to device
limitations)
Not used
Special Original mode
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-101-026
COMMENTS
0: When prefixed by #, handled only as a stored
address.
1: When prefixed by #, when a digit exists that
prevents handling the transaction as a Coded,
One-Touch, or Group dialing, handles temporarily.
Sets the number of jobs controlled for PC-FAX
transactions. If 1 is selected (no limitations), control
is relinquished to the device (standard 400,
expandable to 800).

1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
or letterhead which has a colored or printed
background, change this bit to 1. Original 1 and
Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text,
Text/Photo and Photo modes.
37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1A
No
FUNCTION
0
LS RX memory remaining
to refresh value setting
7
SP No. 1-101-026
COMMENTS
Sets a value of 4K.
If the amount of memory remaining falls below 4K,
documents received in memory are printed to create
more space in memory.
Initial value: 0x80 (512K)
00-FF (0-1020 KB: Hex)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
System Switch 1D
No
FUNCTION
0
RTI/CSI/CPS display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-030
COMMENTS
1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the
LCD panel during communication.
System Switch 1E
No
FUNCTION
0
Communication after the
Journal data storage area has
become full
0: Impossible
1: Possible
Action when the SAF memory

has become full during
scanning
0: The current page is erased.
1: The entire file is erased.
SP No. 1-101-031
COMMENTS
This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
report (e.g., no paper).
0: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
B603
38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 1E
No
FUNCTION
2
RTI/CSI display priority
0: RTI 1: CSI
3
File No. printing

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Action when authorized
reception is enabled but
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not
yet programmed
0: All fax reception is disabled
1: Faxes can be received if the
sender has an RTI or CSI
5-6
7
Not used
RAM initialization after the
optional Function Upgrade unit
is installed or removed
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
SP No. 1-101-031
COMMENTS
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has

stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
machine will not be able to receive any fax
messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
messages from senders that do not include an RTI
or CSI, change this bit to 1, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting).
When the machine detects that a Function Upgrade
unit has been installed or removed, the machine
shows the following message on the display for the
customer.
Adding/Removing FAX Feature Expander causes
data loss. Turn Main Power Switch off and
remove/replace it to avoid loss. To continue, press
Yes.
If Yes is pressed, the machine initializes the RAM to
the with or without card configuration. However,
changing this bit to 1 disables this initialization,
even if Yes is pressed.
Change this bit to 1 after installing the Function
Upgrade unit.
0: When the above message is displayed, the
machine initializes the RAM if Yes is pressed. The
amount of data lost depends on whether the board
is in or out. To avoid losing data, the user must
switch off immediately and put the Function
Upgrade unit back in.
1: When the above message is displayed, the
machine does not initialize the RAM even if Yes is
pressed. However, the fax unit cannot be used until
the user switches off, puts the Function Upgrade
unit back in, then switches back on. No data is lost.
SM
39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1F
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Report printout after an original
jam during SAF storage or if
the SAF memory fills up
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2
3
5-6
7
Not used
Received fax print start timing
(G3 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
Received fax print start timing
(G4 reception) (Japan Only)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
Not used
Action when a fax SC has
occurred
0: Automatic reset
1: Fax unit stops
SP No. 1-101-032
COMMENTS
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want
to have a report in these cases.
Memory tx Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx Transmission result report
0: The machine prints each page immediately after
the machine receives it.
1: The machine prints the complete message after
the machine receives all the pages in the memory.
Do not change the factory settings.

0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
resets itself.
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
B603
40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.2.2 FAX SWITCHES

FAX Switch 00 - Not used (do not change the settings)
FAX Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0
Scan density step value
to (Text mode)
7
SP No. 3-201-002
COMMENTS
When scan density is adjusted manually away from
the Normal setting, the threshold value for binary
picture processing changes for each step from the
value specified by Scanner Switch 02, by the
amount programmed here.
For example, with the default setting (14), the
threshold value changes as follows.
+3 (Darkest) : 71 (= 85 14)
+2 :
85 (= 99 14)
+1 :
99 (= 113 14)
0 (Normal) : 113 (Scanner Switch 02 setting)
-1 :
127 (= 113 + 14)
-2 :
141 (= 127 + 14)
-3 (Lightest) : 155 (= 141 + 14)
For smaller steps, input a lower value.
FAX Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
Binary picture processing:
to Threshold for Text mode 7
Normal setting (center position)
SP No. 3-201-003
COMMENTS
This setting determines the threshold value for
binary picture processing in Text mode (when the
scan density setting is at the center).
The value can be between 01 and FF. For a darker
threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 71(H) = 113(D)
FAX Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings)

FAX Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
to Threshold for monotone
7
background special original 1
mode - Normal setting (center
position)
SM
SP No. 3-201-005
COMMENTS
binary picture processing in monotone background
special original 1 mode (when the scan density
setting is at the center).
Default setting: A4(H) = 164(D)
41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
FAX Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
to Threshold for colored
7
background special original 2
mode - Normal setting (center
position)
SP No. 3-201-006
COMMENTS
binary picture processing in colored background
special original 2 mode (when the scan density
setting is at the center).
Default setting: 28(H) = 40(D)
FAX Switch 06
SP No. 3-201-007
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
MTF filter level (Text mode)
to The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.
3
Default setting: 7
This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.
4
MTF filter level (Text/Photo mode)
to The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower value.
7
Default setting: 7
FAX Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
Smoothing filter level (Photo
to mode)
2
3-7
Not used
SP No. 3-201-008
COMMENTS
The value can be between 0(Off) and 7. For a
weaker threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 2
This setting is independent from the threshold
setting specified by the copier SP modes.
FAX Switch 08 Not used (do not change the settings)
SP No. 3-201-009
FAX Switch 09 Not used (do not change the settings)
SP No. 3-201-010
B603
42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX Switch 0A
SP No. 3-201-011
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0-3
Not used
4 to 7 MTF filter level (Colored background special original mode)
The value can be between 0 (Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower
value.
Default setting: 7
FAX Switch 0B
SP No. 3-201-012
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Scan margin setting (right and left margin in book scan ADF mode)
to The setting can be between 0 and F (H) (unit 0.5 mm).
3
Default setting: 2 mm
4
Scan margin setting (top and bottom margin in book scan and ADF mode)
to The setting can be between 0 and 7 (H) (unit 0.5 mm).
7
FAX Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Action when an original jam
has occurred while scanning
the original into memory for
memory tx
0: Continues scanning after
recovery
1: Stops scanning and erases
all scanned pages for that job
1 to 2
3-7
SM
Setting when an original size

cannot be recognized
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 No original
0 1 A5
1 0 A5
1 1 No original
Not used
SP No. 3-201-013
COMMENTS
This bit is only effective when parallel memory tx is
disabled (user parameter 07 - bit 2).
If parallel memory tx is enabled, the machine always
erases the scanned pages when an original jam
occurs. The machine then asks the user to retry from
the first page, even if the parallel memory tx is not
actually used.
0: The machine displays a message asking the user to
put the jammed page back into the original stack, and
continues scanning.
The message is displayed for the time period specified
by scanner switch 0E, bit 2.
1: The machine erases all the scanned pages and
asks the user to retry from the first page.
43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
FAX Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0-6 Not used
7
Scan width for A5 lengthwise or
B5 lengthwise originals
0: 210 mm (8.5)
1: Original width
FAX Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Scan resolution unit
0: mm
1: inches
2-7
Not used
FAX Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
A4/LT LEF-to-SEF turn
1
2
3-7
Not used
A5/HLT SEF-to-LEF turn
Not used
SP No. 3-201-014
COMMENTS
0: The machine scans the original as 210 mm (8.5")
width. The transmitted image has a blank area on
the right.
1: The machine scans 148 mm (A5) or 182 mm (B5)
and centers the scanned data on a 216 mm width
transmitted image.
SP No. 3-201-015
COMMENTS
This bit determines which resolution unit will be
used for scanning a fax message.
Default setting: mm
SP No. 3-201-015
COMMENTS
0: OFF/1: ON
Bit 0 activates or deactivates the A4/LT LEF-toSEF turn function. When this function is
activated, the machine sends A4/LT SEF data
even when the machine has fed an A4/LT LEF
original.
0: OFF/1: ON
Bit 2 activates or deactivates the A5/HLT SEFto-LEF turn function. When this function is
activated, the machine sends A5/HLT LEF data
even when the machine has fed an A5/HLT
SEF original.
FAX Switch 10 ~ 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B603
44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP No. 3-201-016
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Page separation mark
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-103-001
Repetition of data when the

received page is longer than
the printer paper
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Prints the date and time on

received fax messages
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-7
Not used
Printer Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3-4 Maximum print width used in
the setup protocol
Bit 4 3
Setting
0 0
Not used
0 1
A3
1 0
B4
1 1
A4
5-6 Not used
7
Received message width
restriction in the protocol signal
to the sender
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM
COMMENTS
0: No marks are printed.
1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a 2 inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
0: The next page continues from where the previous
page left off.
1: The final few mm of the previous page are
repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
- bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages) is enabled.
1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.
SP No. 1-103-002
COMMENTS
These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
switch 01 is 1.

0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the print width depending on the paper size
available from the paper feed stations.
Refer to the table on the next page for how the
machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and
4 above.
45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
Available Paper Size
A4 or 8.5" x 11"
B5
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5"
No paper available (Paper end)
Printer Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
1st paper feed station usage for
fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1
2nd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2
3rd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3
4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4
LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7 Not used
Printer Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Length reduction of received
data
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1-3
B603
Not used
Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)

297 mm width
256 mm width
216 mm width
216 mm width
SP No. 1-103-003
COMMENTS
0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
messages and reports.
1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
for printing fax messages and reports.
Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
which has been specified by User Parameter Switch
0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
Selection feature.

SP No. 1-103-004
COMMENTS
0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
Do not change the settings
46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Switch 03
SP No. 1-103-004
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
4
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
to
7
If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)
0
0
1
1
and so on until
F
15
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Printer Switch 04
SP No. 1-103-005
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
4
N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
5
to
6
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
place.
0
1
0
1
= 4 mm, = 10 mm, = 15 mm, = Not Used
0
0
1
1
Not used.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Printing while a paper cassette
is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is
enabled.
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used.
Printer Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
Reduction for Journal printing
0: Off
1: On
2-3 Not used.
4
List of destinations in the
Communication Failure Report
for broadcasting
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred
5-7 Not used.
SP No. 1-103-007
COMMENTS
Cross reference
Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5

SP No. 1-103-008
COMMENTS
1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
there is enough space in the left margin for punch
holes or staples.
1: Only destinations where communication failure
occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
Report.

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Paper size selection priority
0: Width
1: Length
1
B603
Paper size selected for

printing A4 width fax data
0: 8.5" x 11" size
1: A4 size
SP No. 1-103-015
COMMENTS
0: A paper size that has the same width as the
received data is selected first.
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
This switch determines which paper size is selected
for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
2
Page separation
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3
to
4
5-6
7
Printing the sample image on

reports
Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting
0
0
The upper half
only
0
1
50% reduction
in sub-scan only
1
0
Same size
1
1
Not used
Not used
Equalizing the reduction ratio
among separated pages
(Page Separation)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Printer Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Smoothing feature
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
1
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Disabled
1
0
Enabled
1
1
Not used
2
Duplex printing
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3
Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4
Printing fax messages in user
code mode
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-103-015
COMMENTS
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
separation to print a received fax message, the
machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
Same size means the sample image is printed at
100%, even if page separation occurs.
User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 to enable this switch.
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
this feature.

0: When page separation has taken place, all the
pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
paper size when page separation has taken place.
Other pages are printed without reduction.
SP No. 1-103-016
COMMENTS
(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
receives halftone images from other manufacturers
fax machines frequently.
1: The machine always prints received fax

messages in duplex printing mode:
1: The machine holds the received fax messages

until the machine exits the restricted access mode
(user code or key counter).
If the machine enters the restricted access mode
again while printing fax messages, the machine
stops printing the machine exits the mode again.
49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Compression modes available
to in receive mode
1
Bit 1 0 Modes
0
0 MH only
0
1 MH/MR
1
0 MH/MR/MMR
1
1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2
to in transmit mode
3
Bit 3 2 Modes
0
0 MH only
0
1 MH/MR
1
0 MH/MR/MMR
1
1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
4
Not used
5
JBIG compression method:
Reception
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6
JBIG compression method:
Transmission
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7
Closed network (reception)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B603
SP No. 1-104-001
COMMENTS
These bits determine the compression capabilities
to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
protocol.
These bits determine the compression capabilities

to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.

Change the setting when communication problems
occur using JBIG compression.
Change the setting when communication problems

occur using JBIG compression.
1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the

other terminal does not match the ID code of this
terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.
50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No
FUNCTION
0
ECM
0: Off 1: On
1
2
to
3
4-5
6
to
7
Not used
Wrong connection prevention
method
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
8 digit CSI
1
0
4 digit CSI
1
1
CSI/RTI
Not used
Maximum printable page length
available
Bit 7 6 Setting
0
0 No limit
0
1 B4 (364 mm)
1
0 A4 (297 mm)
1
1 Not used
No
FUNCTION
0
Burst error threshold
0: Low 1: High
1
2
SM
Acceptable total error line ratio

0: 5% 1: 10%
Treatment of pages received
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
SP No. 1-104-002
COMMENTS
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
(0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
dialed telephone number. This does not work when
manually dialed.
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is
done from the external telephone.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
SP No. 1-104-003
COMMENTS
If there are more consecutive error lines in the
received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi
200 dpi
400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm
15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6
12
24
High settings 12
24
48
If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
3
Hang-up decision when a
negative code (RTN or PIN) is
received during G3 immediate
transmission
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
4-6
7
Not used
Method of total error rate
calculation
0: Normal method
1: French PTT requirement
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum number of page
to retransmissions in a G3
7
memory transmission
SP No. 1-104-003
COMMENTS
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
received.
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
receives RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
0: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number of
total lines by the number of error lines.
1: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number of
total plus error lines by the number of error lines.
SP No. 1-104-004
COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

B603
52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No
FUNCTION
0
Fallback from G4 to G3 if the
other terminal is not a G4
terminal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Japan Only)
1
Not used
2
Not used
3
Fallback from G4 to G3
reflected in programmed
Quick/Speed dials
0: Fallback enabled
1: Always start with G4
(Japan Only)
4
Fallback from G4 to G3 when
G4 communication fails on the
ISDN B-channel
0: Fallback disabled
1: Fallback enabled
(Japan Only)
5
Not used
6
Not used
7
Not used
SP No. 1-104-008
COMMENTS
Also see system switch 0A bit 7.
Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4
Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for the
CPS code set (Cause Value set) that determines G4
to G3 fallback.
0: If a communication falls back from G4 to G3, the
machine will always start transmission with G3 from
the next communication.
1: The machine will always start to transmit with G4.
1: Enable this switch only when G4 communication

errors occur because the exchanger connects G4
calls to the PSTN.
This problem occurs with some types of exchanger.


Communication Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Point of resumption of memory
transmission upon redialing
0: From the error page
1: From page 1
1-6 Not used
7
Emergency calls using 999
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
SM
SP No. 1-104-011
COMMENTS
0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission failed the previous time.
1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
normal memory transmission.
If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the Hong Kong.
53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
end receivers
1
Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
2
Use of Label Insertion for the
End Receivers in a Transfer
operation
3
Conditions required for
Transfer Result Report
transmission
0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if there was
an error
4
Printout of the message when

acting as a Transfer Station
Action when there is no fax

number in the programmed
Quick/Speed dials which meets
the requesting terminals own
fax number
0: Transfer is disabled
1: Transfer is enabled
6-7
B603
Not used
SP No. 1-104-012
COMMENTS
These bits determine whether the machine uses the
Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
This bit determines whether the machine uses the

Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine
will always send a Transfer Result Report back to
the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
Request, even if there were no problems.
1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
this bit determines whether the machine prints the
fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the last N digits of the
requesting terminals own fax number with all the
Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N
is the number programmed in communication switch
0C.)
0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed
in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the
transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the
requesting terminal.
54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Number of digits compared to
to find the requesters fax number
4
from the programmed
Quick/Speed Dials when acting
as a Transfer Station
5-7
Not used
Communication Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0
The available memory
to threshold, below which ringing
7
detection (and therefore
reception into memory) is
disabled
Communication Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Minimum interval between
to automatic dialing attempts
7
SM
SP No. 1-104-013
COMMENTS
00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the own telephone number sent
from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
SP No. 1-104-014
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
SP No. 1-104-015
COMMENTS
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
FUNCTION
0
Memory transmission:
to Maximum number of dialing
7
attempts to the same
destination
SP No. 1-104-017
COMMENTS
01 - FE (Hex) times
Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
FUNCTION
0
Memory transmission: Interval
to between dialing attempts to the
7
same destination
SP No. 1-104-019
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) minutes
Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
FUNCTION
0
Inch-to-mm conversion during
transmission
1-5
6
to
7
B603
Not used
Available unit of resolution in
which fax messages are
received
Bit 7 Bit 6
Unit
0
0
mm
0
1
inch
1
0
mm and inch
(default)
1
1
Not used
SP No. 1-104-021
COMMENTS
0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
format are transmitted without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored
data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
Do not change the factory settings.
For the best performance, do not change the factory
settings.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

No
FUNCTION
0
Standard G3 unit
0: Disabled
3
4
5
6
7
Optional G3 unit (G3-2)

0: Not installed
1: Installed
Optional ISDN unit
0: Not installed
1: Installed (Japan Only)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
G4 Dual communication
0: Enabled
1: Disabled (Japan Only)
No
FUNCTION
0
SEP reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
SUB reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2
PWD reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-6 Not used
7
Action when there is no box
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)
SP No. 1-104-023
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 0 if the user wants to use only the
ISDN line (option G4 unit), even for G3
communications. However, for ISDN on hook
dialing, bit 7 of user parameter 30 must be set to 1.
Note: If the optional G4 unit is not installed, but this
bit is changed to disabled, no document can be
transmitted.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
G3 unit.
Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
ISDN unit.
1: The machine uses only one B channel for
communication. This enables a customer to occupy
another B channel for other purposes such as
internet communication.
SP No. 1-104-024
COMMENTS
0: Polling transmission to another makers machine
using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
0: Confidential reception to another makers
machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
disabled.
0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
signal reception.
Change this setting when the customer requires.

SM
57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B
No
FUNCTION
0
Extension access code (0 to 7)
to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
7
0: On
1: Off
SP No. 1-104-028
COMMENTS
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
procedure, set this bit to 1 to disable V.8.
Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 0 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if 3 is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C
No
FUNCTION
0
Extension access code (8 and
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
1
0: On
1: Off
SP No. 1-104-029
COMMENTS
Refer to communication switch 1E.
Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 8 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
2-7
Not used
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B603
58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES

G3-1 Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Monitor speaker during
to communication (tx and rx)
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
2
memory transmission
3-7 Not used
G3-1 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
5
6
Not used
CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3-1 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
1-4
5
Not used
Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
AI short protocol (transmission

and reception)
Short preamble
SM
SP No. 1-105-001
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
SP No. 1-105-002
COMMENTS
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
SP No. 1-105-003
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
V.8 protocol in manual
reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2
V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
ECM frame size

0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
received
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)
SP No. 1-105-004
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
when starting a manual reception.
1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
reception.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit NRe send

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
B603
Modem rate used for the next

page after receiving a negative
code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change 1: Fallback
V.8 protocol in manual
transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
1: The machine detects either ANSam or CED
during manual transmission.
60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-1 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
SP No. 1-105-005
COMMENTS
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
Not used
G3-1 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Tx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps.
5
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
V.34
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
SM
SP No. 1-105-006
COMMENTS
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
need to change this for specific receivers.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Rx modem rate
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4
Modem types available for
to reception
7
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
SP No. 1-105-007
COMMENTS
reception.
G3-1 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
PSTN cable equalizer
to (tx mode: Internal)
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
SP No. 1-105-008
COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems

during reception.
Cross reference
The setting of these bits is used to inform the

transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of

the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
B603
62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-1 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
2
to (rx mode: Internal)
3
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
5
6-7
SP No. 1-105-008
COMMENTS
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
Not used

communications.
Keep this bit at 1.
Keep this bit at 1.

G3-1 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-1 Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0
ISDN cable equalizer
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
(Japan Only)
SP No. 1-105-010
COMMENTS
specific receivers.
Communication error
communications.
SM
63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
2
to (rx mode: Internal)
3
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
(Japan Only)
6-7
SP No. 1-105-010
COMMENTS
0-20, 0-23, etc.

0: Disabled
(V.34 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
Not used
G3-1 Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum allowable carrier
1
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used
2-3 Not used
4
Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
5
6
Not used
Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Not used
B603

communications.

SP No. 1-105-011
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
between ECM frames from the other end.
frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-1 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements: Europe
1
Protocol requirements: Spain
2
Protocol requirements:
Germany
3
Protocol requirements: France
4
PTT requirements: Germany
5
PTT requirements: France
6
Not used
7
DTS requirements : Germany
SP No. 1-105-012
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.

Change this bit manually if required.
G3-1 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Pulse dialing method
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal(P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden
(N+1)
1
1
Not used
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-105-013
COMMENTS
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
G3-1 Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Not used
2
Data rate threshold during V.34
to reception
5
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 Normal
0 1 1 1 Lower by
one step
1 1 1 1 Lower by
two steps
6
Not used
7
B signal detection time for V.34
polling transmission
0: 75 ms (default setting)
1: 65 ms
SP No. 1-105-014
COMMENTS
The machine changes the modulation parameters in
the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate
during V.34 reception. If this switch is set to 0111,
the machine lowers the initial speed one step, for
example, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.
This switch reduces transmission time if the
machine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34
reception.
Change this switch only when there are
communication errors during V.34 polling
transmission to a machine with a Panasonic
modem.
SM
65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-1 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-1 Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Alarm when an error occurred
in Phase C or later
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Alarm when the handset is offhook at the end of
communication
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2-7 Not used
B603
SP No. 1-105-016
COMMENTS
If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
error communication, change this bit to 1.
If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the

handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
change this bit to 1.
66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.2.6 G3-2 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-2 Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Monitor speaker during
communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
2
memory transmission
3-6 Not used
G3-2 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
5
6
Not used
CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
1-4
5
Not used
Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
AI short protocol (transmission

and reception)
Short preamble
SM
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
SP No. 1-106-002
G3-2 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
SP No. 1-106-001
COMMENTS
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
SP No. 1-106-003
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
Not used
2
V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
ECM frame size

0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
received
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)
SP No. 1-106-004
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit NRe send

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
6
7
Modem rate used for the next

page after receiving a negative
code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change
1: Fallback
Not used
Not used
G3-2 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
B603
Not used
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
SP No. 1-106-005
COMMENTS
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-2 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps.
5
Bit 5 Bit 4
Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
V.34
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
G3-2 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Rx modem rate
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
SM
SP No. 1-106-006
COMMENTS
transmission.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
need to change this for specific receivers.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit 2
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.

SP No. 1-106-007
COMMENTS
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
Cross reference
69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
4
Modem types available for
to reception
7
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3-2 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
1
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
2
to
3
5
6-7
B603

(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
Not used
SP No. 1-106-007
COMMENTS
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
SP No. 1-106-008
COMMENTS
specific receivers.
Communication error
communications.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
communications.
Keep this bit at 1.
Keep this bit at 1.

70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

G3-2 Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum allowable carrier
1
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0
Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used
2-3 Not used
4
Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
5
6
Not used
Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Not used
G3-2 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements: Europe
1
Protocol requirements: Spain
2
Protocol requirements:
Germany
3
Protocol requirements: France
4
PTT requirements: Germany
5
PTT requirements: France
6
Not used
7
Not used
SM
SP No. 1-106-011
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
frequent.

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
between ECM frames from the other end.
frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
SP No. 1-106-012
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.

71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Pulse dialing method
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal(P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden
(N+1)
1
1
Not used
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-106-013
COMMENTS
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B603
72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3
NCU PARAMETERS
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this
will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code
unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the
settings for the first optional G3 interface unit.
Change the fourth digit from 5 to 7 (e.g. 680500 to 680700) for the
settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
SM
73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
680500
Function
Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Unit
Remarks
Use the Hex value to program the
country/area code directly into this
address, or use the decimal value to
program it using SP2-103-001
Country/Area
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Hong Kong
South Africa
Australia
New Zealand
Singapore
Malaysia
China
Taiwan
Korea
Greece
Hungary
Czech
Poland
20 ms
680501
680502
680503
Line current detection time

Line current wait time
Line current drop detect time
680504
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit

(high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
680505
680506
680507
B603
Hz (BCD)
Hz (BCD)
74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Decimal Hex
00
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10
0A
11
0B
12
0C
13
0D
14
0E
15
0F
17
11
18
12
20
14
21
15
22
16
23
17
24
18
25
19
26
1A
27
1B
28
1C
33
21
34
22
35
23
36
24
Line current detection is
disabled.
Line current is not
detected if 680501
contains FF.
If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
disabled.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
680508
680509
68050A
68050B
68050C
Function
PSTN dial tone detection time
PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PSTN dial tone continuous tone time
PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
68050D
68050E
68050F
PSTN wait interval (LOW)

PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
PSTN ring-back tone detection time
680510
PSTN ring-back tone off detection

time
PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
680511
680512
680513
680514
680515
680516
680517
680518
680519
68051A
68051B
68051C
68051D
68051E
68051F
680520
680521
680522
680523
680524
680525
SM
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit

(low byte)
PABX dial tone detection time
PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)
PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PABX dial tone continuous tone time
PABX dial tone permissible drop time
PABX wait interval (LOW)
PABX wait interval (HIGH)
PABX ringback tone detection time
PABX ringback tone off detection
time
PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone detected
(LOW)
PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
Unit
20 ms
Remarks
If 680508 contains FF(H),
the machine pauses for
the pause time (address
68050D / 68050E).
Italy: See Note 2.
20 ms
Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
If 68051B contains FF,

the pause time (680520 /
680521).
20 ms
20 ms

disabled.
disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
680526
680527
680528
680529
68052A
68052B
68052C
68052D
68052E
68052F
680530
680531
680532
680533
Function
Unit
Remarks
Hz (BCD)
PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
disabled.
PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD)
PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
disabled.
PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Busy tone ON time: range 1
20 ms
Busy tone OFF time: range 1
Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ONOFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance ()
Bit
1 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
680534
680535
680536
680537
680538
680539
68053A
68053B
68053C
68053D
68053E
B603
75% Bits 2 and 3 must always

50% be kept at 0.
25%
12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

Hz (BCD)
International dial tone frequency
upper limit (high byte)
disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD)
lower limit (high byte)
disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
International dial tone detection time 20 ms
If 680538 contains FF,
International dial tone reset time
the pause time (68053D /
(LOW)
68053E).
International dial tone reset time
(HIGH)
Belgium: See Note 2.
International dial tone continuous
tone time
International dial tone permissible
drop time
International dial wait interval (LOW)
International dial wait interval (HIGH)
76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
68053F
680540
680541
680542
680543
680544
680545
680546
Function
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (HIGH)
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (HIGH)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone detection time
Country dial tone reset time (LOW)
Country dial tone reset time (HIGH)
Unit
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
If 680543 contains FF,

the pause time (680548 /
680549).
1 ms
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

Function 06-2 (parameter
11).
See Note 3.
12).
See Note 3.
13).
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
See Note 3 and 8.
15).
16). See Note 3.
17).
18).
19).
See Note 5.
20).
The setting must be less
than 5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
68054B
Country dial tone continuous tone

time
Country dial tone permissible drop
time
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Time between opening or closing the
DO relay and opening the OHDI
relay
Break time for pulse dialing
68054C
Make time for pulse dialing
1 ms
68054D
Time between final OHDI relay

closure and DO relay opening or
closing
1 ms
68054E
Minimum pause between dialed

digits (pulse dial mode)
20 ms
68054F
680550
Time waited when a pause is

entered at the operation panel
DTMF tone on time
680551
DTMF tone off time
680552
Tone attenuation level of DTMF

signals while dialing
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
680553
Tone attenuation value difference

between high frequency tone and
low frequency tone in DTMF signals
-dBm x 0.5
680547
680548
680549
68054A
SM
Remarks
disabled.
1 ms
1 ms
77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
680554
680555
680556
680557
Function
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level
after dialling
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level
after dialling
Not used
Unit
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
-dBm x 0.5
Remarks
21). See Note 5.
See Note 5
Do not change the

settings.
1 ms
This parameter takes
effect when the country
code is set to France.
Do not change the
setting.
20 ms
The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
1 ms
The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
BCD
For a code of 100:
68055B - F1
68055C - 00
20 ms
This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
680558
Time between 68054Dh (NCU

parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU
parameter 15)
Not used
680559
Grounding time (ground start mode)
68055A
Break time (flash start mode)
68055B
68055C
International dial access code (High)

International dial access code (Low)
68055D
PSTN access pause time
68055E
Progress tone detection level, and

cadence detection enable flags
68055F
to
680564
680565
680566
Not used
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

Do not change the
settings.
Long distance call prefix (HIGH)

Long distance call prefix (LOW)
BCD
BCD
680567
to
680571
680572
Not used
For a code of 0:
680565 - FF
680566 - F0
Do not change the
settings.
1000/ N
(Hz).
Function 06-2
(parameter 02).
03).
04).
05).
680573
680574
680575
B603
Acceptable ringing signal frequency:

range 1, upper limit
range 1, lower limit
range 2, upper limit
range 2, lower limit
78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
680576
Function
Number of rings until a call is
detected
Unit
1
680577
Minimum required length of the first

ring
20 ms
680578
Minimum required length of the

second and subsequent rings
Ringing signal detection reset time
(LOW)
Ringing signal detection reset time
(HIGH)
Not used
20 ms
680579
68057A
68057B
to
680580
680581
680582
20 ms
Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms

and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit
1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Remarks
06).
The setting must not be
zero.
See Note 4.
07).
06-2).
09).
10).
Do not change the
settings.
Factory setting: 500 ms
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit
3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
680583
to
6805A0
6805A1
6805A2
6805A3
6805A4
6805A5
6805A6
6805A7
SM
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

Not used
Do not change the

settings.
Acceptable CED detection frequency

CED detection time
Acceptable CNG detection frequency
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
BCD (Hz)
79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

disabled.
B603
Fax Option
B603
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
6805A8
Function
Not used
Unit
BCD (Hz)
6805AB
6805AC
6805AD
CNG on time
CNG off time
Number of CNG cycles required for
detection
20 ms
20 ms
6805AE
Not used
6805AF
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (high byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (high byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short
protocol tone
PSTN: Tx level from the modem
6805A9
6805AA
6805B0
6805B1
6805B2
6805B3
6805B4
6805B5
6805B6
6805B7
6805B8
6805B9
6805BA
6805BB
6805BC
6805BD
B603
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission

level
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: Tx level from the modem
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
ISDN: Tx level from the modem
(Japan Only)
ISDN: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level (Japan Only)
ISDN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level (Japan Only)
Modem turn-on level (incoming
signal detection level)
Hz (BCD)
Remarks
disabled.
Do not change the
setting.
The data is coded in the
same way as address
680533.
Do not change the
settings.
disabled.
Hz(BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
-N 3 dBm

01).
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB)
See Note 7.
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB)
See Note 7.
- dBm
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
- dBm
The setting must be

between -12dBm and 15dBm.
- N 6805BA - 0.5N 6805BB (dB)
- N 6805BA - 0.5N 6805BC (dB)
-37-0.5N
(dBm)
80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
6805C8
to
6805D9
6805DA
6805E0
bit 3
Function
Unit
Not used
Remarks
Do not change the
settings.
Fax Option
B603
Address
6805BE
to
6805C6
6805C7
Bits 0 to 3 Not used.

Bit 4 V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 Not used.
Not used
Do not change the
settings.
T.30 T1 timer
Maximum wait time for post
message
1s
0: 12 s
1: 30 s
1: Maximum wait time for

post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to 1 if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
NOTES:
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: 0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
SM
81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds

closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
B603
82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.
3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".
4. Select the destination key you want to program.
5. When the programmed dial number is
displayed, press "Start".
Make sure that the LED of the Start
button is lit as green.
B603S901.WMF
6. The settings for the switch 01 are now

displayed. Press the bit number that
you wish to change.
7. To scroll through the parameter
switches, either:
8. Select the next switch: press "Next"
or
Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct switch is displayed.
Then go back to step 6.
B603S902.WMF
9. After the setting is changed, press "OK".

10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
SM
83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0
Tx level
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
4
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 -1
0 0 0 1 0 -2
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4
:
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
5
Cable equalizer
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting
7
0 0 0 None
0 0 1 Low
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High
1 1 1 Disabled
COMMENTS
If communication with a particular remote terminal
often contains errors, the signal level may be
inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal until the results
are better.
If the setting is Disabled, the NCU parameter 01
setting is used.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
the modem and the telephone exchange when
calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
left.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
B603
84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
to Bit3
2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2,400
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200
0 1 0 0 9,600
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400
0 1 1 1 16,800
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600
1 0 1 0 24,000
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4-5
6
Other settings: Not used

Not used
AI short protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
Not used
Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Inch-mm conversion before tx
0
0
Inch-mm
1
conversion
available
0
1
Inch only
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
2
DIS/NSF detection method
3
0
0
First DIS or
NSF
0
1
Second DIS or
NSF
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
SM
COMMENTS
If training with a particular remote terminal always
takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
must be changed to 0.
left.
used.

used.
COMMENTS
The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed copy
may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
machine uses mm-based resolutions.
used.
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
used.
85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
4
V.8 protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
6
to
7

in transmit mode
0: MH only
1: Disabled
ECM during transmission
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
0
0
Off
0
1
On
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
COMMENTS
If transmissions to a specific destination always end
at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
used.
This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
to the other terminal during transmission.
used.
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
the (0, 0) setting.
Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
used.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Switch 06 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required - (Japan Only)
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Data rate
If the setting is Disabled, the current setting of G4
parameter switch 2 (bits 0 and 1) is used.
to Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting
3
0 0 0 0 64 kbps
0 0 0 1 56 kbps
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4-7 Not used
B603
86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Layer 3 protocol
parameter switch 6 (bit 0) is used.
3
0 0 0 0 ISO 8208
0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4
Packet modulus
parameter switch 6 (bit 4) is used.
7
0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 Disabled
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Attachment of the Higher Layer This bit determines whether Higher Layer
to Capabilities
Capabilities are informed in the [SETUP] signal or
1
not.
2
ISDN G3 information transfer
In tx mode, this determines the information transfer
to capability
capability informed in the [SETUP] messages.
3
0: 3.1 kHz audio
In rx mode, this determines the information transfer
1: Speech
capability that the machine can use to receive a call.
Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support 3.1 kHz
audio.
4-7 Not used
SM
87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only.
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680040 to 68004F(H) - Scanner bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled (Japan Only)
Bit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled (Japan Only)
Bit 7: Not used
B603
88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
B603
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report

printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 1 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
SM
89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the Tone mark over an ISDN line
0: UUI, 1: Tone (Japan Only)
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D) (Japan Only)
Bit 5: Action when receiving a SETUP signal containing no called number and the
G4 subscriber number was programmed in this machine.
0: Respond to the call, 1: Do not respond to the call
Bit 6: Action when the received HLC (Higher Level Capabilities) is Tel or BC
(Bearer Capabilities) is Speech.
0: Do not respond to the call, 1: Respond to the call
This switch determines which information transfer capabilities the machine can
accept when receiving a call.
1: When the received HLC is Tel (digital telephone) or BC is Speech (voice), the
machine responds to the call. In short, the machine receives every call.
This switch is useful for communication problems when the other terminal informs
the above transfer capabilities although it is a fax machine.
Bit 7: ISDN SPID programming (used only in the USA)
B603
90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)

Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays Cannot detect original size.
1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
SM
91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
finisher)
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and subscan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC FAX error report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC Fax driver
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC Fax
driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0
0 min.
0 0 0 1
1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15) : Not used
6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16): Not used
6800E7(H) User Parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used
B603
92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
B603

Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
Bit 1
0
Setting
0
0
File retention impossible
0
1
24 hours
1
0
File retention impossible
1
1
72 hours
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA to 6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 29 (SWUSR_1A to 1D)
: Not used
680EE(H) - User parameter switch 30 (SWUSR_1E)
Bit7: On hook dialing
0: PSTN, 1: ISDN (Japan Only)
NOTE: If this bit set to 1, the on hook dialing is available on the ISDN line. But, the
machine cannot use the G3 standard analog line for detecting the ringing
and on hook dialing.
6800F0 to 6800FF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches (Japan Only)
680100 to 68011F(H) - G4 Internal Switches (Japan Only)
680180 to 68019F(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101)
See 68036C(H) for the type of network used for this number.
6801A0 to 6801A3(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801AA to 6801B3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
6801B4 to 6801C7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only)
6801C8 to 6801D3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) (Japan Only)
6801D4 to 6801DF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) (Japan Only)
6801E0 to 6801EB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only)
6801EC to 6801F7(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) (Japan Only)
6801F8 to 68020B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
note
below.
68020C to 68021F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the note
below.
680220 to 680233(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the note
below.
680237 to 680276(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the note below.
680277 to 6802B6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the note below.
6802B7 to 6802F6(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following
SM
93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6802F7 to 68030A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)

68030B to 68031E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
68031F to 680332(H) PSTN-3 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
680333(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
680340 to 680342(H) - PSTN-1 line settings
680340
Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX.
Bit 1
0
Setting
0
0
Loop start
0
1
Ground start
1
0
Flash start
1
1
Not used
Bit 2: Telephone line type.
0: PSTN, 1: PABX
Bits 3 and 4: Dialing type.
Bit 4
3
Setting
0
0
Pulse dialing
0
1
Not used
1
0
Tone dialing
1
1
Not used
680341: PSTN access number for loop start
Access number Hex value to program (BCD)
0
F0
9
F9
00
00
99
99
680342
Bit 0: Transmission disabled
0: Tx and Rx, 1: Rx only
Bit 1: Memory Lock reception
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
680348 to 68034A(H) - PSTN-2 line settings
680350 to 680352(H) - PSTN-3 line settings
680358 to 68035A(H) - ISDN line settings (Japan Only)
680360(H) - ID code (low - Hex)
680361(H) - ID code (high - Hex)
680362(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)
680363(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)
B603
94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
B603
680364(H) - Memory Lock ID (low - BCD)

680365(H) - Memory Lock ID (high - BCD)
68036C(H) - Network type used for the service station number
0 1 (H) - PSTN-1
0 2 (H) - PSTN-2
1 0 (H) - G4 (Japan Only)
0 7 (H) - G3 auto selection
680370 to 680377(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680370(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680371(H) - Year (BCD)
680372(H) - Month (BCD)
680373(H) - Day (BCD)
680374(H) - Hour
680375(H) - Minute
680376(H) - Second
680377(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680384(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: Function Upgrade unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
680385(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Function Upgrade unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 4: G3-2
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: ISDN unit
0: Not installed, 1: Installed (Japan Only)
Bit 7: Not used
6803B8 to 6803CF(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters) (Japan Only)
6803D0 to 6803E3(H) - ISDN CSI (Japan Only)
6803E4(H) - Number of ISDN CSI characters (Hex) (Japan Only)
6803E9 to 6803EC(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address (Japan Only)
6803ED to 6803F0(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address (Japan Only)
6803F1 to 6803F5(H) - SiG4 board ROM information (Read only) (Japan Only)
6803F1(H) - Suffix
6803F2(H) - Version (BCD)
6803F3(H) - Year (BCD)
6803F4(H) - Month (BCD)
6803F5(H) - Day (BCD)
6803F6 to 6803FA(H) Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
6803F6(H) - Suffix (BCD)
6803F7(H) - Version (BCD)
6803F8(H) - Year (BCD)
6803F9(H) - Month (BCD)
6803FA(H) - Day (BCD)
680402(H) - Option G3 board (G3-2) modem ROM version (Read only)
SM
95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
680406 to 68040B(H) - Modem ROM version (Read only)

680406(H) - Part number (low)
680407(H) - Part number (high)
680408(H) - Control (low)
680409(H) - Control (high)
68040A(H) - DSP (low)
68040B(H) - DSP (high)
680464(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680465(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680482(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680483(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680484(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680485(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680486(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
6BA000 6BA1FF(H) Latest 64 error codes (Read only)
6BE988 6BF35F(H) Latest 20 error communication records
B603
96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Fax Option
B603

4.1 OVERVIEW
Fax Function
Upgrade
FCU
NCU
G3
CCUIF
NCU
MBU
Controller
Expansion
Memory
B603D901.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of three PCBs: an FCU, an MBU and an NCU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. The NCU switches
the analog line between the fax unit and the external telephone.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Only one extra G3 interface option can be installed. The
optional G3 unit consists of three PCBs: G3 board, NCU, and CCUIF.
2. Fax Function Upgrade Unit: JBIG compression becomes available. In addition,
this expands the systems SRAM capacity to hold programmed telephone
numbers, memory files, etc.
3. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM
97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
4.2 BOARDS
4.2.1 FCU
JP7
TIP
RING
Surge
Protection
Overcurrent
Protection
DB1
Noise
Filter
OHDI SW.
TRXD
CML
Relay
DC Loop
LTransformer
Surge
Protection
JP8
Current
Sensor
NCU
OHDISW
CMLSW
Hook0
Hook1
T1
Ring
Detection
Circuit
Noise
Filter
ExRing
T2
B603D902.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE2 (Fax Application Control Engine)

CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
DMA control
Clock generation
DRAM backup control
Ringing signal/tone detection
FBI (FACE Bridge Interface)
Interface between the PCI bus and the FACE
DMA control
Modem (Panasonic MN195006-E)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
B603
98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
Fax Option
B603
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory
: 4 MB
Working memory : 4 MB
Page memory
: 8 MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
Memory back-up
A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
Switches
Item
SW1
Description
Reset switch, to reboot the FCU board
4.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM
3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory back-up
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item
SW1
SM
Description
Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
4.2.3 NCU (US)

JP7
TIP
RING
Surge
Protection
Overcurrent
Protection
DB1
Noise
Filter
OHDI SW.
TRXD
CML
Relay
DC Loop
LTransformer
Surge
Protection
JP8
Current
Sensor
NCU
OHDISW
CMLSW
Hook0
Hook1
T1
Ring
Detection
Circuit
Noise
Filter
ExRing
T2
B603D903.WMF
Jumpers
Item
JP7
JP8
DB1
B603
Description
These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is connected to a dry
line.
Also remove DB1 when the machine is connected to a dry line.
100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.4 NCU (EUROPE/ASIA)

SHUNT
CML Relay
T1
DCLSW
DO Sw.
TIP
RING
TRXD
Current
Sensor
R1
DCLoop
GS
OHDI Sw.
DOSW
OHDISW
GS Sw.
CMLLSW
Hook0
SHUNT
Hook1
T1
GSSW
TIP
R1
Noise
Filter
Ring
Detection
Circuit
GS
CSEL
RSEL
ExRing
B603D904.WMF
Control Signals and Jumpers

Country
CTR21
Australia
South Africa
Malaysia
Hong Kong
New Zealand
Singapore
Asia
CSEL1
RSEL
CN2-5
CN1-13
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L: Low, H: High
CTR21 (Common Technical Regulation 21):

France, Germany, UK, Italy, Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, Ireland, Norway,
Sweden, Switzerland, Portugal, Holland, Spain, Israel, Greece
SM
101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
BOARDS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
4.2.5 SG3-D BOARD
FCU
NCCP
CPU
(RU30)
Modem
Flash
ROM
JBIG
SDRAM
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
CODEC
AFE
NCU
SG3-D
B603D905.WMF
The SG3-D board allows up to two simultaneous communications when used with
the the FCU.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)
Controls the SG3-D board
CPU (RU30)
Modem (V.34)
JBIG
Flash ROM
8 MB flash ROM shared between the SG3 software and modem softare.
SDRAM
16 MB DRAM shared between the ECM buffer, line buffer, and work memory.
CODEC
Converts analog data to binary data.
Converts binary data to analog data.
AFE (Analog Front End)
Analog circuit
Data transfer
B603
102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.3 ADDRESS BOOK

The address book (directory) for this machine combines under one user name the
fax address and mail address.
With Printer Scanner Unit

All the address data is stored on the HDD. Up to a maximum of 2,000 items can be
stored for addresses.
Without Optional Printer Scanner Unit (Asia Model Only)

All the address data is stored in the FCU.
Standard: 500 items
With Expansion Memory: 500 items
With Fax Function Upgrade Unit: 1,200 items
With Expansion Memory and Fax Function Upgrade Unit: 1,200
SM
103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
ADDRESS BOOK
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
Desktop type transceiver
Circuit:
PSTN (max. 2ch.)

PABX
Connection:
Direct couple
Original Size:
Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(single sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(double sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method:
Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution:
G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note.
Transmission Time:
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)

200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note.
Note 1: Optional Expansion Memory required
G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
Data Compression:
MH, MR, MMR

JBIG (optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit required)
Protocol:
Group 3 with ECM
Modulation:
V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate:
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate:
With ECM: 0 ms/line

Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
B603
104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Memory Capacity:
ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 16 MB (8 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 8 MB)
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
Item
Standard
Quick Dial
Groups
Destination per Group
Boxes
(Information/Personal/Transfer)
Destinations dialed from the
ten-key pad overall
Programs
Auto Document
Communication records for
Journal stored in the memory
Specific Senders
500
100
500
With Fax Function

Upgrade Unit
1200 (2000*)
100
500
150
400
500
2,000
100
6
200
18
200
1,000
30
50
*: With the Printer/Scanner Option
SM
105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B603
Fax Option
B603
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
Memory
Transmission file
Maximum number of
page for memory
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission
(Note1)
Memory
Transmission file
Maximum number of
page for memory
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission
(Note1)
Without the
Expansion Memory
With the
Expansion
Memory
400
400
1,000
3,000
320
2,280
800
800
1,000
3,000
320
2,280
Without the Fax

Function Upgrade
Unit
With the Fax

Function Upgrade
Unit
NOTE: 1) Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the

standard resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
B603
106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Option
B603
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
[B]
[A]
[C]
[G]
[F]
[E]
Component
Fax Unit
Interface Board
G3 Board
NCU
Fax Function Upgrade Unit
Expansion Memory
Handset
SM
[D]
B603V901.WMF
Machine
Code
B603
Remarks
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[E]
B604
A892
G578
B433
107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Included in the optional G3

unit.
For USA model only.
B603
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INTERNET FAX (IFAX)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 IFAX INSTALLATION ................................................................................... 1
1.2 INITIAL SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 1
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................................2
2.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 2
2.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES ....................................................... 7
3. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES........................................9

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES ............................................................. 9

SP1102 IFAX SWITCH............................................................................... 10
FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE......................................................... 16
IFAX RAM ADDRESSES............................................................................ 17
4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .........................................18

4.1 INTERNET FAX.......................................................................................... 18
4.1.1 INTERNET FAX FEATURES............................................................. 18
4.1.2 DNS SERVICE .................................................................................. 19
4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ........................................................ 20
4.2.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION ...................................................................... 20
Procedure .............................................................................................. 20
Data Formats ......................................................................................... 20
Errors ..................................................................................................... 20
Results................................................................................................... 21
Selectable Options................................................................................. 21
Secure Internet Transmission ................................................................ 22
4.2.2 MAIL RECEPTION ............................................................................ 23
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure ............................................... 23
Characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 Reception............................................ 24
SMTP Reception.................................................................................... 24
SMTP Reception Characteristics ........................................................... 25
Delivery: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP
(Off Ramp Gateway)....................................................................... 26
Overview................................................................................................ 26
Handling Mail Reception Errors ............................................................. 29
Printing Received Mail ........................................................................... 30
Multi-part Messages............................................................................... 30
Manual e-mail reception......................................................................... 30
Secure Internet Reception ..................................................................... 30
4.2.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE COMBINED)... 31
4.2.4 TRANSFER REQUEST ..................................................................... 32
Operation at the Transfer Requester ..................................................... 32
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Operation at the Transfer Station........................................................... 34
4.2.5 AUTOROUTING ................................................................................ 36
4.2.6 TRANSFER BOX............................................................................... 36
4.3 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE) .......................................................... 37
4.3.1 SUBJECT AND LEVEL OF IMPORTANCE....................................... 37
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................... 37
Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................... 37
4.3.2 E-MAIL MESSAGES.......................................................................... 38
4.3.3 MESSAGE DISPOSITION NOTIFICATION (MDN) ........................... 39
Handling Mail ......................................................................................... 40
Setting up the Receiving Party............................................................... 41
Handling Reports ................................................................................... 41
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................42
1. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................. 42
IFAX
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX INSTALLATION
IFAX
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 IFAX INSTALLATION
IFAX requires the installation of the Fax Unit and the Printer/Scanner Controllers.
For details about installation, please refer to the main machine and the Fax Unit
manuals for the machine.
1.2 INITIAL SETTINGS

Users can set the IFAX initial settings. Please refer to the Network Guide Operating
Instructions.
Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail server before machine
installation.
IP address
Host name
Mail account and the password
CAUTION: The initial settings include items related to user security, such as the
login password and IP addresses. So, please ask the user to input the
initial settings of the IFAX. If the user asks you to input the initial
settings, be sure to keep the settings confidential.
To enable IFAX functions, do the following procedure in the User Tools mode:
User Tools > Facsimile Features > E-Mail Settings > Internet Fax Settings
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
solve the problem as suggested below.
Code
14-00
Meaning
SMTP Send Error
Cause
Error occurred during sending to the
SMTP server. Occurs for any error
other than 14-01 to 16. For example,
the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.
14-01
SMTP Connection
Failed
Failed to connect to the SMTP server Check the IP address of the

(timeout) because the server could
SMTP/DNS server.
not be found.
Check the traffic on the LAN.
The IP address for the SMTP
Check the machine settings
server is not stored in the
such as the SMTP port setting,
machine.
DNS server setting, and so on.
The DNS IP address is not
registered.
Network not operating correctly.
14-02
No Service by SMTP
Service (421)
SMTP server operating incorrectly.
14-03
Access to SMTP
Server Denied (450)
SMTP server operating incorrectly
14-04
Access to SMTP
Server Denied (550)
14-05
SMTP Server HDD Full SMTP Server hard disk full.

(452)
14-06
User Not Found on

SMTP Server (551)
The user does not exist locally.
14-07
Data Send to SMTP

Server Failed (4XX)
14-08
Data Send to SMTP

Server Failed (5XX)
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action
Register the address of the
system administrator.
Set the User Parameter Switch
21 (15[H]) Bit 4 to Off.
Contact the network

administrator. Confirm correct
SMTP server settings and
operation.
Contact the network
operation.
Contact the network
operation.
Contact the network
administrator. Free space on the
HDD of the SMTP server.
Check that the mail address is
correct.
Contact the network
administrator. Check that the
e-mail the user intended to
send exists on the SMTP
server.
Contact the network
operation.
Contact the network
operation.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
14-09
14-10
14-11
14-12
14-13
14-30
14-31
14-32
14-33
14-50
SM
Meaning
Cause
Authorization Failed for POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP
Sending to SMTP
authorization failed.
Server
Action
POP-Before-SMTP:
Check the IFAX user name
and password.
Check that POP server is set
correctly.
Check the SMTP server
settings.
SMTP Authorization:
Check the SMTP server user
name and password.
Check the encryption settings.
Check the SMTP server
settings.
Addresses Exceeded
Number of broadcast addresses
The maximum number of
exceeded the limit for the SMTP
addresses depends on the SMTP
server.
server.
Buffer Full
The send buffer is full so the
No action required. The
transmission could not be completed. transmission will be recalled and
Buffer is full due to using Scan-tosent as soon as buffer space is
Email while the buffer is being used
available.
send mail at the same time.
Data Size Too Large
Transmission was cancelled because Divide the original into sections
the detected size of the file was too
and send as separate files.
large.
Use G3 to send the original.
Reduce the TX mail size.
Send Cancelled
Processing is interrupted because
No action required.
the user pressed Stop.
MCS File Creation
Failed to create the MCS file
Delete unneeded files from the
Failed
because:
Document Server.
The number of files created with
Initialize the HDD.
other applications on the
If initialization fails to correct
Document Server has exceeded
the problem, replace the HDD.
the limit.
Update the software.
HDD is full or not operating
correctly.
Software error.
UFS File Creation
UFS file could not be created:
No action required. Once the job
Failed
Not enough space in UFS area to currently using the UFS area is
finished sufficient space will
handle both Scan-to-Email and
become available. If this does not
IFAX transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly. solve the problem:
Initialize the HDD.
Software error.
If initialization fails to correct
the problem, replace the HDD.
Cancelled the Mail Due Error detected with NFAX and send
to Error Detected by
was cancelled due to a software
NFAX
error.
No Mail Address For
Neither the mail address of the
Contact the network
the Machine
machine nor the mail address of the administrator. Check that these enetwork administrator is registered.
mail addresses are registered
correctly.
Mail Job Task Error
Due to an FCU mail job task error,
No action required. If the problem
the send was cancelled:
persists, update the firmware.
Address book was being edited
during creation of the notification
mail.
Software error.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
14-51
Meaning
UCS Destination
Download Error
14-60
Send Cancel Failed
14-61
Notification Mail Send

Failed for All
Destinations
15-01
POP3/IMAP4 Server
Not Registered
15-02
15-11
POP3/IMAP4 Mail
Account Information
Not Registered
Mail Address Not
Registered
DCS Mail Receive
Error
Connection Error
15-12
Authorization Error
15-13
Receive Buffer Full
15-14
Mail Header Format

Error
15-15
Mail Divide Error
15-03
15-10
IFAX
Cause
Not even one return notification can
be downloaded:
The address book was being
edited.
The number for the specified
destination does not exist (it was
deleted or edited after the job was
created).
The cancel operation by the user
failed to cancel the send operation.
All addresses for return notification
mail failed.
At startup, the system detected that

the IP address of the POP3/IMAP4
server has not been registered in the
machine.
The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has
not been registered.
Action
Check the address in the address
book.
No action required.
Correct the mail address for
the PC.
Contact the network
administrator. Check the other
error codes to determine if
other errors occur at the same
time.
Register the name of the
POP3/IMAP4 server.
Register the e-mail account, user
name, and password.
The mail address has not been

registered.
Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
Register the e-mail account and

e-mail address.
Update the firmware, update the
server software.
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server
Contact the network
could not be found:
administrator.
The IP address for DNS or
Check that the DNS address is
POP3/IMAP4 server is not stored
correct.
in the machine.
Check that the POP3/IMAP4
The DNS IP address is not
IP addresses are correct.
registered.
Confirm correct operation of
Network not operating correctly.
the network.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization
Contact the network
failed:
administrator:
Incorrect IFAX user name or
Check that the IFAX user
password.
name and password are
correct.
Access was attempted by another
device, such as the PC.
Determine whether another
device of the same account
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
attempted access at same
time.
Check that the POP/IMAP4
settings are correct.
Occurs only during manual reception. No action required. The next
Transmission cannot be received due transmission can be received as
to insufficient buffer space. The
soon as the other application
buffer is being used for mail send or releases the buffer area.
Scan-to-Email.
The mail header is not standard
Advise the sender to send e-mails
format. For example, the Date line
in the standard format.
description is incorrect.
The e-mail is not in standard format. Advise the sender to send e-mails
There is no boundary between parts in the standard format.
of the e-mail, including the header.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
15-16
15-17
15-18
15-31
15-39
15-41
15-42
15-43
15-44
15-61
15-62
15-63
SM
Meaning
Cause
Action
Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because Increase the setting that limits
it is too large.
the size of e-mail that can be
received (in the User Tools>
System Settings> File Transfer
menu).
Ask the sender to break the email into smaller parts and
send them separately.
Receive Timeout
May occur during manual receiving
Contact the network administrator
only because the network is not
and check that the network is
operating correctly.
operating correctly.
Incomplete Mail
Only one portion of the mail was
Ask the sender to send as one
Received
received.
transmission.
Final Destination for
The format of the final destination for Ask the sender to check the final
Transfer Request
the transfer request was incorrect.
destination.
Reception Format Error
Send/Delivery
The transmission cannot be delivered Delete the destination file to
Destination Error
to the final destination:
enable receiving.
Destination file format is incorrect. Ask the sender to check the
transfer destination and final
Could not create the destination
destination.
for the file transmission.
SMTP Receive Error
Reception rejected because the
Check the content of the
transaction exceeded the limit for the
From entry in the mail
Auth. E-mail RX setting.
header.
Check the Auth. E-mail RX
setting.
Off Ramp Gateway
The delivery destination address was Enable the Off Ramp Gateway
Error
specified with Off Ramp Gateway
function.
OFF.
Ask the sender not to specify
the Off Ramp Gateway
address.
Address Format Error
Format error in the address of the Off Ask the sender to check the mail
Ramp Gateway.
destination.
Addresses Over
The number of addresses for the Off Ask the sender to check the mail
Ramp Gateway exceeded the limit of destination.
30.
Attachment File Format The attached file is not TIFF format. Try to check the format of the
Error
sent mail, then ask the user to
use TIFF format.
TIFF File Compatibility Could not receive transmission due
Ask the sender to check the
Error
to:
following:
Resolution error
File was sent in TIFF format.
Image of resolution greater than
Compatibility of the resolution
200 dpi without extended memory.
setting.
Resolution is not supported.
Size of the page.
Page size error
Method used to compress the
file.
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other
than MH, MR, or MMR.
TIFF Parameter Error
The TIFF file sent as the attachment Ask the sender to check that
could not be received because the
the attachment was sent in
TIFF header is incorrect:
correctTIFF format.
The TIFF file attachment is a type If the problem persists, update
not supported.
the software.
The TIFF file attachment is
corrupted.
Software error.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
15-64
15-71
15-73
15-74
15-80
15-81
15-91
15-92
Meaning
TIFF Decompression
Error
Cause
The file received as an attachment
caused the TIFF decompression
error:
The TIFF format of the attachment
is corrupted.
Software error.
Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received
because the attachment was not
binary image data.
MDN Status Error
Could not find the Disposition line in
the header of the Return Receipt, or
there is a problem with the firmware.
MSDN Message ID
Could not find the Original Message
Error
ID line in the header of the Return
Receipt, or there is a problem with
the firmware.
Mail Job Task Read
Could not receive the transmission
Error
because the destination buffer is full
and the destination could not be
created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a
request for notification of reception).
Repeated Destination
Could not repeat receive the
Registration Error
transmission because the destination
buffer is full and the destination could
not be created (this error may occur
when receiving a transfer request or
a request for notification of
reception).
Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer
to the final destination:
The format of the final destination
or the transfer destination is
incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final
and transfer destinations could not
be created.
Memory Overflow
Transmission could not be received
because memory overflowed during
the transaction.
15-93
Memory Access Error
15-94
Incorrect ID Code
15-95
Transfer Station
Function
IFAX
Action
Ask the sender to check that
the attachment was sent in
correct TIFF format.
If the problem persists, update
the software.
Ask the sender to check the
content of the attachment.
Ask the sender to resend the
mail. If the problem persists,
update the firmware.
Ask the sender to resend the
mail. If the problem persists,
update the firmware.
No action required. When
destinations are used and a
space opens in the buffer, the
transmission will be received.
No action required. When

destinations are used and a
space opens in the buffer, the
As the send to check both the

transfer destination and the
final destination.
When destinations open, the
Expand SAF memory.

Ask the sender to break up the
file and send the parts
separately.
Transaction could not complete due Initialize memory. If the problem
to a malfunction of SAF memory.
persists, replace the MBU.
The machine rejected an incoming e- Ask the sender to correct the
mail for transfer request, because the
ID code.
ID code in the incoming e-mail did
Set IFAX SW03 Bit 3 to 1.
not match the ID code registered in
the machine.
The machine rejected an incoming e- Inform the transfer requester that
mail for transfer because the transfer this machine does not support the
function was unavailable.
transfer station function.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.
Communication
Route
Item
1. Connection with the
LAN
General LAN
2. LAN activity
1. Network settings on
the PC
Between IFAX and

PC
2. Check that PC can

connect with the
machine
3. LAN settings in the
machine
1. LAN settings in the

machine
Between machine
and e-mail server
2. E-mail account on the

server
3. E-mail server
Between machine
and e-mail server
1. E-mail account on the

Server
Between e-mail
server and internet
SM
Action
Remarks
Check that the LAN cable

is connected to the
machine.
Check that the LEDs on
the hub are lit.
Check that other devices
connected to the LAN can
communicate through the
LAN.
Check the network
Is the IP address
settings on the PC.
registered in the TCP/IP
properties in the network
setup correct? Check the
IP address with the
administrator of the
network.
Use the ping command At the MS-DOS prompt,
on the PC to contact the
type ping then the IP
machine.
address of the machine,
then press Enter.
Check the LAN
Use the Network
parameters
function in the User Tools.
Check if there is an IP
If there is an IP address
address conflict with other
conflict, inform the
PCs.
administrator.
Check the LAN
Use the Network
function in the User Tools.
parameters
Check if there is an IP
If there is an IP address
address conflict with other
conflict, inform the
PCs.
administrator.
Make sure that the
Ask the administrator to
machine can log into the
check.
e-mail server.
Check that the account
and password stored in
the server are the same
as in the machine.
Make sure that the client Ask the administrator to
devices which have an
check.
account in the server can Send a test e-mail with
send/receive e-mail.
the machines own
number as the
destination. The machine
receives the returned email if the communication
is performed successfully.
Make sure that the PC
can log into the e-mail
check.
server.
Check that the account
and password stored in
the server are the same
as in the machine.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
2.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Communication
Route
Item
Action
Remarks
2. E-mail server
Make sure that the client

devices which have an
account in the server can
send/receive e-mail.

check.
Send a test e-mail with
the machines own
number as the
destination. The machine
receives the returned email if the communication
is performed successfully.
3. Destination e-mail
address
Make sure that the e-mail

address is actually used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters such as
spaces.
Use the ping command to Ask the administrator of
contact the router.
the server to check.
Check that other devices
connected to the router can
sent data over the router.
Check whether e-mail can Inform the administrator
be sent to another
of the LAN.
address on the same
network, using the
application e-mail
software.
Check the error e-mail
message.
4. Router settings
Between e-mail
server and internet
IFAX
1. Error message by email from the

network of the
destination.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES
IFAX
3. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

3.1 ACCESSING IFAX BIT SWITCHES
1. Ensure that the machine is in standby mode.
2. Press , enter with the 10-key pad, then hold down for more
than 3 seconds. The SP mode main menu opens.
3. Touch Fax SP on the touch-panel to enter the fax service mode.
4. Use SP1102 1~16 to set the bit switches for IFAX. For details, refer to the
Service Tables on the following pages.
WARNING
Never adjust a bit switched marked DFU or Japan Only," as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not
accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas,
such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List print out.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
3.2 SP1102 IFAX SWITCH

Only one SP number is used to access IFAX bit switches. These bit switches are
described in the tables below.
SP
1102 1
IFAX SW
00
Bits 0~6: Original Width of TX Attachment File
This setting sets the maximum size of the original that the destination can receive.
(Bits 3~7 are reserved for future use or not used.)
0: On
1: Off
Note: If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the larger size has priority. For
example, if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the maximum size is A3 (Bit 2).
Bit 6
Reserved
Bit 5
Reserved
Bit 4
Reserved
Bit 3
Reserved
Bit 2
A3
Bit 1
B4
Bit 0
A4
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the
destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original width
selected with this switch is used as the RX machines original width setting, and the
original is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept,
the machine detects this and this causes an error.
Bit 7: Not Used.
IFAX
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP
1102 2
IFAX SW
01
Bits 0~ 6: Original Line Resolution of TX Attachment File
This setting sets the maximum resolution of the original that the destination can
receive.
0: Not selected
1: Selected
Note: If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the higher resolution has
priority. For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to 1 then the resolution is set for
"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).
Bit 6
Reserved
Bit 5
Reserved
Bit 4
400 x 400
Super Fine
Bit 3
Reserved
Bit 2
200x400
Fine
Bit 1
200x200
Detail
Bit 0
200x100
Standard
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the
destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (resolution setting) of the receiving machine.
The resolution selected with this switch is used as the RX machines resolution
setting, and the original resolution is converted before sending.
The default is both 200 x 100 and 200 x 200 are selected.
If the resolution set with this switch is higher than the receiving fax can accept, the
machine detects this and this causes an error.
Note: The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400
resolution.
Bit 7: mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion)
1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to 1), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Note: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch
selection is determined by the sender fax.
Only two choices are available for transmission: inch statements and inch images, or
inch statements and mm images.
When this switch is Off (0):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
SP
1102 3
IFAX SW
02
Bit 0: RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the From address and
Subject address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
Bit 1: Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail attachment
are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows the
customer to see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent
to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
Bits 2~3: Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
00: Dispatched Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the
Return Receipt with dispatched in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The dispatched string is included in the Subject string.
01: Displayed
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the
Return Receipt with displayed in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The displayed string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
Note: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to 00
(for dispatched) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any
setting other than displayed (01) causes a problem, change the setting to 01 to
enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
Bits 4~6: Not Used.
Bit 7: Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
Note: The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400
resolution.
IFAX
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP
1102 4
IFAX SW
03
Bit 0: Original Output at Transfer Station
This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is
received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the
same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
0: Received original not output at the transfer station.
1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has
transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been
transferred.
Bit 1: Transfer Result Report
This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to
the transfer requestor.
0: Returns the report after each transfer.
1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.
Bit 2: Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request
This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are
correct or not.
0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no
errors in them).
1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions
and returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the
transfer.
There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to
determine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This setting
determines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is a
mistake in even one of the final destination addresses.
Bit 3: Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request
This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are
checked to ensure that the polling IDs match.
0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.
1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.
Bits 4~7: Not Used
SP
1102 5
IFAX SW
04
Bit 0: Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
Bits 1~7: Not Used
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
SP
1102 6
IFAX SW
05
Bit 0: Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9"
in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
Bits 1~7: Not Used
SP
1102 7
IFAX SW
06
Not Used
SP
1102 8
IFAX SW
07
Not Used
SP
1102 9
IFAX SW
08
Bits 0~7: Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores
fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds
incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory
available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then
stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
Note: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the
amount of memory.
SP
1102 10
IFAX SW
09
Bits 0~3: Not Used
Bits 4~7: Restrict TX Retries
This setting determines the number of retries when connection and transmission fails
due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
SP
1102 11
IFAX SW
0A
Not Used.
SP
1102 12
IFAX SW
0B
Not Used.
IFAX
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP1102 IFAX SWITCH
IFAX SW
0C
Not Used.
SP
1102 14
IFAX SW
0D
Not Used
SP
1102 15
IFAX SW
0E
Not Used
SP
1102 16
IFAX SW
0F
Bit 0: Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
Bits 1~7: Not Used
SM
IFAX
SP
1102 13
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
3.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

When you need to update the firmware for IFAX, follow the firmware update
procedures described in the main machine Service Manual.
IFAX
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX RAM ADDRESSES
Parameter
Mail Address
Mail address of the

fax account.
ASC: 128 bytes
Address
69FEAE
User Name
User name of the fax

account.
ASC: 64 bytes
6A002E
64 x 3 area
provided, but only
the first is used.
Password
Password of the fax

account.
ASC: 64 bytes
6A00EE
64 x 3 area
provided, but only
the first is used.
RX Mail Capacity
---
4 Bytes
6A01AE
64-1024 Kbytes
SMTP RX
Permission
Address
Address or partial
address that is used
to limit access to mail
delivery (see pg. 411, Auth E-Mail
Rx).
ASC: 128 bytes
6A01B2
Doc. Svr. RX
Notification No
Number of RX
Notification Mails that
have been sent in
order to notify receipt
of a fax message on
the document server.
2 bytes
6A0232
SM
Function
Data Format
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Comments
128 x 3 area
provided, but only
the first is used.
IFAX
IFAX
3.4 IFAX RAM ADDRESSES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INTERNET FAX

4.1 INTERNET FAX
4.1.1 INTERNET FAX FEATURES
The Internet fax produced by Ricoh is also known as IFAX.
An Internet fax converts fax hard copy document data to e-mail format and
transmits the data over the Internet. Another IFAX or a PC can receive the e-mail
sent by an IFAX. Rather than inputting the telephone number of the destination, the
user inputs the applicable e-mail address.
Documents are sent as e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image (the
scanned original), so a MIME-compatible e-mail reader is required in order to view
documents received on a PC. To view an attached image, software capable of
displaying TIFF-F formatted images is required.
NOTE: The IFAX must be connected to a LAN and set up correctly in order to use
its Internet fax functions.
The main IFAX features are:
TCP/IP communication protocols that support connection to a LAN with e-mail.
Easy-to-master operations that are identical to those of a standard fax machine.
Fax transmission and reception over a telephone line.
Using a browser (such as Netscape or Internet Explorer) to check the settings
and status of an IFAX from a PC This uses the Web Status Monitor application
built into the machine.
Transferring or mailing received faxes directly to a PC.
Using the Internet to reduce communication costs.
Reducing paper expenses by eliminating the use of paper for fax transmission
and reception.
The IFAX communicates with a server over a LAN (it does not communicate
directly with another party).
If an error occurs, a mail error report is sent back to the sender.
Some minor restrictions of IFAX are:
If an Internet related error occurs, the sender might not receive an error report.
The level of security for Internet communications is low. The use of standard
subscriber lines is recommended for confidential communication.
Voice communications are not supported over a LAN.
Internet fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use standard
fax communication whenever time is a crucial factor.
IFAX
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not with
Internet faxing.
These functions are not supported by e-mail transmission:
Immediate Transmission
Confidential Transmission
ID Transmission
Polling Transmission
Chain Dial
Transmission by F-Code (SUB) - e-mail protocol cannot specify an F-Code
On Hook Dial
Manual Dial
JBIG Transmission
Batch Transmission
ECM (Error Correction Mode)
These functions are not supported by e-mail reception:
Confidential Reception
Memory Lock Reception
Polling Reception
F-Code (SUB) Reception using Personal Box (e-mail protocol cannot specify an
F-Code)
Preventing nuisance faxes by destination
Setting Reception Print by Destination
4.1.2 DNS SERVICE

IFAX supports DNS (Domain Name System). See the Core Technology Manual for
more details (Facsimile Processes Faxing From a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards
E-mail Basics).
The IFAX can use the Domain Names for the SMTP and POP3/IMAP4 server
instead of the actual IP addresses, if there is a DNS server on the same LAN as
the SMTP server, POP3/IMAP4 server, and the IFAX.
With models that do not support DNS, the user has to input the actual IP addresses
of the SMTP server and the POP3/IMAP4 server.
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
INTERNET FAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION
4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

4.2.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION
Sending T erminal
SMT P
Server
IFAX
E-mail
Router
LAN
Internet
POP/IMAP
Server
IFAX
E-mail
Router
LAN
IFAXD601.WMF
Procedure
Scanned documents are sent as electronic mail (e-mail).
All messages are sent using memory transmission.
All e-mail transmissions are controlled using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
procedures. There must be an SMTP server on the same LAN as the sending
machine, or the machine will not be able to send e-mail (it is not necessary to set
up an SMTP account).
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compression
can be used).
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
From
Reply To
To
Bcc
Subject
Content Type
Content Transfer Encoding
Message Body
Content
Mail address of the sender
Destination requested for reply
Mail address of the destination
Backup mail address
From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)
Errors
An error report is generated if an error occurs during communication between the
machine and the SMTP server. However, it is possible that the sender will not
IFAX
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The interval between attempts to resend mail to the same destination when an
SMTP error occurs is the same as for G3 fax transmission.
To view what happens when an error occurs when the machine is receiving, refer
to the Mail Reception section.
Results
The transmission result is listed in the Journal. The file list for e-mail transmissions
is created in the same way as for G3 memory transmissions. The TTI for the mail
message includes the word Mail at the head of the information in the TTI column.
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
The default compression is TIFF-F format.
IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
receive reports of errors that occurred between the SMTP server and the receiving
terminal.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Secure Internet Transmission

To transmit e-mail via the Internet more securely, use SMTP authentication, and
POP before SMTP for IFAX.
SMTP Authentication. SMTP Authentication requires user authentication before
they can access the server. This prevents unauthorized access to the server. To
use SMTP authentication, your server must support CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, or
LOGIN. The account name and password specified in the Mail Server settings
are used for SMTP authentication. Other account names and passwords cannot
be specified.
To set up SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP. Prevents unauthorized access to the SMTP server and
requires users to access and log onto the POP3 server before sending e-mail.
To set up POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
IFAX
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
4.2.2 MAIL RECEPTION

SMTP
Server
IFAX
E-mail
Router
LAN
Receiving
Terminal
Internet
POP
Server
IFAX
E-mail
Router
LAN
IFAXD912.WMF
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:

POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

In order for the fax machine to receive e-mail, 1) there must be a POP3/IMAP4
server on the same LAN as the IFAX, and 2) an account must be set up for the fax
machine.
The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is
adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
When the arrival of new e-mail is detected, the IFAX receives the mail.
If the POP3/IMAP4 server is holding several e-mails for the IFAX, the machine
picks up the e-mails one at a time, in the order of arrival at the server.
After POP3 has picked up the mail from a POP3 server, it deletes it from the server.
IMAP4 also picks up the mail from a server, but it does not delete the mail from the
server.
However, the server setting is given higher priority than the machine setting.
E-mail reception conforms to POP3 (Post Office Protocol version 3.0) procedures
or IMAP4 (Internet Message Access Protocol).
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 Reception

Here are some general characteristics of POP3/IMAP4 receiving:
No MX record registration. There is no need to register the machine in the MX
record of the DNS server.
Power can be switched off. As long as the machine is not receiving mail, mail
stored in the mail server is not lost when the power is switched off. With SMTP
reception, if the machine is switched off, the SMTP server sends an error report
back to the sender, and the machine will not receive the mail unless the sender
sends it again after the machine is switched on.
Dial-up compliance. POP3/IMAP4 can be accessed spontaneously, making it
ideal for dial-up operation.
SMTP Reception
SMTP Mail Reception Procedure
By registering the IFAX as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server,
you can enable direct receiving of mail from the SMTP server.
When mail is sent to the mail address specified for the IFAX, it is received
immediately without checking the server for the arrival of new mail (as is done in
the POP/IMAP protocol). Also, with SMTP, the received mail can be routed to
another fax (this is known as delivery).
Setting Method
The following settings are required for SMTP receiving:
The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS
server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
Enable SMTP reception:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be
received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the
MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on
the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
IFAX
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SMTP Reception Characteristics

Expanded RX mail delivery. The Off Ramp Gateway feature allows expansion
for RX mail delivery to a G3 fax. The machine transfers incoming mail is sent to
the G3 fax specified by the local part. For example, in a destination address
specified as:
fax=0454778907@cl01.dom1.ricoh.co.jp
the local part is 0454778907.
A POP3/IMAP4 server is not required. For example, in an environment where
there is only a UNIX server or in an intranet environment where Notes is used for
mail, mail received from outside is handled via the SMTP gateway.
Immediacy of response is slightly better. There is no interval in the acquisition
of mail as with POP3/IMAP4, thus slightly improving the response time.
Easier error handling. When an error occurs with POP3/IMAP4, the receiving
terminal sends an error mail back to the sender in order to inform them that an
error has occurred. With SMTP mail reception, however, in almost all cases the
SMTP server sends the error mail to the sender.
SM
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Delivery: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP (Off Ramp Gateway)

Overview
If the address of the mail received with SMTP contains the following information, it
can be delivered to another G3 fax:
Fax = Delivery Number@IFAX
DNS
Host Name.Domain
SMTP
SMTP
IFAX
(Address:
fax = 045477459@ Cl01.dom1g.ricoh.co.jp)
Router
Internet/
Intranet
Router
SMTP
IFAX
DNS
Telephone Line
T ransmission
PST N
SMTP
IFAX
R
Switching
Station
Switching
Station
(SMTP Receive Setting:

cl01@ dom1g.ricoh.co.jp)
IFAXD901.WMF
IFAX
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
How to Set Up Mail Delivery

IFAX
The sender must set the mail address in the following format:
1) When dialing using a fax number
fax=<Delivery Destination Fax Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>
Example:
fax=0454771459@cl01.dom1g.ricoh.
co.jp
! Delivers to fax number 0454771459
2) When dialing using a Quick dial destination

fax=<# Quick Dial Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>
Example:
fax=#001@cl01.dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
! Delivers to the number registered for Quick

dial key 001.
3) When dialing using a Group dial destination

fax=<#**Group Dial Number>@<IFAX Host Name>.<Domain Name>
Example:
fax=#**05@cl01.dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
! Delivers to numbers registered for Group

dial key 05.
Mail Delivery Conditions

1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery
Settings
2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver
mail from designated senders, the machines Auth. E-mail RX feature must
be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings).
3) If the SMTP RX File Delivery Setting is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving,
and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with
an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings)
4) The fax= setting does not distinguish between upper and lower case
letters.
5) More than one destination cannot be specified in the mail address. A Group
counts as 1 destination.
6) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail
transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and
outputs an error report.
SM
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp
Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp
Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp
Does not match and is not delivered.
2) Conditions
The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.
IFAX
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Errors during POP3/IMAP4 procedures

When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and the message
stays in the server. An error report is output. After a prescribed interval, the
machine calls the server and starts to receive, starting with the interrupted
message. If there is an incomplete received message in memory, it will be erased.
Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the
server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends
information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the From
or Reply-to field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in
the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error
notification after a certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the
following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header
Content-Type
Charset
Content-Transfer-Encoding
Supported Types
Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,
and some garbage may appear in the data.
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF
capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The email will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after
substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for this
type of error is the same as for Abnormal files.
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine
operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to Abnormal
files above).
SM
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
Handling Mail Reception Errors
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printing Received Mail

To print received e-mail:
The machine detects whether it has received a TIFF-F format image, then prints
it.
Text in US ASCII or ISO 8859 X format can also be printed. When a line of text is
longer than the paper width, the excess data will be truncated and lost.
Multi-part Messages
When a multi-part e-mail message contains several text parts and binary files, the
message will be divided by boundaries, and each portion will be printed separately.
If the machine cannot determine where the boundary is, it will print an error report,
and then send error information e-mail back to the sender.
Manual e-mail reception
The manual e-mail reception function can be stored in a Quick Operation Key.
When the key is pressed, the machine calls the POP3/IMAP4 server immediately.
The timer for automatic e-mail reception is not reset when the machine calls the
POP3/IMAP4 server manually.
Here is an example of the sequence
1. Automatic e-mail reception interval: 30 minutes.
2. The machine calls the POP3 server (automatic e-mail reception)
3. 10 minutes later, the user calls the POP3 server (manual e-mail reception)
4. The machine will call the POP3 server again automatically after 20 minutes.
Secure Internet Reception
APOP: Passwords are encrypted when e-mail is received, making it safer than
POP3 authentication (clear text), which is not encrypted. APOP requires a POP
server that supports APOP.
IMAP-AUTH (Mail Reception): If the IMAP Server supports the AUTHENTICATE
command (CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, or LOGIN confirmation), then higher-level security
confirmation can be implemented for users logging in.
To enable password encryption and higher level security:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption
(set to On)
IFAX
30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G 3 Transmissions
(PSTN)
IFAX
E-mail
transmission
IFAX
4.2.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE

COMBINED)
E-mail Transmissions
(LAN/Internet)
SMT P
Server
LAN
IFAXD913.WMF
The machine can send the same message to several destinations in one operation.
Some destinations can be G3 faxes and others can be e-mail. For the G3 fax
transmissions, each address has to be dialed separately. However, all e-mail
addresses can be sent with the message to the SMTP server in one transmission.
The SMTP server then sends the message to each destination.
The following example for broadcasting to three e-mail destinations and two G3 fax
destinations shows how G3 fax messages are each sent individually. However, the
e-mail destinations are all sent to the server at the same time.
Order of inputting the addresses at the operation panel
G3 fax (1) - mail (1) - G3 fax (2) - mail (2) - mail (3)
Order of transmission
G3 fax (1) - mail (1), (2), (3) - G3 fax (2)
The SMTP server cannot broadcast the message if the message contents included
individual information for each terminal in the transmitted data (such as a label
insertion). If this type of feature is used, the machine sends the e-mails to the
server one by one.
With the default settings, up to 500 destinations (including both e-mail and G3 fax)
can be dialed for one broadcast. The maximum number of e-mail destinations in a
broadcast depends on the limitations of the mail server.
SM
31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.4 TRANSFER REQUEST

Operation at the Transfer Requester
Request by Mail
Transfer
Requester
R: Router
SMT P
Server
IFAX
E-mail
Transfer
Station
LAN
POP
Server
IFAX
E-mail
E-mail End
Receivers
Individual G3
Transmissions
(PSTN)
SMT P
Server
LAN
E-mail
(several destinations,
one transmission)
Individual E-mail
Transmissions
G3 End Receivers
E-mail (one transmission

for each destination)
IFAXD914.WMF
The requesting terminal dials the Transfer Station, and requests it to transfer the
message to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in the
Transfer Station.
A quick dial number is indicated by a # and 1 to 5 digits.
A group dial is indicated by #** and 1 to 5 digits.
The machine can request transfer to a maximum of 30 end receivers for each
Transfer Station. The end receivers can be a mixture of e-mail and G3 fax
addresses.
The transfer request goes to the SMTP server as an e-mail message. The dialing
codes (Quick, Speed, Group) and the ID code are included in the mail body field of
the e-mail as text. The message arrives at the POP3/IMAP4 server of the Transfer
Station.
The Transfer Station sends the message to the end receivers.
The Transfer Station sends back a transfer result report. The original may be
attached to the transfer result report, depending on the G3 settings of the fax
machine. For transmissions to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report only
indicates whether the message was successfully transmitted from the Transfer
Station to its SMTP server.
IFAX
32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Content
E-mail address of the requesting terminal
Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Backup mail address
From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Mail body (text part)
Message body
IFAX
Field
From
To
Bcc
Subject
Content-Type
Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01.
MIME-converted TIFF-F.
Request by G3 Fax
G3 End Receivers
G 3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

IFAX
Requesting
Term inal
E-mail End
Receivers
PSTN
G 3 Transmission (Report)
SMT P
Server
IFAX
Transfer
Station
E-mail
LAN
IFAXD915.WMF
The procedures are the same as for a normal G3 fax machine.

The requesting terminal dials the Transfer Station, and requests it to transfer the
message to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in the
Transfer Station.
The machine uses NSF to send an ID code and the machine telephone number.
Up to 30 end receivers can be requested.
End receiver destinations can also be selected using tone signals, in the same way
as for other recent fax models. An e-mail address can also be selected in this way,
as end receivers and as the destinations for receiving the transfer result report.
The receiving IFAX machine receives the transfer request on the PSTN
connection. It then handles the transfer request in the same way as explained in
Request by Mail.
SM
33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Operation at the Transfer Station

Request by Mail
Transfer
Requester
R: Router
SMTP
Server
IFAX
E-mail
Transfer
Station
LAN
POP/IMAP
Server
IFAX
E-mail
E-mail End
Receivers
SMT P
Server
Individual G3
Transmissions
(PSTN)
LAN
E-mail
(several destinations,
one transmission)
Individual E-mail
Transmissions
G3 End Receivers
E-mail (one transmission

for each destination)
IFAXD605.WMF
The IFAX polls the POP3/IMAP4 server at regular intervals. If a transfer request
has come in, it receives the e-mail from the server, then sends the message to the
end receivers by G3 fax or e-mail, depending on the type of end receiver address.
The IFAX sends each G3 fax as an individual transmission. However, for the email, the IFAX sends the message to the SMTP server once, and the server
broadcasts the message to the e-mail end receivers one at a time.
The Transfer Station sends back a transfer result report to the address in the
From field of the received e-mail. If an administrator address is registered, the
result report is also sent to that address. The original may also be attached to the
transfer result report, depending on the G3 settings of the fax machine.
For transmission to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report only indicates
whether the message was successfully transmitted from the Transfer Station to its
SMTP server. The Transfer Station does not know what happens to the messages
on the way to the end receivers.
If a communication error occurs between the machine and the SMTP server during
result report transmission, the machine prints the result report.
IFAX
34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
Request by Fax
G3 End Receivers
G 3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

G3 FAX
Requesting
Term inal
E-mail End
Receivers
PSTN
G 3 Transmission (Report)
SMT P
Server
IFAX
Transfer
Station
E-mail
LAN
IFAXD916.WMF
When the machine receives a transfer request by G3 fax, it sends the message to
the e-mail and G3 end receivers in the same way as for a request by mail.
The machine sends back the transfer result report to the telephone number of the
requesting terminal, which it specified in the NSF signal. The machine prints the
result report if it cannot be sent.
The IFAX can accept end receiver destinations and transfer result report
destinations that were sent from the requester as DTMF tones. This applies to email or PSTN G3 addresses.
SM
35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.5 AUTOROUTING
G 3 T ransmission
G 3 Fax
PST N
SU B cod e: 1111
SM T P
Server
IFAX
e-mail
Personal C o de 1111:
abc@ ricoh.com
LAN
C lient
PC
E-m ail ad dress:
abc@ ricoh.com
IFAXD918.WMF
When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code (max. 20 digits), the machine
compares this SUB code with the Personal Box SUB codes stored in the machine
with e-mail addresses. If there is a match, the machine routes the message to that
e-mail address by e-mail.
There can be only one destination. If there is no destination attached to the SUB
code of the personal box, the incoming message is kept in the fax machines SAF
memory.
A communication failure report will be printed if a transmission error occurs
between the machine and the SMTP server.
The RTI or CSI of the forwarding machine is indicated in the subject field of the
forwarded e-mail. The format is From RTI (or CSI) (Fax Message No.xxxx).
4.2.6 TRANSFER BOX

When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code, the machine compares this
SUB code with the Transfer Box SUB codes stored in the machine with e-mail
addresses. If there is a match, the machine uses e-mail to transfer the message to
the e-mail addresses specified in the Transfer Box.
Up to 5 destinations, including both e-mail and G3 fax addresses, can be stored in
one Transfer Box. There must be at least one destination.
IFAX
36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE)
The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,
designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
4.3.1 SUBJECT AND LEVEL OF IMPORTANCE

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject
can also be prefixed with an Urgent or High notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type

Mail Type
Subject Entry
!
---
No Subject
Entry
Confirmation
of Reception
Mail delivery,
memory
transfer,
SMTP
receiving and
delivery
"
Entry Condition
1. CSI (RTI)
2. RTI
3. CSI
4. None
1. CSI (RTI)
2. RTI
CSI not registered
3. CSI
RTI not registered
4. None
CSI, RTI not registered
From
From
RTI or CSI of
the station
designated for
delivery
RTI or CSI of
sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail error
notification
CSI not registered

RTI not registered
CSI, RTI not registered
---
#
Fax Message No.
+
File No.
Normal:
Return Receipt
(dispatched).
You can select
displayed with IFAX
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
Error:
Return Receipt
(processed/error)
Mail delivery
Mail sending from G3
memory
Fax Message No. + File

Number
Memory sending
SMTP receiving and
delivery (Off Ramp
Gateway)
Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
Items ! " # of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
IFAXD919.WMF
SM
37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
4.3 E-MAIL OPTIONS (SUB TX MODE)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.3.2 E-MAIL MESSAGES

After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item
Number of Lines
Line Length
Name Length
IFAX
Maximum
5 lines
80 characters
20 characters
38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been
received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this
request (known as MDN):
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other partys machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions
below are met:
The other partys machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
The other partys machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
R outer
Server
Server
Internet
Server
Modem
R outer
$
10:17AM
IFAX
M ail (R equest receive

respone)
R eception Confirmation
O ptioin O n
SF2@ dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Time
IFAX
s_tadasi@ abcde.ne.jp
* * * JO U R NAL * * *
AD DR ESS
Mode
MailSMQ
'
Time
PAG E
0'09"
RESU LT
--
&
C onfirm
Mail (Answer to R eception
C onfirmation R equest)
IFAX
IFAX
T X M anagem ent
R eport
C onfirmation
(TX M anagement
R eport)
&
Time
10:18AM
10:17AM
M ode
SF2@ dom1g.ricoh
'
Time
* * * JO U R NAL * * *
AD D RESS
M ailSM A
Time
0'09"
PAG E
2
RESU LT
--
* * * JO URNAL * * *
AD D RESS
M ode
MailSMQ
Time
0'09"
PAG E
2
R ESU LT
OK
OK
IFAXD920.WMF
SM
39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
4.3.3 MESSAGE DISPOSITION NOTIFICATION (MDN)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Handling Mail
Handling Mail on the Send Side
When mail is sent, a Disposition Notification To notation is included in the header
as a request for confirmation that the mail was received.
X-Mozilla Status
: 0001
X-Mozilla Status2
: 00000000
Message-ID
: <3A23379A.81BE0ABD@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
Disposition-Notification-To
: T.Suzuki <s_tadashi@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
Date
: Tue, 28 Nov 2000 13:4203 +0900
From
: T.Suzuki <s_tadashi@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
X-Mailer
: Mozilla 4.73 [ja]C-CCK-MCD BDP jm-Sony 3

(Win95: U)
X-Accept-Language
: ja
MIME-Version
: 1.0
To
: fuser_01@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Subject
: Mail Request for Reception Confirmation
Content-Type
: text/plain: charset=iso-2022-jp
: 7bit
Handling Mail on the Receive Side

Return Path: <>
Received
From fuser_01 ([133.139.157.20]) by dom1g.ricoh.co.jp (post

office MTA V1.9.3 ID# 0100110-37392) with SMTP id AAA163
for<S_tadasi@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
Date
28 Nov 2000 13:4236 +0900
X-Mailer
ICFAX Version 1.0
MIME-Version
1.0
Content-Type
multipart/report: report-type=disposition-notification:
boundary=ICFAX_000000EF48
To
T.Suzuki <s_tadashi@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp>
Message-ID
<20001128133423664.ICFAX-XFC9BE-X26986@133.139.157.20]>
From
fuser_01@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Subject
From @81454771459(RICOH GTS)(Return Receipt)(dispatched)
X-Mozilla-status
8001
X-Mozilla-Status2
00000000
X-UIDL
20001128044713447.AAA163@fuser_01
This is a Return Receipt for the mail that you sent to fuser_01@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Final Receipt: rfc822:fuser_01#dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Original Message ID: <3A23379A.81BE0ABD@dom1g.ricoh.co.jp
Disposition: automatic action/MDN-send-automatically: dispatched
IFAX
40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Respond Mail Text
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:

1) The Disposition Notification To field is in the received mail header
(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,
if MDN is enabled), and
2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter
Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is
as follows:
Normal reception:
Return Receipt (dispatched) in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3)
Return Receipt (displayed) in the Subject line
Error:
Return Receipt (processed/error) in the Subject line
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail senders
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a Q in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receivers journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an A in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
senders journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with OK in the Result column.
When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an E
in the Result column.
The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in
the Result column.
If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See How
to set up Mail Delivery), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.
SM
41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
IFAX
Setting up the Receiving Party
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Report Sample
DATE
MAY. 5
TIME
ADDRESS
MODE
TIME
PAGE
RESULT
10:15
fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co.
Mail SM
0'09"
--
10:16
fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co.
Mail SMQ 0'05"
--
10:17
s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09"
OK
10:19
m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05"
--
IFAXD921.WMF
IFAX
42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
IFAX
SPECIFICATIONS
1. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Fax Unit and Printer/Scanner Unit
Connectivity
Local area network
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
Connection
100base-Tx/10base-T direct
connection
Resolution
Main scan: 200 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
4 must be set to 1.
Transmission Time
1 s (through a LAN to the server)
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document
(Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Protocol
(Supported by TCP/IP protocol)
Transmission:
IETF RFC821 SMTP procedure
Reception:
IETF RFC1725 POP3 procedure
IETF RFC2026 IMAP4 procedure
Data rate
100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
10 Mbps (10base-T)
Remark
The machine must be set up as an email client before installation. Any
client PCs connected to the machine
through a LAN must also be e-mail
clients, or some features will not work
(e.g. Autorouting).
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Note: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3)
must be set to 1.
E-mail File Format
Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH) format only
SM
43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IFAX
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit
Type A/B694-01
Type B/B692-01
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DataOverwriteSecurityUnit
B692/B694
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 1
DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A .............................................. 1
DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type B .............................................. 1
1.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN.................................................................................. 2
1.3 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL.................................................................... 2
1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 3
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE........................................................5
3.1 HDD.............................................................................................................. 6
3.2 NVRAM ........................................................................................................ 7
3.3 DIMM OR SD CARD .................................................................................... 9
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................. 10
4.1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................ 10
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 11
4.2 OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED ......................................... 12
5. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................13
5.1 COPY SP SERVICE TABLES .................................................................... 14
5.2 PRINT SERVICE TABLE............................................................................ 15
6. DETAILS.........................................................................................16
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................21
1. HARDWARE................................................................................................. 21
2. SOFTWARE ................................................................................................. 21
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The metal parts of the fusing unit and other internal components become
extremely hot while the copier is operating. Avoid touching those
components with your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
the machines.
2. The NVRAM has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly.
Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer
recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Never attempt to recharge or
incinerate this battery. Used NVRAMs must be handled in accordance with
local regulations regarding the disposal of such items.s
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Never incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
What This Manual Contains

This manual describes the DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A/B for:
B147/B149
B135/B138
B089/B093.
The DOS unit is an optional DIMM (or SD card) that contains special firmware. At
the end of every job, this special firmware overwrites every cluster in temporary
storage on the HDD twice with random data. Then each cluster is once again
overwritten with a zero. This erases sensitive data on the disk which could be
retrieved secretly.
Conventions in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol
!
What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Short Edge Feed (SEF)
Long Edge Feed (LEF)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ACCESSORY CHECK
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type A

This module is for B135/B138 and B089/B093.
Description
Q'ty
1. DIMM .................................................................................. 1
2. Keytops for B089/B093 (Blank Covers) ............................... 2
3. Keytops for B135/B138 (Blank Covers) ............................... 2
4. Operation Instructions.......................................................... 1
DataOverwriteSecurity (DOS) Unit Type B

This module is for B147/B149.
Description
Q'ty
1. SD Card............................................................................... 1
2. Keytop (Blank Covers)......................................................... 2
3. Operation Instructions.......................................................... 1
CAUTION
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
The machine should always be switched off and its power cord
disconnected before doing any of the following procedures.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
1.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

1.2.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL
[A]
B692I901.WMF
B692I903.WMF
[B]
CAUTION
Before you start the installation, you must check the box seals to confirm
that they have not been removed since the items were sealed in the box at
the factory.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.

Confirm that a tape is attached to each corner.
The surfaces of the tapes should be blank. If you see VOID on the tapes
STOP, do not install the components, contact your superviser.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes are unmarked, remove from the corners of the box.
3. As you remove each seal, the VOID marks [B] appear. This prevents the tape
from being reattached to the box.
4. Make sure that you have the correct security module for the machine. The
machine model requires either the DIMM type or the SD Card type.
Model
B135/B138 e/f
B089/B093
B147/B149
B692/B694
Security Module Required

DOS Unit Type A (DIMM)
DOS Unit Type B (SD Card)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. If the machine is on, switch off the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the Network cable if the NIB is installed.
3. Disconnect the Fax module cable if the fax option is installed.
4. Switch the main power switch on.
5. Check that the following Copy SPs are set as indicated below:
SP No.
5871 001
5967 001
5846 090
5836 001
5832 001
SP Name
HDD Function Disable
Document Server Set Function
USC Settings - Plain Data Forbidden
Capture Settings Capture Function
HDD Formatting (ALL)
B089/B093 OR B135/B138
B147/B149
Set To:
1 (On)
1 (Off)
1 (Check)
0 (Off)
Press # to Execute
Press Execute key
6. Check that the following Printer SPs are set as indicated below:
SP No.
1006 001
SP Name
Sample/Proof Print
Set To:
1 (On)
7. Turn off the operation switch.

8. Turn off the main switch.
9. Disconnect the Fax cable (RJ11 connection) if installed
10. Disconnect the Network cable (RJ45 connection) if NIB is installed
B089/B093
B147/B149
B135/B138
[A]
[A]
B692I902.WMF
11. Install either the DIMM [A] or the SD Card [B]:

The DIMM is installed for B135/B138 or B089/B093.
The SD Card is installed for B147/B149.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Model B147/B149
If the PostScript 3 option is not installed, install the DOS option SD card in Slot 2.
If the PostScript 3 option is installed, remove the Printer/Scanner card from Slot
1 and install the DOS option SD card in Slot 1.
Follow the procedure in the B147/B149 Service Manual, section 5.7 SD Card
Appli Move, to move the Printer/Scanner application data to the DOS option card.
(The Printer/Scanner software is now on the SD card with the DOS option.)
Remove Printer/Scanner card from Slot 3
NOTE: After the SD Card Appli Move procedure is completed the Printer/Scanner
card will no longer function
After the procedure is completed, the DOS card, with Printer/Scanner
application data, will be in Slot 1. The PS3 card will be in Slot 2 and Slot 3 will be
empty
12. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.
13. Connect the Fax cable if the fax option is installed.
[A]
[B]
09/09/2003
Origi.
Total
[C]
14:13
Copies
B692I904.WMF
B692I905.WMF
15. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
16. Make a Sample Copy.
17. Watch the overwrite erase icon.
The bottom of the icon becomes thicker [B].
Next Copy is displayed briefly below the icon.
The icon returns to its normal appearance [C].
18. Remove the Document Server and Scanner keytops and replace them with the
blank keytops provided.
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
There are no preventive maintenance checks or procedures for the

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
HDD

3.1 HDD
1. Switch the operation power switch off.
2. Switch the main power switch off.
3. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply.
4. Replace the HDD. (Refer to the section 3. Replacement and Adjustment in
the Service Manual of the appropriate machine.
5. Discard the used HDD
CAUTION
The customer engineer must consult with the key operator or system
administrator to decide how to handle the old HDD.
6. Connect the power cord to the power supply.
7. Switch on the main power switch.
[A]
[B]
09/09/2003
Origi.
Total
[C]
14:13
Copies
B692R906.WMF
B692R905.WMF
9. Check the overwrite erase icon [A] in front of the date in the upper right corner
of the operation panel display.
10. Confirm that the icon has changed from the display for data on disk [B] to no
data on disk [C]
NOTE: No SP settings are required for replacement of a defective HDD.
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NVRAM
3.2 NVRAM
1. Switch the operation power switch off.
2. Switch the main power switch off.
4. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.
5. Disconnect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.
6. Insert a blank IC card or SD card into the controller slot:
B135/B138, B089/B093 require the IC card.
B147/B149 requires the SD card.
7. Connect the power cord to the power supply.
8. Switch the main switch on.
10. Do the following SPs.
SP No.
5990 003
Name
SMC Printout SP
5990 002
SMC Printout User

Programs
NVRAM Data Upload
5824
Comment
Prints a list of all the current User Tool
settings
Prints a list of all User Tool settings.
Uploads all SP and UT settings to the card.
11. When the upload is finished, switch the main power switch off.
12. Disconnect the power cord from the power supply, and remove the card.
13. Replace the NVRAM. (For more details about how the replace the NVRAM,
refer to section 3. Replacement and Adjustment in the Service Manual for the
appropriate machine.
14. Switch on the main power switch.
15. Do the following SPs:
Name
Memory Clear All Clear
HDD Formatting IMH
Comment
Clears entire memory.
Initializes documents stored on the document
server, stamp print data, scanner delivery
images, fax delivery images.
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
SP No.
5801 001
5832 002
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NVRAM
16. Switch the main power switch off, then switch it on again.
17. Insert the IC card or SD card with the uploaded NVRAM data into the controller
slot.
18. Enter the SP mode and do SP5825 (NVRAM Data Download).
19. In the Copy SP mode, confirm the correct settings of the following SPs:
SP No.
5871 001
5967 001
5846 090
5836 001
SP Name
Correct Setting
1 (On)
1 (Disable)
1 (Check)
0 (Disable)
20. Exit the Copy SP mode and enter the Print SP mode.
21. Confirm the correct setting of SP1006.
SP No.
1006 001
SP Name
Sample/Locked Print
Correct Setting
1 (Enable)

23. Connect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIMM OR SD CARD
3.3 DIMM OR SD CARD

1. Switch the operation switch off.
2. Switch the main switch off.
4. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB option is installed.
5. Disconnect the fax cable if the fax option is installed.
6. Make sure that you have the correct DOS unit for the machine.
7. The machine model requires the DIMM or the SD Card.
Model
B135/B138
B089/B093
B147/B149
Security Module Required

DOS Unit Type B (SD card)
8. Install either the DIMM or the SD Card in the controller slot:

B135/B138, B089/B093 require the DIMM.
B147/B149 requires the SD card.
10. Connect the Fax cable if the fax option is installed.
[A]
[B]
09/09/2003
Origi.
Total
[C]
14:13
Copies
B692R908.WMF
B692R907.WMF
13. Check the overwrite erase icon [A] in front of the date in the upper right corner
of the operation panel display.
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
14. Confirm that the icon has changed from the display for data on disk [B] to no
data on disk [C].
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is
open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the
network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory
for reading or writing data.
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level
Definition
The LCD shows the SC code. The
customer cannot continue to use
the machine. The customer must
call for service.
Reset Procedure
The customer engineer must:
Enter the SP mode.
Switch the main power switch off and on.
Troubleshoot the problem by following
the procedures described in this section.
The customer must:
Switch the operation switch off and on.
If the error occurs again, switch the main
switch off and on.
If the error occurs again, user must call
for service.
The customer must:
Switch the operation switch off and on.
If the error occurs again, switch the main
switch off and on.
After recovery, the user can continue to
use any feature other than the disabled
function. For example, if an error occurs
in Tray 1, the user can use other paper
feed trays.
Customer should call for service if the
affected function continues to return
errors.
No action required. The machine updates
the SC history.
The LCD shows the SC code. The

customer cannot continue to use
the machine. This is a machine
error.
The LCD shows the SC code.

However, only the unit that
generated the error is disabled.
B692/B694
The LCD shows no SC code. The

customer can continue to use the
machine.
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

B
Copy Countermeasure Error

A special chip on the ROMDIMM installed in the machine is
designed to prevent copying.
After the command was sent to
this chip, the chip generated an
unexpected response.
B135/B138, B089/B093 Only

ROM-DIMM
SC865
HDD Access Error

During operation, the HDD
generated an error.
B135/B138, B089/B093, B147/B149

Hard Disk Failure
Do SP5832 001 (HDD Formatting - All)
Do SP5832 002 (HDD Formatting - IMH)
If normal operation of the HDD cannot be
recovered after doing these two SPs,
replace the HDD.
SC866
SD Card Recognition Error

The machine generated an error
when it attempted to detect the
electronic recognition license.
An illegal program is on the SD
card.
B147/B149 Only
Use an approved SD card.
SC867
SD Card Removal Error

The SD card was removed from
its slot while an application was
executing.
B147/B149 Only
Never remove an SD card from the
controller slot while a program is
executing.
Switch the main power switch off and on,
then start again.
SC868
SD Card Access Error

The SC card controller returned
an error because the SD card is
defective or the SC card
controller is defective.
B147/B149 Only
Replace the SD card.
Replace the SD card controller.
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
SC828
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED
4.2 OVERWRITE ERASE ICON NOT DISPLAYED

[A]
09/09/2003
Origi.
Total
14:13
Copies
B692T901.WMF
If the overwrite erase icon [A] is not displayed, check the following SPs and make
sure that they are set correctly.
Copy SPs
SP No.
5871 001
5967 001
5846 090
5836 001
SP Name
Set To:
1 (On)
1 (Disable)
1 (Check)
0 (Disable)
SP Name
Sample/Locked Print
Set To:
1 (Enable)
Print SP
SP No.
1006 001
B692/B694
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SP SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES
Service Table Key
Notation
[range / default / step]
*
1111
DFU
Japan only
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
LEF
SEF
(!6.2 Image Processing)
What it means
Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
adjusted in the range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM
reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with
each key press.
Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value
(factory setting) is restored.
An SP number set in bold-italics denotes a Special Service
Program mode setting. To display the SSPs:
2. On the touch panel, press Copy SP and together.
Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value.
The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this
value.
Long Edge Feed
Short Edge Feed
Refer to 6.2 Image Processing in 6. Details.
Due to fundamental changes in how image processing
adjustment is done with Group 4 SP codes, more details are
provided in Section 6.
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SP SERVICE TABLES
5.1 COPY SP SERVICE TABLES

5801 1
Memory Clear - All Clear

Resets all data for process control and all software counters, and restores all
modes and adjustments to their default values. To execute, hold down for
over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and on again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier has
malfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM.
5801 014
Clear DCS Settings

Initializes SP setting related to DCS. DCS (Delivery Control Service) manages
the Scan Router connection. To execute, hold down for over 3 seconds,
and then turn the copier off and on again.
5824
NVRAM Data Upload

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
number) from NVRAM on the control board to a flash memory card.
While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents a
software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.
5825
NVRAM Data Download

Downloads the content of a flash memory card to the NVRAM on the control
board.
5832
HDD Formatting
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
ALL
Initializes entire content of the HDD.
IMH
Initializes 1) documents stored on the document
server, 2) stamp print data, 3) scanner delivery images,
4) fax delivery images.
5832 1
5832 2
5836*
5836 1*
B692/B694
Capture Settings
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
0: With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature
cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected.
1: With this function enabled, the settings screen for the capture features an
be displayed.
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINT SERVICE TABLE
5846
5846 50*
5871
UCS Settings
UCS (User Control Service) is the software that manages user codes, the fax
address book, the scan-to-email address book, and the scan-to-folder address
book.
Initialize All Directory Info.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,
including all user codes
[0~1 / 0 / 1] (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the
HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to
enable the setting. This SP is used after the optional Security Module Type A
has been installed on the machine. For more details about this installation, see
1. Installation.
5872
HDD Overwrite Status Check

Determines whether the content of the hard disk has been overwritten.
Range: 0 to 65535
5967*

Allows or denies access to the document server screen. After changing this
setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.
0: Function enable. Pressing the Document Server button opens the
Document Server screen.
1: Function disable. Pressing the Document Server button does not display
the Document Server screen. Free access to the document server is denied.
However, files on the document server can still be accessed with the printer
driver.
5990
5990 1
5990 2
5990 3
5990 5
SP Print Mode (SMC Printout)

All (Data List)
Execute to print a list of the settings for the selected
item.
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program
Diagnostic Report
1006 001
SM
Sample/Locked Print
[0~1/0/1] 0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select 0, the
document server is enabled according to the Copy Service Mode SP5967. If
you select 1, the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service
Mode SP5967.
Note: Set to 1 (On) for use of the Sample Copy and Locked Print features.
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
5.2 PRINT SERVICE TABLE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6. DETAILS
When an original is scanned or printed, the data for the job is stored temporarily on
the hard disk for jam recovery. After the copy or print job finishes, some of this
temporary data remains on the HDD at random locations until it is overwritten by
the next job.
At the end of every copy and print job, the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit
automatically writes over unneeded temporary data with random data twice and
with a zero (0) once. This is the method recommended by NSA.
[A]
Overwritten
Data present
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
No data present
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32
[B]
B692D901A.WMF
Original Data
B692/B694
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Overwrite
[B]
11
26 25
27
. .
18
17 28
29 .
12
14
31 3 0
16 1
5
[A]
20 19
23 22
24 . 3 2
21
13
10
B692D902A.WMF
HDD Data
A copy or print job always starts writing data to disk, starting with the clusters at the
outer edge [A] and progressing toward the center.
The overwrite, on the other hand, always begins at the center cluster [B] and
progresses toward the edge.
Taking the first square as cluster 1 on the outermost track:
A job starts writing from 1, 2, 3, and continues toward 32.
At the end of the job , the Security module overwrite erase proceeds from the
opposite direction, starting from 32, 31, 30 on the innermost track and continues
to 1.
NOTE: Each number in the illustration represents 1 cluster, the smallest unit the
operating system uses to handle data on the HDD.
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
If a copy or print job starts during data overwrite, the job has priority and the
overwriting stops, and the copy or print job begins.
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
HDD Data
.
.
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28
26 25
27
13 14 15 16
17 2 8
29 .
11
12
31 3 0
13
9 10 11 12
20 19
23 2 2
24 . 3 2
21
14
18
10
Original Data
[A]
29 30 31 32
16 1
5
B692D903A.WMF
1. A copy job writes data to the HDD as far as cluster 32 [A].

[B]
.
.
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28
26 25
13 14 15 16
27
17 28
29 .
11
12
31 30
13
9 10 11 12
20 19
23 22
24 . 3 2
21
14
18
10
29 30 31 32
16 1
5
B692D904A.WMF
2. When the copy job is finished, the data overwrite starts at cluster 32 [B] can
continues to overwrite each cluster twice with random data and once with a 0.
B692/B694
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
.
.
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
26 25
27
13 14 15 16
17 28
29 .
11
12
31 30
13
9 10 11 12
20 19
23 2 2
24 . 32
21
14
18
10
[C]
25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32
16 1
5
B692D905A.WMF
3. In this example, a copy job starts when the overwrite reaches cluster 21 [C] and
overwriting stops.
.
.
27
13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
[D]
26 25
9 10 11 12
17 28
29 .
11
12
13
1
6
31 30
20 19
23 22
24 . 3 2
7
21
14
18
10
25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32
16 1
5
B692D906A.WMF
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
4. Next, the job writes data to the disk as far as cluster 32. When the job finishes,
the overwrite restarts, starting with cluster 21 [D].
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[E]
.
.
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28
26 2 5
27
13 14 15 16
17 28
29 .
11
12
9 10 11 12
20 19
31 30
13
1
6
23 22
24 . 32
21
14
18
10
29 30 31 32
16 1
5
B692D907A.WMF
5. As soon as the overwrite progresses as far as cluster 1, it starts again from

cluster [E] and continues through 32, 31, and so on.
[F]
.
.
27
17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28
26 2 5
13 14 15 16
17 28
29 .
11
12
31 30
13
9 10 11 12
20 19
23 22
24 . 32
21
14
18
10
29 30 31 32
16 1
5
B692D908A.WMF
6. When overwriting reaches cluster 22 (in this example), the overwrite is finished.
B692/B694
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. HARDWARE
SD Card
DIMM
B147/B149
B135/B138, B089/B093
Either the DIMM or SD card is

required.
2. SOFTWARE
The table below describes:
The types of data overwritten automatically.
Compatibility of the data overwrite function with other functions of the machine.
Types of temporary data that are
overwritten
Copy jobs
Print jobs

not overwritten
Sample print/locked print jobs *1

LAN fax printing
Document server functions
Scanner functions (except TWAIN)
Internet fax
Paperless/serverless fax

not originally stored on the HDD
*1
*2
*3
*4
PS3 (only for Type A) *2

Spool printing
SDK applications (Global Scan, Doc Mail, etc.)
File format converter functions
Normal fax functions (except I-Fax, paperless/serverless
fax)
TWAIN scanner
A sample print or locked print job can be overwritten after execution.

The PS3 function cannot be used with the Type A DIMM because the Type A DIMM is
inserted in the PS3 slot. However, B147/B149 is provided with an SD card merge function,
so the PS3 function can be used with the Type B.
User stamps are not overwritten and erased.
Printer fonts, overlay forms, and RTIFF data are not overwritten.
B692/B694
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
If the fax option is installed, the address book data is stored in the FCU (500
addresses maximum). If the Function Upgrade Kit is installed, up to 1200
addresses can be stored. The number of addresses that can be stored is
determined by the capacity of the FCU and Function Upgrade Kit. The HDD does
not store address book data.
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B692/B694
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 - 001
05/14/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER DSc332/DSc338
LANIER - LD232c/LD238c
RICOH Aficio 2232C/2238C
SAVIN C3224/C3828
SUBJECT:
SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied.
xiii
Updated Information (Table of Contents)
Tab Page
Updated Information ( Bleeding Tab Page)
1 through 21
New Information (B692/B694 Data Overwrite Security Unit)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Copyright 2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGES:
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 05/2004





FAX OPTION B603

INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

SEE SECTION IFAX FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

SEE SECTION B692/B694 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM
xiii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149
FAX OPTION B603

INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

TROUBLESHOOTING
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TAB
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 6
TAB
POSITION 5

TAB
POSITION 2
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597
TAB
POSITION 3
INSTALLATION
TAB
POSITION 1
Rev. 05/2004
TAB
POSITION 4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 002
06/02/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER - DSc332/DSc338
RICOH - AFICIO 2232C/2238C
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
SUBJECT:
5-10
Updated Information (SP1-105)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 06/2004
1-105
1-105-2 P: Ready
*BCU [ 10 to 100 / NA: 10, EU: 20 / 1oC/step ]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing ready condition.
Temperature specified in this SP mode
The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressure
rollers in various modes. (The default settings are different for N. America and
Eur./Asia)
1-105-4 H:N [K] S 125
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 180, EU: 175 / 5C/step]
1-105-5 H:N [K] S 185
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 180, EU: 180 / 5C/step]
1-105-6 H:N [K] D 125
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 165 / 5C/step] **
1-105-7 H:N [K] D 185
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 175 , EU: 175 / 5C/step]
1-105-8 H:N[FC] S 62.5
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5C/step]
1-105-9 H:N[FC] S 125
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / 180 / 5C/step]
1-105-10 H:N[FC] D 62.5
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 145/ 5C/step]
1-105-11 H:N[FC] D 125
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 170 / 5C/step] **
1-105-13 H:OHP
*BCU [ 100 to 190 / 165 / 5C/step]
1-105-15 P:N [K] S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 160, EU: 155 / 5C/step]
1-105-16 P:N [K] S 185
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 155, EU: 160 / 5C/step]
1-105-17 P:N [K] D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 145 / 5C/step] **
1-105-18 P:N [K] D 185
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 145, EU: 155 / 5C/step]
1-105-19 P:N[FC] S 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 125, EU: 130 / 5C/step]
1-105-20 P:N[FC] S 125
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 160 / 5C/step]
1-105-21 P:N[FC] D 62.5
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 120, EU: 125 / 5C/step]
1-105-22 P:N[FC] D 125
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5C/step] **
1-105-24 P:OHP
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 150 / 5C/step]
1-105-26 H:TH
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5C/step]
1-105-28 P:TH
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5C/step]
1-105-29 H:Envelop
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 175 / 5C/step]
1-105-30 P:Envelop
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5C/step]
1-105-31 H: Slow Down
*BCU [ 1 to 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
Fusing temperature must be decreased when the machine changes to a process
speed that is slower than the current process speed (for example, when the speed
changes from 185 mm/s to 62.5 mm/s). The machine idles while reducing the fusing
temperature. When the fusing temperature becomes lower than the ready
temperature, the machine starts printing.
Ready Temperature = Target temperature + Temperature specified in this SP mode.
1-105-32 P: Slow Down
*BCU
[ 1 to 20 / 10 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
1-105-33 H:SP 62.5
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-34 H:SP 125
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-35 H:SP 185
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-36 P:SP 62.5
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-37 P:SP 125
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +10 / 1C/step]
1-105-38 P:SP 185
*BCU [ -20 to +30 / +20 / 1C/step]
** Requires Engine firmware 1.09C or later.
[Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)

Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
1-106-1 Heat Roller
[ 0 to 200 / - / 5C/step]
1-106-2 Pressure Roller
1-106
B147/B149
5-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 - 003
06/10/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER DSC332/DSC338
LANIER LD232C/LD238C
RICOH AFICIO 2232C/2238C
SAVIN C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: COLD OFFSET (POOR FUSING)
Cold offset (poor fusing) may occur when all of the following conditions are met:
1. The machine is turned on under low-temperature conditions
2. The weight of the paper loaded in the tray is near the upper limit for plain paper (e.g. 100g/28lb.)
3. Copies are made in B&W mode (185 mm/sec.)
NOTE 1:
The offset normally occurs between the second and fifth copy, gradually improving and
disappearing within approximately 15 copies.
NOTE 2:
This does not occur in Color mode or with paperweights of 80g/24lb or less.
MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
The heat distribution across the fusing belt is not uniform while the initial copies are made onto thicker plain
paper in B&W mode (highest processing speed.)
SOLUTION:
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
o
o
1. SP1-912-2: Change the threshold for enabling low temperature correction from 17 C to 22 C.
2. SP1-916-1: Enable idling mode (set to a value of 1.)
SP Mode
SP1-912-2
SP1-916-1
Default
o
17 C
0: OFF
Change to
o
22 C
1: ON
See Notes below.
NOTE 3:
It is not required to change the idling time (default: 30 sec) for SP1- 916- 2. Please maintain
this setting of 30sec, since a software bug will cause the machine to continue running if the
setting is changed to 40sec or more (the firmware correcting this will be released soon.)
NOTE 4:
Enabling Idling Mode causes the warm-up time to increase by 30sec, therefore please advise
customers of this point.
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
The firmware will be modified to ensure cold offset does not occur without changing the warm-up time. This
TSB will be reissued when the released date has been confirmed.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 1
ELECTRICAL
CAUSE:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 003 REISSUE +
10/25/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: COLD OFFSET (POOR FUSING)
Cold offset (poor fusing) may occur when all of the following conditions are met:
1. The machine is turned on under low-temperature conditions
2. The weight of the paper loaded in the tray is near the upper limit for plain paper (e.g. 100g/28lb.)
3. Copies are made in B&W mode (185 mm/sec.)
The offset normally occurs between the second and fifth copy, gradually improving and
disappearing within approximately 15 copies.
NOTE 2:
This does not occur in Color mode or with paperweights of 80g/24lb or less.
NOTE 1:
The heat distribution across the fusing belt is not uniform while the initial copies are made onto thicker plain
paper in B&W mode (highest processing speed.)
SOLUTION:
o
o
1. SP1-912-2: Change the threshold for enabling low temperature correction from 17 C to 22 C.
2. SP1-916-1: Enable idling mode (set to a value of 1.)
Default
o
17 C
0: OFF
Change to
o
22 C
1: ON
See Notes below.
NOTE 3:
It is not required to change the idling time (default: 30 sec) for SP1- 916- 2. Please maintain
this setting of 30sec, since a software bug will cause the machine to continue running if the
setting is changed to 40sec or more (the firmware correcting this will be released soon.)
NOTE 4:
Enabling Idling Mode causes the warm-up time to increase by 30sec, therefore please advise
customers of this point.
+ The B147/B149 Engine firmware version 1.11 or later has been modified to ensure that cold offset does not
occur without changing the warm-up time. This firmware modification has been in production starting in April
2004.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 1
ELECTRICAL
CAUSE:
SP Mode
SP1-912-2
SP1-916-1
MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 004
06/10/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: METER CLICK FUNCTION ERROR
The counter on a meter charge device installed mistakenly increments twice when all of the following
conditions are met.
- A meter charge device (e.g. key-card, coin-lock, key-counter) is installed
- The 2-tray paper supply unit is installed
- SP5-121 is set to Paper Feed
- A paper misfeed occurs in tray 4
NOTE:
This error occurs only on the external meter charge device. The mainframe meter click counter
increments correctly.
CAUSE:
A software bug causes the counter to increment twice under the above conditions.
SOLUTION:
I. PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
Engine main firmware modification (applied from v1.09b)
II. FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
Upgrade the engine-main firmware to v1.09b, or Change SP5-121 to 1: Paper Exit.
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new firmware v1.09b,
or later installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner DSC332
Savin C3224
Gestetner DSC338
Savin C3828
Lanier LD232C
Lanier LD238C
Ricoh Aficio 2232C
Ricoh Aficio 2238C
SERIAL NUMBER
K024010047
K0340100331
K024010047
K0340100331
K024010047
K0340100331
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 1
SOFTWARE
SYMPTOM:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 - 005
06/11/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER DSc332/DSc338
LANIER LD232c/LD238c
SAVIN C3224/C3828
SUBJECT:
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGES:
Vii
Updated Information (Table Of Contents)
2-1
Updated Information (Settings)
2-2
Updated Information (PM Table)
4-29
Deleted SC570 and SC571
5-63
Updated Information(Service Mode Tables)
5-73
Updated Information (Service Mode Tables)
5-140
Updated Information (Updating Firmware)
6-49
Deleted Sentence (Photoconductor Unit)
6-58
Deleted Sentence (Development)
6-96
Updated Information (Fusing Waste Oil)
6-96
Updated Information (Oil Supply Detection)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2004
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ..............................................................5-140

5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-140
5.6.3 VERIFYING A SUCCESSFUL UPDATE ......................................5-147
5.6.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL.............5-150
5.6.5 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ..................................................5-151
5.6.6 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-152
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-152
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-152
5.6.7 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-153
5.6.8 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS ...............................5-156
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-157
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-157
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-158
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-159
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................5-160
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-160
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................5-161
5.9 USER PROGRAM MODE .....................................................................5-162
5.9.1 MENU ...........................................................................................5-162
5.9.2 DISPLAY ......................................................................................5-166
Selecting Menu .................................................................................5-166
Inquiry ...............................................................................................5-166
5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-167
Controller Board................................................................................5-167
BCU Board........................................................................................5-167
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4
Overview...............................................................................................6-4
Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-5
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS ......................................................................6-6
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8
Overview...............................................................................................6-8
Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10
Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12
SM
vii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SETTINGS
Rev. 06/2004
2.1 SETTINGS
You must enable New Unit Set (SP5-999) before you replace the following units:
PCUK (SP5-999-001)
Development UnitC (SP5-999-008)
PCUY (SP5-999-002)
Development UnitM (SP5-999-007)
PCUM (SP5-999-003)
Development UnitY (SP5-999-006)
Fusing Unit (SP5-999-009)
PCUC (SP5-999-004)
Development UnitK (SP5-999-005)
3. Select "1. Enable."
4. Select "OK."
7. Replace the unit.
8. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit.
Counter Reset
After you replace the following units, you must reset the counter (SP7-804):
By-pass tray (SP7-804-011)
Tray 4 (SP7-804-015)
Tray 1 (SP7-804-012)
Transfer unit (SP7-804-017)
Tray 2 (SP7-804-013)
Transfer belt cleaning unit (SP7-804018)
Tray 3/LCT (SP7-804-014)
3. Select "EXECUTE."
SM
2-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149
Preventive
Maintenance
New Unit Set
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
Rev. 06/2004
2.2 PM TABLES
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Symbol key:
C: Clean,
R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
Copier
Item
Scanner
1st/2nd/3rd mirrors
Front and Rear
Rails
Exposure Glass
ADF Exposure
Glass
Exposure Lamp
APS Sensor
Development
Dev. UnitK
Dev. UnitC
Dev. UnitM
Dev. UnitY
PCUK
PCUCMY
Transfer
Waste Toner Bottle
Fusing
Fusing Unit
Oil Supply Unit
Paper Path
Registration Sensor
Duplex Unit
Inverter Roller
Transport Roller
Inverter Sensor
Miscellaneous
20K
40K
60K
80K
120K 140K
Remarks
Optics cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol

Dry cloth
C
R
R
R
R
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
R
R
R
R
2.1
R
C
Blower brush
C
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Blower brush
Dust Filter
Breaker
B147/B149
EM
Distributed with development

unit-K
I
2-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Rev. 06/2004
Item
Definition
SC 555
Pressure roller
fusing lamp
consecutive full
power
Pressure roller
thermistor out of
position
SC 556
Pressure roller
fusing lamp
temperature
fluctuation
Zero cross error
Loose connection of
the pressure roller
thermistor
Loose connection
between the fusing
unit and main frame
Electrical noise in the
supply from the
power cord

SC 560
1. Replace the PSU.
SC 620
ARDF
communication
error

the pressure roller fusing lamp
keeps ON with full power for
100 consecutive seconds.
The pressure roller
temperature changes by
20C or more in one second.
This occurs three times in one
minute or two consecutive
times.
turned on, the machine checks
how many zero-cross signals
are generated during 500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross
signal generated is either more
than 66 or less than 45 and
when this condition is detected
10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
After the ARDF is detected,
the break signal occurs or
communication timeout
occurs.
of ARDF
ARDF defective
IPU board defective
External noise
SC 621
Two-tray
finisher/booklet
finisher
communication
error
Bank
communication
error
While the BCU communicates

with an optional unit, an SC
code is displayed if one of
following conditions occurs.
1. The BCU receives a signal
which is generated by the
peripherals only just after
the main switch is turned
Cable problems
BCU problems
PSU problems in the
machine
Main board problems
in the peripherals

ARDF.
4. Replace the ARDF.
2. Check if the cables of peripherals are
properly connected.
supplied to peripherals.
4. Replace the BCU or main board of
peripherals.
SC 622
SM
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
B147/B149
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 06/2004
5-997-6 By-pass Paper Size
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: A4 LEF
1: LT LEF
2: A3
3: DLT
Selects the paper size for making a test pattern from the by-pass table.
5-997-7 Print
Prints the test pattern with the settings specified with SP5-997-001 to 006.
NOTE: When exiting the SP mode, the test print mode is automatically canceled.
5-998
[Memory Clear]
5-998-1 ENG Setting
Clears the engine settings except for counters.
5-998-2 ENG Counter
5-999
New Unit Set
*BCU
[0: Disable/1: Enable]
#
This program makes the machine to start the
initialization processing for a newly installed
unit. You set 1: Enable before installing a
new unit.
PCU: Bk
PCU: Y
PCU: M
PCU: C
Dev. U: Bk
Dev. U: Y
Dev. U: M
Dev. U: C
Fuser
Service
Tables
5-999-1
5-999-2
5-999-3
5-999-4
5-999-5
5-999-6
5-999-7
5-999-8
5-999-9
SM
5-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7-803-33 S: Toner [C]

Displays the total operating time for the toner attraction pump.
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 s/step ]
7-803-34 Toner Supply[K]
7-803-35 Toner Supply[Y]
7-803-36 Toner Supply[M]
7-803-37 Toner Supply[C]
(Current revolution Target revolution) 100, where Current revolution is the
current value for the counter of the part, and Target revolution is the values of SP7803-17 through 27. This shows how much of the units expected lifetime has been
used up.
The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter
is still less than 100%.
Oil supply unit: When the R% counter reaches 100%, it enters the near-end condition,
not the end condition. The end condition occurs some number of rotations after this
(not adjustable).
NOTE: The machine internally adjusts or compensates as necessary, depending on
conditions of machine usage. Due to this, at the oil supply unit near-end
condition, the R% counter of the oil supply unit can be 100%, lower than
100%, or higher than 100%.
7-803-38 R(%): PCU [K]
*BCU
7-803-39 R(%): PCU [Y]
7-803-40 R(%): PCU [M]
7-803-41 R(%): PCU [C]
7-803-42 R(%): Dev [K]
7-803-43 R(%): Dev [Y]
7-803-44 R(%): Dev [M]
7-803-45 R(%): Dev [C]
7-803-46 R(%): Oil Spply
7-803-47 R(%): Fusing
7-803-48 S: Trans Cln
7-803-49 R: Trans Cln
7-804
7-804-1
7-804-2
7-804-3
7-804-4
7-804-5
7-804-6
7-804-7
7-804-8
7-804-9
7-804-10
7-804-11
7-804-12
SM
[PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

(Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Clears the PM counter.
Press the Enter key after the machine asks Execute?, which will store the PM
counter value in SP7-906-1 to 25 (PM Counter Previous), and reset the value
of the current PM counter to 0.
Paper
PCU [K]
PCU [Y]
PCU [M]
PCU [C]
Dev. [K]
Dev. [Y]
Dev. [M]
Dev. [C]
Oil Supply
PF By-pass
PF Tray 1
5-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 06/2004
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Rev. 06/2004
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

An SD card is a precision device, so always observe the following precautions
when handling SD cards:
Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card. Never insert the SD
card into the slot with the power on.
After the power has been switched on, never remove the SD card from the
service slot.
Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD
card.
Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature,
high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them. Never
drop an SD card or expose it to other shock or vibration.
Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware update
software:
Upload means to send data from the machine to the SD card, and download
means to send data from the SD card to the machine.
To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touchscreen of the LCD, or press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the
operation panel. For example, Exit (0) displayed on the screen means you can
touch the Exit button on the screen, or press the button on the operation
panel of the copier.
Before starting the firmware update procedure, always make sure that the
machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job from arriving
while the firmware update is in progress.
5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE
Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire romdata folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the romdata folder, copy the B149 folder onto the
card.
3. If the card already contains folders up to B149, simply copy the necessary
firmware files (e.g. B149xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
B147/B149
5-140
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Rev. 06/2004
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1
2
3
B146D529.WMF
1. Cleaning brush roller

2. Charge roller (non-contact)
3. OPC drum
4. Cleaning brush
5. Waste toner collection auger
6. Cleaning blade
This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU consists
of an OPC drum, non-contact charge roller, cleaning brush, and cleaning blade.
The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).
The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller
is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not
adjustable in the field.
.
SM
6-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149
Detailed
Descriptions
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8
Rev.06/2004
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.1
OVERVIEW
3
6
4
5
B146D534.WMF
1. Doctor blade
2. Developer hopper
3. Mixing auger (right)
4. TD sensor
5. Mixing auger (left)
6. Development roller
This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Each
contains 280 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied to
the development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface of
the roller.
The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by
the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field.
The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit
has a TD sensor.
The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (circumference about 56.5 mm).
B147/B149
6-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Rev. 06/2004
Waste Oil Sensor

There is an enclosed area [A] on the rear left shoulder of the waste oil bottle. On
the inside wall of this area are two pinholes, through which the waste oil can flow
into the enclosed area. This enclosed area contains an actuator [B], which
interrupts the waste oil sensor [C] if no oil is in the area.
When the amount of waste oil becomes large enough for the waste oil to flow into
the area, the actuator floats on the oil. When the actuator leaves the waste oil
sensor, the message, Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full, is displayed on the
operation panel.
NOTE: With this error message, another message, Waste Oil Bottle Setting
Error, can be displayed ( Bottle Set Sensor).
After this message appears, the copier can operate until the number of rotations of
development drive motor K reaches the value specified with SP7-905-010. When
the number has reached this value, an error message is displayed and the copier
stops its operation. When you dispose of the waste oil, the machine resumes its
normal operations (no need to switch the machine off/on).
6.12.6 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B146D573.WMF
The fusing oil supply unit [A] contains a fuse [B] in a circuit between the fusing unit
and the BCU board. The fuse opens shortly after a new unit has been installed in
the machine and the power is switched on. When the power is turned on or the left
cover is closed, the BCU checks whether a new fusing oil supply unit is installed by
checking the fuse condition. If the fusing oil supply unit has been replaced, the
machine detects the new unit and automatically resets the counter for the unit.
Oil near-end is detected by counting the number of prints made. The machine
indicates oil near-end 2,500 sheets before the life of the oil supply unit runs out.
This timing can be changed with SP7-905-14. . When the number has reached this
value, an error message is displayed and the copier stops its operation.
B147/B149
6-96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 - 006
06/14/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING COPY QUALITY ISSUES
A RAM access error sometimes occurs when the controller attempts to access the SDRAM DIMM, resulting
in one of the faulty images shown below (band shifting along the main scan direction, solid banding,
stretched banding).
Note:
Occurrence is limited to when SDRAM DIMM memory is inserted in all 3 slots, and shows a factory rate
of approximately 0.56%.
Even if this occurs on a FAX image, the machine will not send the data.
The response time that the controller requires is sometimes too short for the SDRAM DIMM, preventing the
image from being read out of memory correctly.
PARTS
CAUSE:
COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:
SOLUTION:
Production Countermeasure:
SDRAMM DIMM parts are tested so that only those that are able to respond in time are selected for use.
OLD PART NO.

B1475730
B1495730
NEW PART NO.

B1475733
B1495733
DESCRIPTION
Controller for J-C1y (B146/147)
Controller for J-C1z (B148/149)
QTY
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
97
9
97
9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 4
ELECTRICAL
Production Countermeasure (permanent):

The following controller board has been changed to ensure proper communication between the controller
and SDRAM DIMM.
Tech Service Bulletin No B147/B149 006

CPIA
NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace the controller board when any of the following image symptoms are reported.
1. Printer Image
2. Printer Image
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 4
Tech Service Bulletin No B147/B149

006
CPIA
NO
3. Copy Image
CONTROLADA
4. Scan-to-Email Image (Color)
5. Scan-to-Email Image (Grayscale)
6. Scan-to-Email Image (Text)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 3 of 4
Tech Service Bulletin No B147/B149 006

CPIA
NO CONTROLADA
7. Scan-to-Email Image (Text/Photo)
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Controller,
installed during production
MODEL NAME
Gestetner DSc332
Savin C3224
Gestetner/DSc338
Savin C3828
Lanier LD232c
Lanier LD238c
Ricoh AFICIO 2232C
Ricoh 2238C
SERIAL NUMBER
K0231200001
K0331200001
K0231200001
K0331200001
K0231200001
K0331200001
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 4 of 4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 006 REISSUE +
01/18/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: TROUBLESHOOTING COPY QUALITY ISSUES
A RAM access error sometimes occurs when the controller attempts to access the SDRAM DIMM, resulting
in one of the faulty images shown below (band shifting along the main scan direction, solid banding,
stretched banding).
Note:
Occurrence is limited to when SDRAM DIMM memory is inserted in all 3 slots, and shows a factory rate
of approximately 0.56%.
Even if this occurs on a FAX image, the machine will not send the data.
The response time that the controller requires is sometimes too short for the SDRAM DIMM, preventing the
image from being read out of memory correctly.
PARTS
CAUSE:
COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:
SOLUTION:
Production Countermeasure (Permanent):
The following controller board has been changed to ensure proper communication between the controller
and SDRAM DIMM.
+ GENERAL:
The following part information is being issued for all B147/B149/B190 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.

B1475730
B1495730
16017879
16090026
16504470
16340000
NEW PART NO.

B1475733
B1495733
16017757
16090011
16071520
16504470
DESCRIPTION
Controller Board (B147)
Controller Board (B149)
Resistor 0
Resistor 22 5% 1/16W
Filter - BLM18BA470SN1B
Resistor 47 5% 1/10W
QTY
1
1
-
CPIA
NOreserved.
CONTROLADA
w w w . R i c o h U n i v e r s i t y. c o m
Copyright 2005 RICOH Corporation.
All rights
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
97
9
97
9
140
153
140
174
140
198
140
181
Page 1 of 4
ELECTRICAL
SDRAMM DIMM parts are tested so that only those that are able to respond in time are selected for use.
Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149/B190

006
REISSUE +
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace the controller board when any of the following image symptoms are reported.
1. Printer Image
2. Printer Image
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 4

006
REISSUE +
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
3. Copy Image
4. Scan-to-Email Image (Color)
5. Scan-to-Email Image (Grayscale)
6. Scan-to-Email Image (Text)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 3 of 4

006
REISSUE +
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
7. Scan-to-Email Image (Text/Photo)
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Controller,
installed during production
MODEL NAME
Gestetner DSc332
Savin C3224
Gestetner/DSc338
Savin C3828
Lanier LD232c
Lanier LD238c
Ricoh AFICIO 2232C
Ricoh 2238C
SERIAL NUMBER
K0231200001
K0331200001
K0231200001
K0331200001
K0231200001
K0331200001
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 4 of 4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 007
07/12/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: OIL SUPPLY UNIT
The pressure between the oil supply pad and the oil supply roller has been optimized to further improve
the uniformity of oil supply from the roller. The following part update is being issued for all B147/B149
Parts Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
OLD PART NO.

B1164280
NEW PART NO.

B1164285
DESCRIPTION
Oil Supply Unit
QTY
1
INT
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
61
35
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Oil Supply
Unit installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner DSc332
Lanier LD232c
Ricoh Aficio 2232C
Savin C3224
Gestetner DSc338
Lanier LD238c
Ricoh Aficio 2238C
Savin C3828
SERIAL NUMBER
K0231100001
K0331100001
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0
1
3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
2
NEW machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 1
PARTS
GENERAL:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 008
07/13/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: PCU
A lubricant bar has been added to the PCU cleaning brush to further ensure that additives contained in
paper do not stick to the drum surface. The following part update is being issued for all B147/B149 Parts
Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
In accordance with this change:
The PCU yield has been increased from 40k to 60k.
Both the color and Bk PCUs have been standardized to one part number, as they all use the same
modified cleaning mechanism mentioned above.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO.
NEW PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B1492214
PCU-BK
51
1
10
B1492213
PCU-CMY
51
2
30
B1909510
PCU:C1:EXP:ASS'Y
4
0
51
1
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE:
Before replacing any of the new units, be sure and perform the following procedure to enable the new-unit
detection program.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Check the engine firmware version.

If the version is version 1.11 or newer, go to step 4.
If available, update the engine firmware to version 1.11 or newer.
Access SP5-999.
Select one of the new set programs (SP5-999-001 to 004).
Select "1. Enable."
Select "OK."
Number
SP5-999-001
SP5-999-002
SP5-999-003
SP5-999-004
Unit
PCUK
PCUY
PCUM
PCUC
Default
Settings
0
Adjustable Range
0: Disable
1: Enable
8.
9.
10.
11.
Exit SP Mode.
Turn the main switch OFF.
Replace the unit.
Turn the main switch ON. The machine will begin the initialization for the new unit. If the engine firmware
is version 1.11 or newer, the following step is not required.
12. If the engine firmware is older than version1.11: in User Tools, perform Auto Color Registration
(automatic line position adjustment) twice.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 2
PARTS
GENERAL:
Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 CPIA

008
NO CONTROLADA
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style PCU
installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner DSc332
Lanier LD232c
Ricoh Aficio 2232C
Savin C3224
Gestetner DSc338
Lanier LD238c
Ricoh Aficio 2238C
Savin C3828
SERIAL NUMBER
K0240500001
K0340500001
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 008 REISSUE +
01/18/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
+ SUBJECT: INCREASED PCU YIELD (40K 60K)
GENERAL:
In accordance with this change:

The PCU yield has been increased from 40k to 60k.
Both the color and Bk PCUs have been standardized to one part number, as they all use the same
modified cleaning mechanism mentioned above.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO.
NEW PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B1492214
PCU-BK
51
1
10
B1492213
PCU-CMY
51
2
30
B1909510
PCU:C1:EXP:ASS'Y
4
0
51
1
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE:
Before replacing any of the new units, be sure and perform the following procedure to enable the new-unit
detection program.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Check the engine firmware version.

If the version is version 1.11 or newer, go to step 4.
If available, update the engine firmware to version 1.11 or newer.
Access SP5-999.
Select one of the new set programs (SP5-999-001 to 004).
Select "1. Enable."
Select "OK."
Number
SP5-999-001
SP5-999-002
SP5-999-003
SP5-999-004
Unit
PCUK
PCUY
PCUM
PCUC
Default
Settings
0
Adjustable Range
0: Disable
1: Enable
8.
9.
10.
11.
Exit SP Mode.
Turn the main switch OFF.
Replace the unit.
Turn the main switch ON. The machine will begin the initialization for the new unit. If the engine firmware
is version 1.11 or newer, the following step is not required.
12. If the engine firmware is older than version 1.11: in User Tools, perform Auto Color Registration
(automatic line position adjustment) twice.
CPIA
NOreserved.
CONTROLADA
All rights
Page 1 of 2
PARTS
A lubricant bar has been added to the PCU cleaning brush to further ensure that additives contained in
paper do not stick to the drum surface. The following part update is being issued for all B147/B149 Parts
Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.

008
REISSUE +
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style PCU
installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner DSc332
Lanier LD232c
Ricoh Aficio 2232C
Savin C3224
Gestetner DSc338
Lanier LD238c
Ricoh Aficio 2238C
Savin C3828
SERIAL NUMBER
K0240500001
K0340500001
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 009
07/19/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: SC285, SC387, SC388 OR SC389
An SC285, SC387, SC388, or SC389 can sometimes occur on machines that printout primarily in B/W
mode (total color to B/W page ratio of 1:100), such as when using the machine primarily as a FAX.
CAUSE:
Color development units are activated at power OFF/ON, jam recovery and process control (ID sensor
pattern), which slightly charges and consumes the toner. However, the units are inactive and therefore toner
is not replenished when printing out (primarily in B/W mode triggering the SC).
SOLUTION:
1. Set SP3-125-003 to a value of 2 to enable Job End & Non-use Self Check Mode.
NOTE:
This will instruct the machine to perform Auto Density Adjustment every 200 prints at the next job
end (operation lasts approximately two to six minutes).
2. Set SP3-125-005 to a value of 0 (disable).

NOTE:
This will instruct the machine to ignore all environmental factors when performing process control.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 1
ELECTRICAL
SYMPTOM:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149 009 REISSUE +
01/11/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN - C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: SC285, SC387, SC388 OR SC389
An SC285, SC387, SC388, or SC389 can sometimes occur on machines that printout primarily in B/W
mode (total color to B/W page ratio of 1:100), such as when using the machine primarily as a FAX.
CAUSE:
Color development units are activated at power OFF/ON, jam recovery and process control (ID sensor
pattern), which slightly charges and consumes the toner. However, the units are inactive and therefore toner
is not replenished when printing out (primarily in B/W mode triggering the SC).
SOLUTION:
+ 1. Set SP3-125-003 to Job End.
NOTE:
This will instruct the machine to perform Auto Density Adjustment every 200 prints at the next job
end (operation lasts approximately two to six minutes).
+ 2. Set SP3-125-005 to Unconditional.

NOTE:
This will instruct the machine to ignore all environmental factors when performing process control.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 1
ELECTRICAL
SYMPTOM:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 010
09/08/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER DSc332/DSc338/DSc328
LANIER LD232c/LD238c/LD228c
RICOH AFICIO 2232C/2238C/2228C
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT:
NEW PRODUCT RELEASE INFORMATION
GENERAL:
!
PARTS
The purpose of this TSB is to supply the technician with the information required to support the new B190
color copier. This bulletin contains the additional parts information and service manual changes from the
other models in the series, the B147 and B149. Please update your B147/B149 Parts Catalog and
Service Manual with the information supplied in this bulletin.
PARTS CATALOG UPDATE:

The following parts updates are being issued for all B147/B149/B190 Parts Catalogs.
!
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGE:
Legend
Updated Information (Legend)
REFERENCE
B147/B149
PART NO.
B1495059
B1475733
B1495733
B1476192
B1496192
B1476193
B1496193
B1476194
B1496194
B1476195
B1496195
B1476492
B1496492
B1476493
B1496493
B1476494
B1496494
B190 PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
B1905059
B1915734
PCB: BCU : B190 Board

PCB: Controller Assy (B190)
1
1
93
97
15
9
B1906192
Decal Emblem: B190: Ricoh
B1906193
Decal Emblem: B190: Savin
B1906194
Decal Emblem: B190: Gestetner
B1906195
Decal Emblem: B190: Lanier
B1906492
Decal Emblem: B190: NRG NSA
B1906493
Decal Emblem: B190: NRG REX
B1906494
Decal Emblem: B190: NRG GES
11
147
11
147
11
147
11
147
11
147
11
147
11
147
1
9
1
9
1
9
1
9
1
9
1
9
1
9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 2

010NO CONTROLADA
CPIA
SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE:

PAGES:
Legend
Updated Information (Legend)
2-2 and 2-3
Updated Information (PM Tables)
5-167
Updated Information (Dip Switches)
7-1
Updated Information (Specifications Basic)
7-3 and 7-4
Updated Information (Specifications Printer and Scanner)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
B147
B149
B190
G329
B597
B601
B598
B600
G306
B599
B377
B602/B657
B612
B603
B604
COMPANY
GESTETNER
LANIER
RICOH
DSc322
LD232c
Aficio 2232C
DSc338
LD238c
Aficio 2238C
DSc328
LD228c
Aficio 2228C
Platen Cover Type 3800C
Auto Reverse Document Feeder DF77
1-Tray Paper Feed Unit PS540
2-Tray Paper Feed Unit PS550
Large Capacity Tray PS560
Multi-Bin Unit PT460
2-Tray Finisher SR90
Punch Kit Type 1045
Booklet Finisher SR910
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2238
Fax Option Type 2238
G3 Interface Unit Type 2238
SAVIN
C3224
C3828
C2820
REV. NO.
*
1
DATE
01/2004
09/2004
COMMENTS
Original Printing
B190 release
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
B147
B149
B190
GESTETNER
DSc332
DSc338
DSc328
COMPANY
LANIER
RICOH
LD232c
Aficio 2232C
LD238c
Aficio 2238C
LD228c
Aficio 2228C
SAVIN
C3224
C3828
C2820
REV. NO.
*
1
DATE
01/2004
09/2004
COMMENTS
Original Printing
B190 update
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
Rev. 09/2004
2.2 PM TABLES
On the B190, there is a wider gap between sheets of paper. Since the PM interval
is based on the number of motor revolutions, increasing the paper interval means
shortening the PM interval by 10% (motor revolutions are more frequent, making
the PM timing sooner).
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Symbol key:
C: Clean,
R: Replace,
L: Lubricate,
I: Inspect
B147/B149
Copier
B190
Item
Scanner
1st/2nd/3rd mirrors
Front and Rear Rails
Exposure Glass
ADF Exposure Glass
Exposure Lamp
APS Sensor
Development
Dev. UnitK
Dev. UnitC
Dev. UnitM
Dev. UnitY
PCUK
PCUCMY
Transfer
Waste Toner Bottle
Fusing
Fusing Unit
Oil Supply Unit
Paper Path
Registration Sensor
Duplex Unit
Inverter Roller
Transport Roller
Inverter Sensor
Miscellaneous
Dust Filter
Breaker
B147/B149/B190
20K
120K
140K
60K
40K
36K
54K
18K
108K
126K
C
C
C
C
EM
C
C
I
Remarks
Optics cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth
R
R
R
R
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
R
R
R
R
C
Blower brush
C
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Blower brush
Distributed with development unit-K

I
2-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
Rev. 09/2004
B147/B149
ARDF
B190
240K
216K
Pick-up Roller
Feed Belt
Separation Roller
Sensors
Platen Sheet Cover
White Plate
Drive Gear
Transport Roller
Exit Roller
Inverter Roller
Idle Rollers
R
R
R
C
EM
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
C
C
C
C
Remarks
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Blower brush
Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
Dry or damp cloth
Grease G501
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original) (B147/B149)

216k copies (= 72k originals x 3 copies/original) (B190)
Item
Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
240K
EM
C
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Remarks
EM
C
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
EM
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
EM
C
C
C
I
Remarks
Damp cloth
Dry cloth
Blower brush
Replace if required.
EM
C
Discard chad.

Item
Feed Rollers
Pickup Rollers
Separation Rollers
240K
Remarks
LCT
Item
Relay Roller
Bottom Plate Pad
240K
Remarks
Two-Tray Finisher
Items
Rollers
Discharge Brush
Sensors
Jogger Fences
240K
Two-Tray Finisher Punch Kit

Item
Punch Chad
SM
240K
Remarks
2-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Preventive
Maintenance
Item
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
Rev. 09/2004
5.10 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board
DIP SW No.
OFF
ON
Boot-up from flash
Boot-up from IC card
ROM
Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.
1
2 to 4
BCU Board
Set the DIP switch on the BCU as listed in the table.
Model
North/South
America
Europe
Asia
Taiwan
Korea
DIP Switch
1
4
B147/B190
B149
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Service
Tables
When the DIP switch is incorrectly set, one of the following error occurs:
SC195
SC902
Fusing Unit Setting Error
SM
5-167
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 09/2004
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 BASIC
Configuration:
Desktop
Print Process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Number of scans:
Resolution:
Scan: 600 dpi

Print: 600 dpi
Gradation:
Scan: 8 bits/pixel
Original type:
Sheets, book, objects
Max. original size:
A3/11" x 17"
Original reference
position:
Left rear corner
Copy speed:
Normal
OHP/Thick
B147, B149, B190: 10 cpm (color/black & white)
ADF 1 to 1
First copy (normal

mode):
Color: 10 seconds or less

Black & white: 8 seconds or less
Warm-up time:
101 seconds or less (23C, 50%)
Print Paper Capacity:

(80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2

By-pass tray: 100 sheets
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2, Optional
LCT: 2000 sheets
Print Paper Size:
(Refer to Supported Paper Sizes.)

Tray 1
Tray 2
By-pass
Optional Tray
LCT
Printing Paper
Weight:
SM
Minimum
Maximum
A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
A3/11" x 17"
90 x 148 mm
305 x 458 mm/12" x 18"
A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
A3/11" x 17"
A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Standard tray:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Optional paper tray:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
By-pass tray:
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)
7-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Specifications
Print: 2 bits/pixel
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 09/2004
SPECIFICATIONS
1.2 PRINTER
Printer Languages:
PCL5c
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Resolution and
Gradation:
PCL5c:
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
Adobe PostScript 3:
RPCS:
NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)
Printing speed:
B147
Color
Monochrome
B149
Color
Monochrome
B190
Color
Plain paper
32 ppm
32 ppm
28 ppm
24 ppm
24 ppm
14 ppm
38 ppm
38 ppm
28 ppm
28 ppm
28 ppm
14 ppm
28 ppm
20 ppm
20 ppm
20 ppm
20 ppm
14 ppm
Thick/OHP
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
10 ppm
Resident Fonts:
PCL5c:
35 Intelli fonts
10 TrueType fonts
Adobe PostScript 3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces:
Bi-directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1..................... Standard

Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)...................... Standard
USB 2.0 ............................................................... Optional
IEEE1394............................................................. Optional
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)............................... Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless)............................................. Optional
SM
7-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Specifications
Monochrome
Resolution
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 09/2004
Network Protocols:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk, SMB
First Print Speed:
Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)

Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)
1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner
Resolution:
Main scan/Sub scan

600 dpi
Available scanning
Resolution Range:
Twain Mode:
100 ~ 1200 dpi
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales:
1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scanning
Throughput
(ARDF mode):
B/W: 28 ppm LEF

Color: 24 ppm LEF
Interface:
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,

Wireless LAN
Compression
Method:
B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)

Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG
B147/B149/B190
7-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 011
10/19/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT:
ADD PAPER TO TRAY 1 (2) WITH PAPER IN THE TRAY
PAPER PATH
SYMPTOM:
The message Add paper to Tray1 (2) is displayed even if there is paper in paper tray 1 or 2.
NOTE:
This symptom does not occur in the LCT or paper bank.
CAUSES:
1. The paper tray holder (Item 17: See picture below) moves forward due to the defective rear metal board.
This does not let the paper tray close correctly. This tends to occur in tray 2 because of the machines
layout.
2. The paper tray holder cannot hold the paper tray firmly if these occur:
-
The paper tray gets pushed and pulled many times.
The paper tray holder becomes worn.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 2

011NO
CPIA
CONTROLADA
SOLUTIONS:
For CAUSE 1:
Use this procedure to attach the tape (P/N: G0123897 X 4).
1. Remove the rear cover (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.5.1).
2. Remove the high voltage supply unit (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.13.6).
3. Remove the sub power supply unit (See B147/B149/B190 Service Manual 3.13.7).
4. Remove the tray holders (See illustration below).
5. Attach the tape (P/N: G0123897 X 4) according to the following illustration.
6. Reassemble the parts.
For CAUSE 2:
1. Replace the paper tray holder (P/N G0602801).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 012
10/20/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER DSC332/DSC338/DSC328
LANIER LD232C/238C/LD228C
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SC397/SC388
SYMPTOM:
SC387/SC388 may occur when you install the machine.
CAUSE:
NOTE:
Do these steps before you turn on the main

switch.
1.
Turn the transfer belt release lever

counterclockwise.
2.
Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 2
MECHANICAL
Action required when installing the machine
The drum plate can bend if development unit K (Y) is not set correctly. This will not let development unit C
(M) get set correctly. At this time, development unit C (M) cannot mesh with the mainframe drive gear. As a
result, the development unit cannot be driven when the main switch is turned on.
Tech Service Bulletin No.B147/B149 /B190

012NO
CPIA
3.
CONTROLADA
Hold the development unit. At the same time,

slowly pull out the tape horizontally.
4. .Push in each development unit
5. Lower the drum plate. Then tighten two screws

that hold the plate (the upper left one first, then
the lower right one).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 012 REISSUE +
10/25/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/c2820
SUBJECT: SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389
SYMPTOM:
+ SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389 may occur when you install the machine.
CAUSE:
NOTE:
1.
Do these steps before you turn on the main

switch.
Turn the transfer belt release lever
counterclockwise.
2. Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 2
MECHANICAL
SOLUTION:
ACTION REQUIRED WHEN INSTALLING THE MACHINE
the drum plate can bend if development unit k (y) is not set correctly. this will not let development unit c (m)
get set correctly. at this time, development unit c (m) cannot mesh with the mainframe drive gear. as a result,
the development unit cannot be driven when the main switch is turned on.
Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 /B190

012
REISSUE
+
CPIA
NO
CONTROLADA
3. Hold the development unit. At the same time,

slowly pull out the tape horizontally.
4. Push in each development unit.
5. Lower the drum plate. Then tighten two screws

that hold the plate (the upper left one first, then
the lower right one).Return the transfer belt
release lever to its operational position (See
step no. 1).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 012 REISSUE +
11/24/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SC386/SC387/SC388/SC389
SYMPTOM:
+ An SC386, SC387, SC388, or SC389 may occur when you install the machine or replace the development
unit.
+CAUSE:
+ SOLUTIONS:
Action Required When Installing The Machine
NOTE:
1.
Do these steps before you turn the main switch

ON.
Turn the transfer belt release lever counterclockwise.
2. Loosen the two screws that fasten the drum plate.

3.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 3
MECHANICAL
The drum plate bends slightly and the development unit gear cannot mesh with the mainframe gear. This
can happen when:
The unit is not installed correctly at the factory.
or
A new unit is not installed correctly in the field during developer replacement.
Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149 /B190

012
REISSUE
+
CPIA
NO
CONTROLADA
4. While holding the development unit with one hand,

pull out the tape gently as shown.
5. Push in the four development units all the way to

the rear.
6. Lower the drum plate.

7. Tighten the upper-left screw for the drum plate.
8. Tighten the lower-right screw for the drum plate.
9. Return the transfer belt release lever to its
operational position. (See step 1.)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 3
Tech Service Bulletin No. B147/B149

REISSUE +
CPIA/B190
NO 012
CONTROLADA
+
Action Required When Replacing The Development Unit
If the symptom occurs after you install a new development unit,
1. Pull out the new development unit from the machine.
2. Check if there is any toner scattering inside the machine, and clean the area if necessary.
Toner scattering can occur because in some cases, toner is supplied even when the development
unit is not running.
3. Install the new development unit again.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the development unit is pushed all the way to the rear of the machine.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 3 of 3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 013
10/20/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: EARLY TONER NEAR END ALERT
SYMPTOM:
CAUSE:
When the machine is not used for a long period of time, the air supply bulbs cannot work normally. This
causes insufficient toner agitation.
SOLUTION:
Remove the toner cartridge from the machine and shake it side to side 5 to 6 times. Then put it back in the
machine.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 1
MECHANICAL
The toner near end alert shows even if toner remains in the toner cartridge.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 014
10/22/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT:
1-7 through 11
Updated Information (Installation Procedure)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGES:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CAUTION
Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn
the main switch on. The development units may be severely damaged if
they operate with the tape attached.
If you install an optional paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time, place
the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install the copier and other
options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. You may need
them (in the future) to transport the machine to another location.
[A]
1.
B146I945.WMF
B146I944.WMF
Remove the tape and padding on the copier. To remove the tapes from the
developer units follow the procedure below:
a) Turn the transfer belt release lever
counterclockwise.
b) Loosen two screws that fasten the drum plate.
SM
1-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
Rev. 10/2004
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2004
c) Hold the development unit. At the

same time, slowly pull out the tape
horizontally.
d) Push in each development unit
e) Lower the drum plate. Then tighten

two screws that hold the plate (the
upper left one first, then the lower
right one). Return the transfer belt
release lever to its operational position. (See Step a).
2. Remove the pin [A]. (As shown on the previous page.)
NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it to transport the machine in the future
( 1.4.3).
B146I913.WMF
3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit.
B146I914.WMF
B147/B149/B190
1-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.
Install the oil supply unit to the fusing

unit.
[A]
5. Install the fusing unit [A] to the copier.
[B]
B146I912.WMF
6. Shake the toner cartridge five or six

times.
7. Install the toner cartridges to the copier.
8. Check that the hooks [B] hold the
cartridge correctly.
B146I915.WMF
[C]
9. Install the external tray [C].
B146I916.WMF
SM
1-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
Rev. 10/2004
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 10/2004
10. Attach the cloth holder [A] to the left side of the
scanner unit.
11. Place the contact glass cleaning cloth [B] in the

holder.
B146I936.WMF
12. Remove the guide cover [C].

13. Attach the duplex inverter guide [D].
14. Re-attach the guide cover.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B146I003.WMF
15. Attach the appropriate model name decal [A] to

the front cover.
16. Pull each paper tray out, and adjust the side
guides and end guide to match the paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out
the tray fully, then push down the green
lock at the rear inside the tray.
17. Attach the appropriate paper tray number
decals [B] to the paper trays.
[A]
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used
for the optional paper tray or the
optional LCT. Keep any remaining
decals for use with these optional units.
18. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen

cover.
B147/B149/B190
1-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
B146I928.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
19. Plug in the machine and turn the main power switch on. The machine
automatically starts the initialization procedure. After this has finished, the Start
button LED (C) turns green.
20. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
21. Perform the Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Place the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Place 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5) Press Start Scanning on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
22. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
23. Check that the circuit breaker works normally.
Settings Relevant to Contract

If the customer has a service contract, change the settings of the following SPs in
accordance with it.
NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in
accordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).
Item
Counting
method
SP No.
SP5-045-001
A3/11" x 17"
double
counting
Serivice Tel.
No. Setting
SP5-104-001
SM
SP5-812-001
through 004
Function
Specifies whether the counting method
used in meter charge mode is based on
developments or prints.
NOTE: You can specify this setting only
one time. After you have specified
it, you cannot change the setting.
Specifies whether the counter is doubled
for A3/11" x 17" paper.
Default
0:
Developments
No: Single
counting
Programs the service station fax number.

The number is printed on the counter list
when the meter charge mode is selected,
so that the user can fax the counter data to
the service station.
1-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Installation
Rev. 10/2004
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 015
10/22/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: PAPER JAM IN THE DUPLEX UNIT
PAPER PATH
SYMPTOM:
Paper jams in the duplex unit.
CAUSE:
The shape of the sheet gate mylars (P/N G3484682; Sheet: Gate: 2; Index 16) used in
the duplex unit were out of specification. They
were angled in the wrong direction, creating a
block when the paper was transferred to the
two-tray finisher.
OCCURRENCE CONDITIONS:
Mainframe units that are configured with:
- Two-Tray Finisher and LCT or
- Two-Tray Finisher and Paper Feed Unit
Type (2 trays) or
- Booklet Finisher
SOLUTION:
An inspection process has been added to the production line whereby the mylars are checked to ensure
they conform to specification. In addition, the mylars stocked as service parts have been replaced with the
modified ones.
NOTE:
The serial number cut-in information not available at the time of this publication.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 4

015NO
CPIA
CONTROLADA
Replace the seven mylars as shown in the procedure below.
MYLAR REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE:

1. Open the duplex left cover [A].
2. Remove the top cover (4 screws).
3. Remove the stopper.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 4

015
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
4. Remove the duplex control board (4 screws, 7 Connectors).
5. Remove the left middle guide plate (2 screws ).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 3 of 4

015NO
CPIA
CONTROLADA
6. Replace the seven (7) Mylars circled below.

IMPORTANT:
Refer to the Attachment Specifications below.
Clean the attachment area for each Mylar before you attach the new one.
Press hard on the attachment area of the Mylar.
Make sure the Mylar is not sticking out from the guide plate.
Attachment Specifications:
A: Horizontal (left to right): - 0.5mm to + 0.5mm
B: Vertical (up and down): 0 to + 0.5mm
NOTE:
The edge line is a line on the guide plate. It is not the edge of the guide plate.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 4 of 4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 016
11/11/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SERVICE CODE 385
ELECTRICAL
SYMPTOM:
SC385 sometimes may occurs at intervals of 20k prints or less
CAUSE:
Toner scatters from the transfer belt during process control, which can then sometimes accumulate on the
center ID sensor.
SOLUTION:
If SC385 occurs, clean the surface of the ID sensor by opening and closing the ID sensor shutter (black felt
covered handle) several times.
The ID sensor shutter is located inside the drum positioning plate (at the end of the ID Sensor).
At the next service visit, make sure that SP3107-02, -04 and 06 all show a value of 200 or lower. If they do
not, clean the ID sensor as described above.
NOTE:
In either case, after cleaning the ID sensor, check the SP modes listed above and confirm that
they show a value of 200 or lower.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 017
11/17/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SPRINGS FOR THE TRANSFER UNIT ROLLERS COME LOOSE
MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
The springs for the transfer unit rollers come loose during transport.
NOTE:
The Transfer Unit part number is- B1013810.
CAUSE:
Vibration during transport may cause the springs to come loose.
SOLUTION:
Two stoppers have been added to the unit. (As shown in the photo below.)
NOTE:
New transfer units have a yellow circle on the outer box.
Stopper
Stopper
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 2

017NO
CPIA
CONTROLADA
Field Countermeasure:
When you install the new style units (units with stoppers):
- Remove the two stoppers before you install the new transfer unit.
Remove the wires at the four ends of the stoppers.
Remove the four red tags.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 018
01/12/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
LANIER LD232C/LD238C/LD228C
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT:
5-29
Updated Information (SP3-125)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGES:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 01/2005
3-123
3-123-1
3-123-2
3-123-3
3-123-4
[Vref Display] Current Vref Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vref value.
[K]
*BCU [ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
3-125
[Process Control]
3-125-1 ON/OFF
*BCU
Enables or disables process control.

3-125-2 LD Control
*BCU
0: Fixed (at the value in SP2-103)
1: Controlled by process control
2: Controlled by LD power selection
Selects the LD control mode.

3-125-3 Auto TD Adj.
*BCU
0: Disable
NOTE: The words seen on
1: Initial & Non-use self-check
the display are indicated in
2: Job End & Non-use self-check
Italics.
3: Initial & Job End & Non-use self-check
Specifies when to perform the Auto Toner Density Adjustment. When performing the
Auto Toner Density Adjustment, the machine supplies or consumes toner so that the
development gamma is within 0.15 of the gamma target.
Change if the customer complains of toner density fluctuations. Before changing the
setting away from 0, check whether the forced TD adjustment (3-126-2) is effective. If
the problem is persistent, then change to 1, 2, or 3. However, the machine takes
several minutes to do this adjustment.
3-125-4 ACC
*BCU [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step ]
0: Disable
1: Process Control Self-check
2: Auto TD Adjustment & Process Control Selfcheck
Enables or disables the process control self-check before printing the ACC pattern.
NOTE: If color balance changes during multi-copy runs after ACC is performed, select
1 or 2. Setting 2 can precisely adjust the image density; however, it takes about 6
minutes. Select 1 or 2 depending on the customers requirement.
3-125-5 TD Adj. Cndtn
*BCU [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Unconditional
1: Conditional
Specifies whether temperature and humidity are taken into account when deciding the
timing of the auto toner density adjustment (described in SP 3-125-3).
Timing for the auto toner density adjustment is determined by the setting of SP3-125003. In addition, if SP 3-125-5 is set to 1, the auto toner density adjustment is done
when the temperature and humidity meet specified conditions (same conditions as
used for transfer current correction).
Specify 1 when both temperature and humidity are both high or low.
SM
5-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: OFF (Use the fixed values for VD, VL and
VB set with SP2-001, SP2-103, and SP2-201.)
1: ON
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 - 019
01/17/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
LANIER LD232C/LD238C/LD228C
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
GENERAL:
UPDATE 1:
PARTS
PCB: DCB To make sure the junction gate solenoid does not make
noise when the machine goes into Energy Saver Mode, minor
components were added to the DCB (Duplex Control Board). Please
update your parts catalog with the following change.
PLUS FIX
OLD PART NO.

B1015290
NEW PART NO.

B1015291
DESCRIPTION
PCB: DCB (Duplex Control Board)
QTY
1
INT
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
81
2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B147/B149/B190 copiers listed below and manufactured after the serial numbers provided will have the
new PCB: DCB installed during production.
PRODUCT CODE
B147
B149
B190
SERIAL NUMBER
K0240800481
K0340900001
From 1st production
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 1 of 3

019NO
CPIA
UPDATE 2:
OLD PART NO.

B1014720
CONTROLADA
Reverse Unit The part number for the Reverse Unit has been
changed to standardize with the G106 printer. Please update your parts
catalog with the following change.
NEW PART NO.

G3820250
DESCRIPTION
Reverse Unit
QTY
1
INT
0
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
75
1
UNITS AFFECTED:
new Reverse Unit installed during production.
PRODUCT CODE
B147
B149
B190
SERIAL NUMBER
K0240900361
K0340900411
From 1st production
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 3

019
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
UPDATE 3:
OLD PART NO.

B1013350
B1013352
B1013353
B1013354
Toner Supply Unit Pumps To ensure the right amount of toner is

always supplied, a minor internal shape change was made to the
pumps. Please update your parts catalog with the following change.
NEW PART NO.

B1013356
B1013357
B1013358
B1013359
DESCRIPTION
Pump: Toner Supply Unit: Bk
Pump: Toner Supply Unit: M
Pump: Toner Supply Unit: C
Pump: Toner Supply Unit: Y
QTY
1
1
1
1
INT
1
1
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
49
4
49
7
49
6
49
5
UNITS AFFECTED:
new Toner Supply Unit Pumps installed during production.
PRODUCT CODE
B147
B149
B190
SERIAL NUMBER
K0240100471
K0340100331
From 1st production
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 3 of 3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 020
01/21/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT:
5-136
Updated Information (SP2-022-7)
www .RicohUniversity.com
CPIA
NOreserved.
CONTROLADA
All rights
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGES:
Page 1 of 1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 - 021
01/25/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: SERVICE CODE 385
PARTS
SYMPTOM:
SC385 sometimes occur at intervals of 20k prints or less.
CAUSE:
Attach the guide plate bracket (P/N B1499903) as outlined in the procedure below. This bracket will reinforce
the ID sensor assembly.
MECHANICAL
SOLUTION:
The guide plate bends causing toner to scatter from the transfer belt on to the ID sensor (center) during
process control. This material will help ensure that the transfer exit guide plate does not bend.
Checks Performed at Next Service Call:

1. Check the machine serial number to see if the unit falls within the affected serial number range.
3. Check if SP3107-02, -04 and -06 all show a value of 200 or higher.
4. If either is true, install the corrective part (P/N B1499903).
NOTE:
The guide plate bracket (B1499903) is a retrofit part and can only be ordered with the form
on this bulletin.
UNITS AFFECTED:
Before ordering the guide plate bracket please check to see if, your machine is within the serial number
range.
MODEL NAME
B147
B149
B190
SERIAL NUMBER
K0231100001 - K0240600001
K0331100001 - K0340600001
NOT AVAILABLE
CPIA
NOreserved.
CONTROLADA
All rights
Page 1 of 4
ELECTRICAL
2. Check the SMC history and see whether or not a SC385 has occurred.

021
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
GUIDE PLATE ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE:

PACKING LIST:
Bracket for Guide Plate [A] x 1
M3x5 Screw [B] x 1
[B]
[A]
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.

2. Remove the transport feed unit.
3. Remove the transfer unit.
4. Remove the fusing unit.
5. Remove the Black PCU.
6. Remove the ID sensor assembly [C]
(screw x 2, connector x 1).
[C]
7. Remove the transfer exit guide plate (G0803620) [D].

(screw x 1).
[D]
8. Remove the shutter (G0803617) [E]

(screw x 2, spring x 1).
[E]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 4

021
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
9. Remove the screw [F] from the ID sensor assembly.
[F]
10. Attach the Guide Plate Bracket using the screw

provided in the kit. (M3x5 screw x 1 [H]).
[G]
11. Make sure there is no clearance between the

bracket and ID sensor assembly core.
[H]
Check Clearance
12. Reassemble the ID sensor assembly, and replace all

the parts removed in the previous steps.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 3 of 4

021
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
FAX IN FORM
B147 GUIDE PLATE BRACKET KIT (B1499903)
Please complete form below.
To Prevent Any Delays in Processing Please Fill in ALL FIELDS Below.
Fax this entire page in Detail Mode ATTN: TSD B147 PROGRAM
Fax Number (973) 882-3960
Please list the serial numbers for each machine that requires a Guide Plate Bracket Kit.
Serial Number(s)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE:
The serial number must fall within the range of affected units on page one of this bulletin.
PLEASE TYPE OR PRINT CLEARLY.

DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
CITY:
STATE:
ZIP CODE:
TECH ID #:
ATTN:
PHONE # :
FAX # :
DEALER ACCOUNT NUMBER:
THIS RETRFIT PROGRAM WILL EXPIRES ON JULY 1, 2005
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 4 of 4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 022
01/26/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828
SUBJECT: VERTICAL BLACK LINES
On units that have the Lubricant Bar installed in the PCU (P/N B1909510) (Refer to TSB B147/B149/B190 008 REISSUE INCREASED PCU YIELD (40K 60K), vertical black lines may appear on the printed or
copied image.
CAUSE:
Paper dust or silica particles can collect on the charge roller. The paper dust and silica particles will increase
the roller surfaces electrical resistance and decreases its charge efficiency. This is turn, results in vertical
lines on the image.
SOLUTION:
Replace the PCU (P/N B1909510) or clean the surface of the charge roller according to the following Charge
Roller Cleaning Procedure.
NOTE:
Prior to replacing the PCU, verify that the firmware is version 1.11 or newer. Then enable New
Unit Detection using the appropriate SP5-999 setting: 1-K, 2-Y, 3-M, 4-C.
Charge Roller Cleaning Procedure:

1. Place the PCU on a cloth-covered surface, being sure to place smaller cloths or sponge sheets
underneath both edges of the unit as shown, to protect the drum.
CPIA
NOreserved.
CONTROLADA
All rights
Page 1 of 7
COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:

022
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
2. Remove the front cover (2 screws).
3. Hold the drum at both ends as shown, and then slide it in the direction of the arrow until the outer gear
has cleared the PCU frame (see next photo).
Slide the drum until this outer

gear clears the PCU frame,
as shown.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 7

022
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
4. Lift the drum out of the unit as shown below, i.e. from the left edge.
5. As in Step 1, place the drum down on the cloth-covered surface, being sure to place smaller cloths or
sponge sheets under both edges as shown, to protect the drum.
6. Cover the drum with a black plastic sheet or black cloth to prevent any light fatigue.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 3 of 7

022
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
7. Remove the charge roller from the frame along with plastic components B, C, and D shown below, being
sure to touch only the tape-covered rubber edges of the roller (see photo in Step 9 below).
NOTE:
Do not touch the cleaning blade or exposed rubber surfaces of the charge roller.
8. Place the charge roller on the cloth-covered surface just as in Step 5, with smaller cloths or sponge
sheets under both edges as shown.
9. Remove parts B, C and D as shown while holding the charge roller by its taped edges.
B
C
Tape-covered areas.
Do not remove this tape.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 4 of 7

022
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
10. Clean the charge roller surface with a new cloth while holding the roller by its metallic edges (to remove
any loose particles).
11. Clean the charger roller with alcohol.

12. Attach parts B, C, and D while holding the charge roller by its tape-covered areas.
C
D
Tape-covered areas.
Do not remove this tape.
13. Reattach the charge roller to the PCU frame (see NOTES on next page).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 5 of 7

022
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
NOTES: Before proceeding to the next step,

Make sure to attach the charge roller as shown below, i.e. parts B and D should both fit into their
respective guide ribs on the unit frame.
Make sure that:
1) the spring is properly aligned (straight; not bent),
2) the gears on both sides are attached properly to the shaft, and
3) the charge roller cleaner is properly secured in its bushings at both ends.
14. Holding the drum by both ends as shown, reattach the gear-end first by sliding the drum in the direction
shown and then mounting the gear in the frame hole.
Set the drum gear in the

frame hole.
15. Bring down the unattached end {, and then slide the drum in the direction shown | to complete the
attachment.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 6 of 7

022
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
16. Reattach the front cover (2 screws).

NOTE:
When reattaching the front cover, make sure there is no gap between the cover and frame.
Make sure there is no gap
between the cover and frame.
Make sure to tighten the screws in the following order ({, then |):
|
{
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 7 of 7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
2-022
2-022-1
2-022-2
2-022-3
2-022-4
2-022-5
2-022-6
2-022-7
Rev. 01/2005
[ACS settings]
Color judge rate
*
[ 1 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step ]
CTL
This menu specifies the area ratio that is checked by the auto-color sensing feature.
*
[ 0 to 255 / 30 / 1 /step ]
CTL
*
[ 0 to 255 / 28 / 1 /step ]
CTL
*
[ 0 to 255 / 25 / 1 /step ]
CTL
*
[ 0 to 255 / 22 / 1 /step ]
CTL
*
[ 0 to 255 / 10 / 1 /step ]
CTL
This program specifies the color difference for each image density level.
Adjustment value of threshold
*
[ -127 to 127 / -110 / 1 /step ]
NOTE: Requires System firmware v1.21 CTL
or newer.
This menu specifies the threshold of the auto-color sensing feature.
B147/B149/B190
5-136
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 - 023
03/28/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
PARTS
GENERAL:
UPDATE 1:
NEW PART NO.

B1163011
B1163012
B1163013
B1163014
DESCRIPTION
Development Unit: Bk
Development Unit: C
Development Unit: M
Development Unit: Y
QTY
1
1
1
1
INT
1
1
1
1
PLUS FIX
OLD PART NO.

B1163005
B1163006
B1163007
B1163008
Development Unit To make sure the development unit gear

connects with the mainframe gear correctly (to ensure SC38x does not
occur), the shape of the joint area of the development unit was
changed. Update your B147/B149/B190 Parts Catalog with the
following changes.
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
51
3
51
5
51
6
51
4
UNITS AFFECTED:
new Development Units installed during production.
PRODUCT CODE
B147
B149
B190
SERIAL NUMBER
K0241100499
K0341100298
K4341100155
CPIA
NOreserved.
CONTROLADA
All rights
Page 1 of 2

023
CPIA NO
CONTROLADA
UPDATE 2:
OLD PART NO.

AW010098
G0602801
Paper Tray Holder To conform to new regulations for

environmentally sensitive materials, the material for the Paper Tray
Holder and Photointerrupter were changed (environmentally-sensitive
material was deleted). Also, to make it easier to attach the Paper Tray
Holder, the shape of the Paper Tray Holder was changed. Update your
B147/B149/B190 Parts Catalog with the following changes.
NEW PART NO.

AW010107
B1802801
DESCRIPTION
Photointerrupter - GP2A231LRSA
Holder - Paper Tray
QTY
1
1
INT
0
0
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
89
17
43
16
UNITS AFFECTED:
new Paper Tray Holder and Photointerrupter installed during production.
PRODUCT CODE
B147
B149
B190
SERIAL NUMBER
K0241200906
K0341200651
K4341200401
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B147/B149/B190 - 024
03/28/2005
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
SUBJECT:
5-76 and 77
Updated Information (Copy Service Mode)
www .RicohUniversity.com
CPIA
NOreserved.
CONTROLADA
All rights
SERVICE
MANUAL
PAGES:
Page 1 of 1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7-852
Rev. 03/2005
ADF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter

Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on the
scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4991 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust
Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zeror
7-901
[Assert Info]
Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in
this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
7-901-1 File Name
7-901-2 Number of Lines
7-901-3 Location
7-905
[Alert Display]
7-905-10 Wst Oil: Full
*BCU [ 232 to 464 / 232 / 1 kilo-revolutions/step ]
Specifies the number of revolutions the development drive motor-K can make after
the message, Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full, is displayed.
The machine stops after the motor has made the specified number of revolutions.
This SP specifies the interval from near end to end for the waste oil bottle. 232k
revolutions equals 2.5k prints. If it is set to 464, the end condition is 5.0k prints after
near end.
7-905-14 Oil: Alert: Page
*BCU [ 25.0 to 27.5 / 27.5 / 0.1 kilo-sheets/step ]
Specifies the number of sheets to trigger the oil near-end condition.
NOTE: The target job volume for this SP mode is 5 pages/job.
B147/B149/B190
5-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
7-906
7-906-1
7-906-2
7-906-3
7-906-4
7-906-5
7-906-6
7-906-7
7-906-8
7-906-9
7-906-10
7-906-11
7-906-12
7-906-13
7-906-14
7-906-15
7-906-16
7-906-17
7-906-18
7-906-19
7-906-20
7-906-21
7-906-22
7-906-23
7-906-24
7-906-25
7-906-26
7-906-27
7-906-28
7-906-29
7-906-30
7-906-31
7-906-32
7-906-33
7-906-34
7-906-35
[PM Counter: Previous]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
S:PCU [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
S:PCU [Y]
S:PCU [M]
S:PCU [C]
S:Dev. [K]
S:Dev. [Y]
S:Dev. [M]
S:Dev. [C]
S:Oil Supply
S:Fusing
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous
maintenance units.
R:PCU [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
R:PCU [Y]
R:PCU [M]
R:PCU [C]
R:Dev. [K]
R:Dev. [Y]
R:Dev. [M]
R:Dev. [C]
R:Oil Supply
R:Fusing
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner
cartridge.
S:Waste Toner
*BCU [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
S:Toner [K]
S:Toner [Y]
S:Toner [M]
S:Toner [C]
(Current count Yield count) x 100, where Current count is the current values in the
counter for the part, and Yield count is the recommended yield.
R(%): PCU [K]
*BCU [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
R(%): PCU [Y]
R(%): PCU [M]
R(%): PCU [C]
R(%): Dev [K]
R(%): Dev [Y]
R(%): Dev [M]
R(%): Dev [C]
R(%): Oil Supply
R(%): Fusing
7-907
[Check Sum]
Displays the check sum of the firmware.
*BCU
7-907-1 Engine Main
7-907-2 Engine MUSIC
SM
5-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B147/B149/B190
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 03/2005
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE HISTORY
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE HISTORY
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUBLISHED DATE: 03/28/2005

PRODUCT CODE:
B147/B149/B190
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SAVIN C3224/C3828/C2820
GENERAL:
The latest firmware version can be downloaded at the Technology Solutions Center FTP Site at
http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. Be sure to check the README file for important notes and explanations.
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
1. B147/B149/B190 ENGINE: ................................................................. 2
1.1 B147/B149 ENGINE FIRMWARE HISTORY: ..............................................2
1.2 B190 ENGINE FIRMWARE HISTORY: ........................................................4
SYSTEM:............................................................................................. 5
2. 2.1
SYSTEM FIRMWARE HISTORY: ................................................................5
3. LANGUAGE KIT: ................................................................................ 8
3.1 LANGUAGE FIRMWARE HISTORY: ...........................................................8
4. MUSIC:................................................................................................ 9
4.1 MUSIC FIRMWARE HISTORY:....................................................................9
5. FAX: .................................................................................................... 9
5.1 FAX FIRMWARE HISTORY: ........................................................................9
6. NETFILE:........................................................................................... 10
6.1 NETFILE FIRMWARE HISTORY: ..............................................................10
7. NIB: ................................................................................................... 10
7.1 NIB FIRMWARE HISTORY: .......................................................................10
8. WebSystem: ..................................................................................... 11
8.1 WebSystem FIRMWARE HISTORY:..........................................................11
9. WebDocBox: .................................................................................... 11
9.1 WebDocBox FIRMWARE HISTORY: .........................................................11
10. LCDC: ............................................................................................. 11

10.1 LCDC FIRMWARE HISTORY: .................................................................11
11. FCU: ................................................................................................ 12

11.1 FCU FIRMWARE HISTORY:....................................................................12
12. SCANNER:...................................................................................... 13
12.1 SCANNER FIRMWARE HISTORY:..........................................................13
13. SCANNER IPU: ............................................................................... 14

13.1 SCANNER IPU FIRMWARE HISTORY: ..................................................14
14. PRINTER:........................................................................................ 15
14.1 PRINTER FIRMWARE HISTORY: ...........................................................15
15. POST SCRIPT:................................................................................ 16

15.1 PS FIRMWARE HISTORY: ......................................................................16
CPIA
NOreserved.
CONTROLADA
All rights
Page 1 of 16
FIRMWARE
Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 and Publication Bulletin #023 for more information about
the FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM/Flash Card Exchange program.
NOTE:
Flash
Memory
Card
Firmware History for B147/B149/B190
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1. B147/B149/B190 ENGINE:
NOTE:
The B190 engine firmware is different from B147/B149 engine firmware. Make sure you are using
the correct firmware when updating your machine.
1.1 B147/B149 ENGINE FIRMWARE HISTORY:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.08
1.08B
1.09
1.09A
1.09B
1.09C
1.09D
1.11
1.13
1.14
1.14A
1.16
B1495505C
B1495505D
B1495505E
B1495505F
B1495505G
B1495505H
B1495505J
B1495505K
B1495505L
B1495505M
B1495505N
B1495505P
C8E5
24CC
360C
D474
5C1B
4CE3
33E4
D9E8
86FB
2EF0
12CB
FF5D
PRODUCTION DATE
October 2003 production
November 2003 production
December 2003 production
January 2004 production
February 2004 production
March 2004 production
April 2004 production
June 2004 production
September 2004 production
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
Initial Production Release
Corrects the following:
Optimized the target pressure roller temperature for when recovering from Low Power
Mode.
NOTE:
This applies to the Asia model only.
1.09
Optimized conditions for error detection during developer initialization to ensure that new
development units are properly detected (Vt normal range changed from 0.5V to
0.78V).
Optimized toner supply control for when printing onto undefined paper types longer than
DLT/A3.
SC220-1 misdetections.
Optimized detection conditions of output tray JAM 25 to eliminate unnecessary

occurrences.
CARD
VERSION
1.08
1.08B
1.09A
(Changes applied to the Japanese model only).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 2 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
The counter on a meter charge device installed mistakenly increments twice when all of
the following conditions are met:
-
NOTE:
A meter charge device (e.g. key-card, coin-lock, key-counter) is installed

The 2-tray paper supply unit is installed
SP5-121 is set to Paper Feed
A paper misfeed occurs in tray 4
This error occurs only on the external meter charge device. The mainframe meter
click counter increments correctly.
1.09C
Default fusing temperature changed on NA machines for the following modes in order to
increase the glossiness on the second side of a duplex sheet.
1105 6
1105 11
1105 17
1105 22
H:N [K] D 125

H:N[FC] D 125
P:N [K] D 125
P:N[FC] D 125
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
[ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 165 / 5C/step]

[ 100 to 190 / NA: 170, EU: 170 / 5C/step]
[ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 145 / 5C/step]
[ 0 to 190 / NA: 150, EU: 150 / 5C/step]
1.09D
SC670 misdetection.
1.11
Modified as part of solution for cold offset at power on under cold conditions.
Modified in conjunction with PCU cleaning blade modification to ensure the blade remains
properly fixed in place.
Finisher jam with series printing if the stapling positions for the 1st and 2nd jobs are
different and the 1st job is set for stapling under unsupported conditions (e.g. only one
sheet in stack).
SC545/555 misdetection (EU).
1.13
The display values for SP7-803-46 and SP7-906-34 were wrong (oil unit lifetime
1000%). Also, the calculation for oil unit lifetime was improved.
Modified software to get Energy Star certification in Taiwan.
1.14
Added the serial number information for the Korea model.
1.14A
The detection timing for SC471 was optimized.
CARD
VERSION
1.09B
1.16
Added fusing control data for the China model.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 3 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.2 B190 ENGINE FIRMWARE HISTORY:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
PRODUCTION DATE
1.01
K1.02
K1.03
K1.04
B1905505 A
B1905505 B
B1905505 C
B1905505 D
AFED
62D0
BA05
9393
August 2004
October 2004
November 2004
December 2004
NOTE:
An SC995 will occur if the B147/B149 engine firmware is installed in B190 BCU. If this happens,
install the B190 engine firmware.
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
Optimized the target pressure roller temperature for when recovering from Low Power
Mode.
K1.03
The detection timing for SC471 has been optimized.
CARD
VERSION
1.01
K1.02
K1.04
Changes applied to the Japanese model only.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 4 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. SYSTEM:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.10.1
1.12.2
1.14.1
1.18.1
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
B1015851D
B1015851E
B1015851F
B1015851G
B1015851H
B1015851J
B1015851K
B1015851L
BE45
7EFF
0EED
6A36
0086
F49B
C02A
6C87
PRODUCTION DATE
May 2004 production
July 2004 production
2.1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
Minor errors during an HDD self-diagnostic are sometimes not detected.
Minor errors during an optional RAM self-diagnostic are sometimes not detected.
The machine mistakenly allows local storage files containing mixed B/W and color pages
to be printed out in Magazine Mode.
Optimized detection conditions for NVRAM access errors to eliminate unnecessary

occurrences.
CARD
VERSION
1.10.1
1.12.2
Specification changes:
A data backup function (SP5-846-50 to -53) has been added to the SD card that allows
the Address Book data to be uploaded to the card.
Note: An RTB will be released announcing the details of this change.
Specification for the development counters (SP8-771-01 to -05) changed so that the
counter increments according to actual machine operation, i.e. no longer follows the
value of the meter charge counter.
Revised so that SP8-383-01 (F:Total PrtPGS) does not increment when printing out a
Fax reception document from local storage.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 5 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
After canceling a scan using DeskTopBinder, an internal error will occur if another scan is
attempted afterward.
Unable to send with Scan-to-Folder to an SMB-connected Win98 PC with shared security

settings enabled when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
CARD
VERSION
1.14.1
- The destination folder is selected from a registered entry in the Address Book.
- A New Password has been set but the User Name has not in the Address Book
MgmtNew Program Folder screen.
- Neither the SMB Default User Name nor Default Password has been set in the File
TransferDefault Username/Password (Send) screen.
Network PC stations registered under a given workgroup are not displayed when the
workgroup name consists only of numerical characters (SMB transmission Network
screen).
HDD initialization is performed when the main switch is turned on
SC990 sometimes occurs when the main switch is turned on.
1.18.1
Added the B190 product name.
1.19
"Near End" messages for oil and waste toner are only displayed when the display
language is English or Japanese.
When a Magazine/Combine job is made, the separator line is printed in the wrong color
or it is not printed.
1.20
The remote service system captures the Development Counter data even when the
machine is configured to use the Page Counter.
Example: A color print job.

Page Counter value
Development Counter value
Excess
Color Counter
+1
+3
+2
BK Counter
0
+1
+1
The Oil Near Full message is displayed in WebImageMonitor (correct: Oil Near End").
NOTE:
1.21
Swedish display language only.
B/W image quality with the Scanner ACS feature was improved.
NOTE:
To enable this change, set SP2-022-007 (Adjustment value of threshold) to a

value of 110.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 6 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
B147/B149 is not displayed in the MAC chooser using Apple Talk as a printer port.
The machine does not update the address book data after SP5850-3 is executed.
NOTE:
CARD
VERSION
1.22
This only occurs when the address book data is in the FCU.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 7 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. LANGUAGE KIT:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
3.28
B1015238
5F95
PRODUCTION DATE
3.1 LANGUAGE FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
VERSION
3.28
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
Using the Language Kit.

1. Insert the SD card containing the firmware into the controller SD card slot.
2. Turn ON the main power. Then, chose either the First or Second display language for the update.
Note: It is also possible to write to both the First and Second languages.
3. Start the update.
4. Select the appropriate display language in User Tools.
As shown in the table below, there are some cases where certain languages cannot be displayed, depending
on the type of operation panel software:
Possible Display Languages for Operation Panel Software
Key:
: Can be displayed.
: Can be displayed, but printer application window is not displayed correctly.
--: Cannot be displayed.
LCDC Software:
B1015234
NA
B1015235
EU
B1485531
Asia/TWN
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
-9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Language:
Japanese
English-NA
English-UK
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Norwegian
Danish
Swedish
Portuguese
Czech
Finish
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 8 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4. MUSIC:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.00
1.01
B1015660
B1015660A
A108
67C1
PRODUCTION DATE
4.1 MUSIC FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
VERSION
1.00
1.01
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
Vsg adjustment error during process control self check.
5. FAX:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
02.00.00
03.00.00
04.00.00
B1015853A
B1015853B
B1015853C
2F66
3F99
A8D0
PRODUCTION DATE
5.1 FAX FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
Minor changes applied to improve reliability.
CARD
VERSION
02.00.00
03.00.00
04.00.00
Machine cannot detect fax option if network interface board is not installed.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 9 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6. NETFILE:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.01
1.02
B1015854A
B1015854B
7540
F83C
PRODUCTION DATE
6.1 NETFILE FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
VERSION
1.01
1.02
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
The Tray Full error message is not displayed when the destination output tray has
reached capacity.
7. NIB:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
4.11
4.13
B1015852B
B1015852C
1EF8
7DB9
PRODUCTION DATE
7.1 NIB FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
CARD
VERSION
4.11
4.13
Printing slows when jobs of more than 1 Mb are sent through a Windows 2000 Standard
TCP/IP port (Raw protocol) only.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 10 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
8. WebSystem:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.03
B1015855B
5A7E
PRODUCTION DATE
8.1 WebSystem FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
VERSION
1.03
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
9. WebDocBox:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.03
1.04
B1015856B
B1015856C
149D
2A08
PRODUCTION DATE
August 2004 production
9.1 WebDocBox FIRMWARE HISTORY:

CARD
VERSION
1.03
1.04
SYMPTOM CORRECTED
The separator line is printed in the wrong color or it is not printed when a
Magazine/Combine job is sent from WebImageMonitor or DeskTopBinder.
10. LCDC:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.03
B1015234A
8255
PRODUCTION DATE
10.1 LCDC FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CARD
VERSION
1.03
Page 11 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
11. FCU:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
05.00.00
06.00.00
07.00.00
B6035570D
B6035570E
B6035570F
E6EA
1E9C
BB96
PRODUCTION DATE
11.1 FCU FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
CARD
VERSION
05.00.00
06.00.00
07.00.00
Communication error sometimes occurs when receiving a PC FAX through MH/MR

reception.
The machine accepts an incoming email while in an SC error condition, in spite of the fact
that User SW05 bit 0 is set to 1 (i.e. do not accept emails while in an SC error
condition).
The sound generated to alert the operator that reception has been completed does not
turn off, even when this setting is disabled.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 12 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
12. SCANNER:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
B6126520B
B6126520C
B6126520D
B6126520
42C7
D7A6
FB6F
5DCD
PRODUCTION DATE
12.1 SCANNER FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
The Access Code dialogue box remains displayed after pushing the Scanner button on
the MFP if the Partial Access Code settings are not completed.
When a blank fax number is input for an advanced search using the LDAP search
function, information for the previous user will be displayed instead.
SP1-007-001 (Store Priority) returns to its default value of 1 (Send Only) following a
Scanner Document Server job using either a setting of 2 (Store Only) or 3 (Send and
Store).
The Destination field for a Scanner Document Server job is selectable even if SP1-007001 (Store Priority) has been set to 2 (Store Only), when: The setting of 2 is input
Scanner main screen is accessed Main power is turned Off/On.
The following errors occur when printing out the Scanner UP from SP5-990-23:
-
The default and current values for Original Feed Type Priority do not appear
on the printout.
The default and current values for Exposure Glass and SADF (under Wait
Time for Next Originals) are displayed incorrectly.
2.04
VRAM memory-full error after multiple Scanner transmission jobs.
Network PC stations registered under a given workgroup are not displayed when the
workgroup name consists only of numerical characters (SMB transmission Network
screen).
CARD
VERSION
2.02
2.03
2.05
Default value for SP2-022-007 (Adjustment value of threshold) was changed from
-80 -110.
Reason: To improve the B/W image quality with the Scanner ACS feature.
NOTE:
- To enable this change, set SP2-022-007 to its new default of 110.

- Also install System firmware v1.21 or newer.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 13 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
13. SCANNER IPU:

CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.09:03
1.10:03
1.11:03
B1015155B
B1015155C
B1015155D
8833
7B9F
53B1
PRODUCTION DATE
13.1 SCANNER IPU FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
CARD
VERSION
1.09:03
1.10:03
1.11:03
Scanner freezes if SP4-008 (Firmware Release History (Scanner IPU)) is set to 0.8 or
higher or a negative value.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 14 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
14. PRINTER:
CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.01
1.02
1.03.1
1.04
1.05
B6126505
B6126505A
B6126505B
B6126505C
B6126505D
A666
EDEF
A415
D24E
4423
PRODUCTION DATE
14.1 PRINTER FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
Corrects the following: GPS
CARD
VERSION
1.01
1.02
Cell shading specified using the "pattern" settings is not printed when using Excel (for
Win2K/XP).
Corrects the following: PCL
The form overlay and text in a PCL job are printed separately.
Vector lines are shifted slightly to the side with Overlay Printing (PCL 5c 1.4.0.0).
Incorrect font size settings when printing a multi-page document in PCL format.
B/W pages contained in data sent from the driver as a Color job are not counted up by
the external counting device when the device is set to prohibit B/W prints.
NOTE:
1.03.1
The mainframe counters increment correctly.
Addition:
Bit SW2 bit 6 is now active, which utilizes a new dither pattern to improve color
consistency in 600x600dpi, 2-bit Photo Mode.
NOTE:
To properly activate the setting, it is necessary to turn the main power Off/On,
and then perform ACC.
1.04
SC920 sometimes occurs when attempting to bring the Printer function on line (timeout
error).
1.05
Sometimes Locked Print does not work when User Code Control is enabled.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Page 15 of 16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
15. POST SCRIPT:

CARD VERSION
PART NUMBER
CHECK SUM
1.00
G3695907
9337
PRODUCTION DATE
15.1 PS FIRMWARE HISTORY:

SYMPTOM CORRECTED
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CARD
VERSION
1.00
Page 16 of 16

AF2228C - AF2232 MS - v00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AF2228C - AF2232 MS - v00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ..............................................................5-140

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599

BOOKLET FINISHER B602

FAX OPTION B603

INTERNET FAX (IFAX)

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694

IIMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

Symbols and Abbreviations

Short Edge Feed (SEF)

Long Edge Feed (LEF)

FAX OPTION B603

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit B692/B694

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B597

10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F)

Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)

5. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

For Asia model only

One from the four

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

Unpack the copier.

Install the copier.

Select the language.

Will the paper feed

Set the date and time.

Will the controller options installed?

Adjust the operation panel display if

Install the controller options.

Specify the settings relevant to the

Install the platen cover or ARDF.

Will the two-tray finisher

Will the punch unit installed?

Install the finisher.

The finisher requires an optional paper tray unit or the LCT.

1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1. Operating InstructionsSystem Setting................................1

* The Asia model does not include these accessories.

c) Hold the development unit. At the

e) Lower the drum plate. Then tighten

3. Remove the tape from the oil supply unit.

Install the oil supply unit to the fusing

5. Install the fusing unit [A] to the copier.

6. Shake the toner cartridge five or six

11. Place the contact glass cleaning cloth [B] in the

12. Remove the guide cover [C].

15. Attach the appropriate model name decal [A] to